25s Ie ge het ~& = ees A 85 a18< 80% Stree esters tatetens see ee. pee ie ee eee 3. Be a-Oe He Fe Me Ee OR cee Berka Hendy eee eee eH Ol oO Fe So. te - ~ ead *- arte ee ee Bee ere Oe &. phn hat pa he whe par tad ed ¥ nl oh tn Or Bw mgth bese es a0 wid he be A 4 oz @=2-9_8:0n" ry "alee eet Soe eee Men fy = ete PS EP oe we Oe = ==2-2+-e_->.s- 3-3 ar at ee fo Re Vo ttety® — =e ee os ee oe hot bmteGot= Ds Gretel ee ere ie = hoe n. Pp ham tm ee ee = ta tehe rea F Ba Gora FG e ete GM Morey eh Es Sen & ent fee 2 Pete ®t -§ Mn Ua aes em = ‘= *-9-9 te H~S~0- 8 om: Rove t= Has: : sue 4 * <= Be’ Cee) - te ee ee wt OF eae as tee aice.e PG Pee Cx re es ne Pe eee te Oe Sr ee a~ rok a OAR) 7 +e Oe ee et eet oe Phe hae tha fo ee Cig->-G>0- rs * > Ga thet Re oe so oF Fe mG eueee er ‘eo eee Raga ts et : i = iow te Ge Oe o> ed Sete os eee fe ee er ty ees ee. ea ee ed o> Oa Orde - SMA G: Reva h- fod wisteticerecane-e Taste ; +e be ert 9nd a tel B © ees O- I~ eam ee cto Oe bode ats aO<4> &< 4-H @ sGo bots teste’ ae pest) ote Oo we aoe Os Fe. saa < re Sn Ge Oe te dee = Gta at O=he es P+ Se@- Ag pee bt it aie see mH a: 2 es anette 2 id ae vit+ eds tw Boots tat- > we irigegeeaeecee tee ¥ Pe 4 Pt se ey et eo ~ sees nw Be rr Seta a ee. Poe Orbe ee Un Pewee ete e 7-3 @ 2 be eee. - es ee -@ 0-6-6-Fe On Gat Me oe P= ete es Gree oa ve Betee-# ee ee ee A see Bctse = oe PT) © O74 ewe &- Fe Gee OP b> PPOs Gee ee * { Hi wen shane ee JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, EDITED BY THE SECRETARIES. VOL. XXVI. West Tf: to VE 1857. SRA ADL DAD PLLPVIVPPII II IIA “Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science, in difierent parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish if such communica- tions shall be long intermitted; a ll die away, if they shall entirely cease.” —Sirn WM. JONES. PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS. 1858. j ‘ uly } i ny? } Pret oi ’ ; eerie ie een yah ' + Pare wh ae 3 at - ue 1, ' Wis i f 1 ris toe . é ar aS UNE TCR yc ae pe ; t yee Ay 2 i v al Rey j ' ~ *, - , — Ed = P t ’ ‘ y , : t+ s [ Pht «he F Paras A , ’ i " wy Le ’ . 4 iv , teh ip? +. é j 0] ‘ s i = ‘ ! woh a, Se r ripe we ; « ’ Lad 5 .. " Li! “hh j A Aw 4 5 | | * ; ‘ : ts vier i - ans aT tee | | Yo Lee ie CONTENTS Bahing tribe, Vocabulary of, Buddhist Remains (ancient) at Pagan on the Irawadi, account of, a sae ee soe ar Darjiling, Sikkim Himalayah, Mean Temperature and fall of rain at, 1848 to 1855, . : Derdjat-Lower, Account of the dias ee district Of aaa called Roh, forming the western boundary of the—with notices of the tribes inhabiting if,... Entomological Papers, Jamera Pat in Sirgooja, Notes on, Pe ie Kiranti dialects—Comparative Vocabulary of, Kokan, Kashgar, Yarkund and other places in Central hen, Notes on, ... ; me Lagomys (new) and a new diragels rani the ay region of Sikim and the proximate parts of Tibet, Lycium, Indian species of, Notes on the, f Magnetic Survey, Report on the progress of, and of the He: searches connected with it, from November, 1855, to April, 1856, Ny we oe tae 54, Report on the Proceedings of the Officers engaged in the, Meteorological epee ueons puheousts of ) feat at the she veyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the months of October, November and December, 1856, in the month of January, 1857, in the month of February, 1857, in the months of March, April, May, in June, 1857, in the yon of Faly 1857, in the months of August, peptoled Oahabee November and December,.......... Page 207 iv Contents. Meteorological Register kept at the Office of the Secretary i to Government N. W. P. Agra, for the months of Septem- ber, October, November and December, 1856, Pe WL Nanga Parbat and other Snowy mountains of the Himalaya Range adjacent to Kashmir, Memo. on, saath OO Nepal, Comparative Vocabulary of the broken tiles of, (eee Pagan, Account of Buddhist remains in, : i Pigeon (Indian) akin to the Stock-Dove of aera denaencies of, with notices of other Columbine, : as LT Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal se J anuary sai February 1857... ae - ce GO for Ach and April, 1857, ask ave BGS ee for May, 1857, i i BaF 23. —— for June, July, August, September ahd Oxsaneey 1857, sa 275 Shells (of India) Land aud Tega wale Notes on ih eke tion of the Part I. ... ase ei we 245 Vayu tribe, Vocabulary of, — i. ele fe Grammar of, Se 429 Vocabulary (Comparative) of the languages of ne = ‘vibes of Nepal, . Ene : aot of the several dialects of te Kinanti- language,... 350 —_—— and Grammar of Vayu Tribe, ae 372, 429 eee of Bahing Tribe, _ INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS. Anderson, T. Esq., M. D. Oude ees N otes 0 on the Indian Species of Lycium, 52 Blyth, Edward, Esq. Description of a new Tad Been akin to the ‘Stock-Dove’ of Europe; with Notices of other Columbine, iS ee piece ea Contents. Hodgson, B. H. Esq., B. C.S. On a new Lagomys and anew Mustela, inhabiting the north region of Sikim and the proxi- mate parts of Tibet, Comparative Vocabulary of the Biker Tribes of Nepal, ey Se : of the several dialects of bbe Kiranti foie Vocabulary of the Vayu Tribe, Grammar of the Vayu Tribe, Vocabulary of the Bahing Tribe, Leigh, Capt. R. T. Notes on Jamera Pat in Sirgooja, Montgomerie, T. G., Lt. Engineers, Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat and other Snowy Mountains of the Himalaya Range adjacent to Kashmir, Nietner, John, Esq. Entomological Papers, Raverty, H. G., Lieut. An account of the Mountain ainio forming the western boundary of the Lower Derajat, com- monly called Roh, with notices of the tribes inhabiting it,... Netes on Kokan, Kashgar, Yarkand, and other places in Central Asia, Schlagintweit, Adolphe and Robert, Esqrs. es on the oe O- gress of the Magnetic Survey and of the Researches con- nected with it; from November, 1855, to April, 1856,... 54, Report on the Proceedings of the Officers engaged in the Magnetic Survey of India, . Theobald, W. Junr. Notes on the dunburion of some of ‘is land and freshwater shells of India, Part I. Yule, Capt. Henry. An account of the Ancient Buddhist he. mains at Pagdn on the Irrawadi, Withecombe, J. R., M. D. Mean temperature ae fall of rain at Darjiling, Sikkim Himalayah,—1848 to 1855, LOL OLLI oOo" an 257 97 make erg s ‘ 1] "y xd ae raiyNe seat gh? y 7 ' eu mgt eu ei ‘ na ., is = al yt iy ‘ ma ae sige coat =. i ? aa i) ; : din ba > ¥ in | 7 waht 48 e 241ts byt) ‘J mL gts i: pit ) 7 : ea ee wand) - ~ get, Te Jats wes a TS - ce we ——_ = =| a io 7 - ~ “ * ees 4 bi " _ ' e * be ) ys i a f ‘ . 4 oe a ‘at ~~ od ; a 4 af 4 ; , & ee 7 _ pt ’ é P| , a; * é » 7 i ‘ . ; i 4 ‘ = 4 y$ it) . ~~ A 0 Oe ; ay > y. NOTICE. The Secretaries wish to add that they cannot hold themselves re- sponsible for any misprints in the earlier part of these Vocabularies, especially those in No. V. The MSS. which Mr. Hodgson left with them, when he quitted India, were in such a confused state from ink and pencil interlineations that 16 was hopeless to avoid errors. This was pointed out to Mr. H. who replied that the Secretaries must do the best they could with them. This they have tried to do, but the task of correcting the proofs has been very laborious. JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. PPPOE LADLE LOL ILS IIL III LI SOIL OIL OE Now? “1s57: PDA DADIODIIIDIIIV™IIIYIPPADAIIVIIAAAADAE IA An Account of the Ancient Buddhist Remains at Pagdn on the lra- widt— By Captain Hunry Yuin, Bengal Engineers. The Burmese monarchs derive their stem from the S’dkya kings of Kapilavastu, the sacred race from which Gautama sprang. One of them, Abhi-Raja by name, is said to have migrated with his troops and followers into the valley of the Irawédi, and there to have established his sovereignty at the city of Tagoung: a legend manifestly of equal value and like invention to that which deduced the Romans from the migration of the pious Al‘neas, the ancient Britons from Brut the Trojan, and the Gael from Scota daughter of Pharaoh.* But that Tagoung was the early capital of the Burmans, appears to be admitted, and is probable, supposing the valley of the Irawadi to have been settled from the north. There, they relate, (as is told also of Anurédhapura in Ceylon), a city or a succession of cities had existed even during the times of each of the three Bud- dhas who preceded Gautama. The last foundation of Tagoung took place, according to story, in the days of Gautama himself, and this city was the seat of seventeen successive kings. From Tagoung a wild legend carries the dynasty to Prome, where an empire under the Pali name of Sare Khettara (Sri Kshetra) was * J see, however, since the text was written, that Lassen accepts the traditions of the Indian origin of the Burmese Kings as genuine. (Indische Alterthwn- skunde, II. 1034.) + Col. Burney in J. A. 8. B. vol. V. p. 157. No. LXXXV.—New Serius. Von. XXVI. B 2 The Remains at Pagan. No. wh. established about 484 B.C. It does not appear from the authori- ties whether the kingdom of Tagoung is believed to have continued contemporaneously with that of Prome. There is no doubt that the frequent shiftings of their capitals is characteristic of the Indo-Chinese nations, and is connected with the facilities for migration presented by their great navigable rivers, and by the unsubstantial nature of their dwellings. Still, one can- not but have some suspicion that the desire to carry back to a re- moter epoch the existence of the empire as a great monarchy, has led to the representation of what was really the history of various pet- ty principalities, attaining probably an alternate preponderance of dominion, as the history of one dynasty of monarchs in various suc- cessive seats. Pegu, it need not be said, was an independent kingdom, though several times subjected for a longer or shorter period by the Bur- mans previous to the Jast conquest by Alompra, and twice at least in its turn subjecting Ava.* Toungt also appears undoubtedly to have been a separate kingdom for a considerable period, two of its kings or princes in succession having conquered Pegu during the sixteenth century ; and Martaban was the seat of an independent prince for at least 140 years. ‘Tavoy was occasionally independent, tuough at other times alternately subject to Pegu or Siam. Aracan, bearing much the same relation to Burma that Norway did to Sweden, preserved its independence till the end of the last century. But besides these, there are perhaps indications of other principali- ties within the boundaries of Burma proper. Kings of Prome are mentioned in the histories of the Portuguese adventurers. Ferdi- * In the thirteenth century three generations of Burman kings reigned over Pegu. In 1554 or thereabouts, the king of Pegu, who was a Burmese prince of Toungu, conquered Ava and its empire as far as Mogoung and the Shan state of Thein-ni. This was the acme of Peguan prosperity, but even that was under a Burmese sovereign. About 1613 the king of Ava became master of Pegu and all the lower provinces. So matters continued tillthe Peguan revolt of 1740 and the following years, which not only succeeded in the expulsion of the Burmans, but in 1752 in the conquest of Ava. This brief ascendancy was upset in the same year by the Hunter-Captain Alompra, whose dynasty still sits on the throne of Ava, though Pegu has past into the hands of the Kalds. 1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 3 nand Mendez Pinto speaks of several other kingdoms on the Trawadi; but he is to be sure a very bad authority. Father Sangermano also, in his abstract of the Burmese chronicles, appears to speak of contemporary kings of Myen-zain or Panya, Ta-goung and Tsa-gaing.* These instances may, however, originate only in the ambiguity of the Burmese title Mun, which is applied equally to the King of England and to the Governor General of India, to the king of Burma and to all the high dignitaries and princes of his provinces. The Empire of Prome came to an end, it is said, through civil strife,t and one of the princes, in A. D. 107, flying to the north, established himself at Pagan. According to the view taken by Craw- furd and Burney, as well as Sangermano, the Burmese monarchy continued under a succession of fifty-two or fifty-five princes, to the end of the thirteenth century. But the authority quoted by Mr. Masont (apparently an edition of the royal chronicle) implies that the city founded, or re-founded, in 107 was that of Upper Pagan on the Upper Irawadi closely adjoining Tagoung, and that the Pagan of which we now speak was not founded till 847 or 849. The site of upper Pagan has been visited by Captain Hannay in 1835, and by the Rev. Mr. Kincaird in 18387. Capt. Hannay says,§ “About a mile to the south of this (Tagoung) is a place called Pagam-myo, which is now a complete * Description of the Burmese Empire, pp. 42, 43. + The following quaint legend is related by Sangermano, On the day of the last king’s death it happened that a countryman’s cornsieve, or winnowing fan, was carried away by an impetuous wind. The countryman gave chase, crying out : “Oh my cornsieve! oh my cornsieve!” The citizens, disturbed by the clamour, and not knowing what had happened, began likewise to ery, “ Army of the Corn- sieve! Soldiers of the Cornsieve!’’ A great confusion consequently arose and the citizens divided themselves into three factions, who took up arms against one another, and were afterwards formed into three nations, the Pyu, the Karan, and the Burmese. (The Pyu were probably the people in the neighbourhood of Prome; Karan or Kanran the Aracanese. See Payne in J. A. 8. B. XIII. 29.) 5% Natural Productions of Burma, II. 450. § M.S. Narrative of a journey from Ava to the Amber-mines near the Assam frontier. (In Foreign Office, Calcutta.) B 2 4 The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1. jungle, but covered with the remains of brick buildings ag far as the eye can reach. There are also the ruins of several large tem- ples which have now more the appearance of earthen mounds than the remains of the brick buildings, and they are covered with jungle to the top.” The people on the spot told Capt. Hannay that the city was much more ancient than the other Pagan. And indeed we heard this upper city spoken of as “old Pagan,” when we were at the capital. Some interesting discoveries in Burmese history and antiquities may yet be made among the ruins of which Capt. Hannay speaks. Nine of the oldest temples at Pagan are ascribed, according to Crawfurd, to king Pyan-bya, circa 850. This coincides with the reign and date to which Mr. Mason’s account assigns the foundation of the city. Here then twenty-one kings reigned in regular succession from the middle of the 9th to the end of the 13th century, and here in the year 997, under the apostleship of A-rahan and the reign of Anau-ra-men-zan, Buddhism was established in its present shape as the religion of the country.* The history of the destruction of Pagd4n has been related by Col. Burney from the Burmese chronicles.f Indignant at the murder of an ambassador by the Burmese king, the Emperor of China sent a vast army to invade Burma, The king, Narathee-ha-padé, in his anxiety to strengthen the defences of his capital, pulled down, for the sake of the materials, (so the chronicle relates), one thousand large arched temples, one thousand smaller ones, and four thousand square temples. But under one of these temples a prophetic inscription of ominous import was found: the king lost heart, left his new walls defenceless and fled to Bassein. The Chinese advanced, occupied the city, and continued to pursue the Burman army as far as Taroup-mau, or Chinese point, a considerable distance below Prome. ‘This was in 1284, Colonel Burney has indicated that this is the same Chinese invasion which is spoken of by Marco Polo. Turning to that traveller (in Purchas, vol. III. 98,) we find that when the Great * Judson’s Life, I. 199, and Crawfurd, p, 491. + J, A.S. B, Vol. IV. p, 402, 1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 5 Khan minded to subdue the city of Mien, [the Chinese name for Burma] he sent a valiant Captain, and an army chiefly composed of jesters with whom his court. was always furnished. It is curious enough to contrast the contemptuous view of the Burmese enterprise here indicated, with the history of the same event as given by the Burmans in their chronicle. Instead of an army of jesters they represent the emperor to have sent a host of at least six millions of horse, and twenty millions of foot, to attack Pagan, and to have been obliged to reinforce these repeatedly before they could overcome the resolute resistance of the Burmese, who encountered the enemy near the mouth of the Bamo river. From the mention of this locality it would appear that the Chinese invasion took place by the route still followed by the main body of the Chinese trade with Burma. Pagan surprised us all. None of the preceding travellers to Ava had prepared us for remains of such importance and interest. I do not find any mention of Pagan and its temples before the middle of the last century, when Capt. George Baker and Lieutenant North were sent ona joint embassy to Alompra from the British settlement at Negrais. Lieut. North died at Pagan, or rather at Nyoung-ti, a considerable trading town at the northern extremity of the ruins, On his way down, Capt. Baker seems to have staid a week at “Pagang Youngoe.”’ He mentions the great number of pagodas in the neighbourhood, and one in particular, “the biggest of any between Dagon (Rangoon) and Momchabue (Moutshobo the resi- dence of Alompra,) kept in good repair, and celebrated by the people for haying one of their god’s teeth and a collar bone buried under it.’’* Colonel Symes visited some of the temples on his way both up and down the river, and gives a somewhat vague account of the Ananda, which was then undergoing repair at the expense of the Prince Royal. He was told that the prince had collected gold for the purpose of gilding it, an intention which the size of the building renders improbable, and which certainly was not fulfilled. Cox also describes the Ananda, and took some measurements with the intention of making a plan of the building. * Dalrymple’s Oriental Repertory, I. 171. oo The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1. Among the ruins of the ancient city on the 8th February, 1826, the Burmese under the hapless Naweng-bhuyen, or “King of Sunset,”’* made their last stand against Sir Archibald Campbell’s army, which remained encamped there for some days afterwards. Havelock, in his history of the Campaign, notices the namerous monuments, but says; “the sensation of barren wonderment is the only one which Pagahm excites. There is little to admire, nothing to venerate, nothing to exalt the notion of the taste and invention of the people which the traveller might already have formed in Rangoon or Prome.” It will be seen presently that we differ widely in opinion from Colonel Havelock. The account that conveys the most truthful impression of Pagan is probably that contained in the travels of Mr. Howard Malcom, an American missionary traveller. Mr. Crawfurd indeed devotes several pages of his admirable book to the detailed description of some of these buildings, and gives an engraving of that which he considered the finest architectural work among them. rom his selection in this instance I utterly dissent. The temple which he has engraved is, as compared with the greater works at Pagan, paltry and debased. It is altogether uncharacteristic of the peculiar Pagan architecture ; nor is it indeed well or accurately represented in the print. Mr. Crawfurd’s descriptions too, an accurate observer as he is, fail somehow to leave with his readers any just impression of these great and singular relics. From that preference of his which has been referred to, it strikes me that he did not himself do justice to the grandeur or interest of these buildings, and therefore could not enable his readers to do so. With the assistance in illustration that we enjoy, we ought to be able to do better. In Pegu and lower Burma, the Buddhist pagoda is seldom found in any other form than that of the solid bell-shaped structure, representing (though with a difference) the topes of ancient India and the Chaityas of Libet, and always supposed to cover a sacred * Otherwise Laya-thooa. He fled to Ava, and appeared before the king de- manding new troops. The king in a rage ordered him to be put to death. The poor fellow was tortured out of life before he reached the place of execution.— Judson’s Life, I, 295. 1857. | The Remains at Pagin. 7 relic. Images of Gautama are often attached to these, but do not seem to be essential to them. The great Pagodas of Rangoon, Prome, and Pegu are celebrated examples of this kind of edifice. The type of the principal temples at Pagan is very different, and they suit better our idea of what the word ¢emple implies. Remains of this description but on a small scale, first attracted our attention at Tantabeng, a place on the east bank of the Irawaddi some miles above Yenangyoung.* The buildings at Tantabengf were numerous, had an air of creat antiquity, and were, as far as we examined them, on one general plan. The body of the buildings was cubical in form, inclosing a Gothic-vaulted Chamber. The entrance was by a projecting porch to the east, and this porch had also a subsidiary door on its north and south sides. There were also slightly projecting door- places on the three other sides of the main building, sometimes blank and sometimes real entrances. The plan of the building was cruciform. Several terraces rose successively above the body of the temple, and from the highest terrace rose a spire bearing a strone general resemblance to that of the common temples of Eastern India, being like the latter a tall pyramid with bulging sides. The angles of this spire were marked as quoins, with deep joints, and a little apex at the projecting angle of each, which gave a peculiar serrated appearance to the outline when seen against the sky. ‘These buildings were entirely of brick; the ornamental mouldings still partially remained in plaster. The interior of each temple contained an image of Gautama, or its remains. The walls and vaults were plastered and had been highly decorated with minute fresco painting. Such is the substantial type of all the most important temples at Pagan, though when the area of the ground-plan expands from 30 or 40 feet square to 200 or 300 feet square, the proportions and details of the parts necessarily vary considerably. * Mr. Oldham says that he saw a chambered pagoda as low down as Akouk- toung (below Prome.) ‘There is a conspicuous one also at Thayet Myo. But they are comparatively rare anywhere below the point named, and never, I think, of the antique type here described. + These haye been photographed by Captain Tripe. 8 The Remains at Pagdn. { No. 1. The Pagan ruins extend over a space about eight miles in length along the river, and probably averaging two miles in breadth. The present town of Pagan stands on the river side within the deeayed ramparts of the ancient city, near the middle length of this space. This brick rampart and fragments of an ancient gateway shewing almost obliterated traces of a highly architectural character, are the only remains at Pagan which are not of a religious description. If any tradition lingers round the site of the ancient palaces of the kings, who reigned here for so many centuries, our party missed it. Of the number of the temples at Pagan, I feel scarcely able to form-any estimate, the few days which we spent there having been chiefly devoted to a detailed examination of some of the most important. But of all sizes I should not guess them at less than eight hundred, or perhaps a thousand. All kinds and forms are to be found among them; the bell-shaped pyramid of dead brick-work in all its varieties; the same, raised over a square or octagonal cell containing an image of the Buddha ; the bluff knoblike dome of the Ceylon Dagobas, with the square cap which seems to have characterized the most ancient Buddhist Chaityas as represented in the sculptures at Sanchi, and in the ancient model pagodas in the Asiatic Society’s Museum; the fantastic Bo-phya or Pumpkin Pagoda, which seemed rather like a fragment of what we might conceive the architecture of the moon, than anything terrestrial; and many variations on these types. But the predominant and characteristic form is that of the eruciform vaulted temple, which we have described above. Three at least of the great temples, and a few of the smaller ones of this kind, have been from time to time repaired, and are still more or less frequented by worshippers. But by far the greater number have been abandoned to the owls and bats, and some have been desecrated into cow-houses by the villagers. In some respects the most remarkable of the great temples, and that which is still the most frequented as a place of worship, is the Ananda. “This temple is said to have been builtin the reign of Kyan-yeet- tha, about the time of the Norman conquest of England. Tradition 1857. ] The Remains at Pagan. 9 has it, that five Rahandahs, or Saints of an order second only toa Buddha, arrived at Pagan from the Hema-winda or Himalayan region. They stated that they lived in caves on the Nanda-mila hill (probably the Nunda Devi Peak), and the king requested them to give him a model of their abode, from which he might construct a temple. The Rahandahs did as they were requested, and the temple being built was called Wanda-tst gun or “ Caves of Nanda.” (PI. I.) The term Ananda, by which the temple is now known, is a corrup- tion, arising from the name of Ananda, the cousin and favourite disciple of Gaudama, being so well known to the people. The representation of a cave is a favourite style of building among the Burmese for depositing images.* This is not wonderful among the votaries of a religion which regards an ascetic life in the wilderness as the highest state for mortals in this world.”’+ Major Phayre mentioned another probable origin of the name of this temple, viz. from the Palee Ananta “the endiess;’ which seems to be supported by the fact that another great temple close at hand is called Thapinyu, “ The omniscient.’ To reach the Ananda we passed out through the principal eastern gate of the ancient city. The remains of the defences form a distinct mound and ditch, traceable in their entire circuit, and large masses of the brick work still stand at intervals, but I saw none in which any feature of the architecture, or portion of the battlements, was distinguishable. The gate has some remains of architectural design, and ornament of a rich character in plaster, with foliated pilaster capitals and festcons; but these remnants have been disfigured and obscured by the erection of two coarse modern niches with figures of Warders. A few yards beyond the gate are the square sandstone inscribed pillars mentioned by Mr. Crawfurd. Their appearance is suggestive of great antiquity and interest. But the expectation of the latter would probably be disappointed by an interpretation. The character appeared to be square{ Bur- * Several of the temples at Pagdn are named in this way; e. g. Shwé-ku, The golden cave ;” Sembyo-ki, *‘ The white elephant cave,” &c.—H. Y. + Note by Major Phayre. {I do not know whether it has been noticed that the circular form of the ordinary Burmese character, as of the Ooria, the Tamul and several other South C 10 The Remains at Pagan. Nosed. mese of a very neat and uniform type, as indeed most of the Burmese inscriptions are, and very much superior in execution to what owr lapidary inscriptions were a century ago. In the precincts of the Ananda we entered a large group of monastic buildings, forming a street of some length. These in beauty of detail and combination, were admirable. The wood carving was rich and effective beyond description ; photography only could do it justice. Great fancy was displayed in the fantastic figures of warriors, dancers, WVdts (spirits) and Bilis (ogres,) in high relief, that filled the angles and nuclei of the sculptured surfaces. The fretted pinnacles of the ridge ornaments were topped with birds cut in profile, in every attitude of sleeping, pecking, stalking, or taking wing. With the permission of a venerable and toothless poongyee we looked into a chamber which was a perfect museum of quaint and rich gilt carving, in small shrines, book chests, &c., not unlike the omnium gatherum of a Chinese Josshouse. One chamber contain- ed, among other things, a neat model of a wooden monastery with its appropriate carving. The most elaborate of these religious buildings is stated to have been built only a few years ago by a man of Ye-nan-gyoung; probably some millionnaire of the oil trade.* In the same monastic street a brick building, in the external form of a Kyoung, contains a corridor entirely covered with rude paintings on the plaster. These are all, Major Phayre informs me, representations of Jats or passages in the life of Gautama in various periods of pre-existence. ‘The greater part of the scenes appeared to depict the amusements and employments of ordinary life, such as feasting, hunting, weaving, looking at plays, being shampooed, and the like. The persons represented, like the marionnettes in the puppet plays, were all exhibited with pure white complexions. By a curious self-delusion, the Burmans would seem to claim that Indian alphabets, is a necessary result of the practice of writing on palm leaves with a style. Certain of the sacred books which are written in the square cha- racter are inscribed with a black gum (the thit-see) used as ink, * Photographed by Capt. Tripe, ANANDA 4.0 Feet = an Inch. Scalo ; ein vex 1857.] The Remains at Pagén. tf in theory at least they are white people.* And what is still more curious, the Bengalees appear indirectly to admit the claim; for our servants in speaking of themselves and their countrymen, as dis- tinguished from the Burmans, constantly made use of the term ‘Kalaé admi’—black man, as the representative of the Burmese Kéld, a foreigner. In one part of the series were some representations of punishment in the Buddhist Hells. Demons were pictured beating out the brains of the unhappy with clubs, or elephants trampling on them, and in one place was a perfect picture of Prometheus; the victim lying on the ground, whilst a monstrous unclean bird pecked at his side. From this monastic colony a wooden colonnade, covered with the usual carved gables and tapering slender spires, led to the northern doorway of the Ananda. This remarkable building, with a general resemblance in charac- ter to the other great temples, has some marked peculiarities and felicities of its own. They all suggest, but this perhaps above them all suggests, strange memories of the temples of Southern Catholic Europe. The Ananda is in plan a square of nearly 200 feet to the side, and broken on each side by the projection of large gabled vesti- bules which convert the plan into a perfect Greek cross.f (Plate IT.) These vestibules are somewhat lower than the square mass of the building, which elevates itself to a height of 35 feet in two tiers of windows. Above this rise six successively diminishing terraces connected by curved converging roofs, the last terrace just affording breadth for the spire which crowns and completes the edifice. The lower half of this spire is the bulging mitre-like pyramid adapted from the temples of India, such as I have described at Tantabeng: the upper half is the same moulded taper pinnacle that terminates the common bell-shaped pagodas of Pegu. The gilded tree caps the * But so also thought some of the old travellers. Thus Vincent Leblanc says ; “The people (of Pegu) are rather whites than blacks, and well shap’d.” I think I have seen some brahmins fairer than any Burmans. But the average tint in Burma is much lighter than in India. One never, I believe, sees a Burman to whom the word black could be applied fairly, + See also Capt. Tripe’s photograph, No. ——. c 2 12 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1. whole at a height of one hundred and sixty-eight feet above the ground. The building internally consists of two concentric and lofty cor- ridors, communicating by passages for light opposite the windows, and by larger openings to the four porches. Opposite each of these latter, and receding from the inner corridor towards the centre of the building, is a cell or chamber for an idol. In each this idol is a colossal standing figure upwards of 380 feet in height. They vary slightly in size and gesture; but all are in attitudes of prayer, preaching, or benediction. ach stands, facing the porch and entrance, on a great carved lotus-like pedestal, within rails like the chancel-rails of an English church. There are gates to each of these chambers, noble frames of timber rising to a height of four and twenty feet. The frame bars are nearly a foot in thickness, and richly carved on the surface in undercut foliage; the pannels are of lattice work, each intersection of the lattice marked with a gilt rosette. The lighting of these image chambers is perhaps the most singus lar feature of the whole. The lofty vault, nearly 50 feet high, in which stands the idol, canopied by a valance of gilt metal curiously wrought, reaches up into the second terrace of the upper structure, and a window pierced in this sends a light from far above the spectator’s head, and from an unseen source, unon the head and shoulders of the great gilded image. This unexpected ‘and partial illumination in the dim recesses of these vaulted corridors, produces avery powerful and strange effect, especially on the north side, where the front light through the great doorway is entirely subdued by the roofs of the covered approach from the monastic establishments.* These four great statues represent the four Buddhas who have appeared in the present World: Period. * “A similar artistic introduction of the light is mentioned by Mr. Fergusson as characterising ‘the great rock-cut Basilicas of India.’” (Handbook of Arch. 1. 313.) May this not have been imitated in the Ananda, and may the fact not be in some degree a confirmation of the legend, that caves were intended to be repre+ sented by these vaults ? + “ They are said to be composed of different materials as follows : 1857. | The Remains at Pagin. 13 The temple, like the other great temples here, is surrounded by a square enclosure wall with a gate in each face. “That to the north is the only one in repair. This was no doubt intended as the principal entrance, and has the image of Gautama placed there, but itis difficult to say why the western entrance was not chosen for this distinction,* as it is directly in sight of the Tan- Kyee hill and Pagoda, on the opposite site of the Irawadee, where Gautama himself stood with his favourite disciple, Ananda, and predicted the future building and greatness of the city of Pagan. Perhaps the north was chosen as being the direction in which Gau- ’ tama walked after the moment of his birth.’’+ In the centre of the vestibule on the western side stands cut in stone on an elevated and railed platform, a representation of the impression of Gautama’s feet. In the galleries or corridors running round the building, disposed in niches along the massive walls, at regular distances apart, are numerous images of Gau- tama, and sculptured groups of figures illustrating particular events of his life. These have been covered over with a substance resem- bling thitsee (black gum resin) and vermilion.t “The image to the east is the Buddha Kankathan made of a sweet-scented wood called Dan-tsa-goo. To the west is Ka-thaba, made of brass. To the north Gautama, of Fir; to the south Ganno-goon of Jasmine-wood. Whatever the original material of these images may have been, it appears now that the outer coating of each is of plaster richly gilt over.” Major Phayre. * Compare Cunningham’s Topes of Bhilsa, p.191. It there appears that at No. 1 Tope at Sanchi, within the enclosure and immediately facing each entrance, there is a large figure, once under a canopy. That to the east Major Cunningham considers to be { KRAKUCHANDA, first mortal Buddha; that to the south KANAKA; to the west KASYAPA; and to the north SAKYA SINHA” (Gautama). Hence it would appear that the figures in the Ananda were not placed arbitrarily, but according to orthodox Buddhistic tradition.—H. Y. . + Major Phayre. t I extract the following detailed account of some of these curious groups from Major Phayre’s notes. Lt. Heathcote, I. N. informs me that the number of these sculptures is upwards of fifteen hundred. “Several, indeed, most, of the images of Gautama in this temple have a different physiognomy to those made by Burmese artists, and the Woondouk who accom- panied me, asked if I did not notice a strong resemblance in the features to those Buddhist images in the compound of the Asiatic Society at Calcutta, which have 14 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1. The outer corridor is roofed with a continuous flying buttress, or half pointed arch, abutting on the massive outer walls. The inner corridor and cells are pointed vaults. been brought from central India. There is undoubtedly a great similarity, so that it is impossible not to conclude that these have been carved by Indian artists. The following are the principal figures and groups illustrating events of Gautama’s life. A recumbent female figure richly clad with large earrings, and pendent ears, decked with numerous armlets from the wrist to the elbow; the figure and dress are entirely in the Indian fashion. The hair of all the female figures in these groups is bound up sideways in the form of a cornucopia, and in a fashion, cer- tainly not Burmese. This is said to be the Princess Ya-thau-da-ya,* the wife of Prince-Theiddat,+ i. e. Gautama, before he left his father’s kingdom and became a hermit. The four predictive signs displayed to the Prince, and which, convinc- ing him of the vanity of all earthly things, determined him to leave his father’s palace and go forth to the wilderness, are here displayed in separate groups. ‘The Prince, from his chariot, sees the decrepid man, the diseased, the dead and de- eayed, and finally the Priest ordained. He chooses the latter state as the only refuge from the ills of mortality. In another sculpture is represented a stately female with her left arm round the neck of another, and both standing beneath a tree. This is the figure of Gautama’s mother called Amay-dau-ma-ya,{ beneath the Engyeen tree (Shorea robusta), when giving birth to her son while on a jour- ney. She leans on the neck of her younger sister Gau-da-mee. A female atten- dant is near at hand. On the right of the mother is seen the infant, as if just born, but displaying his inherent glory, while three other minute figures of him denote his being received by the three higher orders of beings, Byahmas, Nats and men, the latter being lowest and receiving him on earth. This scene is repeated four times in the temple with some small variations, ; It would be tedious to recount in detail the whole of these interesting sculp-. tures; but I will mention that they include Prince Theiddat} in his palace sur- rounded by musicians and attendants, but dissatisfied with worldly splendour ; then they show him taking a last look at his sleeping wife and child, before going forth to the wilderness; mounting his horse, and leaving, despite of all opposi- tion ; stringing a famous bow before the Court of his maternal uncle Thoopa- bood-da,§ the King of De-wa-da-ha, who then bestowed on him in marriage his daughter Ya-thau-daya. All these and many others, the subjects of which, I did not recognize, but which evidently relate to events in the life of Gautama, have no doubt been chiseled by Indian artists at an early period. * Yasodhara. + Siddhartha. { Maha Maya. § Supra-Budha. 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 15 One of the peculiar features of the Ananda is the curved slope given to the roofs both of the porches and of the main building, as if preserving the extrados of the arch which lies beneath. In all the other temples the roofs are flat. This, with the massive gables which are thus formed at the ends of the porches, and the great scrolls, if we may call them so, at the wings of these gables, probably go far in producing that association with the churches of southern Europe to which I have alluded.*. Still these scrolls are perfectly Burman, and seem identical with the horn-like orna- ments which are so characteristic of the Burman timber buildings. Here they are backed (another unique circumstance) by lions rising gradatim along each limb of the gable or pediment. The windows also of the main building, standing out from the wall surface with their effective mouldings, pilasters, and canopies, recall the views of some of the great Peninsular monasteries. But not the exterior only was redolent of kindred suggestions. The impression on us, (I speak of Major Allan, Mr. Oldham, and myself,) as we again and again paced the dim and lofty corridors of the Ananda, was that of traversing some sombre and gigantic pile appropriated to the cabals and tortures of the Inquisition. No architecture could better suit such uses. And in the evening, as I sat in the western vestibule sketching the colossal idol before me, the chaunted prayers of the worshippers before the northern cell boomed along the aisles in strange resemblance to the chaunt of the priests in a Roman Catholic cathedral. Of the details of architecture I shall speak below, but before proceeding to describe any of the other temples, it may be well to notice the material of which they are built. This, I believe to I should have mentioned that on the outside of the building, and about three feet above the ground, glazed tiles are set closely all round it, having rude figures of monsters on them, some riding camels and other animals unknown in Burmah. These have Pali inscriptions on them, intimating that the figures represent the sol- diers of the evil spirit, who sought to alarm Gautama from his resolution of be- coming an ascetic and attaining Buddhahood. * Compare the elevation of the entrance to one of the vestibules of the Ananda with that very common facade of Italian churches. The analogy in the com- position is, I think, very striking. The R.C. Church at Agra has a facade of this type. 16 The Remains at Pagan. [INo-nk. be in every case the same, viz. what we call in India kucha pukka work, that is to say, brick cemented with mud only. Mr. Crawfurd supposed the temples to be of brick and lime mortar. But 1 satisfied myself that this is not the case, and that the penetration of the plaster, which had been applied to the walls and corridors, into some of the joints had misled him.* We are not indeed ac- customed in India to conceive of kucha pukka edifices two hundred feet in height. Of these it is to be said that they are so massive as to be practically almost solid; so that the vaults and corridors rather resemble excavations in the mass than structural interiors. It is also to be said, however, that they are built with a care and elaboration which I never saw bestowed ona kucha pukka structure in India, and which the Burmans of the present day seem remotely incapable of in brickwork of any kind. On the outside at least, in the better buildings, every brick has been cut and rubbed to fit with such nicety that it is difficult, and sometimes not possible, to insert the blade of a knife between the joints. The arches and semi-arches are carefully formed of bricks moulded in the radiating form of voussoirs. The peculiarity of these arches is that in general the bricks are laid edge to edge in the curve of the arch, instead of being laid parallel with its axis as among other nations. The exterior archfaces of the smaller doors and windows are, however, laid in the European way, with the bricks cheek to cheek. . The bricks are usually about 14 inches by 7, (I here speak from memory,) and well moulded, but they are not very well burnt. Such being the substance of the structure, all the ornamental finish is consequently executed in the plaster, which, even without view to ornament, would have been essential to the preservation of the buildings. Where the plaster has been kept in repair, the buildings remain apparently perfect. Where the original plaster has decayed, and has not been renewed, the temples are in ruins. But it is in the latter only that we can learn to do justice to the spirit of art that * Mr. Oldham notes his impression that the Bauddhi temple is built with lime mortar. 1857. | "The Remains at Pagén. 17 adorned these monuments. The renewals and repairs have been executed by barbarous and tasteless hands. Of this I shall speak more fully by and bye. The second great temple of Pagan is the Zhapinyu—“ the Omnis- cient,” It is stated to have been built in the reign of A-loung-tsee-chyoo Men, grandson of the king who erected the Ananda, about the year of our era 1100.* It stands within the ancient walls, some five hundred yards to the south-west of the Ananda, and its taper spire, rising to a height of two hundred and one feet from the ground, overtops all the other monuments. Its general plan is not unlike that of the Ananda, but it does not, like the latter, form a symmetrical cross. The eastern porch alone projects considerably from the wall. The body of the building forms a massive square of more than one hundred and eighty feet to the side. The characteristic of the Thapinyu is the great elevation of the mass before considerable diminution of spread takes place, and the position of the principal shrine high above the ground. We have first a spacious two-storied basement like that of the Ananda, then two receding terraces. But here the usual gradation is interrupted. The third terrace, instead of rising a few feet only like the others, starts at one leap aloft to a height of some fifty feet in a truly massive and stupendous cubical donjon, crowned again at top by a renewal of the pyramidal gradation of terraces, and by the inevitable culminating spire. Within this donjon, in a lofty vaulted hall opening by pointed gateways to the east, north and south, and directly under the apex of the spire, sits the great image of the shrine. This is, with one exception, the only instance I have seen in these temples, in which * The dates given are those traditionally ascribed to the temples, and are the same with those already given by Crawfurd. Major Phayre considers the inscrip- tions at Pagan, so far as he had time to examine them, to confirm these dates, very reraarkable as they are under the circumstances. D 18 The Remains at Pagan. [ No. 1. the core of the building beneath the central spire had been hollowed into a chamber. The principal shrine of the temple being thus in the lofty upper tower, the basement contains little of interest in the interior arrangements. There is on the ground level but one corridor, with images in the halls opposite the north, south, and west doorways. The main, or eastern, doorway is faced by a staircase leading to the upper terraces, but first to a curious mezzanine or entresol, forming a double corridor, running round the basement story at the level of the second tier of windows. ‘This also is a peculiarity of the Thapinyu. The Gauda-palen is the third and last of the greater temples which have been kept in repair. (PI. III.) It dates from the reign of Na-ra-pa-ti-tsi-thu, about A. D. 1160. Crawfurd explains the name as signifying, “the throne of Gauda’’ —a Nat or spirit. Major Phayre, though unable to obtain a satisfactory solution of the name, expresses strong disbelief that a Buddhist temple could be named after a Nat. Though of great size, and rising to a height of 180 feet, this temple covers a considerably less area than the two already describ- ed. It is within the city walls, and stands on lower ground than they do; but being nearer the river it is very conspicuous in approaching Pagdn from the southward. Gleaming in its white plaster with numerous pinnacles and tall central spire, we had seen it from far down the Irawadi, rising like a dim vision of Milan eathedral. This enchantment it lost of course on nearer approach, though still strongly suggestive of south-European church architec- ture, more so perhaps than any other of these buildings except the Ananda. It is cruciform in plan, and stands ona low parapetted terrace irregularly following the outline. lt is more compact and elevated in proportion to its bulk than the two former buildings, but resembles them in general character, exhibiting a massive basement with porches, and rising above in a pyramidal gradation of terraces, crowned by a spire and héee. The latter has broken from its stays at one side, and now leans over almost horizontally, having torn with it the acorn of brick-work which caps the spire, and threatening speedy downfall. N.E VIEW of GAUDA-PALEN TEMPLE. Photographed fron a Drawing by CAPTAIN H.YULE. Titles By HM vimith, Sure, ral’ Office, (atari, How 1857 wi.) ~~, [ nian! wel a Se jee” Ki a of eo cen % CP ght v1, { vio: 4 ; ¥ ‘ ae ; a - . 7) ej + ; ' Tas igi e\ ey " “4 ‘ Lae £ * " ’ j r se & 4 hye 4, r 5 ; » ¢ Woe =; i i . bis aL 5 a ‘ a \ as . \ , ‘ ry y ° i n fl 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 19 From the last terrace, below the spire, we had a noble prospect of ° the vast field of ruined temples stretching north, east, and south, and Mr. Grant devoted many laborious hours to sketching this panorama. All these three buildings have been kept in repair, and “ beauti- fied’? in some churchwarden spirit, more to their loss than gain. One other important temple within the city walls has also been kept in repair. Its date is given by Mr. Crawfurd as about the year 1200. ‘This is the Batddhi* described and delineated by him. It is different in style from the other temples and very inferior in size, majesty, and art. The basement is a quadrangular block of no great height, supporting a tall spire strongly resembling that of the ordinary Hindu shiwala, and still more strongly the sikra of the Jain temples near the river Barakar, and of some of the ancient Hindu temples delineated by Mr. Fergusson, such as those at Bhubaneswar in Orissa and that at Barolli in Rajputana. The latter, in general effect, has a considerable resemblance to the Bauiddhi as seen from a distance.t Both base and spire are covered with niches, bearing seated Gautamas, and interspersed with orna- mental pannels and mouldings. This gives the building a very rich appearance at a little distance, but, closely viewed, the exe- eution is execrably rough and inaccurate, and there is an absence of the whole spirit of art visible in. what I must call the greater and purer works. In these there is an actual sublimity of architectural effect, which excites wonder, almost awe,and takes hold ef the imagination jn a manner that renders apology for them as “ Burmese,” absurdly out of place.f There is no such spell in Batddhi, which only re- ealls the Hindu temple, of which a thousand specimens infinitely superior in material and workmanship are to be seen at Benares * Baiddhi signifies the Banian tree. tT See Fergusson’s Axcient Architecture of Hindustan, Pl. VII., and Capt. Tripe’s Photograph, No. — t “We were all struck with awe” says Mr. Oldham, in his Journal “at the littleness of our individual might in the presence of such evidence of combined power and exertion.” D2 20 The Remains at Pagan. [Nowd. and Mirzapur, to say nothing of the older and finer works in other parts of India, of which I have scarcely any personal knowledge. Omitting further consideration of the last named building, the architectural elements of which the great temples are composed, and hundreds of smaller ones in the same style, are nearly the same in all, though combined in considerable variety. The pointed arch is found in all, and is almost universally the form of the doorways. It is, universally, enclosed in a framework, or facade, exhibiting an arch dressing of a triangular or almost parabolic shape, drooping in cusps of a characteristic form, and sur- mounted by a sort of pediment of graduated flame-like spires and horns of avery peculiar character. This cusped arch and these flamboyant spires and horns are, in a modified form, part of the style of ornament universal in the elaborate timber monasteries of Burma. The style seemed to me more natural in the latter material, and I felt more inclined to believe that the masonry or- namentation had been, (as in so many other climates,) adapted from that of timber, than the architecture of the temples modified to suit the timber structures. This opinion has changed since my return to Calcutta, and access to drawings has enabled me to trace the prototype of this flamboyant ornament in the temples of Southern India. Whether again this pattern did not originate in a preceding timber model is too remote a question. Even in the cave temples of Western India, Mr. Fergusson traces distinctly the limitation of. timber construction. In the greater doorways, this cusped arch face and pediment is generally supported at each side by a semi-arch and semi-pediment of like charcter, at a lower level. All these arches and semi-arches rest on regular pilasters with base, eapital, and cornice, the singular resemblance of which, both in general character and in many of the details of mouldings, to the pilasters of Koman architecture is startling, perplexing, and unac- countable to me by any theory I have yet heard propounded, if anything like the true date has been assigned to these buildings. The following extracts from Mr. Oldham’s journal well express the feeling with which several members of the mission involuntarily viewed these structures with reference to their origin. 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. ps ' “So strongly unlike all other Burman buildings, can these have ewed their origin to the skill of a western Christian or Missionary, who may have adopted largely the ornamentation of the Burmese, and ingrafted much of their detail and their arrangements on his own idea of atemple? May not the true cross-like plan of the Ananda be thus symbolical, and may he not, in the long-trusting hope of a zealous worshipper of Christ, have looked forward to the time when this noble pile might be turned from the worship of an unknown God to the service of the Most High.” “I can’t think any Burman ever designed or planned such buildings. They are opposed to the general plan of their construction. The Shwe Koo fone of the minor temples] might possibly be the work of Burman mind, but I fancy not the others; or, if they did design them, the Burmans of those days were very different from the Burmans of the present day.” Such an impression, I know, was almost irresistible at times when on the spot. But, without going much into argument on the sub- ject, I cannot think it probably founded in truth. There is not, I believe, reason to believe that any missionaries, or Europeans of any kind, found their way to these trans-gangetic regions in the days when these temples were founded.* If there had been * At the suggestion of a friend I annex an abstract of the chronology of Burmese intercourse with the west. However imperfect, this abstract, which has been compiled with considerable labour, will be, I trust, interesting, indepen- dently of the question of the origin of these temples. Ptolemy is, I believe, the only ancient geographer who gives any particulars of these countries. He quotes his predecessor Marinus of Tyre (who lived about A. D. 100) as referring to the log of one Alexander, who had voyaged along these shores as far as Thinae and Cattigara, Great difference of opinion has ex- isted as to the identification of these and the hitherward localities which he names. Some, considering that the Aurea Chersonesus, which was passed in reaching the two places above mentioned, can only answer to the Peninsula of Malacca, have carried their locality as far eastward as the southern extremity of Camboja. But Gos- selin* has shewn a strong reason to believe that the Aurea Chersonesus really represents the protuberant Delta of the Irawadee, and that Thinae is rather to be * Recherches sur la Geographie des anciens, Pav P. F, J. Gosselin. Paris, 1813. Vol. Lil. 22 The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1. communication we must go further back for it. And the points of resemblance are rather to Roman architecture, properly so called, identified with Tenasserim. There are abundant difficulties in the way of either interpretation. It is an interesting subject, but a great deal more learning and leisure than I possess would be required to discuss it properly. Two arguments, however, may be mentioned which appear strongly to favour Gosselin’s theory. Ptolemy de- scribes the various rivers of the Chersonesus as mutually communicating, a cir- cumstance which could not apply to the Malay Peninsula, but which applies excellently to the waters of the Delta. These rivers, whose embouchures he names Chrysoana, Palanda and Attabas, would therefore be three of the principal outlets of the Irawadee. Again, immediately westward of the Chersonesus he places the Sinus Sabaricus, and in this gulph the mouths of the river Besynga. Now, a little below, in his sketch of the hydrography of India beyond the Ganges, the Geographer says distinctly; ‘From the range of Meandrus flow down all the rivers beyond Ganges, wntil you come to the river Besynga.” This remark seems infallibly to identify Mons Meandrus with the Aracan Yomadoung and the river Besynga with the Bassein branch of the Irawadee. The Rey. Mr. Mason in his valuable book, “ The Natural Productions of Bur- ma,’* following the more common arrangement of maps of ancient geography, which makes the Sinus Sabaricus represent the Gulph of Martaban, traces Be- synga in the Solwen, called by the Talaings Be-khung. But it may be suggested that Bathein-khyoung (river of Bassein, in Burmese) affords at least as strong a resemblance. And it is curious that this very gulph of Negrais, which we take to be the Sinus Sabaricus, is called by several of the old travellers “the Sea of Bara.”"f Where the data are so vague, attempts at the identification of names are rather amusing than profitable. But afew may be mentioned. Sada suits in locality as well as name with Sandoway, which is mentioned at a very early period of Burmese history.t Zabai has been identified by Gosselin with Tavoy. In Ptolemy’s list of inland cities to the north of the Chersonesus occurs the name of Mareura metropolis. The identity of this has been suggested§ with the ancient city of Mauroya, which, as Col. Burney tells us from the Burman histories, pre- * Published at Maulmain 1856. See under the head of Ethnology, p. 427. + Vide Cesar Frederick in Purchas, IJ. 1717 and Gasparo Balbi, id. p. 1724. At the same time, be it said, I feel some misgiving that this Bara may be only the Bar of Negrais. In Wood’s map, at the beginning of Syme’s Narrative, one of the mouths of the Irawadee is called Barago, and I believe Barago Point is still the name given by mariners to the extreme point of the delta. t See Col. Burney in J. A. 8S. B. V. 163. § By Col. Hannay in his Sketch of the Singphos, 1847, p. 32, and by Mr. Mason, I. p. 440. 1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 23 than to anything of later date, so far as I know, before the fif- teenth century. And even this Roman character is so mixed up ceded Tagoung as the seat of the Sakya kings. Mauroya is now known as Mueyen, a town not far south from Bam6. In Tugma metropolis, an inland city of the Aurea Regio, we have perhaps the venerable city of Tagoung; in Tharra, an inland city of the Chersonesus, Thara- wadee, or perhaps Thare-khettara, the ancient name of Prome; Satyrorwn Pro- montorium we might be tempted to find in the point of Bili-gyoon or Ogre’s Island, off Maulmain. At the northern confines of Mons Meandrus, Ptolemy, true to this day, places the Nanga loge or Naga Lég, which he defines as truly to mean ‘the Naked Folk.’ Eastward towards the Sine are the Kakobe, whom Col. Hannay* finds in the Ka-khyens called by themselves Kakoos ; and near the shores of the Magnus Sinus we find the Kadope or Kadote who may be the Karens, called in the Talaing language, according to F’. Buchanan, Kadoon. Be- yond them we get among tribes of Pirates, who are said to have skin like that of a hippopotamus, not penetrable by arrows ; so we may decline to follow Ptolemy any further. It may be noted that though the geographer characterises several tribes in these parts as Anthropophagi, he affixes “ Emporium” to the names of various places on the coast, which seems to indicate civilization and foreign trade. Why these lands should have been termed the lands of silver and gold (Argen- tea Regio, Aurea Regio, Chersonesus Aurea) may appear obscure, as they are not now remarkably productive of those metals. There are, however, gold-washings on a small scale in many of the rivulets both of Pegu and of the valley of the upper Irawadee and of the Kyendwen, which may have been more productive in ancient times. And the Argentea Regio may probably (as suggested by Col. Hannay7) have been the territory including the Bau-Dwen, or great silver mine on the Chinese frontier, which is believed to supply a large part of the currency of Burma. Indeed Aurea Regio may be only a translation of the name Sona- paranta, which is the classic or sacred appellation of the central region of Burma between the Irawadee and the Kyendwen, always used to this day in the enu- meration of the king’s titles. These regions may moreover have been the channels by which the precious metals were brought from China, and the mountains near the sources of the Irawadee which are said to be very productive of gold, and possibly even at that remote period the profuse use of gilding in edifices may have characterised the people, as it does now. it seems, however, most probable that this practice was introduced with Bud- dhism.t Yet even at the period of the first Buddhistic mission to this region, * As above p. 2. + Ditto. t The elaborate gilding of chapels and monastic cells in India and central Asia is mentioned by Fahian, the Chinese pilgrim in the fifth century. (See Laidlay’s translation, p. 18, &c.) 24 The Remains at Pagan. (iNest. and blended with other touches and details so utterly un-Roman and original, that one cannot conceive so spirited and effective a fusion to have been produced by any chance Huropean aid. at the conclusion of the third great synod, B. C. 241, it was known in India as * Suvarna Bhuini’ the Golden Land.* According to Mr. Mason, the ancient capital of the Talaings (of the Toungthoos according to the tradition of the latter) was Thadung, or Satung, a city whose traces still exist between the mouths of the Salwen and the Sitang. Suvanna- bumme, he adds, but unfortunately stating no authority, is still the classic Pali name of Satung.+} In the beginning of the fifth century, Buddhaghosa, a Bramin of Magadha, visit- ed Ceylon and there revised the Buddhist scriptures and re-translated them into Pali. He carried his version with him to Pegu, and there made it known. In A. D. 1171, a mission was sent from Burma to Ceylon, and ten years subse- quently five men deeply versed in the Burmese scriptures came from Ceylon to Pagan. One of the number is said to have been a Cambojan, and another a Cingalese.t The intercourse with Ceylon appears to have continued more or less till a late period. It was not always an intercourse of merely a religious character. In one instance, more particularly referred to at page 55 of the text, we find a king of Ceylon carrying a hostile armament against the Burman countries (A. D. 11538) ;§ and in another we find ‘ Brama, king of Pegu,’ as he was called by the Portuguese, sending to solicit the daughter of a king of Ceylon in marriage (about 1566.)|| It is scarcely possible that any intercourse should go on at the present day, if we may judge by the surprise and incredulity of the Burmese courtiers when told by Major Phayre that the sacred island of Lankadwipa also belonged to the English. The last remarkable instance of intercommunication between Ceylon : and Burma, of which, I am aware, occurred towards the end of the last century, * “Sono and Uttaro were deputed to Suvarna Bhumi or Golden Land. As this country was on the sea-coast, it may be identified either with Ava, the Aurea Regio, or with Siam the Aurea Chersonesus, 6,000,000 of people are said to have been converted, of whom 25,000 men became monks, and 1500 women became nuns.’ Quoted from the Mahawanso by Major Cunningham in his Bhilsa Topes, . 118. + Mason, as above p. 427. He also says that Maubee in the delta of the Ira- wadee was called Suvanna nadee, River of gold. Sobana emporium and Sobanas occur as the names of a town and river in Ptolemy’s list. And Chrysoanas, his name for one of the rivers of the delta, looks like a translation of the same. { Mason—p. 453. § It is curious that in the reign of the preceding monarch of Burma, Alountsee- thoo, it is said in the chronicles that “ the governors of Bassein, of other districts in the Talaing country, the Kala governor of the island of Ceylon, and he of Tenasserim, haying rebelled, were put down, and their countries taken possession of.” (Mason, as above.) || Hist. of the discovery and conquest of India by the Portuguese, London, 1695. 1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 25 To return to details. The angles of all the chief buildings are when the maintenance of caste-distinctions among the priesthood by the kings of Candy, provoked the low-caste monks to organize an expedition to the orthodox Buddhists of Burma, with a view to the restoration of equal rights. That religious visits were made during the middle ages of the Burmese coun- tries to the sacred spots of Buddhism in India, is proved by an inscription in Burmese at Buddha-Gaya, discovered by the Burmese envoys who were sent to Lord W, Bentinck in 1831-33. Some doubt attaches to the reading of the date and the determination of the king whose repair of the temple it commemorates. Burney ascribed it to the reign of Aloungtsee-thoo, A, D. 1109. There is no mention of Pegu, by the Mahomedans of the 9th century, whose travels were published by the Abbé Renaudot and are given in Pinkerton’s and various other collections, nor so far as I can learn by any Western traveller till the time of Marco Polo. Indeed, the first opening for Christian travellers into Asia was in quite another direction, and much further to the North. Monks of Italy, France and Flanders jostled each other at the court of Kara Korum; and Mongol ambassadors found their way to Paris and Northampton,* when as yet all that Europe knew of India was derived from Strabo and Arrian. It is probably Pagan which Marco Polo speaks of under the name of Mien, “a great and noble city, the head of the kingdom.” Mien is said by Col. Burney to be the Chinese name of Burma.¢ But Marco does not speak as if he had himself been in the country, and there is only one unmistakeably Burmese feature in his story. This is in the description of two towers in pyramid fashion which a cer- tain king caused to be built near his sepulchre ; “ upon the top, round about the balls” he says, “‘ many little gold and silver bells were hanged, which at the blow- ing of the wind give a certain sound.” The date of the expedition which Marco Polo relates is between A. D. 1272 and 1290. In 1444, Nicolo di Conti,{ a Venetian, returned from five and twenty years’ tra- velling in the Kast. He visited Racha (Aracan) on a river of the same name, and thence “after seventeen days passing desert hills, came into a champaign coun- try.” He must therefore have gone over the Aeng pass, or some other pass of the Aracan Yoma. He speaks of the river of Ava, as greater than the Ganges; the city of Ava, as fifteen miles in circuit, &c., the kingdom itself he calls Macin * Rémusat, Mémoire sur les Relations Politiques des Princes Chrétiens, &c. avec les Emperewrs Mongols, 1824, p. 154. + J. A. 8. B. IV. 400. Dr. Buchanan says that the Chinese of Yunan call the Burmese Law meen, As. Res, V. 223. In DuHalde’s Maps, a distinction is made between the kingdoms of Yaowa and Mien. f Ramusio, I. 340, The narrative is very imperfect, which is to be regretted, as it bears the stamp of honesty. A few additional particulars are given in Pur- chas, IL, 159, from another version of di Conti’s travels, E 26 The Remains at Pagan. [ No. 1. formed into pilasters such as we have spoken of supporting a regu- (Maha-chin doubtless, a name often applied in India to the little known Eastern kingdoms indiscriminately). He is the first traveller, I believe, who mentions the white elephant, and the name of Ava, which has not existed a century.* He speaks also of the Burmese fashion of tattooing the body, as common both with men and women. The latter do not now practise it, though among their Khyen neighbours it is almost confined to the women. Di Conti makes the singular statement that the people in their daily prayer said, “God in Trinity keep us in his Law.” This, which at first sight looks like fic- tion, is really an evidence of his veracity. He had doubtless heard of “the three precious ones,” the triad of Buddha, Dharma, and Sanga, the Buddha, the Law, and the Clergy; (see note by Rémusat in Pilgrimage of Fa-hian, Cal. 1848, p- 42).+ In 1496, Pegu was visited by Hieronymo da Santo Stephano, a Genoese, who is, I believe, the first Kuropean by whom Pegu is distinctly mentioned. He speaks of it as a great city ruled by a “ Gran Signore” who possessed 10,000 elephants. He was prevented from visitmg Ava by war between the two nations.{ About the same time or a little later, we find at Pegu another traveller, Lo- dovico Barthema of Bologna. He gives few interesting particulars, but mentions creat canes” (bamboos) “as large as a barrel,” and like all the travellers to these parts, speaks much of the rubies, the original locality of which they all assign to a city, or mountainous region called Capelan, beyond Ava. He also speaks of Pegu and Ava as at war.§ With the extension of Huropean discovery in the beginning of the 16th century, European traders and Portuguese adventurers began to haunt the coasts of Pegu. The first Portuguese traveller known to us is Ruy Nunez d’Acunha, who was sent thither by Alphonso d’ Albuquerque in 1511.|| * He is also the first traveller who mentions a strange, obscene, and barbarous custom, which is spoken of so repeatedly by all travellers during the next 200 years, that it seems impossible to doubt its having existed, though I believe there is not now the slightest trace of it; unless the practice be so, which some of the Burmese warriors are said to retain, of inserting a piece of metal under the flesh to make themselves invulnerable. Some old travellers ascribe to the Siamese and Shans as well as the Burmese, the custom alluded to, The prevalence of such a custom seems a strong corroboration of the idea expressed by Ritter (rd- kunde V.171,) that the Burmans have not long emerged from barbarism. There is a deep element of barbarism in the Burman character, but looking to Pagan and other evidences, it may be doubted whether their civilization, such as it is, was not fully greater eight centuries ago, than one century ago. The modified practice referred to above is witnessed to by Mr. Howard Malcom, who was al- lowed by one of the Christian converts at Ava to take several amulets of gold from under the skin of his arm. (I. 307.) + In the letter which the king of Ava wrote to the Governor General in 1830, His Majesty speaks of his “ observing the three objects of worship, namely, God, his precepts, and his attendant or priests,’ (Buddha, Dharma and Sanga.) t Ramusio Navigatiom et Viaggi, Venetia MDLXIII. I. p. 345. § Ditto Ditto, p. 165. || Purchas, II, 1681. 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 27 lar and bold cornice, and resting on a regular and varied series of The travels of Odoardo Barbosa to this coast about 1520 are given in Ramu- sio’s collection. He speaks of “ Verna” as a distinct kingdom from Ava, as many later travellers do. Apparently Toungoo is meant.* About the same time Antony Correa was sent by the Portuguese to negotiate a treaty with the King of Pegu.t} The celebrated Ferdinand Mendez Pinto was in these countries as a military adventurer in 1545, and professes to have been present at the sieges of Martaban and Prome. His relations are full of extravagant statements, and a great deal of his geography is probably absolute invention. Still it is evident that he was in the country. Among names still easily recognizable which he mentions, are Dalaa (Dalla near the coast of the Delta), Digon (Dagon, 7. e. Rangoon), the Province of Danaplu (Danobyu), Anseda (Henzada), and Meletay (Meaday). The last he correctly describes as a fortress twelve leagues up the river from Prome.t Many of the old maps depict a certain ‘‘ Lake of Chimay” somewhere in the far interior of the Indo-Chinese countries, whence issue all the great rivers of Eastern India. But Ferdinand Mendez is probably the only traveller who declares he had seen it. He gives it, however, a different name. During the constant wars that went on between Siam, Pegu, Toungoo, Ava, and Arracan, during this century, some Portuguese partisans appear generally to have been found on either side. Thus in 1544, when Martaban was besieged by “Parad, Mandara (as he is called by the Portuguese writers) || king of the Burmas” (i. e. of Toungoo),{] we find among his force some galleys manned by Portuguese under John Cayero, and five years later when the same prince invaded Siam and attacked the capital, he had with him 180 Portuguese under James Surez de Melo, whilst the king of Siam in his besieged city of Odio* had 50 Portuguese under James Pereyra.f Some years later when this conquering king of the Burmas had been murdered * Ramusio, p. 316. + Modern Universal History, VI. 162. t Elsewhere he speaks of the kingdom of Meletay, which other travellers have reproduced as a kingdom of Melntay. It is curious that Malanda is one of Ptolemy’s names for an inland city in this region. § Such a notion seems to have been generally diffused, probably from India with the Buddhist legends. Doubtless it originated in the fact of the rise of the Indus, the Sutlej, the Ganges, and the Tsanpoo within a space of little more than two square degrees from that great world-water-shed on which lake Mansarowar lies. || Probably Men-tara-gyee Phra, a common appellation of Burmese monarchs, "| According to the history consulted by Sangermano, the kingdom of Toungoo was founded by a Prince of Pagan in 1252. The conqueror, Paraé Mandara, whom Sangermano calls Mentrasvedi, was the thirtieth prince of the line. * Odia or Yuthia, the former capital of Siam, above Bankok. + History of the Discovery and Conquest of India by the Portuguese. London, 1695. IL. 134-8. E 2 28 The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1. basement mouldings which run ali round the building. by the “‘Shemin of Satan,” (Sitang or perhaps Thadung), and the latter contested the throne with a member of the old royal house of Pegu, whom the Portuguese call Shemindoo, he was killed before Pegu by the fortunate shot from the musket of Gonzalo Neto. But in 1552 a second prince of Toungoo again got possession of Pegu. This is the king called by the old writers Aleagar, or “ Brama king of Peeu,’* who extended his conquests over Ava, Mogoung, Jangomai (Zimmé), the west of Yunan, and other adjoining states, and the wealth and splendour of whose court made Pegu so famous in Europe as an empire of fabulous magnificence. Casper de Cruz, a Dominican, appears to have been to the East between 1550 and 1560. He speaks of the “ Brames” as “‘a great people, very rich of gold and precious stones; chiefly of rubies; a proud and valiant nation. The country very scarce of victuals. They wear their clothes painted or wrought. They are somewhat like the Chinas in their faces; they have very rich gallant shippings garnished with gold, in which they sail in the rivers; they use vessels of gold and of silver; their houses are of timber very well wrought. ‘The kingdom is very great. They have not commonly war with the Chinas, because of the great mountains that are between the one and the other, and because the Chinas are well fortified on that side,’ + &c. All which is very accurate. In 1557, Bomferrus a Dominican missionary returned from Pegu. He had spent three years in learning their language and mysteries, that he might preach among them, “ but was soon forced to give over and return into India; for they could not endure to hear any better knowledge than they had.”t This mission- ary appears to have given a tolerable account of Buddhism as it exists in these countries. In 1569, Ceesar Frederick, a Venetian merchant, was in Pegu, and gave a very interesting account of that country. That same “‘ Brama of Toungoo” was on the throne, who was said to have twenty and six crowned heads at his command, and to be able to bring into the field a million and a half of men of war!§ “ For people, dominions, gold and silver” Mr. Frederick hesitates not to say, “he far excels the power of the Great Turk, in treasure and strength.” These expressions seem utterly preposterous, when we see what Pegu and Bur- ma are in our day. All the old travellers use similar superlative terms in speak- * His name in Burmese history is Tshen-byu-mya-yen “ Lord of many white elephants.” He is the personage called by Pinto, “The Chaumigrem.” “ He was born on a Wednesday” says the chronicle, ‘‘ and on the day of his death the great Pagoda fell into ruins, an inundation covered the whole city, and a shower of rubies fell from heaven.” (Sangermano, p. 45.) + In Purchas, III. p. 169. t Purchas, V. p. 507. This Friar according to Sir Thomas Herbert, “ came home professing that he had rather with St, Anthony preach among pigs than among such a swinish generation.” Herbert's Travels, p. 359. § That is, more than twice the whole population of the British province of Pegu in 1856, 1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 29 These cornices and basements are, in almost all the buildings, ing of the Peguan monarchy at this time. Yet Frederick, and Fitch who fol- lowed him a few years later, are men who give a sober and true account of other matters, in which we still may compare their descriptions with facts as they are.* It may perhaps be remarked that only at the end of the last century the spectacles of Col. Symes appear to have shewn him in Burma a magnificent and civilised empire, including a population which he estimated at seventeen millions. Later experience has proved that the Colonel’s view of the magnificence and civilisation was as exaggerated as his estimate of the population. But making allowance for a similar tendency to the over-estimation of so dis- tant a region by the older travellers, in reading their narratives it is impossible to resist the conviction that the lower provinces at least of the Irawadee exhibited in the 16th century a much more flourishing and wealthy community than now exists in the delta, and we have, in the subsequent history of the country, the causes of a great deterioration. The splendour of the Peguan monarchy was very short-lived. In the time of the son of the conquering prince came a suc- cession of internal and external wars, during which the country was harassed and devastated, both by the cruelties of the savage king, and by invasions from Arracan, Siam, Toungoo and Ava, by all which Pegu was reduced to the depths of desolation and misery ; insomuch that Purchas, in a curious chapter “on the destruction and desolation of Pegu,’’+ collected from the writings of numerous eye-witnesses his contemporaries, thinks it appropriate to observe, that ‘‘ the natives of Pegu are not quite extinct, but many of them are fled into other king- doms.” Notices of the history of Pegu are defective during the greater part of the 17th century, and I do not know what further wars took place during that period, But towards the middle of the century following came its temporary re-assertion of independence and even of supremacy, and its rapidly succeeding subjection to the vengeance of Alompra. It is not surprising that Pegu should never have recovered from calamities so repeated and disastrous. History scarcely justifies the expectation that countries should recover, even in long periods of comparative repose, from such universal and thorough devastation. And the habits of the Burman races are not favourable to increase of population. A singularly small portion of their children live to maturity.t _* See for instance Frederick’s vivid and accurate account of the bore in the Sitang, (Purchas, 11. 1716,) which I have lately had the opportunity of com- paring with that of a good observer, Mr. T. Login. + V. p. 500. {1 have just read in the course of my ordinary duties a report by Mr. T. Login on a projected canal to the Sitang, from the Pegu river at a point below the ancient capital. He speaks incidentally of traces of extensive cultivation in tracts which now scarcely shew two souls to the square mile. The vast ruined pagoda of Mahkau, of which Mr. Login speaks in the same report, doubtless represents the site of the castle of Maccao, mentioned by the old travellers as 30 The Remains at Pagan. BNgrk. formed of the same succession of members, but it is only from the Returning from this digression, we find in 1583 Gasparo Balbi, a jeweller of Venice, visiting Pegu with a stock of emeralds. As with all the travellers about this period, his ship made a port in the river of Bassein or one of its channels, called by them Cosmi or Cosmin,* which seems at that time, distant as it was from the capital, to have been the principal port of Pegu. In entering the Bassein river his description of the gilded beacon temple of Modaen on Pagoda point, and of the swarms of flies attracted by the ngapee manufacture at Negrais, are pleasant to read in their graphic truth, after three centuries nearly have past. From Cosmin the travellers appear to have taken a route through the rami- fied channels of the lower Delta, and Balbi mentions several great and fair cities by the way.t In seven days they reached Dalla (near the mouth of the Rangoon river,) and next day the “ citie of Dogon” (Rangoon,) where he describes the great Pagoda, &c., in a manner still very recognizable, Mr. Ralph Fitch, merchant of London, is the first Englishman who has given an account of a visit to Pegu. He follows the same route as the last traveller, by Cosmin to Dalla, Sirian and Pegu. Fitch’s account of the capital appears to be borrowed to some extent from that of his predecessor Frederick, which I have partly extracted in illustration of my description of Amarapoora.{ From Pegu he extended his travels to **Tamahey which is in the country of the Langeiannes whom we call Iangomes ; it is five and twenty days’ journey north-east from Pegu.” ‘This Iamahey or Jamahey is undoubtedly the Shan town of Zimmé, which has been very rarely reached by any European traveller in modern times. Fitch describes it as “a the place where goods for the royal city were discharged ; and where the king had his gardens and his boat-races. During the three years that have elapsed since the war that terminated in the annexation of Pegu, in some of the districts which, directly or indirectly suffered most, such as Padaung and Mendoon (West and North-west of Prome) scarcely any favourable reaction has taken place. The writer had an epportunity of seeing the state of the former small district between the Arracan hills and the Irawadee, once covered with beautiful and thriving towns and villages, in travelling from the Arracan coast to Prome in March 1853, just as the war was closing. And one may conceive how deadly and enduring would be the results of war, repeated year after year in such a country, by various hosts of barbarians. Such, all these races eminently are in war, whatever they may be in peace. * T had always supposed from the narratives that Cosmin must have been Bassein itself. But in Wood’s map (1795), the last which gives the name, Cosmin is placed on another channel, to the eastward of the main Bassein river. + Frederick states that at all the villages on this route “ hennes, pigeons, eggs, milke, rice, and other things be very good and cheape ;” a very different state of things from the present, when our hungry surveyors complain that they can get neither “ Hennes” nor eggs, let alone “ other things” for love or money. { See Major Phayre’s Mission to Ava page 160, (unpublished.) 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 31 study and comparison of the remains of the unrepaired and unbar- very faire and great Towne with faire houses of stone,’ which is remarkable, if true. From the accounts of all the travellers of this period we derive the impression of a thriving trade in the ports of Pegu. Martaban, we are told by Frederick and Fitch, was frequented by many ships from Malacca, Sirian by ships from Mecca (Mocha probably) and Achen, Cosmin by ships from Bengal, St. Thomé (Madras) and Masulipatam. Fitch was at Pegu in the end of 1586, and the kingdom seems still to have stood in its glory.* But only eleven years later, in 1598, Nicholas Pimenta, Visitor of the Jesuits in India, relates the destruction of the Peguan monarchy, and the miserable state of the country, as reported to him by ships which arrived at St. Thomé when he was organizing a Mission for Pegu. In March 1600, Boves, another Jesuit, writes that he was in the country when the king besieged by the kings of Arracan and Toungoo surrendered, and was put to death. “It is a lamentable spectacle,” says the Padre, “to see the banks of the rivers, set with infinite fruit-bearing trees, now overwhelmed with ruins of gilded temples and noble edifices; the ways and fields full of sculls and bones of wretched Peguans, killed or famished, and cast into the river in such numbers that the multitude of carcases prohibiteth the way and passage of any ships ; to omit the burnings and massacres committed by this, the cruellest tyrant that ever breathed.’ + After his victory, the king of Arracan made over the port of Syrian to Philip de Brito, a Portuguese partisan leader.{ De Brito, however, quarrelled with the king of Arracan, and went to Goa to obtain the support of the Viceroy. During his absence his followers proclaimed him king of Pegu. He continued to carry things with a high hand for some years, capturing the son of his former patron the king of Arracan, for whom he demanded a ransom of 50,000 crowns ;§ and sometime afterwards he treacherously seized the person dnd treasure of the king of Toungoo,|| with whom he had made alliance. In 1610 a traveller says of de Brito ; “ He yet also domineereth and careth for nobodie.”4 He had married his son Simon to a daughter of the king of Martaban,* which province had appa- * Purchas, Vol. II. + Boves in Purchas, IT. 1748. t Do. Do. § Hist. of Dise. and Cong. of India by the Portuguese, III. 138 etc. and Pur- chas, V. p. 514. || Hence called by the Burmese Kala-ya-men, “The king whom the Kalis seized.” Col. Burney in J. A. S. B. IV. 404. aod Relations of strange ocewrrents by Peter Williamson Floris; in Purchas, I. * Hist. of Discov. and Conq. as above. 32 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1. barized temples that their full intention and true character can be rently risen again to brief independence during the anarchy which succeeded the fall of the Peguan monarchy. In 16138, however, the king of Ava appeared on the field, and with a large army besieged de Brito in Sirian, where the Portuguese leader made a desperate defence. The king of Arracan, whom he had so grievously offended, sent 50 vessels to his assistance, but they were captured by the Burmans. At last de Brito was betrayed and carried to the king, who caused him to be “ spitted,” or impaled, and set up on an eminence overlooking the Fort. In such misery he continued to live for two days. His wife Donna Luisa de Saldanha was sent to Ava with the other captives.* The dominance of Ava over the lower provinces dates from this time. The king after having been crowned at Pegu, sent his brother to master the southern states. He soon conquered Tavoy, and proceeded to besiege Tennas- serim. Here Christopher Rebello, an outlaw from Cochin, with 40 Portuguese and 70 slaves, in four galliots, attacked and routed the Burmese flotilla of 500 vessels.} . A short time afterwards the king of Ava, fearmg the vengeance of the Portu- guese, should they unite with his rivals of Arracan and Siam, sent ambassadors (to Goa apparently) to the Portuguese Viceroy, to apologise for the killing of de Brito, and offering to join in an attack on Arracan. The Viceroy agreed, and sent an envoy in turn, but he was treated with true Burman nonchalance, and nothing resulted.{ Though Mr. Fitch, and possibly other wandering English merchants, had visited Pegu in the preceding century, no English convoy had at that time come to the Indian seas for trade. The East India Company was first established in 1599, when Pegu was in the depths of its desolation. Hence, though our trade had spread far to the eastward, no attempt at intercourse with the Irawadee. delta had taken place up to 1618. Curiously enough, the first intercourse originated from the east- ward. A year or two before the period named, the English factor at Siam, Lucas Anthonison by name, sent one Thomas Samuel to Zengomay (Zimmé),§ to inquire into the prospects of trade there. Zimmé had been subject to the great king of Pegu, but during the misfortunes of that monarchy in his son’s time, had been taken by the Siamese. The king of Ava, whose power had risen, as we have seen, on the fall of Pegu, and who was extending his conquests over most of the pro- vinces that had been subject to the latter, obtained possession of Zimmé whilst Samuel was there, and carried him, with other foreigners, to Pegu. There he died, and his property was seized by the king. * Hist. of Disc. as above, III. 191. See also Modern Universal Histy. (1781,) vol. VI. p. 202; and Purchas, V. 502 and 514, + Hist. of Disc. as above, III, p. 197. t Hist. of Disc. &e. p. 255. § Called by the Siamese Chang-mai, TEMPLE caiteo SENPHYOKOO at PAGAN. Photographed from a Drawing by CAPTAIN H. YULE. Lathegraphad by XIE. Seath 1857. ] The Remains at Pagan. 33 made out.* Every main cornice, for instance, is crowned with a sort of battle- The relator, William Methold, in the supplement to Purchas’s Pilgrims, calls the monarch king of Pegu, and at Pegu he appears to have held his court. But he was in fact properly the king of Ava. News was brought of Samuel’s death to Masulipatam where Lucas Anthonison happened now to be factor for the Company. He took the opportunity of send- ing two agents carrying a letter and present for the king, professedly to apply for the restoration of Samuel’s effects, but also with a small adventure to make trial of | the trade. The agents were unfaithful. They misappropriated the proceeds of the trade, and wrote most discouraging accounts of their treatment. But they were sent back in April 1619, with most of Samuel’s property, as well as a present from the king and a letter inviting trade.* The history at this period is very obscure, but it would appear that soon after the time mentioned, British intercourse with the Burman countries became more free than it ever was again up to the annexation of Pegu. Dalrymple ascertained from old documents at Fort St. George, that the English had settlements} at Prome and Ava, as well as at Sirian, and even at a place on the borders of China, which he conjectures to have been Bamd. The Dutch, who had a considerable trade with Burma, likewise possessed factories in the Upper Provinces, and are said to have been at this time in occupation of Negrais. On some dispute with the Burmese Government, the Dutch threatened, or attempted, to invite the interference of the Chinese. On this, both Dutch and English were ejected. In 1658 or 1659, when a Chinese force invaded Burma, and attacked the capital, the guns on the ramparts of Ava are said to have been served by a party of native Christians under a foreigner named Methari Kdtan, a name which Col. Burney happily suggests to be intended for “ Mr, Cotton.”§ * A small but beautiful example of the Pagan architecture in its typical form is the Sembyo-Ku or “ Cave of the white Elephant,” * Methold in Purchas, V. 1006. + He says at the beginning of the 17th century. But it could not have been earlier than the circumstances mentioned by Methold. _f Thisis Dalrymple’s account. I find, however, in Valentyn’s great ‘ Beschry- ving van Oost Indien,” or Description of the Dutch East Indies, (Dordrecht and Amsterdam 1726) vol. V. pt. II. p. 126, that the Dutch had a factory at Sirian from about 1631 till 1677, with subordinate factories at Ava and other places, The Dutch Government of Coromandel sent several embassies to Ava also. Valentyn ascribes the breaking up of the trade to the constant wars that were going on in those regions. § J. A. 8. B. VI, 126. 34. The Remains at Pagéin. [No. 1. mented parapet assuming in the repaired buildings a coarse incon- gruous appearance in rude plaster-work. In the temples which The trade seems to have revived towards the end of the century. In 1680 and 1684, the Company’s agents had made unsuccessful attempts to re-establish factories in Burma or Pegu. In 1686-7 their attention was turned to Negrais ; a survey was made of the island, and it was taken nominal possession of. In 1695, Nathaniel Higginson, governor of Fort St. George, sent Mr. Edward Fleetwood and Captain James Lesly as envoys to the court of Ava. Their objects were to obtain the settlement of a factory at Sirian, the release of English captives, and of a sloop belonging to one Bartholomew Rodriguez, which had been confiscated, and the restoration of the effects of one Adrian Tilbury, a merchant of Fort St. George, who had died at Martaban. They carried presents to the amount of about 1000 pagodas, and a letter from Governor Higginson, written in a very humble style. The presents were a regular mercantile speculation. The envoys were to try to get as much as possible in return, “ asking for more” if they found it feasible, and were them- selves to get ten per cent. on the proceeds as an incitement to do their best.* Mr. Fleetwood does not appear to have been a gentleman likely either to impress the Burmese court with an exalted impression of his country, or to bring back with him any interesting particulars of theirs. He seemed to think he had made a great coup in providing himself with a letter of introduction to the king’s mistress. The mission had as little success as it deserved under such auspices, but the re-establishment of the factory at Sirian was conceded. Two years later (1697) Mr. Bowyear was sent as chief of the factory at Sirian, and with a mission to the court similar in its objects to Fleetwood’s. It appears from the instruc- tions that the retwn-presents made to Fleetwood’s mission had been profitable to Mr. Higginson, and he was not indisposed to repeat the speculation. But he honourably adds ; “If the returns of the present shall stand in competition with, or hinder, the restoring of Bartholomew Rodriguez his cargo, I had rather forego the receiving of any returns for the present, than hinder the restoration of the cargo.” No record of Bowyear’s mission has been found, and it is pro- bable that he did not proceed to Ava, as the king died just after his arrival in the country.t In 1709, a Mr. Richard Alison or Allanson was sent as envoy to Ava. No account of his mission has ever been printed. It appears from Hamilton’s ‘ New account of the East Indies’{ that this gentleman was twice deputed to the court of Ava. But the date of his other mission is unknown. From this point I shall * Higginson’s Instructions to Fleetwood. In Dalrymple’s Oriental Repertory, II. p. 337 et seq. + Bayfield ; see below. t{ Edinburgh, 1727, Vol. II. 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 35 remain in their original state, such as Sudha Muni (of which I have unfortunately no drawings,) and Sembyo-ké we find these content myself mainly with a brief note of events, as the remaining history of British intercourse with Burma has been fully related in a very able and inter- esting paper by Dr. Bayfield, which is printed in the appendix to Pemberton’s Report on the Eastern Frontier.* The agent of the Company at Sirian, Mr. Smart, appears to have acted with duplicity during the contests of the Burmese and Peguans for the possession of Pegu, which ended in the temporary supremacy of the latter. In 1743, the factory was burnt by them, and the establishment was withdrawn. In 1752, the king of Tavoy, then for a short time independent, invited an establishment. But his terms were unreasonable, and no movement was made to act on his offer. In 1753, a factory was established on Negrais, which was in fact taken pos- session of in the Company’s name. In 1755, we find a factory under Captain Baker existing at Negrais, during the continued contests between Peguans and Burmese, the latter being again in the ascendant. ‘The chief at Negrais urged on his Government that we should take a decided part with the Burmans. But, about the same time, some English ships at Dagon (Rangoon) took part with the Peguans. In July of this year, Captain Baker and Lieut. North (who died at Pagén on the way up) were sent by the resident at Negrais on an embassy to Alompra at Mout-sho-bo. The usurper laughed at the idea of assistance from the English, and the mission had no result. Captain Baker took observations on his way, and made a map of the river, which is given by Dalrymple. In 1751, Dupleix the Governor General of French India had sent an ambas- sador to the king of Pegu, and obtained the concession of a factory at Sirian. But in 1756, the Government at Pondicherry, contrary to an engagement of neu- trality into which the factory had entered with Alompra, having sent succours to the Peguans, and these having fallen into the hands of the conqueror, he mas- sacred the officers, and carried the rest of the French as prisoners to Ava.t From these prisoners some of the Burman Christians of the Dibayen district are said to be descended. * “ Historical Review of the Political relations between the British Govern- ment in India and the Empire of Ava, from the earliest date on record to the present year; compiled by G. T. Bayfield, acting assistant to the Resident in Ava, and revised by Lt.-Col. Burney. Ava, 15th December, 1834.” For the facts of the remaining history, I have made free use of this Review. The original authorities are, for the times of Alompra, Dalrymple’s Oriental Repertory ; for Symes’s first Mission and Crawfurd’s, their published narratives ; for the other Missions, the original papers in the records of the Indian Govern- ment. Where I have used other authorities they are referred to. t Sonnerat, Voyage aux Indes Orientales. Paris 1806, III. 5. EF 2 36 The Remaims at Pagan. [| No. 1. battlements to be but the settings of embossed and glazed, and sometimes also richly coloured, tiles, which in fact must have In 1757, Alompra addressed a letter to the king of England, written on gold adorned with rubies, which he delivered to a Mr. Dyer and others who visited him at Rangoon. In June of the same year Lieut. Newton, who was in charge of Negrais, deputed Ensign Lister to go to the king with the pompous title of ambassador extraordi- nary. He overtook Alompra on the river going up from Rangoon, and by dint of some considerable bribery obtained the king’s signature to a treaty conceding in perpetuity Negrais, and ground for a factory at Bassein, with freedom of trade, in return for a pledge of military assistance fom the Company against the king’s enemies. This treaty had never any practical effect. 1759. The greater part of the establishment at Negrais was withdrawn. And on the 6th October in that year the whole of the remaining Europeans, with many natives, were treacherously massacred by the Burmese. The king was said to have suspected that the factory had been in communication with his enemies the Peguans.* In 1760, Captain Alves was sent’ with letters and presents from Holwell, Governor of Fort William, and Pigot, Governor of Madras, to demand satisfac- tion for the massacre, and liberty for the prisoners. Alompra had died on his Siamese expedition a few months before Captain Alves’s arrival at Ava. He found the city in rebellion, and the new king besieging it. He was plundered and other- wise shamelessly treated. The prisoners were released, but the idea of satisfaction was scouted, and Ensign Lister’s treaty was ignored. The factory at Bassein was never re-established, but one appears to have been kept up at Rangoon at least till 1782. In 1769, the French East India Company sent an envoy to the court of Alom- pra’s son Senphyoo-yen,} with the view of re-establishing their trade. ‘They. obtained from the king the grant of a factory and other privileges, but these con- cessions were never acted on. 1794. The Burmese, who had conquered Aracan in 1783 began to make inso- * On the shore of the mainland, close to the north of Negrais is now being laid out the new Port of Dalhousie. ‘The whirligig of Time has brought about its revenges. The kingdom of Pegu, which the rough hunter conquered, has past from his house to the hands of that power whose servants he treacherously slew; and the city that will rise on the site of his crime will borrow a name from the woody dells of Esk.” Blackwood’s Magazine, May 1856. + Called by Sonnerat ‘‘ Zekin-médou,” the Shembuan of Symes. t Sonnerat, as above, p. 8. This author, whose voyages took place between 1774 and 1781, has a dissertation on the advantages of taking possession of Pegu, for which he calculates that 1000 or 1200 Europeans would suffice, as the Peguans would join them. He commences, prophetically ; “‘ 11 est certain que les Anglais chercheront un jour 4 s’emparer du Pegu.” III. p. 60. 1857. ] The Remains at Pagin. 37 formed a briliant ‘‘ polychromatic” (to use the slang of the day) coronet to each successive terrace of the temple. lent and threatening demonstrations on the Chittagong frontier; and it was known that the French were directing their attention to Burma as a good fulcrum for attack or intrigue against British India. For these and other reasons, the Governor General (Sir J. Shore) deputed an embassy to Ava under Captain Michael Symes of His Majesty’s 74th Regiment. It cannot be said that this mission was treated with much respect, or advanced the estimation of the British power among the Burmans. Captain Symes was treated as the envoy of an inferior power, and was undoubtedly himself imposed on by Burmese pretensions. The whole colouring of his narrative tends to leave a very exaggerated impression of the civilisation and magnificence of the Burmese empire. In 1796, in accordance with the permission conceded in the document given to Captain Symes, Captain Hiram Cox was sent to act as resident at Rangoon on the part of the Government of India. He had charge of some articles which the king had commissioned through Symes. But he was not to proceed to court, unless summoned. He was summoned, and reached Amarapoora in January 1797. There, or in its neighbourhood, he remained during nine weary months, bearing with singular patience every kind of slight, indignity, and imposition, the history of which it is quite painful to read. In October he returned to Rangoon, and in February he was recalled by the Government, who (misled perhaps by the impression that Symes had given) intimated their opinion that the conduct of the court must have indicated personal dissatisfaction with Captain Cox. And the king and his min- isters were addressed, notifying Cox’s recall and offering to appoint another gentle- man in whom the Vice-president had the greatest confidence, should His Majesty desire it. Captain Cox’s private journal was published in 1821, some years after his death. Several insolent communications were in the following years received from the Viceroy of Rangoon, and the Governor of Aracan, and in 1802, Captain, now Colonel, Symes was sent again by Lord Wellesley. His mission was attended by an escort of 100 sepoys, and equipped in a style charac- teristic of the Governor General. He was to seek a treaty of alliance, the cessation of extortionate exactions on trade, the establishment of a resident at court and of a consul at Rangoon, and to claim Negrais or compensating commercial advan- tages. The mission was a total failure. The envoy was treated for three months with the most mortifying neglect and deliberate insult, and at last quitted without an audience of leave. It is not to be wondered at, that the Colonel published no narrative of his second mission. 38 The Remains at Pagin. [No. 1. In the basement mouldings, as truly seen in the older buildings, the upper limb is an ogee carved in bold foliation of truly classical character (see Pl. IV. Fig. 17.) This, in the restorations and beautifications, even of such build- ings as the Ananda, has been, by the coarse and tasteless percep- tions of the modern architects, degraded into an idiotic and mis- placed repetition of the battlemented crown of the cornice. The basement again always centres in a sort of entablature or In May 1803, the apprehension of French intrigue in Burma again induced the Government to send Lieut. Canning as agent to Rangoon. But in consequence of the insolent violence of the Ye-woon, who was in charge of the government there, and insisted on opening all letters, Lieut, Canning judged it best to return in November. In 1804, an outrage was perpetrated on a British ship from Penang, which put into Bassein for wood and water. No notice was taken of this. 1809. Capt. Canning was despatched as agent to Rangoon, with a special view of explaining to the Burmese the nature of our blockade-system, which was then enforced on the French isles, to protect British interests, and to watch the pro- gress of the French in Burma. He proceeded to Amarapoora at the king’s desire. He met with much better treatment than either of the two last missions to the court, and the explanation, which was the main object of his mission, was effected. But he did not leave without receiving from the Woongyees two most impertinent letters to the Gover- nor General. 1811. This year commenced those disturbed relations on the Aracan frontier, which eventually led to the war of 1824. A native of Aracan called King Ber- ring, or Khyen-bran, embodied a number of followers within our territory, and invaded Aracan, In September Capt. Canning was sent to give explanations on this matter, and to complain of the conduct of the Governor of Rangoon towards British trade. Whilst he was still at Rangoon a gross violation of our territory was committed by the Governor of Aracan. Additional instructions were sent to Canning to complain of this and to demand the withdrawal of the Burmese troops from the frontier. In consequence of a repetition of the offence he was recalled, whilst repeated orders came from Amarapoora to send him to court, by force if necessary. He despatched the presents, but returned to Bengal in August. This was the last Mission up to the breaking out of war in 1824, It is not neces- sary to follow here the repeated and complicated encroachments and provocations which led to that event. War was declared on the 5th March, 1824, and the peace of Yandabo was signed on the 24th February, 1826, FRAGMENTS oF ARCHITECTURAL DETAIL IN THE REMAIME AT PASANM Proms Shilches kyT Olihars Foy: anal Capt: H Yale Bengal Engineers VS Fisyeree LACKO,A erck 100 roby are dann te Scale DETAILS of ARCHITECTURE at PAGAN Photographed from a Drawing by CAPTAIN H. YULE. beg 5 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 39 dado set with alternate recessed pannels and projecting blocks (PL IV. Figs. 11, 13.) The true meaning of these has fortunately been preserved in Ananda as well as in some of the more shattered buildings. In these the pannels are occupied by tiles moulded in relief. In the Ananda the tiles represent a variety of somewhat rude groups of figures and animals with alphabetic characters over them. In other smaller buildings we have seen them glazed and artis- tically embossed, representing a variety of ornamental figures, some- times the Greek honeysuckle (Fig. 6), prancing horses, pelicans, &c.In the Sudha Muni these impannelled tiles were, like those of the battlements, coloured in enamel. Most of the shafts as well as bases and capitals of pilasters, the cusped arches, flamboyant spires of the door and window cano- pies, &c., and often too the cornice and basement mouldings, appear to have been originally sculptured (in the stucco) with great richness of effect.* And often this effect, in foliage and other ornamentation, is produced by very slight indications and incisions in the plastered surface. These incisions have been made with such instinctive art, and suggestive skill, that, viewed at a little distance, the most elaborate modelling could scarcely have produced the desired effect more completely. All this disappears before the ruthless hand of the restorer, and is replaced by a rude plastered surface scratched without taste, art or result. The old work, rough as it is sometimes, is the bold rough sketch of an accomplished artist. The work of the repairer, compared with it, is like a school-boy’s chalkings on the wall. I may now venture to point out a few analogies bearing on the origin of this remarkable architecture. ’ My attention has not previously been turned to ancient Hindu architecture, and over a great part of this Presidency there are scarcely any remains affording opportunity to become acquainted * See examples of this stucco-work in Pl. IV. Figs. 14, 15 and 16, for which Iam indebted to the kind help of Mr. Oldham. Capt. Tripe’s illness on our second short visit to Pagan unfortunately prevented the photographic illustration of these and other details. 40 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1. with it. But the result of the search that I have been able to make in the Library of the Asiatic Society, since my return from Burma, will perhaps establish the fact that nearly the whole of the details are of Indian origin. I have noticed the resemblance of the spire of these Pagan temples to the common Hindu shiwala, But its absolute idenity with a more ancient form of Hindu temple will be seen by a comparison of the spire of the Ananda (Pl. I.) with the ancient Indian “ Vimana”’ as given by Mr. Fergusson. The most universal and characteristic feature in the Pagan architecture is perhaps the pediment, or canopy, of flamboyant spires over the doors and windows. Compare Figs. 8 and 10 of Pl. V. copied from Ram Raz’s Essay on the Architecture of southern India, with the window of Dhamayangyi at Pagan as shewn in Pl. IV. Fig. 4, and it will be impossible, I think, to doubt that this feature was derived from India. The resemblance is still closer in the doorway of the great temple of Dambil in Ceylon, as given in Sir J. HE. Tennent’s book on Christianity in that island. I have not been able to find any good views of the Ceylonese remains, otherwise I doubt not that the closest type of the Burmese architecture would be traced in these. Compare again the horned and grinning heads which oceur so con- stantly at Pagan in the ornamentation of pilasters, as in Figs. 8, 9 and 14, of Pl. IV. with heads of a similar character over the doorways in Ram Raz’s examples just referred to. If there is any doubt as to the identical origin of these it must disappear when we find at Pagan such a head (Pl. 1V. Fig. 7.) occupying exactly the same position as in the Indian doorway, and surrounded by the same flame-like spires in both cases. This Gorgon-head, as Raffles calls it, in nearly all the ancient Javanese temples, occupies the same position over the doorways. It is there usually on an exaggerated scale; but it assumes its most monstrous form in the “ Tiger-cave”’ of Cuttack, where a colossal tusked and grinning head envelopes the whole entrance. (See Journ. As. Soc. of Bengal, 1847.) This Gorgon-head, as well as the cusped arch and indications of the flamboyant points, are seen in a plate, by the late Major Kittoe, 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 41. of a niche at Badeswur containing an image of Parbati. (J. A. S. B, vol. VIIT. p. 384.) Take again the monstrous trunked and toothed creatures, disgorging scroll-work, over the pilasters of the Dhamayangyi window just referred to, and set them by the Indian monsters in almost similar position, as shewn in Figs. 1, 38 and 8, in the Plate of Analogies. Who can doubt that the one is derived directly from the other ? Look at the festoon ornament of beads and tassels pendant from the mouths of monstrous grinning heads, as seen in the Gaudapalen (Pl. LV. Fig. 9,) and in the Sembyo-ké. It is one of those details which at first sight were strongly suggestive of European origin. But it is absolutely identical with the adorn- ments of a pillar in a temple on the Madras coast given by Col. Mackenzie in his collections. Similar ornament is seen in the Assam remains described in a late number of the Asiatic Society’s Journal, on a pillar at Barolli in Rajpootana given by Fergusson from Todd’s Rajasthan; and on a pillar at Jajeepoor in Cuttack, figured by Major Kittoe in the Journ. As. Soc. Ben. Vol. VII. p. 54; as well as in two sculptured pillars found in the sands of the Ganges near Pubna, which now stand at the door of the Asiatic Society's Museum in Calcutta. A modified rendering of the same, Mr. Oldham tells me, he found on some of the fragments at Benares College which are said to have been brought from the ancient Buddhist Pagoda of Sarnath near that city, and very lately on a sculptured stone which he lghted on among the forests of the Nurbudda valley. Remark those curious little peaks or acroteria which terminate so many of the flat projecting mouldings in all the Pagan temples: (e. g. see ict V. Hios! 9, 10, 11, 12, 18 and 17.) It is a feature found all over India. It is given by Mr. Fergusson as one of the characteristics in his generalized drawing of a Mantdépa, or vesti- bule of an ancient Hindu temple; it appears in Lieut. Maisey’s drawings of Kalinjar; it is seen in pillars represented by Col. Mackenzie; and the closest resemblance, not only in this feature but in the manner of its application, will be seen at a glance on comparing the gate of Bhubaneswar in Orissa as given by G 42 The Remains at Pagan. [No.w1. Mr. Fergusson, with that very common form of doorway at Pagan, of which an elevation is shewn in Pl. IV. Fig. 10. The’ same feature is seen in the Assam column figured by Capt. Dalton, and is found on a large scale in the temples of Java (see Raffles, vol. IT.) The remaining figures in the plate of analogies have been brought together for the sake of less defined resemblances of character. Enough, however, has been made out, I think, to shew that all, or nearly all the details of work at Pagdn must have had an Indian origin, But this is far from removing the perplexity connected with the origin of these buildings. Grant that all details were borrowed from India. But where shall we find in India any model of the composition ? where anything approaching the classical beauty of the Sem-byo-ki, or the stupendous architectural majesty of the Thapinyu and the Ananda ?* The Burman, rejecting indeed, in the pride of his philosophy, the idea of an Eternal Divinity, but recognizing the eternal sanc- tities of nature and conscience, has reared nobler fanes and far more worthy to become the temples of the true God than the Hindu with his deities so numerous and impure. I have said above, that nearly all the details at Pagan must have had an Indian origin. But this does not apply to construction, The arches and vaults, which are such marked features in the Pagan temples, are quite unknown to ancient Hindu architecture. “ As far as my own knowledge and researches go,” says Mr. Fergusson, ‘‘T am certain that I have never been able to detect any trace of an arch in any ancient (Indian) building.” (Ancient Archit. of Hindoostan, p. 12.) Having no more to say on the general subject of this architecture, I have still to offer a few notices of remarkable temples not yet described in this Report. * Perhaps the nearest analogy in general form is to be founded in the rock-cut Raths (as they are called) of Mahabalipuram near Sadras. There is also something, suggestive of the Pagan style in the general arrange- ment of the great Javanese temples described by Raffles, (including the pecu- liarity of the cruciform plan,) as well as in some of the details which I have already noticed. 1857. | The Remains at Pagdn. 43 About three quarters of a mile south-east of the ancient city is the great temple of Dhamayangyi. This temple which dates from the reign of Kalé-Kya4 Men (“The king dethroned by foreigners’’)* about A. D. 1152, in its general arrangement resembles the Ananda more closely than any other, and covers about the same area, though the greater bulk of the vestibules, and greater height of the main walls of the building, must have rendered it, when perfect, even more imposing. Views of some of the architectural details of Dhamayangyf are given in Pl. IV. Figs. 7 and 8. The upper part of the temple is all in sad decay, and the six terraces and crowning spire have well nigh become a shapeless pyramid of brick rubbish. The lower story, however, is in good general preservation ; and, as it is nearly stript of its plaster, it affords a good opportunity of examining the admirable workmanship of these buildings, of which I have already spoken. Where the plaster-work remains, it shews a boldness and richness superior to anything in the more perfect temples. For the usual horn-like wing of the door pediments is here generally substituted a monstrous animal disgorging upcurving scrolls from his gaping jaws (see Pl. 1V. Fig. 6.) Here too are seen in perfection those perplexing pilasters with their quasi-Roman mouldings (Figs. 6 and 7); and here, to my delight, I discovered a perfect flat brick- arch over’a window.f There were two of these in each wing of the temple, and one of them in particular was as perfect in con- struction, in joints and radiation, as any London builder could turn * Col. Forbes (Eleven years in Ceylon) quotes the allusion in Crawfurd’s Narrative to this dethroned founder of the temple, as remarkably confirmatory of a passage in Turnour’s Epitome of the Singhalese chronology. This passage states that “ the king of Cambodia and Avramana” having inflict- ed many outrages and insults on Singhalese subjects and ambassadors, the king Praa-krama-bahoo, who came to the throne A. D. 1153, sailed with a great ar- mament, landed in Arvramana, vanquished the enemy, and obtained full satis- faction. Turnour says that Arramana “comprises probably the provinces between Arracan and Siam.” It may perhaps be referred to Mramma, the true form I believe of Burma. + See this arch in Pl. IV. Fig. 3. 44 The Remains at Pagén. [No. 1. out. No suggestion of European or Indian aid would help here. At least I doubt if m the 12th century the flat brick-arch was known in Hurope,* .and I know that in the 19th it is one of the most difficult things to get done decently in India. In one of the other buildings, Mr. Oldham told me that he saw not only a flat arch, (not, however, correctly radiated,) but also a segmental dis- charging arch over it. The interior of Dhamayangyi contains but one accessible corri- dor. All the openings leading further inward have been built up, for some unknown reason. I did not succeed in finding the stairs leading to the roof. Major Phayre was more fortunate: his opi- nion is that this temple never was finished or plastered in the upper part. I think there are good reasons on the other side, but the question is perhaps not worth arguing. The arch of the western main entrance, and ovale the others, have the edges of the intrados entirely composed of roughly dressed stone voussoirs, regularly arranged as headers and stretchers.f In the corner of the building and in the minor arches, stones are introduced occasionally as binders.t This has been noticed by Mr. Crawfurd, as well as the inscribed stones which are found in the northern and western vestibules. In the latter, opposite the entrance, is a remarkable group of sitting figures. § The Dhamayangyi is encompassed by a high brick-wall of some 250 yards square. This wall is built with as much care and skill, and with almost as elaborate mouldings, as the edifice which it encloses, and consequently it remains very perfect. More beautiful brick-work could scarcely be seen anywhere. The gates in the centre of each side are, however, dilapidated. Half a mile or more eastward of the Dhamayangyi is another remarkable temple called the Sudah Mfwnt. In construction it * The only flat stone-arches that I recollect to have seen in medieval buildings are in the side-aisles of Roslin Chapel, in the chimney-piece of the great hall in Glammis castle, and in the magnificent Saracen gateway of Cairo called Bab- el-Fitoor. t, See, Pl; TY Bigud: t. Do: Fig, :2; § Given well in Capt. Tripe’s Photograph (No. ) 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 45 resembles the Thapinyu, but is smaller, and has never been repaired in later times. The brick-work of the upper part is much dilapi- dated, as much so nearly as that of Dhamayangyi. But that this temple was finished there can be no doubt. The plaster on the walls of a staircase leading to the upper-terraces, at the height of a man’s shoulder, was rubbed and polished, as if by the passage of multitudes during ages of occupancy. Major Phayre did not visit this temple, and I have not Nastia to what date it is attributed. No one of the remaining structures gives so vivid an idea of what these buildings must have been in the brilliancy of their original condition. The plaster-work of the pilasters and mouldings which remains is of a highly florid and artistic character; the battlemented crown of the parapet is set with large tiles embossed and enamelled in colours; the dado of the basement with smaller tiles in the form of diamonds, ro- settes, and other ornamental patterns ; and in the flamboyant rays and spires of the pediments even up to the highest remaining ter- races the tips were composed of pointed glazed white tiles, which must once have given an extraordinary lustre and sparkling effect to the elevation, a good deal of which is perceptible even in the present decay. The ground-plan is a single corridor, the vaults and walls of which have been originally covered with tasteful diaper painting in bright colours. This remains visible on the soffit of the arching, but the walls have been white-washed over, and repainted in an inferior style with life-size saints and Buddhas, and with a smaller series of the Jats or pre-existences of Gautama. The plan of the upper story is rather more complicated than usual. There is a principal image chamber, with a well-lighted corridor running all round it, but this inner chamber has not been placed, as in the Thapinyu, centrically under the spire. An enclosure wall surrounds the temple, equally remarkable with that of Dhamayangyi for the beautiful finish of the brickwork. To the north of this there is a second court, surrounded on three sides by a curious range of vaulted and now dilapidated cells. We could not ascertain the object of these, whether for the residence of the religious order, or for the accommodation of worshippers 46 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1, from a distance, or merely for the deposit of images of Gautama. No traces at least of the latter remained. At one side there was a small house-like building, apparently once two-storied, which may have been the residence of the Poongyee, or Prior, if this was in- deed a conventual establishment, as it most probably was. There was also a small tank surrounded by brick steps. The whole of this court appeared to be of later date than the temple enclosure, and of inferior workmanship. The Shwé Ké or ‘Golden Cave,’ which an inscription, of which Mr. Crawfurd has given a translation by Dr. Judson, assigns to about the year 1552, is a very elegant and elaborately white build- ing of no great size, and stands on an elevated terrace, within the. city walls and near the Thapinyu. It is of the same general plan and church-like appearance as the Gaudapalen, but with much concentrated ornament. The projecting vestibule faces the north, which is unusnal. In nearly all the other temples, which are not absolutely symmetrical on the four sides, the principal entrance is to the east. The interior is unusually light and spacious in proportion to the area of the building. It isa square vaulted cham- ber, in the centre of which rises a square mass of masonry support- ing the spire, and on the four sides of which are so many Gautamas. It contains several inscriptions; two of them, in very clear and elegant square Burmese characters, being built into the wall, and, as noticed by Crawfurd, covered with avery hard black varnish so as pefectly to resemble black marble, though a knife forcibly applied to the edge will shew the sandstone beneath. There are several other minor temples of interest near Thapinyu. A little to the south, and outside the ramparts, stands a group of temples called Sem-byo-k4, to the beautiful details of which I have several times referred. The most conspicuous of the ruins to the westward of Thapinyu is marked by a very curious dome and spire of the Ceylon Dagoba form, but both dome and spire being polygons of twelve sides. This building, from several peculiarities of aspect, is suggestive of great antiquity. The inter- nal vault, which is of considerable height, springs from the ground on every side. In one part of the entrance which, in its length the thick mass of brickwork, exhibits various heights and construc- 1857. ] | The Remains at Pagan. A7 tions, a painted timber lintel has been used, now in utter decay. Another part of the entrance vault is a ¢riangular arch (see Pl. VY. Fig. 5,) about 9 or 10 feet in span, the outer arch which defines the doorway being of the usual pointed form. This temple is called Putho-Budoh-nya. Between this and Thapinyu, an almost shapeless ruin, instead of an arched doorway, has a massive stone lintel, now broken. This is noticed by Crawfurd as containing Hindu sculptures. The sculptures remain; two inside and several framed in pannels on the exterior. ‘The figures have nearly all four arms, and have a very Hindu character; one of them also in its action strongly resembles the usual Hindu images of the Monkey-god Hanuman, but the head is defaced. Major Phayre visited this temple in company with the Woondouk, and has furnished a very interest- ing note on the subject, which is given below.* * Considering the very proximate derivation of the Buddhism of Burma from the Buddhism of Ceylon, may not the following passage throw some light on the subject. ‘The Malabar kings who at an early period had acquired the sovereignty of Ceylon, on the failure of the native dynasty introduced the worship of Vishnu and Shiva into the same temples with that of Buddha. The innovation has been perpetuated, and to the present day the statues of these conflicting divinities are to be found within the same buildings; the Diwalas of Hindooism are erected within the same enclosures as the Wihares of the Bud- dhists ; and the Kappoorales of the one religion officiate at the altars almost beneath the same roof with the priests and neophytes of the other,’ (Sir J. Emerson Tennent’s Christianity in Ceylon, p. 222.) The same singular fact is mentioned by Mr. Hardy. (astern Monachism, p. 201.) This is a small ruined pagoda, standing close to the Thap-pyi-nyo temple, of the usual form of Buddhist hollow Pagodas. It has a stone-frame to the doorway, which is unusual, This has been broken, from the imperfect con- struction of the arched brickwork above. On either side of the doorway are four niches in the outer wall of the building. These are all vacant but one, in which is an erect stone-figure about eighteen inches high. It holds a lotus bud in each hand and has a pointed crown or cap on its head. There are other niches, on the side and back walls of the building, containing similar stone figures. ‘These appear to be Indian in character, and one with a monkey-face no doubt represents Hanuman. Entering the temple, the throne, on which an image had evidently once been placed, occupies as usual the centre of the building. It is now vacant. There 48 The Remains at Pagan. [Nock. Some distance south of Sembyo-Ku is Thein-ma-tiet, of a size considerably larger than the common run of the Pagan temples, are also two empty places for upright images right and left of the throne; and above these are deep niches for smaller images, one of which is still occupied. An image of either kind, standing and sitting, has been displaced from the original position, and these now lie on the ground in the temple. They are of stone. One of the standing figures has disappeared altogether. That which has come. from the smaller niche above is a seated figure with the legs crossed, somewhat in the Buddha attitude. The figure has four arms, long pendent ears, and a high cap or crown upon the head. The two left arms hold a conch shell, and a mallet (?); the upper right hand has a ¢sek* or discus ; the other hand is broken. The figure is supported by a ga-loon* or bird with a man’s head. This is evidently an image of Vishnu. The standing figure is about four feet high, and was pronounced by the Woondouk who accompanied me, to represent the same person as the sitting figure. This, however, is an error. It also has four arms; in the two right hands are placed a sword and a trident, (supposed by the Burmese to be a lotus bud.) In the left hands are a club anda mallet. The image is much dis- figured, but its Indian anklets are visible, and beneath the feet is an animal half broken away, but which probably represents a bull. The image no doubt is that of Siva. The figure up in the niche was too much concealed by the gloom to be minute- ly observed. It was apparently riding on a bird. The Woondouk considered the standing and the seated figures above de- scribed as being images of Pa-ra-mee-thwa,f a Nat worshipped by Brahmans, and that they, as well as some standing figures of plaster around the central throne, had been introduced as subordinate guardian Nats, in honour of Buddha’s image, which once occupied the central place. This image was no doubt of plaster and has decayed by time. This view of the fact of Hindu deities being introduced into a Buddhist temple is quite consistent with the practice of the present day in Burma, At the Shwé tsee-goon Pagoda in Pagan, which attracts more worshippers than any other, there are in the enclosure figures of Nats to which the people make offerings, in the very presence of Buddha’s images, though such is contrary to the tenets of strict Buddhism.f That these stone figures were, as supposed by Crawfurd, the principal objects of worship in the small temple where they are found, I see no reason for con- * The chakr and Garwr (Sansc.) are both appendages of Vishnu. (Y). + This term seems a corruption of Purmesiwar, applied I believe, to Siva. t See page 226. (Y), 1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 49 though still to be classed as small among giants such as Thapinyu and Gaudapalen. It is very much on the model of the latter, and is surrounded by a brick enclosure-wall containing remains of other buildings. It is full of paintings of large figures. On the wall, against which the Gautama was placed, were some sixteen per- sonages depicted, which looked excessively like stiff old figures of the apostles on painted glass. In this, or another temple near it, the whole corridor was diapered with minute paintings of Gautama about an inch and a half square. Not far from this, the outside brickwork having partly fallen from a small solid conical pagoda, it became manifest that it was a real brick-and-mortar palimpsest. It had been actually built over another, and that other of highly finished construction, adorn- ed with beautiful moulded tiles, &c.* This building formed a sidering probable. I rather think with the Woondouk they were simply guar- dian Nats around the Buddha, to whose memory the temple has been erected. The Woondouk added, however, that these images may have been put into the temple to attract Brahminical worshippers, which, as from indications elsewhere, Indian workmen have apparently been employed on the Pagan temples and sculptures, is not improbable. * This incrustation of asacred building appears to be a common Buddhist practice. The great Shwe Madau at Pegu is thus said to have been originally built by two merchants, shortly after the age of Buddha, and to have been only one cubit high, raised by the same individuals to12. (Symes’s Embassy, p. 192.) Speaking of a great Pagoda at Bintenne near Kandy, Mr. Fergusson writes: “The Mahawanso or great Buddhist history of Ceylon, describes the mode by ‘which this building was raised by successive additions, in a manner so illustrative of the principle on which these relic shrines arrived at completion, that it is well worth quoting. The Thero Sarabhu, at the demise of the supreme Buddha receiving at his funeral pile the thorax bone relic, brought and deposited it in that identical dagoba [in which a lock of Buddha’s hair had been previously placed.] This inspired personage causing a dagoba to be erected twelve cubits high, and en- shrining it, thereon departed. The younger brother of King Devenampiatisso (B. C. 250,) discovering this marvellous dagoba constructed another encasing it, thirty cubits in height. King Duttagamini (B. C. 161) while residing there, during his subjugation of the Malabars, constructed a dagoba encasing that one eighty cubits in height. Thus was the Mohayangana dagoba completed. It is possible that at each successive addition some new deposit was made: at least EH 50 The Remains at Pagén. [ No. 1. sort of pair with another pagoda of similar appearance, in front of a small temple of the church character, and the possible object of the incrustation was to make it symmetrize in size with its neighbour. In passing eastward from the pagoda just mentioned we arrived at the Shwé San-dau, a large and lofty pagoda of the Rangoon and Prome type, on a high pyramidal base, and apparently once gilt. Near it, our attention was attracted by a long gabled house, lighted by a few small windows with flat arches in brick of a peculiar con- struction. Looking in, at a small arched doorway, we found the house to contain a Brobdignagian figure of Gautama recumbent ou his side. It was built apparently of brick plastered. But a finger of the hand from which the plaster had been knocked off, was seen to be of sandstone gilt, as if some part at least of the colossus had belonged to a former image of more splendid material.* The eyes were open, and the face, which was the best part of the figure, wore the usual placid smile. The vault of the long chamber in which it lay was painted, rudely enough, with over- shadowing palm-trees. The dimensions of the recumbent giant were as follows: | Top of diead. tontonk iat sai. hone 35 feet 5 inches. Bork to feeti: 5 sac. sess tread 3h. eae ae VRS i IN OBC so. Vastra nisin arsielte ame tileren Sotila ha eBe eee alc a Wiidthwoficlyim, 3: ee eae ou eid te eee, Dy sh fuer $5 Lengthsef ear,/ .2iumneti sews, stat ea MO ee Hee si most of the Topes examined in Afghanistan and the Punjab show signs of these successive increments, and successive deposits, one above the other.” (Hand-book of Architecture, 1. 9.) The same peculiarity is found in some of the Nubian pyramids, and in the Etrurian tombs. (Id. p. 291.) * These gigantic figures are probably direct imitations of what ancient Bur- man pilgrims had seen in Ceylon. At Dambool in that island, says Forbes (I. 370,) a “chamber contains a gigantic and well executed figure of Buddha recumbent, and the statue, as well as the couch and pillow on which he reclines, is cut from the solid rock. This figure is 47 feet in length. The chamber is long, narrow and dark; Gautama Buddha’s position and placid aspect, the. stillness of the place, all tend to impress the visitor with the feeling that he is in the chamber of death.” 1857. ] : The Remains at Pagan. 51 Preadth of shoulders, ...:.....-........ PA ges Ss s. ePID se yyecesseecse lasses, (OO gy O i eet yi foe .teccess.ssceee 104, 0 » POU ae deck lad sSlsss65 ly. ee gf 11.3) Mae ee | CAS. en TAN | ve Ree a Shas dve'nas sbi gd eles 440% 3 Rae aR) 0 On our mentioning this huge image after our return to the steamers, a party started to visit it. They missed their way but lighted on another, of similar character but much greater size! _ This last, I think, was stated 90 feet long. On the east side of the Shwé San-dau was a small cromlech, of unmistakable character used as a depository table of offerings. It is the only thing of the kind I have heard of in the Burmese countries, and is perhaps an accidental construction, and no relic of primeval customs. The whole of the ground about the base of Shwe San-dau on that side was paved with large masses of sandstone about six feet long and ten inches thick, and this may both have afforded the material and suggested the erection. So much of Pagan and its remains we saw, but a vast area of ruins remained unvisited by any of the party, and doubtless much of interest has still to be examined. The time which we spent at Pagan altogether was three days and a half in going up, and nearly two days in coming down, but as nearly one whole day was necessarily devoted to public and private letter-writing, and an- other whole day was abstracted by an attack of fever, I should have come away with much less material for the illustration of these deeply interesting remains, had it not been for the kind assistance’ of Mr. Oldham, and Lieut. Heathcote. I may conclude by introducing, not inappropriately, a note with which Major Phayre has favoured me on the Burmese habit of serib- bling on the walls of temples, instances of which abound at Pagan.* * Had I thought of it sooner I might have written an amusing page or two on the Burmese habit of scribbling upon walls. Brick walls white-washed are so uncommon that when one is met with, the people appear to cover every corner of it with figures drawn with charcoal, and written sentences. Their habit in this respect is as inveterate as that of the English. Some of these writings are the mere names of visitors to the temples, others are facetious, a few of the graye H 2 52 Notes on the Indian species of Lyciwm. [No. 1. Notes on the Indian species of Lycitum.—By TY. ANDERSON, Esq. M. D. Oude Contingent. In October, 1855, when passing through the Doab between the Ravee and Beas, I gathered a specimen of Lycium Edgeworthii of Dunal, a species founded ona plant sent to Dunal by Mr. Edge- worth, from near Sirhind. The plant in my Herbarium is evi- dently the same as that which Dunal has described, but after most careful and repeated examination of a considerable number of specimens in my possession, I am convinced that Dunal’s L. Edgeworthii is only a variety of his L. Mediterraneum, the L. Europaeum of Linneus. In order that his species L. Mediterra- neum and L. Edgeworthii may be distinguished, he has refined their specific characters so much, that they appear to be the descriptions rather of trivial varieties than of permanent and well-marked species. The differences between the specific characters of the species con- sist of a line or two in the length of the calyx, a mark of no import- ance, of minute differences in the length of the pedicels and pedun- cles and of inconstant characters taken from the existence of minute hairs at the insertion of the filaments in Lycium Edgeworthii. In my specimens I found several flowers entirely glabrous. In Lycium Europaeum the character is “‘ filamentis basi puberulis.”’ Characters are also taken from the branches and spines, but the latter, in both species, are of all shapes and sizes from a simple thorn + of an inch- long to a spine 3 inches long, bearing leaves and flowers. Dunal order. The following are specimens copied from the Baudhi Pagoda at Pagan. “On the Ist day of the waning moon Dengyot 1216, A. D. 1854 Nga Phyoo, Naga Kyen, and Ko Byeen, three persons, who live beneath the golden feet, wor- shipped the images and Pagodas at Pagan.” Here is another ; “Palm juice and spirits do not drink; fowls and pigs do not kill; avoid these (sins) that you may hereafter meet the Lord A-ri-ma-tee-ya,”* And again; ** Moung Kha and his wife have worshipped and presented offerings at all the Pagodas—applaud! applaud!” * Arimateeya, or Maitri, is the coming Buddha, who will be the fifth and last of the present world-system. “No oath is considered by a Burmese with more awe and solemnity, than to make him declare that in the event of his failing in truth, may he never see the Boodh Arimadeya.” As. Res. XX. 178. (Y). ay 1857. ] Notes on the Indian species of Lycium. 53 supposes the colour of the corolla of L. Edgeworthii to be yellow : in my specimens it is pale rose-coloured as in L. Kuropaeum. Dunal has purposed to change the name of the Linnean L. Europaeum to L. Mediterraneum, a change by no means applicable to a plant widely diffused in India. I therefore retain the Linnean name and propose the following specific character, which seems applicable to both the Indian and Western plants. L. Europaeum, fruticosum, cortice albido, ramis spinescentibus, spinis teretibus, foliis 2—5 ad basin spinarum fasciculatis, obovato- oblongis vel oblongo-cuneatis, pedicellis calyce longioribus, interdum geminis, plerumque unifloris, calyce breviter 5—dentato glabro vel puberulo, corolla calyce duplo longiore anguste infundibuliformi, staminibus inclusis. L. Europaeum, Linn, et auct.; Royle ill. L. Mediterraneum Dun. in DOC. Prod. xiii. 523 (cum omnibus vari- et.) L. Edgeworthit Dun. in DC. Prod. xiii. 525. L. indicum Wight Icones t. 1403. 3 Has. in India prope Delhi Royle, Guzerat Wight, Sirhind Hdge- worth, Panjab ad Umritsir, ZT. Anderson. | Folia glabra vel punctulata }—1 unciam longa. Spinae axillares nudae vel foliosae ;—1 unciam longae. Flores gemini vel saepius solitarii e fasciculis foliorum. Calyx 5—dentatus cyathiformis 1—2 lineas longus, glaber. Corolla calyce longior infundibuliformis 4—6 lineas longa, roseo-alba. JF ilamenta filiformia inclusa inequalia, uno cxteris breviore. Antherae parvae ovatae, basi bifidae. Stylus eylindricus, staminibus longior. Stigma orbiculare, capitatum. Pollen in aqua globosum. Ovarium ovatum. Bacca globosa parva. In India, special care is required to guard against the undue increase of species, since in this country, besides difficulties arising from want of books of reference, natural causes make the determi- nation of species more difficult than in Europe. One of the most powerful of these is the sudden and complete change of climate in many parts of the Peninsula of India, arising from the periodi- cal recurrence of the rainy season, which often alters the Flora from that of an arid plain to one consisting entirely of a large number of tropical annuals. This climatic change also temporarily affects the appearance or “ habit” of the perennial plants, causing a wonderful luxuriance of growth and alteration of the foliage. 54 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1. To these changes Lycium Europaeum is fully exposed. It is a native of dry sandy plains, where before the rains it is stunted in all its parts, but when the air and soil become charged with moisture an expansion of all its parts takes place, fully accounting for the multiform characters of its leaves and the diversity in the length of the spines, ete. feeport on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey and of the Re- searches connected with it, from November, 1855, to April, 1856. By Rosrrt ScutaGintwetr, Lsq. GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE RovrTzE. My brother Adolphe and I left Agra on the 29th of November, 1855, and went through Dholpore and Chanda to Gwalior. We pro- ceeded thence through a part of Bundelkund, by Dutteeah, Jhansi, Tehri, and Dhamoonee to Saugor, which we reached on the 4th of December. From Saugor we took different routes. Adolphe proceeded by Dhumow to Nagpore and Madras. I left Saugor on the 19th of December, and proceeded by Maharajpore and Bermhan to Nur- singpore, on the left side of the Nerbudda valley ; from thence I proceeded by Jhansi Ghaut and Meergunge to Jubbulpore, where I arrived on the 30th December. The route which I followed from Saugor to Jubbulpore afforded me the gratifying opportunity of examining the large deposits of fossil remains of elephants, rhinoceros, hippopotami, &c., which are exposed on the sides of the Nerbudda valley, and I have been able to obtain a tolerably good collection of specimens. During a stay of six days at Jubbulpore, I was engaged with a series of barometrical and meteorological observations, and with some experiments on the composition of the atmosphere, which were afterwards repeated on the Umerkuntuk Hills. 1857. | Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 53 I started from Jubbulpore on the 6th of January, and went by Mundlah, Ramgurh, Goruckpore and Karenchia up to Umerkuntuk which forms a very important part of the water-shed of Central India. Near it are the sources of the Soane and Tohilla, of the Nerbudda, and of the Yrap, an affluent of the Mahanuddy. I arrived at Umerkuntuk on the 20th of January, 1856, iid having set up my meteorological instruments, which were regularly registered during my stay, I made excursions to the sources of the Tohila and Soane, and up to the summit of Rajmeergurh Hill, which is one of the highest points of the Mekul range, East of Umerkun- tuk. | The plateau of Umerkuntuk afforded me a favourable opportunity of making physical and meteorological experiments, and though the absolute elevation is not very considerable (3,290 to 3,330 English feet,) the data obtained for the decrease of the temperature of the air, and of the ground, &c., may not prove without some interest for the physical geography of Central India, when compared with similar data obtained in the Himalayas, the Neilgherries, and Khasia Hills, &e. I left Umerkuntuk on the 26th January, and proceeded vid Pain- dra, Moonda, and Amukpore to Sohagpore; thence in a Northerly direction, through Kanrodi and Ramnuggur, crossing the Soane River twice, to Rewah, where I arrived on the 11th of February. By Mungown and Sohagi, I went to Allahabad, and thence along the Grand ‘Trunk Road to Agra, where I arrived on the 21st of February. At Agra the whole of the collections sent down last year from the Himalayas, and those made during this cold season, were care- fully re-packed for the purpose of being sent to England. I left Agra on the 8th of March, and travelled wid Delhi to Saha- runpore, and thence to Nahun, where I was engaged, for several days, examining the geological structure of the Sewalik range. I obtained many interesting tertiary fossils from various localities in the Sewaliks. I marched through Dugshaie to Simla, where I arrived on the 25th of March. The observations made in the outer ranges of the Himalayas, and in various localities in the environs of Simla, will be reserved for the next Report, treating of the Himalayas. 56 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1. METEOROLOGY. Besides the daily registry of dry and wet bulb thermometers and barometers, whilst on the march, a longer series of observations was made at Saugor, Bermhan, Jubbulpore and Umerkuntuk ; at Sohag- pore, Allahabad, Agra and Simla. These observations seem to lead to the following conclusions. The minimum temperature of the air was very regularly observed to set in just before sun-rise, but there was never to be observed a second depression of temperature immediately after sun-rise, as we had observed in the Indian Seas in October, 1854. The increase of temperature from sun-rise up to 11 o’clock a. Mm. is specially rapid between the hours of 8 and 9 a. mu. I often no- ticed an increase of temperature of 4 to 5 degrees centigrade between these two hours. The total increase from sun-rise to 11 o’clock was, at Saugor, (15th to 19th December,) as much as 28 degrees centigrade; at Jubbulpore it was from 12 to 15 degrees ; but at Umerkuntuk (20th to 26th January) the difference between sun-rise and 11 o’clock A. M. was only 83 to 9 degrees centigrade. Between 11 a. m. and 4 p. M., the variation of temperature was generally not very great— not more than 3 or 4 degrees centigrade; but the decrease of tem- perature between 4 Pp. M. and 7 P. M. was very rapid. East of Jubbulpore, at Ramgurh, and as far as Umerkuntuk, the minimum temperature of the day was very near the freezing point; but I never observed a temperature lower than 382 degrees Fahren- heit, or 0 degrees centigrade. There was quite regularly a hoar-frost setting in, even if the mi- nimum temperature of the air was 2 or 3 degrees above the freezing point. The hoar-frost was produced by the great radiation of the leaves and grass during the serene nights. At Umerkuntuk itself I observed some remarkable irregularities of temperature. Considering the cold temperatures experienced in the stations of the Nerbudda valley, Westward of Umerkuntuk, it might be expected to find the minimum temperature of the night at Umer- kuntuk below zero; but on the contrary the minimum temperature of the air on the plateau, at the end of January, was constantly 9 degrees and even 12 degrees centigrade above the freezing point. a 1857. Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 57 It was therefore considerably warmer than the minimum of the val- leys at the foot of the plateau. Besides the minimum does not take place just before sun-rise, but one or one-and-a-half hour earlier. The reason of this phenomenon is that during the night, the cold air, which is heavier, flows down along the sides of the hills, and accumulates at the bottom of the valleys, whilst at the top of the small plateau itself, the cold air, which is locally formed by the radiation of leaves and grass, is immediately carried away by the winds into the surrounding atmosphere and re-placed by somewhat warmer air. . During the day-time the temperature at the top of Umerkuntuk is of course much lower than in the valleys below. During my stay there the highest observed temperature was 75 degrees Fahren- heit, exceeding by 5 degrees Fahrenheit the maximum temperature of all the other days. There was only one day quite free of clouds during my stay at Umerkuntuk. Generally, soon after 8 o’clock a. mM. quantities of cirri dispersed all over the sky, and mitigated the full power of the sun’s rays: they only dissolved themselves partially in the evening before sun-set, some portions remaining even during the night. Some rain fell on the 29th and 30th of January. It appeared to have extended over a large area, and greatly affected the temper- ature of the air, cooling it down so that the maximum temperature was lowered more than 5 degrees. From Jubbulpore up to Umerkuntuk, a strong South-West or South wind set in very regularly between 9 and 10 a. m., and con- tinued till 5 or 5-30 Pp. m. The nights were constantly calm. At Umerkuntuk the wind blew from the same direction, but it was quite calm during the rain falls. There was not the least wind on the journey from Paindra to Rewah, where again a South-West wind began. _ Comparing my meteorological observations with those made during the cold season of 1854-55 by my brothers and myself, in the Southern parts of India, the Deccan, Mysore, &c., I find that in Southern India there is, at equal elevations, never so cold a temper- ature as I observed this season in Central India, in the valley of the Nerbudda, &c. 4 58 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1. In connexion with this fact it deserves mention, that in summer the reverse takes place, and that the maximum heat of Central India, at equal elevations, generally exceeds somewhat that of Southern India. Together with the observations of the dry and wet bulb thermo- meters, the readings of the barometer were registered, and I have been able to determine the heights of all important places on the route followed. Some stations were determined both by the baro- meter and the boiling point thermometer, which from its minute and accurate divisions (each degree of Celsius is divided into 100 parts) and having been carefully compared at different heights with barometers, may be considered as giving equally accurate results with the barometer itself. On the journey from Sohagpore to Rewah, I used only this instrument, as the barometer was leaking very much, and some air had introduced itself into it. The minimum of barometric pressure at about 4 P. mu. occurred on the small plateau of Umerkuntuk, very nearly at the same time as in the lower valleys and plains of Hindustan, and the daily vari- ation of the barometer seems to be very nearly the same at Umer- kuntuk as it is in the plains. ‘he temperature of the earth at different depths was determined by the long thermometer (one metre in length.) For greater depths I used a thermometer, the bulb of which was made extremely in- sensible. The observations of the temperature of the ground at Umerkuntuk, compared with similar data around the base of the hill, afford some curious examples of the cooling influences which extensive jungles have, upon the temperature of the ground. . At Umerkuntuk the temperature was, 22nd to 25th January— At one metre below the surface,............21° 2° Centigrade. », two metres, WS UREN AN8 ANTAD | 21° 5 be At Paindra, more than 1,000 feet lower than Umerkuntuk, the temperature was, 27th to 29th of January— At one metre below the surface,............ 20° 0’ Centigrade. ,», two metres, pM rare ae LU 21° 0’ i I observed similar differences at Ramgurh, and at some other stations West and North of Umerkuntuk, which are all 1,000 to 1,300 feet lower than the plateau. 1857.]| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 59 This anomalous phenomenon seems to be due to the following causes. ; The plateau of Umerkuntuk itself has comparatively little jun- gle, and the ground is exposed freely to the action of the sun. Round the base of Umerkuntuk, and especially on the slopes of the hills, very thick and extensive jungles prevail, which keep the ground moist and cool, as they prevent the heating of the surface by the powerful tropical sun. The meteorological observations which I had occasion to make in many parts of the jungles of Central India, as well as those of my brother Hermann in Assam, and of my brother Adolphe in the Godavery jungles, offer many striking examples of the cooling influence which extensive jungles exercise in India on the temper- ature of the ground, as well as on the atmosphere. The anomalous cooling of the ground by jungles is still more apparent than the difference of temperature in the air of jungles when compared with open districts, since the differences in the temperature of the air are much more equalized by winds and atmo- spheric currents. At AgraI was enabled, through the kind assistance of Colonel J. T. Boileau, the Chief Engineer, to ascertain the temperature of the earth nearly 50 feet below the surface. The insensible thermometer was sunk in a small shaft dug for the purpose, and remained buried there for a fortnight before it was taken up. The temperature was, from the 22nd of February to the 4th of March, 28° 3/ centigrade, equal to 82°9 Fahrenheit. The temperature thus observed accords, within one degree, with the temperature of the earth at about 60 feet below the surface, ascertained at Benares in April 1855. The temperature at one metre below the surface at Agra was only 25 degrees centigrade, as the upper strata had been cooled by the influence of the past cold season. The temperature of the wells at Agra was always a little lower than that of the ground, thus directly ascertained. As an average of several welis from which a large quantity of water was constantly drawn for domestic purposes and irrigation, I obtained 27° 6' to 27° 8’ centigrade. 12 60 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1. The temperature of water in wells, which are but little used, is considerably cooler than that of wells from which water is con- stantly drawn, as the cold air which sinks down during the night into the wells cools stagnant water much more than it can do the water of wells which is constantly removed. Asa curious phenomenon connected with Physical Geography, I finally beg to mention the way in which the jungles are distributed in Central India. The base and slope of the hills, and the valleys between them, are generally covered with very dense and extensive jungles, but the summit of the flat hills and small plateaux which occur in many localities, are nearly always quite bare and destitute of trees and jungly vegetation. 1 had been informed by my brothers, that this very curious phenomenon occurs all along the Southern parts of the Khasia and Jynteah Hills, and on the plateau of the Neilgher- ries. This phenomenon seems to be due, in part, to the very strong winds which sweep over those isolated plateaux and which evident- ly must be very injurious to jungle vegetation. . Another impor- tant. cause is, the want of moisture in these isolated plateaux. The geological results obtained in the journey from Agra to Saugor will be contained in the Report which my brother Adolphe will have the honour to submit to Government; I shall therefore content myself by mentioning some geological results to which the investigation of the country visited by me alone seems to lead. In the valley of the Nerbudda some interesting deposits of fossil remains occur. The larger deposits are found from Bermhan up to Mundlah, the bones are found in a brown alluvial clay, and belong to species of elephants, rhinoceros, hippopotami, buffaloes, &c. I also found with the bones well preserved fossil shells of Unio, Melania, and other fresh-water species. A comparison of these fossil shells with those now living in the Nerbudda, and in various tanks of Central India, of which I collected a large number, will assist in determining the geological age of the fossiliferous deposits of the Nerbudda valley. From Jubbulpore to Umerkuntuk the prevailing rock is black trap, identical with the trap of the Deccan. 1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 61 I found in several localities the thin lacustrine deposit, which reposes on trap, and is again overlaied by other layers of trap. In some places it was full of fossil fresh-water shells of Physa, Unio, Melania, &e. The principal fossiliferous localities which I visited were Phool Saugor, about 9 miles west of Mundlah, Bellasur, and Bonder. The plateau of Umerkuntuk is one of the culminating points of Central India and this place, and the hills in its neighbourhood, form the important water-shed of Central India, between the Rivers Nerbudda, Soane, Tohilla, and Mahanuddy. The plateau of Umerkuntuk is not very large—it is nearly circular, and surround- ed by hills, which are only 50 to 60 English feet higher. The slopes are very steep to the East and South, whilst they are much more gentle to the West and North. The hills run from Umer- kuntuk first in a Northerly direction, and then turn to the North- West. They are generally known by the inhabitants under the name of Mokul. The highest point of this range is probably Rajmeergurh, near Umerkuntuk, which it exceeds by about 500 English feet—the latter place itself is about 3,290 to 3,830 English feet. The Nerbudda alone rises on the plateau of Umerkuntuk. It has its origin in a tank or pool, surrounded in the most irregular way, with solid masonry and fine temples :—one of the oldest of them seems to me to be a Jain (Buddhist) temple. The tank is fed by subterranean springs, and the origin of the Nerbudda is thus precisely similar to that of the Kistna, on the plateau of Maha- baleshwur in the Deccan. I determined the quantity of water at the spot where the Ner- budda flows out of the tank, and found it to be, on the 23rd of January, only two French litres per second. But very soon this little rivulet is met by the waters of two other springs, and only a few miles from its source it is joined by the waters of two more springs, and forms a beautiful cataract of about 70 English feet. The Soane has not its rise at Umerkuntuk, but to the East of the hill, and about 1,200 feet lower than the Nerbudda in an open partially cultivated spot, from a tank called Sone Budder, 8 miles 62 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1. Kast of Paindra, and forms a swampy marshy place over a consider- able extent. The Tohilla rises about 5 miles North of the Nerbudda, at a place called Tohaletsur, nearly on a level with the Nerbudda, The Yrap, a small river, which flows to the South, and joins the Mahanuddy, has its origin near Paindra, from several large tanks, forming at first a swampy ground. Its source is situated about 5 or 6 miles from that of the Soane, and its water-shed is not formed by a distinct ridge, but only by a slight rising of the ground. On the journey from Sohagpore through Rewah to Allahabad, I took the opportunity of carrying a barometric and geological section over the plateau of Bundelkund. The plateau, or rather the succession of plateaux, consists of a reddish and white sandstone, in large banks, which are generally horizontal—it reposes upon limestone and shales of blue and grey colours, which very often are a little more inclined than the sand- stone, and the shalesare quite identical with similar rocks which I observed in the Gwalior Territory. The plateau of Bundelkund terminates abruptly about 40 miles South of Allahabad, where the sandy deposits of the plain of Hindustan begin. Simlah, 27th May, 1856. 1857] Mean temperature and fall of rain in Darjiling. 63 Mean temperature and fall of rain in Darjiling, Sikhim Himalayah, 1848 ¢o 1855.—By J. R. Wirnecomss, MW. D. Civil Surgeon. Months. September, October, ... Peeeoe eeeneer eee eee Julla Pahar 7500 feet above the sea. Average. pe 58.53 60.49] 59.51) 59.14 .| 61.42) 62.12] 61.77) 63.59 .| 63.23] 62.87] 63.05) 63.69 63.28] 61.81] 62.54) 63.26 60.13) 62.78) 61.45) 62.32 55.81| 55.93) 55.87| 61.85 48.49] 48.38) 48.43 | 54.48 Civil Station Hospital 6902 feet above the sea. Mean Temperature. 1850-51. 1851-52 43.08) 41.96] 42.52) 55.89] 44.86 40.04) 42.24] 41.14) 40.96] 42.25 40.77| 41.93) 41.33} 41.79] 47.17 50.13) 48.38) 49.26) 51.91) 47.23 59.53] 56.77] 58.65] 55.71] 54.43 Se se SS | 53.79] 53.80] 53.79) 55.38] 55.57 | 1852-53 1853-54. Average. —————S eee Eee ee 61.60) 59.40} 61.35) 60.37 62.57| 62.15) 64.34) 63.16 63.80) 63.07; 65.26] 63.96 64..41| 63.80] 64.13) 63.90 63.23] 62.09] 62.02] 62.42 58.89) 56.40) 56.71] 58.46 50.41] 48.05] 49.28] 50.56 42.75) 45,29} 44.70 36.79) 45.85] 41.46 47.23) 42.01] 45.55 52.83| 51.47| 50.86 57.74 53.83] 55.43 —S— S| | —_ 54.36] 55.13} 54.99 Observatory 7168 feet above the sea. 1854-55. 59.90 61.66 62.70 62.59 60.89 57.86 51.09 47.30 39.42 41.93 49.36 52.58 _ 53.94: 64 Mean temperature and fall of rain in Davjiling. Rain 1n INCHES. 1850-51. | 1851-52. | 1852-53. | 1853-54. | 1854-55. en | RS |S May, - as a | 6.75 June,, . os ...| 30.55 31.00 Sully, 9 Rh wee| 32.02 27.15 August, ... ...| 40.02 | 16.70 September, eee| 20.00 19.60 October, ... Ke .00 9.35 November, oi -00 1.50 December, ae 00 .05 January, v. stall eno 3.45 February, Lal) pee 2.40 March, ... «| 4.40 4.00 Artie ors ne 5D 4.55 Total fall of rain,,..| 135.08 | 126.50 17.40 2.70 114.50 1.00 118.18 a | 147.43 [Nord Average for 5 years. 5.28 29.26 28.52 28.85 20.60 3.64 80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, For January, 1857. LPO LPO DLO VPALDIIAA At the annual general meeting of the Society, held on the 7th January, 1857, Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt. President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following REPORT. The Council of the Asiatic Society have the satisfaction of sub- mitting their annual report exhibiting the Society’s transactions, and the state of its affairs during the past year. The number of ordinary members resident in India at the close Ordinary. Paying. Absent. of every year since 1851 has re- 124 6 1851.. 130 . . 1852. 139 122 7 Be. nearly praeeonanyE rang- 1853... 146 123 23 ing between 122 in 1852, and 1854.. 155 129 26 Sd cadth t Dari 1855. = 162 128 34. RE eee eee ZanS 1856.. 167 131 36 the last twelve months there has been an accession of 19 new members. The loss has been alto- gether 14, of which 7 have been removed by death, 6 by retirement, and one (Dwarika Nath Basu) under bye law 13 of the Society’s rules, It will thus be seen that during the past year, there has been an addition of only 5 to the number of members. The entire list con- tains 167 names, inclusive of those absent.in Europe. 66 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. The obituary includes the names of Major General Sir W. H. Sleeman, K.C.B., Dr. Montgomerie, Lieut. Chancey, Raja Sattya- charan Ghosal, Raja Sriesh Chandra Raya, and Messrs. Houstoun and R. W. G. Frith. Dr. Montgomerie was a zealous and disinterested promoter of the objects of the Society, and as the discoverer of Gutta Percha had received the gold medal of the Society of Arts of London. Mr. Frith was distinguished for his devotion to the science of Entomology. By the death of the Rev. Dr. Buckland, the Society ee lost one of its most distinguished honorary members. The names of Professor Langlois and Mons. Marcel have also to be removed from the list, and the Society has to deplore the loss which the cause of Oriental literature must suffer from the demise of these two distinguished savans, the intelligence of whose death only reached India a few months ago. Seven corresponding members have been elected during the last twelve months, some of whom are Oriental scholars, or are other- wise distinguished for their literary or scientific attainments. Finance.—The abstract statement No. 1 annexed to the report shews the receipts of 1856 to have been Rs. 18,204-7-1, which add- ed to the balance of the preceding year (Rs. 6,251-18-8) make the total of Rs. 24,456-4-9. The disbursements amount to Rs. 17,321-6-5, inclusive of the sum of Rs. 2,500 advanced to the Oriental Publication Fund as a temporary loan, and which must be considered a part of the balance. The total liabilities amount to Rs. 3,605-9-4, while the cash ba- lance in hand is Rs. 6,664-14-1, to which is to be added the sum of Rs. 2,500, advanced to the Oriental Fund, making a total of Rs. 9,164-14-1. In addition to this, there are outstanding assets to the extent of Rs. 8,908-3-8. Of the outstanding sums due to the Society, shown in the report of 1855, Rs. 485-4 have been written off to Profit and Loss as un- realizable subscriptions due from deceased members, and although there are still several items of a similar nature, yet the Council are not without hopes that opportunities may occur for recovering a considerable portion of them. 1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 67 The marginal estimate of the probable income and expenditure of ak ee ree the next year will be found to fall Contributions, .. _.. 8,0000 short of that of previous years, sim- Government Grant at 300 .. 3,600 0 Sale of Books, .. .. 1,0000 ply because the amount of the Journal, .. as -- 8009 Government Grant for the Museum Interest, .. oe « 2200 Miscellaneous, .. -- 100 of Economic Geology has ceased to 13.5309 be borne in the accounts, in conse- : ’ ——— quence of the removal of that es- Monthly average .. seal 278 tablishment, and the cessation of Expenditure, he allowance from September last. Zoological Museum, -- 4,200 0 adil ’ Pr Library—Estabt. 936 0 0 The subject of reducing the rate Eee eaing, (200.0 0 of subscription to the Society from Purchase of ; books, .. 65000 Rs. 16 to 10 per quarter was ti 1 114 00 : x ree aie 2,000 0 brought forward for final discussion Estabt. General, -- 1,800 0 and decision in September last. Journal, os) 22,1000 slice : Miscellaneous, including The proposition was orginally Building, -- 12000 moved by Major Thuillier in Noy, Deposit, oe 72 0 1855. The Council after careful deliberation reported against the Monthly average, .. 997108 expediency of the proposed change, | and the question having been refer- 11,972 0 red to the Society at large, and the votes of absent members solicited under bye-law 45, the motion was negatived at a special meeting, held in September last, the number of suffrages obtained in favour of the motion being 25, whilst 23 were given against it. Library. Considerable improvement has been effected in the preservation and arrangement of the books. Much, however, yet re- mains to be done in the way of enriching the contents of the Library. Nearly 250 vols. have been added during the year, a considerable portion of which are donations from authors and learned societies. The leading Scientific periodicals of Europe, obtained either by pur- chase or exchange, are from time to time laid on the table of the new reading-room for perusal. A. new catalogue of the Library has been published, copies of which may be had by members free of charge by application to the Librarian. The price to non-subscribers has ben fixed at 3 Rupees a copy. K 2 68 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No.1 The Coin Cabinet of the Society has received an addition of 17 gold coins from the Government of the N. W. Provinces, and a few silver coins of historic importance have been contributed by several gentlemen. The Government of India having resolved upon establishing a separate Geological Museum in connection with the Geological Survey, has directed the transfer to the proposed institution of its Museum of Economic Geology which has been in charge of the So- ciety since 1841. : By this arrangement the Society has lost the valuable services of Mr. Piddington, who, besides taking charge of the Government Museum of Economic Geology, has hitherto had the care of the Society’s own collections of minerals and rocks. The accession of new specimens in this department has been re- corded by the Curators. They include amongst others a superb meteorite from Sougoule presented by Mr. Grote ; a valuable collec- tion of fossils from Kohat by Lieut. Trotter ; a fine specimen of the scarce mineral Condrodite from Nagpore, by the Rev. 8. Hislop; a box of minerals and specimens illustrating the different stages of ‘metallurgical processes, particularly of the manufacture of iron from Col. Tremenhere; and a valuable series of Casts of Sewalik fossils from the Museum of the India House, presented by the Hon’ble Court of Directors. The Museum continues to be a source of considerable attraction Nov. 18th to 29th being 12 days open to the public, and that it is duly Natives, Europeans. appreciated is best shewn by the Male Female Male Female Total. ; 9889 81 65 19 3054 numbers who daily resort to the December 26 days open. rooms. ery few persons having Sea 205 588 118 eg Ooms Wery: P 8 hitherto recorded their names in 9303 the visitors’ book, the Jemadar was directed in the middle of November last to note carefully the name and sex of every visitor who expressed either an inability or a reluc- tance to write. The average thus obtained appears to have exceed- ed 240 persons a day, as shewn in the margin. Journal.—Six Nos. of the Journal have already been issued, and another, which will be the last of the year, is in the press, and nearly ready for publication. Of these No. VII contains a complete 1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 69 and efficient Index to the last two volumes of the Researches, and the first 23 vols. of the Journal. It is hoped that this publication will supply a desideratum which has been long felt by all who have occasion to consult the pages of the Society’s transactions, and render the varied and valuable matter contained in the volumes accessible, not merely to our own members, but to the public at large. Officers. Babu Gour Doss Bysack was appointed in March last Assistant Secretary and Librarian in place of Babu Rajendralal Mittra resigned, whose valuable services have received the public acknowledgment of the Society, as recorded in the proceedings of February last. His successor has been very regular and assiduous in the discharge of his duties. Oriental Fund. It has been found that from the rapid issue of the Nos. of the Bibliotheca Indica during the last three years, the demands upon the Oriental Fund have far exceeded its resources. The activity of the several editors had pushed the publication of the series beyond the limits warranted by the Government allowance, and the consequence has been, the accumulation of heavy liabilities which have been the subject of remark both by the local and home Government. It has therefore been resolved that the publication should be suspended until provision is made for the liquidation of the debts. The principles on which the Bibliotheca Indica has lately been conducted were likewise made the subject of animadversion by Pro- fessor Horace Hayman Wilson, and the Hon’ble Court of Directors. They drew the attention of the Society to the disproportion of the Arabic to the Sanscrit publications, which they considered in- consistent with the comparative claims of the two departments of literature, and dwelt on the importance of confining the appropria- tion of the grant to the encouragement of the Sanscrit language, except in the case of works illustrative of the history or social con- dition of India. The Society without concurring in the wisdom of restricting the Bibliotheca Indica to Sanscrit works, or to works relating exclusively to India, have expressed every disposition to be guided by the views advanced by the learned Professor and the Hon’ble Court. 70 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. The Council are glad to add that the liabilities of the Oriental Fund have been considerably reduced within the last year. During the last twelve months only 8 Nos. of the Bibliotheca Indica have been issued, of which 5 are Sanscrit and 3 Arabic. The names of the works are :— 1.—The Taittiriya Saihité of the Black Yajur Veda, edited by Dr. E. Roer, Nos. 188, 184 and 187. 2.—The Brihad Aranyaka Upanishad, edited by Dr. Roer, No. 135. 3.—A Biographical Dictionary of Persons who knew Mahommed, edited by Moulavies Mahamed Wayzeh Abdul Hagqgq and Golam Kadir, and Dr. Sprenger, Nos. 186 and 138. 4.—Waquidy’s History of Mahamed’s Campaign, edited by A. Von Kremer, No. 139. . 5.—The Markandeya Purana, edited by the Rev. K. M. Banerjea, No. 140. It will be observed that these numbers are in continuation of works already undertaken. No new work has been commenced nor will be, until the unfinished editions are completed, which will be a work of time in consequence of the extent to which the resources of the Fund have been anticipated. With the conclusion of the works in hand, the present series of the Bibliotheca Indica will be brought to a close, and it is the opinion of the Council that a new series should not be commenced without a careful revision of the rules under which the publication has been conducted. . The report was adopted. The meeting then proceeded to ballot for the Council and Officers for the ensuing year. Captain Sherwill and Mr. Gordon Young, were appointed Scrutineers, and at the close of the ballot, the Chair- man announced the following result :— Hon’sie Str J. W. Cotvine, Kr. President. Bisu Rameorat GuHosse, Dr. G. G. SprnsBuRy, j YienPresidente A. Grorr, Esq. Dr. H. Waker. C. Brapon, Esa. 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. fu Dr. T. THomson. Dr. T. Boycort. Capt. C. B. Youna. BAsu RamAprasaDd Roy. E. A. Samuvetts, Esq. T. OLtpHAM, Esq. Masor STRacHeEY. W.S. Arxryson, Esq. Joint Se es. Bdzu RAsenpRavAL Mirra. i oint Secretaries The question of transferring the Society’s Geological collections to the new Government Museum, as proposed in the letter (dated 11th July last) from the Government of India, laid before the So- ciety at the August Meeting, was taken into consideration. The Secretary announced that 8 non-resident members out of 55 had replied to the Circular which was addressed to them, requesting their votes on the subject of the transfer, two voted in favour of, and 6 against the transfer. Such of the letters as contained remarks were then read, and several members having addressed the meeting the question was put to the vote, and negatived by a majority of one. For. Against. PNOMTORICENLSY \'a.. suis to es ce. 2 6 epienteee. sao. nthe. so. 2 9 14 15 The meeting then separated. 72 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. STATEMENT Abstract of the Cash Account of the Asiatic RECEIPTS. 1855. 1856. CONTRIBUTIONS, 7,166 0 0 Received from Members, ... A oe e 8,096 0 0 ADMISssIon FEE, 512 0 O Received from new Members, me ue ae 448 0 0 JOURNAL, 784 8 O Sale Proceeds of, and Subscription to | the Journal of the Asiatic Society, .. = és 768 10 0 LIBRARY, - 631 14 O Sale Proceeds of Books, .. - neon -, 1,628 13. 9 - ss of Bookshelves, 00 0 38 4 O 1,662 1 9 MusrEvum oF ZooLoey, 3,662 10 6 Reeeived from the General Treasury at 300 Rs. per month, .. oe 0-0 008 See sresesereee Godeg s Auedutog 9 L L ey meee a. oe ‘kes ‘Kavaquy oy JO onsoyeyeg 0 0 0 4) 6) Gel See eeeeeseresoeresees oecereereers ‘Kes ‘SuryUIId, SNOIULTOISTIL 0 S- O26. ae oO10 © © N i! CO j=) rd Cao. 08h ‘kes ‘xoput 10 “TTA ‘ON G QOS Tire rersre ster eseer see eeeanas Soot cA OIOnOUT Cee0ec ee ee As AMON Se fg CL 68 OL 29 cap see occupensipas snhiinen seis ime ial TUCO TSG) 0 OL “eg A puw AT SON TeuMoL § OF ET FyG‘9 eT OZ8'G ‘Sypris Tesuag Jo pug » L SIP eee ove cee ere ceeeesercerseneresorernss + “bea ‘Aerprey “AA ‘f ‘OG8T 2 eceT 0 8 Tes “SMT STO STEATOO “AA “£ tig “olqenouoy § ‘HSVO “s9U4ygov Ty ‘sjassp ‘S$ ON INHNALVLS 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 83 LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, The * distinguishes non-subscribing Members. 1856. PAI IINALRIIV ALD PALLELS IS Abbott, Lieut.-Col. J. Bengal Artillery, Ishapur. Allen, C. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. *Anderson Lieut.-Col. W. Bengal Artillery, England. Atkinson, W. 8. Esq. Calcutta. Avdall, Johannes Esq. Do. Baker, Lieut.-Col. W. E., Bengal Engineers, Calcutta. Banerjee, Rev. K. M. Bishop’s College, Sibpur. *Barlow, Sir R. Bart. B. C. 8. England. *Batten, J. H. Esq. B. C. 8. Ditto. Beadon, C. Esq. B. C. 8S. Calcutta. Beaufort, F. L. Esq. B. C. 8. Do. *Beckwith, J. Esq. England. *Benson, Lieut.-Col. Rk. Do. Birch, Col. R. J. H.,.C. B. Calcutta. Bivar, Captain H. 8S. 18th Regt. B. N. I. Northern Cachar. Blagrave, Captain T. C. 26th Regt. B. N. I. Trans-sutledge Provinces. Blundell, E. A. Esq. Singapore. Bogle, Lieut.-Col. Sir A. Kt. Tennasserim Provinces. Boycott, Dr. T., Bombay M.S. Calcutta. *Brodie, Captain T. 5th Regt. B. N. I. Europe. Burgess, Lieut. F. J. 17th Regt. B. N. I. Pilibheet. Bushby, G. A. Esq. B. C. 8S. Hyderabad, since dead. Busheerooddeen Sultan Mohammed Saheb, Calcutta. Byng, Hon’ble Captain kh. B. P. 62nd Reet. B. N. I. Cherrapunji, Khasia Hills. *Campbell, Dr. A., B. M.S. Europe. Chapman, C. Esq. B. C. 8, Bhagulpore. Chapman, R. B. Esq. B. C. S, Calcutta. Christison, A. Esq. M. D. Gwalior. 84 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. Colvile, Hon’ble Sir J. W. Kt. Do. Colvin, B. J. Esq. B. C. S. Calcutta. *Colvin, J. H. B. Esq. B. C. 8S. Europe. Colvin, Hon’ble J. R. B. C. S. Naineé Tal. Cunliffe, C. W. Esq. B. C. S. Lucknow. Curtis, J. F’. Esq. Calcutta. *Cust, R. N. Esq. B. C. S. Europe. Dalton, Captain E. 8. 9th Regt. B. N. I. Chota Nagpore. De-Bourbel, Lieut. Raoul, Bengal Eners. Calcutta. Dickens, Captain C. H. Calcutta. Drummond, Hon’ble E., B. C. 8. Do. *Edeworth, M. P. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe. Elliott, Hon’ble W., M. C. S. Madras. Ellis, Major R. R. 23d Regt. B. N. I. Bundlekund. Elphinstone, Lieut. N. W. 4th Regt. B. N. I. Peshawur. Erskine, Major W. C. Commr. of Saugur, Nurbudda Territories, Jubulpore. *Falconer, Dr. H., F. R.8., B. M.S. Europe. Fayrer, Dr. J.. B. M.S. Lucknow. Forbes, Lieut. H.8., Artillery, Benares. Freeling, G. H. Esq. B. C. S. Bundelkund. Fytche, Major A. 70th Regt. B. N. I. Bassein. *Gladstone, W. Esq. Europe. Govindchundra Sena, Baboo, Calcutta. Grant, D. sq. B. C. S. Agra. Grapel, W. Esq. Calcutta. Gray, J. J. Esq. Maldah. Grote, A. Esq. B. C. 8S. Calcutta. Gubbins, C. Esq. B. C. 8. Allighur. Hall, F. E. Esq. M. A. Saugur. Halsy, W. S. Esq. B. C. S. Gurruckpore. Hamilton, R. Esq. Calcutta. Hamilton, Sir R. N. E. Bart, B. C. S. Indore. Hannyngton, Lieut.-Col. J. C. 24th Regt. B. N. I. Chota Nagpore. Haughton, Captain, J. C. Maulmein. Hayes, Captain F, C. C. 66th Regt. B. N. I. Lucknow. Hearsay, Major-Genl. J. B. 10th Lt. Cavalry, Barrackpore. Heatley, S. G. T. Esq. Delhi. 1857.| Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Herschel, W. J. Esq. B. C.S. Rajshaye. *Hichens, Lieut. W. Bengal Engineers, Europe. Hodgson, B. H. Esq. B. C. 8. Darjiling. 85 Hossein Ally Mohamed, His Highness Ex-Ameer of Scinde, Calcutta, Ishureepersaud, Rajah, Benares. Jackson, L. 8. Esq. Mauritius. *Jackson, W. B. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe. Jadava Krishna Singh, Baboo, Caleutta. James, Captain H. C. 32nd Reet, B. N. I. Darjiling. Jenkins, Lieut.-Col. F. Assam. Jerdon, IT. C. Esq. M. M. S. Saugor. *Johnstone, J. Esq. Europe. Kabeeroodeen Ahmed Shah, Bahadoor, Sassaram. Kay, Rev. W. D.D. Bishop’s College. *Laidlay, J. W. Esq. Europe. , Lawrence, Col. Sir H., K. C. B. Aboo. Layard, Captain F. P. 19th Regt. B. N. I. Berhampore. *Lees, Lieut. W. N. 42 Reet. B. N. 1. Europe. Legeyt, P. W. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. Liebig, Dr. G., Von, Bom. M. 8. Calcutta. Loch, G. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. Loch, T. C. Esq. B. C. S. Europe. Loftie, Lieut.-Col. M. E. Almorah. Low, Major Genl. Hon’ble J. Calcutta. Lushington, F. A. Esq. B. C. 8. Do. Maclagan, Captain R. Roorkee. Macleod, D. F. Esq. B. C. S. Lahore. Macrae, Dr. A. C., B. M.S. Caleutta. Manickjee Rostumjee, Esq. Do. *Marshman, J. C. Esq. Europe. Martin, Dr. W, M. M.S. Calcutta. * Middleton, J. Esq. Europe. Medlicott, J. G. Esq. Geol. Survey office. *Mills, A. J. M. Esq. B. C. S. Europe. Money, D. I. Esq. B. C. S. Calcutta. Money, J. W. B. Esq. Do. Morris, G. G. Esq. B. C. 8. Berhampore. Morton, D. T. Esq. M. D. Maulmein. 86 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Mouat, Dr. F. J., M. D., F. RB. C. S. Caleutta. *Muir, J. Esq. Europe. Muir, W. Esq. B. C. S. Nainee Tal. *Nicholls, Captain W. T. 24th Regt. M. N. I. Europe. Nicholson, D. G. Esq. Maulmein. Nogendranauth Tagore, Baboo, Calcutta. Oldham, Prof. T., F. R. S. Caleutta. Ommanney, M. C. Esq. B. C. S. Lucknow. *O’Shaughnessy, Sir, W. B. Knt, Europe. Ouseley, Major W. R. Calcutta. Phayre Major A. P. Pegu. Pratab Chundra Singh, Rajah, Pakparah, Calcutta. Pratt, The Venerable Archdeacon, J. H. Do. *Prinsep, C. R. Esq. Europe. Prosono Coomar Tagore, Baboo, Calcutta. Radha Nauth Sikdar, Baboo, Do. Rajendra Dutt, Baboo, Do. Rajendra Lal Mittra, Baboo, Do. Ramdanauth Banerjee, Baboo, Do. Ramanauth Tagore, Baboo, Do. Ramapersaud Roy, Baboo, Do. Ramehund Singh, Rajah, Do. Ramgopaul Ghose, Baboo, Do. *Riddel, H. P. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe. Roberts, A. Esq. B. C.S. Jubulpore. *Roer, Dr. HE. Europe. *Rogers, Captain T. E. Europe. Row, Dr. J., B. M. S. Meerut. Royle, Dr. J., F. RB. S. Europe. Russel, R. H. Esq. B. C. 8. Chittagong. Samuells, E. A. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. Saxton, Captain G. H. 38th M. N. I. Cuttack. Schiller, F. Esq. Calcutta. *SetonKarr W. Esq. Europe, since returned. Sherer, J. W. Esq. B. C.S. Allighur. Sherwill, Captain W. S. 66th Regt. B. N. I. Calcutta. *Smith, Col. J. S. Europe: smith, Rev. W. O. Calcutta. [ No. 1. 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. *Spankie, R. Esq. B. C. 8. Saharunpore. Spilsbury, Dr. G. G., B. M.S. Calcutta. *Sprenger, Dr. A., B. M. 8. Europe. *Stephen, Major J. G. 8th N. I. Europe. Stewart, Lieut. R. 22nd Regt. N. I. Cachar. Strachey, Major R. Bengal Engrs. Calcutta. *Strachey, J. E. Esq. B. C. S. Europe. Strong, F, P. Esq. B. M. 8. Calcutta. Suttyasharan Ghosal, Rajah, Calcutta. *Thomas, H. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe. Thomson, Dr. T., M. D., F. R. S. Calcutta. Thornhill, C. B. Esq. B. C. 8. Nainee-Tal. Thuillier, Major H. L. Artillery Calcutta. *Thurnburn, Captain I. H. V. 14th Regt. B. N. Ll. Europe. Trevor, C. B. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. Walker, H. Esq. B. M.S. Do. Ward, J. J. Esq. B. C. 8. Cuttack. Watson, J. Esq. B. C. 8S. Berhampore. Waugh, Col. A. S. Bengal Engrs. Mussoorie. Willis, J. Esq. Calcutta. Wilson, The Right Rev. D. Lord Bishop, Do. Woodrow, H. Esq. Do. Young, A. R. Esq. B. C. 8. Do. Young, Captain C. B. Bengal Engrs. Do. Young, W. G. Esq. B. C. 8. Do. *Yule, Captain H. Bengal Engrs. Kurope. ELECTED IN 1856. J. W. B. Money, Esq. Calcutta. Col. J. T. Smith, Europe. Dr. G. von Liebig, B. M. S. Calcutta. R. H. Russel, Esq. B, C. 8. Chittagong. Baboo Rajendralal Mittra, Calcutta. Major R. R. W. Ellis, 23d Regt. B. N. I. Bundelkund. J. F. Curtis, Esq. Calcutta. Dr. F. J. Mouat, B. M. 8. Do. Lieut. R. De-Bourbel, Bengal Engrs. Do. Captain H. Yule, Bengal Engrs. Europe. 88 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. A. R. Young, Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. Sultan Mahomed Busheerooden Saheb, Do. R. B. Chapman, Hsq. B. C. 8S. Do. Lieut. H. 8. Forbes, Artillery, Benares. A. Roberts, Esq. B. C. S. Jubbulpore. Rajah Suttyasharan Ghosal, Calcutta. Major W. C. Erskine, Jubbulpore. Lieut. Chancey, Agra. Rajah Sreish Chundra Raya Bahadur, Krishnagur. Loss or Members Durine THE YEAR 1855. Withdrawn. H. V. Bayley, Esq. Calcutta. K. Colebrooke, Esq. Do. C. Huffnagle, Esq. Do. Captain H. Hopkinson, Arracan. G. I’. Edmonstone, Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta. G. Plowden, Esq. Nagpur. By Death. R. Houstoun, Esq. Calcutta. Rajah Suttyacharan Ghosal, Bahadur, Do. Dr, W. Montgomerie, Barrackpore. Lieut. Chancey, Agra. Rajah Sriésh Chundra Raya, care Krishnagur. R. W. G. Frith, Esq. Jessore. Major Gen. W. H. Sleeman, Europe. Honorary Members. Prof. A. Langlois, Paris. Mons. J. J. Marcel, Do. Rey. Dr. Buckland, London. List oF Honorary MEempBeERs. Baron Von Hammer-Purgstall, Aulic Counsellor, Vienna. M. Garcin de Tassy, Membre de I’ Instit, Paris. Sir John Phillippart, London. Count De Noe, Paris. Prof. Francis Bopp, Memb. de |’Academie de Berlin. [ No. 1, 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 89 Sir J. F. W. Herschel, F. R. 8. London. Col. W..H, Sykes, F. R. 8. do. General Count Ventura, Europe. Prof. Lea, Philadelphia. Prof. H. H. Wilson, F. R. S., London. Prof. C. Lassen, Bonn. Sir G. T. Staunton, Bart., F. R. 8., London. M. Reinaud, Memb. de l’ Instit. Prof. de l’ Arabe, Paris. Dr. Ewald, Gottingen. His Highness Hekekyan Bey, Egypt. Right Hon’ble Sir Edward Ryan, Kt. London. Prof. Jules Mohl, Memb. de l’Instit. Paris. Capt. W. Munro, London. His Highness the Nawab Nazim of Bengal, Murshidabad. Dr. J. D. Hooker, R. N., F. R. S. London. Prof. Henry, Princeton, United States. Lt. Col. C. H. Rawlinson, Persia. Lit. Col. Sir Proby T. Cautley, K. C. B. London. Raja Radhakanta Deva Bahadur, Calcutta. CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS. Kremer, Mons. A. von, Alexandria. Porter, Rev. J. Damascus. Schlagintweit, Mons. H. Schlagintweit, Mons. A. Smith, Dr. E. Beyrout. Tailor, J. Esq. Bussorah. Wilson, Dr. Bombay. Associate MEmBens. Blyth, H. Esq. Calcutta. Kéramt Ali, Syud, Hooghly. Long, Rev. J. Calcutta. MacGowan, Rev. J. Ningpo. Piddington, H. Esq. Calcutta. Stephenson, J. Esq. Europe. Tregear, V. Esq. Bareilly. 90 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. For Frsrvuary, 1857. At a monthly general meeting of the Asiatic Society, held on the 4th instant. The Venerable Archdeacon J. H. Pratt, Senior Member present, in the Chair. The proceedings of the December meeting were read and confirmed. Presentations were received— 1. From the Government of Bombay, copies of “Selections from the Records of the Government.” The Secretary stated that these publications had been sent in compliance with a request made by the Council, who were glad to announce that the Government of Bombay had ordered that the Society should be supplied with all the Selections that may here- after be published. 2. From the Imperial Academy of Sciences, Vienna, the latest publications of the Academy. 3. From the Government of the N. W. Provinces, through Captain Maclagan, Officiating Principal Thomason College of Civil Engineering, Roorkee, a copy of the Report on the Prisons of the N. W. Provinces, for the year 1855. From Baron Von Hammer-Purgstall, a copy of his edition of Wasaf’s celebrated history in Persian, with a German translation, vol. 1st. Letters from Mr. Plowden, Lieut. Stewart, Dr. Martin, and Rev. K. M. Banerjee, announcing their wish to withdraw from the Socie- ty, were recorded. The following gentlemen were named for ballot at the next meet- ing :— Mr. H, F. Blanford, of the Geological Survey, proposed by Dr. Thomson, and seconded by Major Strachey, and Mr. E. B. Cowell, Professor of History in the Presidency College, proposed by Mr. Atkinson, and seconded by A. Grote, Esq. The Council submitted reports— 1. Recommending that Mr. John Nietner, of Ceylon, be elected a corresponding member of the Society. N 2 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 91 2. Announcing that they have appointed the following Sub- Committees— Finance.—C. Beadon, Esq. and Dr. T. Boycott. Philology.—A. Grote, Esq., H. A. Samuells, Esq., Rev. J. Long, and EF, E. Hall, Esq. Library.— Dr. H. Walker, E. A. Samuells, Esq., W. Grapel, Esq., Babu Ramapersad Roy, and Major Strachey. Natural History—Dr. G. G. Spilsbury, T. Oldham, Esq., Dr. H. Walker, Dr. T. Thomson, Dr. T. Boycott, Mr. EH. A. Samuells, Captain C. B. Young, and Major Strachey. Communications were received— 1. From Babu Radhanath Sikdar, forwarding abstracts of the Meteorological Register kept at the Office of the Surveyor-General, Calcutta, for the months of October and November last. 2. From Mr. Asst. Secy. Oldfield, enclosing copy of a Meteoro- logical Register kept at the Office of the Secretary to the Govern- ment of the N. W. Provinces, Agra, for the month of November last. 3. From the Government of India, through Col. Birch, Secretary in the Military Department, forwarding a copy of the report by Mr. A. Schlagintweit on the proceedings of the Magnetic Survey in the Himalaya Mountain and in Western Thibet, from May to November, 1856, and that of Messrs. H. and R. Schlagintweit, on the same subject, from July to September, 1856. 4, rom the Governor-General in Council, through Mr. Edmon- stone, Secretary to the Government of India, a copy of an account of the mountain district forming the western boundary of the Lower Derajat, commonly called Roh, with notices of the tribes inhabiting it, by Lieut. H. G. Raverty, 3rd Regt. B. N. I, 5. From Capt. R. J. Leigh, Senior Assistant Commissioner to the Commander of Chota Nagpore, Notes on Jumeera Pat in Sirgooja, Chota Nagpore. 6. From Dr. Anderson, Oude Contingent, on the Indian species of the genus Lycium. The Librarian submitted his usual monthly reports for December and January last. Dr. Thomson read two reports from the Messrs. Schlagintweit of 92 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. their journey in Northern Thibet, and across the Koenluen, with explanatory remarks. On the motion of the Chairman, the thanks of the meeting were voted to Dr. Thomson for his remarks upon these interesting reports. LIBRARY. The library has received the following accessions during the month8 of December and January last. Presentations. Geschichte Wassaf’s. Persisch Herausgegeben und deutsch tibersetzt von Hammer-Purgstall, 1 Band, Wien, 1856, 4to.—By rum Baron Von HamMER-PURGSTALL. Sitzungsberichte der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Philos. Histor. Classe, Band, XVII. heft 3, Band XVIII. heft 1 and 2, Band XIX. heft 1 and 2 and Band XX. heft 1, 8vo.—By THE ACADEMY. ———- Mathe. Natur. Hist. Classe, Band XVIII. heft 1 and 2, Band XIX. heft 1—2 and Band XX. heft 1, 8vo.— By THE Same. Denkschriften der ditto ditto. mathematisch naturwissenschaftliche Classe, Band X. and XJ.—By THE Same. Archiv fur kunde dsterreichischer Geschictsquellen. Band XV. heft 2 and Band XVI. heft 1, 8vo.—By THR Same. Fontes Rerum Austriacarum ditto ditto. Band XII. abtheilung 2, 8vo. —By THE SAME. Jahrbiicher der K. K. Central—Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und erdmag- netismus Von Karl Kriel. Band IV.—By rue Sams, Almanach for 1856, 12mo.—By THE Samez. Notizenblatt, Nos. 1—14, 1856.—By tHe Same. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. Band X. heft 4, Svo. Liepzig.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY. Die Lieder des Hafis. Persisch met dem commentare des Sadi, heraus- gegeben von Hermann Brockhaus. LErsten Bandes, Drittes heft 4to. Liepzig, 1856.—By tHe Epiror. Memoirs of the Royal Astronomical Society, Vol. XXIV.—By tux SociErTy. Notices of the Meetings of the Members of the Royal Institution of Great Britain, Part VI.—By tue Royat InstitTurion. The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XII. No. 47.— By THE Socterty. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society from November, 1854 to June, 1855, Vol. XV.—By tue Socirry. Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean Society, Vol. I. Nos. 1 and 2.—Ly THE SOCTETY. 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 93 Address of T. Bell, Esq. President, read at the Anniversary of the above Society, May 24th, 1856.—By tur Samer. Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indié. Deel XII. Derde Serie, Deel II. afl. 1—3, 8vo.—By tHE Naturat History SociEty oF NeETHERLAND’S INDIA. The Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, Vol. IX. Nos. 10 to 12, new series, Vol. I. No. 1, 2 copies. —By tur Hpiror. Ethnology of the Indo-Pacific Islands, by J. R. Logan, Esq. 2 copies. —By THE AUTHOR. Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government in the Police Branch of the Judicial Department, Nos. 1 and 2, (the last is an incom- plete copy.)—By tor Bompay GOVERNMENT. No. XX XV. new series, being a report on the Hilly re- gion forming the Western part of the Collectorate of Kurrachee.—By THE SAME. from the Records of the Government of the N. W. Provinces, Parts XX VII. and XXVIII. the 1st chiefly on Public Works and the 2nd connected with the Revenue.—By THE GovERNMENT OF THE N. W. P. ——-——_—— from the ditto of the Government of India, (Home Depart- ment,) No. XVII. Report on the Survey of the Mineral Deposits in Kumaon and on the Iron Smelting Operations experimentally conducted at Dechouree.—By tur GoverNMENT oF Inp1A. —. (Foreign Department) No. XVIII.—General Report on the Administration of the Punjaub Territories from 1854-55 to 1855-56 inclusive.—By THE SAME. (Public Works Department) No. XIX.—Reports on the Communication between Calcutta and Dacca. 2nd. On the Progress of the Dacca and Arracan Road. 3rd. On the Creek Navigation from Akyab to Toungoop. 4th. On the Toungoop Mountain Road.—By Tux SAME. Report of the Inspector General of Prisons, North Western Provinces for 1855.—By Captain Mactacan, Orre. Principat of THE THomA- SON ENGINEERING CoLLEGE aT RoorKeEE. Half-yearly Report of the Committee of the Bengal Chamber of Com- merce.—By THE CHAMBER OF COMMERCE. Journal Asiatique for July and August, 1856, Nos. 28, 29 and 30.—By THE Socrn re’ ASIATIQUE. Report of Dispensary Cases of the Medical College Hospital.—By Dr. CHUCKERBUTTY. Essai sur la Littérature Indienne et études Sanscrites par P. Soupé, 12mo. Paris.—By THE AUTHOR. Catalogo dei Coleopteri della Lombardia compilat dai Antono. E, G. B. Villa. Paris.—By tHe AvrHor THROUGH Mr. PrppineTon. 94 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. }. Catalogo dei Molluschi della Lombardia ditto, ditto. Paris—By tTuE SAME THROUGH DITTO. Dispositio Systematica Conchyliarum Terrestrium et Fluviatalium que adservantur in collectione fratrum, ditto.—By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO. Intorno alla Malattia delle vitirelazione di Antonio Villa. Paris.—By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO. 7 Notizie intorno al genere melania memoria Malacologica dei ditto. Paris.—ByY THE SAME THROUGH DITTO. Osservazioni Entomologiche durante |’ eclisse del 9 Ottobre, 1847. Paris.— By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO. Intorno All’ Helix frigida (2 leaves).—By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO. The Oriental Christian Spectator, for November and December, 1856. —By tHe Epitor. The Oriental Baptist, for December, 1856 and January, 1857.—By THe Epitor. The Calcutta Christian Observer, for ditto ditto.— By THE Epirors. Upadeshak, for ditto ditto—By tur Eprror. The Durbin Newspaper, for ditto ditto.— By tur Epiror. The Pheenix ditto, ditto ditto.—By tur Epitor. The Morning Chronicle ditto, ditto ditto.—By ru Epiror. The Tattwabodhini Patrika, for December, 1856,—By tHe Tarrwa- BODHINI’ SABHA’, The Indian Annals of Medical Science, No. VII. October, 1856.—Bx THE EpITorR. Exchanged. The Athenzum, for October, 1856. The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science, No. 80. The Calcutta Review, No. 54, for December, 1856. Purchased. Comptes Rendus, Nos. 12 to 15. The Literary Gazette, Nos. 34 to 38. The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, for November, 1856. Revue des Deux Mondes, for October and November, 1856. Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 9. A complete Grammar of the Dravidian or South-Indian family of Lan- guages, by the Rev. R. Caldwell, London, 1856, 8vo. Revue Contemporaine et Atheneum Francais, Nos. 109 and 110, 15th: and 31st October. Journal des Savants, for September, 1856. Matlai ul Saadeyn, or a History of Iran and Turan, MS. Hajjat ul Mahafel Tajkirel Dad Intaki. Tarikh Aasam e Qufi. MS. 1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 95 Kitab ul Safa bataarif ul Haqtq ul Mustafi. MS. Minhaj ul Bayan. MS. Milikat Qéji ul Quzzat MS. Aalam ul Nubih. MS. Kitab Zaholdawa Ibn Janzi. MS. Atish Kadah Azo. MS. Mohit, An Arabic Encyclopedia, 5 Vols. incomplete. MS. Badra ul Taam. MS. 2 vols. Kitab min I’d ul Khafa. MS. Yusuf Zulekha. MS. Rijal ibn Haj. MS. Hadikat ul Sahadayn, History of Martyrs; Turkish. PPI LLL ILDIPL LID LL LILI SILLS SLE LAI IOI LS JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. mAnnnnn IPS LI LIS ILL LLL LE LLL No. IL. 1857. srh~resyyryyv4 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey, and of the Re- searches connected with it, from November 1855 to April 1856.— By ApoteHe SCHLAGINTWEIT. OUTLINE OF THE Rovrt. T left Mussoorie in company with my brother, Robert Schlagin- tweit, on the 9th of November. After staying some days at Dehra, we proceeded vid Roorkee to Agra, where we arrived on the 21st of November. We left Agra on the 29th of November, and proceeded wi Gwalior and Tehri to Saugor (14th to 19th December.) I separ- ated at Saugor from my brother Robert, and went vi¢ Dumoh to Jubbulpore (28rd to 27th December,) and after examining the interesting geological structure of the Nerbudda valley, I proceeded to Nagpore across the elevated district of Seuni, which separates the Nerbudda from Berar. From Nagpore I travelled v4 Chandra and Badrachellum along the Godavery valley to the sea-coast near Rajahmundry, where I arrived on the Ist’ of February. The latter road was especially selected for the purpose of tracing the sand-stone of the Nagpore territory down the Godavery to the Eastern Ghauts, and of ex- amining personally the fossiliferous localities of Kota on the Pranteta and of Rajahmundry. I went through the Godavery Delta to Cocanada, and thence by sea to Madras. (Arrived. at Madras 19th February.) I left Madras on the 24th and proceeded No. LXXXVI.—NeEw Srrins, Vou. XXVI, a) 98 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2. to the districts of Pondicherry, South Arcot, and Trichinopoly, to examine the interesting cretaceous strata, which yielded a consi- derable number of fossil remains from different localities. From Trichinopoly I went up by the Coonoor Ghaut to the Neil- gherries, where I stayed from the 10th to the 17th of March. I returned vid Mysore and Bangalore to Madras; I left Madras for Calcutta by Steamer on the 1st of April, and I reached Simla on the 26th of April. I was accompanied during the operations of this cold season by my draftsman, Eleazar Daniel, a guide in the Quarter Master General’s Department, and I beg to bring to the notice of Govern- ment the very useful services rendered to me by this man in the prosecution of my researches, both during this season and previous- ly in the Himalayas, and on the march from Bombay to Madras in 1855. The geological and paleontological collection made during this season (eighteen boxes) have been forwarded to England through the Government of Madras. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. Complete magnetic observations have been made on the following Stations :— Agra. Saugor. -Dumoh. Jubbulpore. Nagri, South of Nagpore. Bibberi, between Chandra and Badrachellum (Maenetic dip only.) Rajahmundry. Cocanada (Declination only.) Pondicherry (Dip only.) Ootatoor, near Trichinopely. Ootacamund on the Neilgherry Hills. Bangalore (Dip only.) At Madras, the magnetic force of my needles was compared with the magnets of the Observatory ; my needles were the same which had been compared with the Observatory needles in February | 1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 99 1855 ; and these comparisons will facilitate in a great measure the determination of the absolute values of the magnetic force for the different stations of observations. All the magnetic instruments have remained in perfectly good order throughout the season. My brother and myself had wished to subjoin to this Report a more elaborate resumé of the results of the magnetic observations now extending over a pretty considerable part of India, together with a map showing the magnetic curves; but we found such a work, with any attempt at the necessary accuracy, would have taken at least one or two months; so great an interruption of our movements would have necessitated a complete alteration of the plan of our operations during the ensuing season, and it would have been probably quite impossible to extend our researches for the present year into the most distant parts of the Western Himalayas. Every one acquainted with the details connected with the final reduction and calculation of scientific data, like magnetic and other physical observations, will agree that it is quite useless to publish, in a hurry, provisional figures and results, which would all have to be cancelled and re-calculated for the final computation of the work. We expect, if no unforeseen accident interrupts our progress, to be able to return to Europe in one year and a half, and we shall then endeavour to reduce and publish the results of our magnetic and other researches with the greatest regard to the accuracy necessary for final results, which may perhaps not prove quite unworthy of the patronage bestowed upon our scientific researches by the Court of Directors. As a general result of our magnetic observations, I mention the fact, that the magnetic intensity increases in India from the South towards the North much more rapidly than might be expected. from a consideration of the geographical latitude only. If the curves of the dip of the needle are laid down on a map, it is plainly seen that the spaces between them are very narrow when compared with other parts of the world. Thus, in North West India, in a latitude of 30 and 314 degrees, the dip of the needle is already as much as from 41 to 43 degrees. 0 2 100 Report on the Progress of the Magnetie Survey. [No. 2. I subjoin a list of the dip for some of the more important of my magnetic stations: several needles were used for the observations at the principal stations : — Names of Stations. Magnetic Dip. Ussilla, on the Tonse River, in Gurhwal, in the Himalayas, ...0:.. yids TAQRSOF Tl Mana, in Gurhwal, in “al Binur aghiih sis ames opiQeio82 Milum, in Kumaon, (Himalayas,) ............ 41 4 Miu ssoGtie, 26 8S. § BERS OS .eeh ea redaehiaeilsie SUMGG <2 WOOP RAO Sd a, JQ te Bae Gade Nainee Palin Kumaony 02.3 se oi. os So oo 1B 138% SaugereVs aig won, & panned. seb owas Jubbulpore, ...... OY DNA RUG s eee pean as Nagri, South of machina ihe AFORE CU, Rajahmundry, «+... JUMBI deo lt oti ie Madras, (1855 ey JN teehee 38 7 Ootacamund; Neilgherries; 000004 0.00 ec el Qedi Aees Ootatoor, near 'Trichinopoly, in Sheet en Tada 2 35 30 The magnetic dips observed by my brother, Hermann Schlagin- tweit, in the Hastern Himalayas and in Assam, agree very well with ' the results obtained by me in North-Western India, and they also show a very great dip of the needle. The magnetic declination in the Himalayas of Kumaon and Gurhwal, visited in 1855, was every where Easterly varying from 3 to 4 degrees. The declination continued constantly to be to the Eastward along the route which I followed during the cold season from Agra to Rajahmundry and from Madras to the Neilgherries. The line which separates the Westerly declination of the Western Coast of Bombay from the country with Easterly declination lay to the West of the route followed. At the Neileherries the declination was still Easterly, amounting to 53’ 30” East. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. The observations of the barometer and thermometer, &c., have been carried on, as before, regularly every day, and the height of all the important places on the march from Agra to Rajahmundry, 1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 101 and from Madras vid Trichinopoly to the Neilgherries and back, have been determined by repeated barometric and hypsometric observations. Particular attention was paid throughout this season to the tem- perature of the ground at various depths below the surface. We have been fortunate enough to obtain very regular and careful observations of the temperature of the ground from the surface down to a depth of two metres (6% feet) for the last twelve months from Madras and Calcutta. They were made at Madras under the superintendence of Major Worcester and of Major Jacob, and at Calcutta under the superintendence of Major Thuillier : the instruments used were brought out by us, were similar to those used by ourselves, and had been all carefully compared. This will enable us to correct our own observations, made at various stations for the changes of temperature taking place from one month to another, and to make them all strictly comparable by reference to one common standard. Our observations show that great confidence may be placed in the temperature of the ground, ascertained thus directly by ther- mometers buried at different depths below the surface, and the results for the decrease of the temperature, with height calculated. from different stations, agree remarkably well. It seems that the temperature of springs is more liable to be effected by local causes connected with their mode of origin, &c. than the temperature of the dry ground, thus ascertained directly. The following Table shows the temperature of the ground at some of my stations, where observations have been conducted for some time, in various localities :— Temperature of the Ground at 2 metres (63 feet) below the surface at some Stations between Agra and the Neilgherries. Temperature, centigrade. Agra, 23rd February to 4th March, 1856, .................. 238° 5’ Jubbulpore, 22nd to 27th December, 1855, .................. 22 8 Sitabuldee, near Nagpore, 3rd to 9th January, 1856,...... 28 6 The temperature of the ground in the plains about Nag- 102 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No.2 pore, which are so remarkable for their excessive sum- mer heat, is very high, when compared with the stations in the more elevated districts of the Nerbudda and of Bundelkund. Chandra, South-East of Nagpore, 14th to 16th January, 29 0 Rajahmundry, at the head of the stg Delta, 2nd to 8th February, ......... thie baclda. Folddalmueniice oly NS Cocanada, Kast of ae on bine Santé of Oak 29 6 The observations were made in three quite different locali- ties, which gave 29° 5' C,, 29° 7’ C., and 29° 6' C. The temperature of the ground is a little colder than at Rajahmundry, though Cocanada is 40 E. F. lower than the other place, on account of the great humidity of the sandy deposits in the lower parts of the Goda- very Delta. Trichinopoly, South of Madras, March 7th to 8th,........ 29 9 Ootacamund, on the Neilgherry Hills, March 12thto17th, 18 8 A fine spring near the Ootacamund Church was, ......... 18 0 Madras, March 19th to: 24bb;i As. ci we Ra We eg If the temperature at Ootacamund (7410 HE. F.—my place of observations) is compared either with Trichinopoly or with Madras, the decrease of the temperature of the ground for 1 degree C. corresponds to an elevation of from 660 to 670 E. F, A fine spring on the slopes of the Neilgherries, when compared with Trichino- poly, indicates even a more rapid decrease of temperature, 1 degree C. corresponding only to an elevation of 600 to 640 HE. F.; and it seems quite certain that the decrease of the temperature of the ground on the isolated Neilgherry Hills is more rapid than in the Himalayas, where we formerly found an elevation of 720 E. F. to correspond to a decrease of the temperature of 1 de- gree C, The observations on the temperature, velocity and quantity of water, &c., of various rivers, have been continued throughout the journey, and we think that these observations, when properly com- pared and worked out, may be not without some interest, both in reference to Meteorology and to Geology. 1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 103 The temperature and quantity of water of springs has also been ascertained as often as opportunities would present themselves. I had the opportunity of visiting an interesting hot spring on the Godavery, near Badrachellum, in the Hastern Ghauts, to the West of Rajahmundry. lt is situated in the sandy bed of the Godavery, about 3 miles from Badrachellum. The water does not come to the surface, but is concealed under the alluvial sand which fills up the dry bed of the Godavery River. I met it after having dug a well of 7 feet depth. The highest tem- perature observed was 49 degrees C., but of course the temperature is much affected by the cold water of the Godavery constantly percolating through the sand. The presence of the hot springs is said to be visible during the rainy season, when the Godavery fills up its whole bed by some vapour of water rising just over the spot where the hot spring is situated. During the dry season the pre- sence of the hot water under the sand is clearly indicated by the high temperature of the sands above it, which, at a depth of from 15 to 20 centimetres from the surface, had a temperature of from 36° to 38° centigrade. The heating influence of the spring upon the surface sands extends over as much as 200 to 240 square metres. Its origin is certainly due to one of the great fissures of disloca- tion or faults which have accompanied the upheavement of the Hastern Ghauts, though in the immediate neighbourhood no pecu- liar alteration in the general features of the country is visible. GEOLOGY. The great surface of the country which I was able to traverse during this cold season offered a very favourable opportunity for geological observations. J shall endeavour, in a few paragraphs, to mention some of the conclusions to which I think my observations will lead, but I must reserve it for some later period to illustrate these statements with the necessary detailed sections and notes. 1. The sandy deposits of the plains of Hindustan, which are bordered by the Himalayas and by the mountains of Bundelkund, 104 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2. are not a deposit by rivers, but a deposit in a large basin of water, which very probably was fresh water; they are in no way to be considered as fluviatile deposits by the Ganges or Jumna; the material for their formation has been brought down from the Hima- layas as well as from the ranges of Bundelkund, and I am quite convinced that the very extensive denudation and excavation of the sand-stone ranges of Bundelkund, Gwalior, &¢., has contri- buted in a very considerable degree to the formation of the deposits in the plains of Hindustan. The formation of kunker is evidently generally due to a process of segregation of the whole deposit, but besides this concretionary hunker, there occurs in some places a different formation of black kunker, which extends horizontally sometimes to very great dis- tances; it occurs not very far below the surface and is generally merely covered by drifted sands ; its origin has been connected with the drying up of old lakes (jheels) similar to those found at present in some parts of Hindustan. 2. To the Southward of Agra, in Bundelkund and Gwalior, occurs a formation of sand-stone with shales absolutely identical with similar rocks, which cover a great extent of surface in India. I shall venture to offer a few general remarks upon these rocks. The formation occurs in Bundelkund, in various parts of the environs of the Nerbudda valley, in many places of the Nagpore territory, and in the Eastern Ghauts throughout their extent: it is there apparent in parts in extensive masses as in the Cuddapah, Bangapilly, and Kurnool districts. In other places only occasional masses or strips of sand-stone shales are met with, and the forma- tion has been broken up and destroyed to a great extent by the granitic outbreak of the Ghauts. The formation can be traced, though often interrupted by the granitic masses in the Eastern Ghauts, to the south of Madras. I met sand-stones and marls undoubtedly identical with the Nagpore rocks and containing faint vegetable remains as Streper- matoor, 30 miles west of Madras, on the Bangalore road, where they crop out in some places around the tank. Another interesting locality which I had the opportunity of visiting was at Trivacery or Teruvacery, a village 18 miles west of Pondi- 1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetie Survey. 105 cherry. The sand-stone of Trivacery is absolutely identical in all petrographical characters with many specimens from the Nagpore territory ; it also contained many fossil trees, which I am convinced will prove the same as those found in some places of the Nagpore territory, as well as near Raneegunge to the west of Burdwan and Calcutta. IT think that the coal-bearing strata of Raneegunge, in the hills west of Calcutta, belong to the same formation with the rest of the above quoted localities. Whether the lime-stone and shales of Kulladghee, which TI had occasion to investigate in the cold season of 1854-55, constitute a formation different from the above or not, I am unable to say at present, from want of my journals and specimens, which have been all sent away. The character of this extensive formation of sand-stones and shales varies considerably; generally the sand-stones can be well distinguished from the underlying shales. In some localities the distinct stratification is clearly visible, and the sand-stones, more or less horizontal, repose contrary to the ordinary laws of conformity, upon the out-crop of the inclined shales underneath: this is the case in the Gwalior territory, in Bangapilly, Cuddapah, &e. In other districts, for instance at Nagpore, near Chanda, and on the Pranheeta, the marly slates and sandstone seem to lie conformably, and have both been subject apparently to the same bendings and foldings. But though the characters of the rock are very variable, it is nearly always possible to trace the one variety into the other; occasionally the mere lithological resemblance, even between very distant points of the formation, is very striking. Fossil remains have been found in several places; the best known locality is at present the Nagpore territory, where the per- Severing researches of the Reverend R. Hislop have brought to light a rich collection of fossil plants and several very interesting animal remains. I haye much pleasure in acknowledging my obligations to-Mr. P 106 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. (No. 2. Hislop, who was kind enough to give me every assistance and information during my stay at Nagpore. I met fossil wood and some fragments of fossil bones in several places along the Godavery. Near the junction of the latter river with the Pranheeta, at Kota, near Shironcha, are found very curious remains of fossil fishes and reptiles connected with a thin bed of coal. These fossils were first discovered by the late Drs. Bell and Walker, and I trust that the collection which I was enabled to make in this locality may not prove without some interest even after the very fine specimens sent to England by the two above- mentioned gentlemen. Vegetable remains can be traced in many places in the sand- stones and marls, though the appearance is often very much changed. Leaves, together with fossil wood, were met with in the Eastern Ghauts on the Godavery and at Trivacery, 18 miles west of Pondicherry. It seems that the formation has been deposited throughout in fresh-water lakes, but it would be premature to express at present positive opinion on the geological age of the formation. It appears from some fossil remains that it may be oolitic; but only a close enumeration and comparison of all the fossils hitherto collected and brought to Europe will be able to decide this question. With reference to the difficult question of the age of the sand- stone formation, it is worth mentioning that I have seen the sand- stone, with fossil trees, clearly overlaid by the cretaceous strata in the Pondicherry district, so that it cannot be younger than Jurassic. The existence of coal in this formation is connected with the vegetable remains, which as I have mentioned can be traced in many places. The coal-seams are generally not of great thickness, and the coal is in most places impure, but larger seams have been found in some localities, in Burdwan, the Palamow Hills, the Nerbudda Valley, &c., some of which are worked pretty extensively. 3. The great trap formation of the Deccan has been visited during this season on its Eastern borders. I have been able to examine the fresh-water strata interposed between the trap layers in many localities, and I have traced the continuation of this thin 1857.) eport on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 107 fresh-water stratum containing only fresh water-shells (Physa, Melania, Unio, &c.) down the Godavery to Rajahmundry. Near this place occurs a very curious mixture of the unmistakeable fresh- water Physa Prinsepii, with numerous true marine species. The lime-stone stratum, with these marine shells, lies like the fresh-water lime-stone of the Deccan between a mass of trap (Dolerite) ; it reposes upon a celiular trap, and is covered by up- wards of 50 feet of nodular trap. It is found at Cateroo, 3 miles from Rajahmundry, and at the Pangadi Hills, 10 miles from the latter place, and is from 2 to 23 feet thick. In some places the rock is quite full of marine shells, which belong to Arca, Car- dium, Venus, Cerithium, Turbinella, &c. I also found a large well-preserved nautilus at Pangadi, which will serve to throw some light upon the age of the intertrapian lacustrine and marine formation of India. The connection between these strata of Rajahmundry and the merely fresh-water deposits of the Deccan is quite clear; it seems to have been a deposit probably in a series of great lakes growing brackish to the Eastward. The fresh-water Physa Prinsepii, not to be distinguished from the Deccan specimens, lies side by side with Cerithium, Arca, and other marine shells. The fresh-water intertrapian stratum of the Deccan is from 2 to 4 feet thick; it consists in part of variously coloured marls, in part of impure lime-stone. In the parts where I had the opportunity of examining it, near Saugor, near Lenni, Nagpore, &c.,it generally is covered by globular black trap of from 40 to 70 feet thick only, which seems to have been the most recent of the trap effusions in this part of the country. It rests upon a cellular Amygdaloid or Wacke, into which it some- times graduates, so as to make it impossible to draw any distinct line of separation between the two rocks. I also observed fre- quently quite isolated patches of a very soft cellular Wacke between the fresh-water strata themselves. It seems to me that the fresh-water strata have been deposited at the bottom of lakes covered with volcanic ashes, and it is quite probable that occasional showers of ashes still fell occasionally during the period of the Pp 2 108 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2. formation of the calcareous and marly deposit at the bottom of the lakes.* Another interesting phenomenon connected with the intertrapian formation is the very regular and horizontal outline shown by the thin line of the sedimentary stratum on the exposed sides of the hills; and the fact, that though no bending or contortion of the stratum is visible, it may be found at a much higher or lower level on one of the next hills. From a careful examination of the localities, I think that this fact can only be due to the ex- istence of extensive faults and to phenomena of subsidence and elevation of whole mountains en masse caused by them. Of the existence of such faults, evident proofs can be found in many localities. | I finally wish to mention, that the intertrapian lacustrine forma- tion is not confined to the borders of the grand trap mass, but that it can be traced, though often altered and scarcely recogniza- ble, to a great distance to the Westward inthe interior of the trap mass. 4. On the road from Madras to Trichinopoly I had an opportu- nity of examining the cretaceous formation, which seems to be en- tirely limited to this part of India. The cretaceous strata cover in these districts an extensive sur- face of country, and the fossil remains are found scattered through- out the formation in many localities. Assisted by my draftsman, Eleazar, and some other of my men, who have now been instructed in collecting similar objects, I have been able to obtain a pretty fine and extensive collection of the cretaceous fossils from very various localities. The whole of the strata from the Pondicherry district down to the most South-Western localities in the Trichi- nopoly district (circumference 120 miles) belong to the same form- ation; the rocks are quite the same and the fossil remains are nearly identical. * T mentioned in the first Report for the cold season of 1854-55, that the effusion of the trap in the Deccan had taken place under heavy pressure, probably of sea-water. I now beg to say that it is much more probable that the effusion has taken place at the bottom of extensive fresh-water lakes than at the bottom of the ocean, 1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 109 There exist local accumulations of bivalve shells, constituting neally the whole mass of the rock, for instance at Garudamgalum, near Ootatoor (Trichinopoly district) where the rock is quarried, polished, and sold as “ Trichinopoly Marble.” These accumulations may~ perhaps have been old sea beaches, but they do not constitute a separate or more recent formation than the strata with the ammonites. Close to the accumulations of bivalve shells occur strata containing large ammonites, some of 14 feet in diameter; and I even saw ammonites in the rock full of the bivalve shells. The cretaceous strata seem to have been generally quite undis- turbed; they repose horizontally upon the oolitic sand-stones at Trivacery and upon the crystalline schists in other loealities. The cretaceous strata are covered by a deposit of rolled pebbles, with red lateritic earth, which is evidently more modern and brought down at a former period by violent currents of water from the astern Ghauts. The deposition of the cretaceous strata took place after the principal upheavement of the Hastern Ghauts, since these strata are nowhere seen to penetrate into the interior of the Ghauts or to the Mysore and Deccan plateaux, and since they have not been affected by the upheaving and disturbing agency, which must have accompanied the formation of the Ghaut Range. 5. During my visit to the Neilgherries and the Mysore, I was especially anxious to extend my observations in reference to the direction of faults and planes of foliation in the crystalline rocks of Southern India. My observations in various parts of India have convinced me, that the lines of faults and joints and of the direction of the planes of foliation and cleavage, when laid down upon maps, show many very striking coincidences with the main direction of mountain chains and rivers. The following are the most important directions of fault and cleavage planes occurring ia the Neilgherries and the Mysore plateau :-— 1. From N.N. H. to 8S. 8. W., which coincides with the mean direction of the Hastern Ghauts, where the cleavage planes run generally in this direction. 110 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2. 2. From 8.8. W.to N. N. E., which is the line of the Western Ghauts. On the Neilgherries these two directions of disturbance actually meet. The former one is clearly represented by the direction of Eastern border of the Neilgherry plateau and by the Dodabetta range, the latter one by the fine mountain range of the Koondahs, which rise to the South and South-West of Ootacamund. 3. lines of extensive faults are clearly traceable on the Mysore plateau, running from West to Hast. The direction of some of the principal rivers, as the Mayar, the Cavery, &c., is connected with them. Along the valley of the Mayar the fault is very clearly visible. 4, 0 = >.> PCIE y cco sc cs os ce lee GiitO, sc 00s. ce ns raibal Gitto, .: «ees Haramook ditto,.. .. Kashmir Series, Snowy Peak, No. 1, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Ditto, Cie Ditto, (Poormandal ke Sir,) No. 12, Kashmir Series, ‘Sno 2eaevee eae ee ee 5) eseecece 9 ee eeee 3 se ee ee > eeesese ae ev eee > eeeoesn oe > efe8 oe Peak, 0.16, .... 2. a meee 19. Ok oe we ee ON es. Ditto, 22, Ditto, (Peer ke dheri), Bij ke- Sir), Ditto, (Neel) ‘No. 25, Kashmir Series, Snowy Peak, No. 26, ...... Ditto, ,, 27, Ba cons Ditto, Gi) SS oe Ditto, A) 5 caret ae Ditto, C0) ee Ditto, CO), oO ra "} YJOS p se ‘xaos gy + wd-eS-vyz, Sed-v5 “ed-ey, = 1-3-2) “11-28 “T1-ey, ‘uru ‘1ayyey 10} (qooy pue opog Ul 1-8) nSnjoy, Ul -p-u-ey, pue vyoder ut 1-3-3 OAR OM JOO! INT Ot Wody os ysnf ‘asouing Ul Y-noX pur ssauiyy ur u-ndé ‘uew 10j 3oo1 nA ayy wos Seyoday pue pimeyz, ut oyim Jo Jaqjou ev ‘nk-Vy yaa nf-ey "nA-8 Woy 9AlqRUsage sj1 Si se eyodary aind st 1ayjou1 = uleSe ni vy asoymM [ime JO 1oyjej = ‘u-ed-e3 ey, pur visseyy jo aut-ey ad-ey = out-ey ‘od-ey stui0y snowuouds ay} sey uieSe yorqa sunaedry Jo ou-om ‘od-om = A[qesysuowap oav san$u0y 98a} JO vut-G ‘ed-G¢ Joa Seu-q ‘ed-qQ snyy ‘uoyouny pur UISI10 03 se 30g ‘uorsanb ut saporsed.ayy Jo ssauauo [BIyUasse ot) 4SULESe ayeIIIIM JOU Op sasn JeIoads asa) qeuyy S19 MASTS UMOJS aq [[I4 J] ‘OMY 99 OLY = osuas aaljtqaed vB Use) oALY ‘pazi[eiaues slay masa ‘| pue vy oI) KISseyYy UT OF *9[91}Ae 1V9Y8 B OUUL Paezi[e.iauas useq OU sey ‘asuas [RUOT}Y[AI JO 4.4108 & Sulavy M pue ‘punoy fypaey ove ‘auaymasja UOWWUOD Os ‘saxya.d v3 pue ey 94) sensu0y Ue 943 UT “sunsesyy ul uowwmoo ssaq Ayoo1vos pur Bisse y Ul ojqeiedasul ysomye oie ey pue ey sjusteammba sq1 pue ‘xyoid siyy, ‘aatjom pue Joyiey == vul-~) ‘ed-q ur se ‘xyoad arjnonae Aavuipao ay 4nq ‘ames ayy you st xyoud a) 14 eya Yemsung pure ing up ‘yarpy Ww pue pig 38 SoyON dog *]MOJ 10J psOM OY} WO1 paallop USIS d11ouss AreUIO\sNO 943 SI ITBjeEq pue SUOIOYOT JO BM JOA BM YG eg *sansuoj NO YIM ATaAIQUa sa0.18e 9SOUlYD sjosdsar asayy Te Uy ‘euay eyyo nueyy ‘10 ‘nuew euy eynO Aes om Hema ur se Ajestoaid uew e = oy yeh unk go ‘unk oy yi og ‘Sundyy ueyg aousym ‘omuu ssdoid e ‘Sundy_ ‘uiequnow — beUS SUL “TetomNu 94} YI papus[q eq 10 oUOTe purys 41 JoyjaYyM si1] pue ‘pexyyns 10 paxyaid aq ABU USIS o119Uag oy) joey UL puke Sjuesvoyd — rey-uryg jo yey) UI se eOURISUL SIY} Ul WSIS OLlauas Be YONUE sv yor] UI aq ley Ysnoyy ‘ased jo yarw oY} SNUIME 4sIY Sa0S oaljiuss 943 ‘83a s |Moy ano ex] punodwod wv se payvaiy Suleq ‘spi0m om} 94} 194 Je} VAJOSqO puew : UN[-iey [OA UB-1ey soueym ‘83a Joy saweu oyioads ayy 04 Poppe ST [MOJ — Tey 19UURTA OHI] UT “ourA ¥ ‘nys reynog pure ‘aldepy e& ‘nys Sung sousym (xyoid arqnop 84} Ssof ‘pioM 1mMq amo) 9a13 = NYS Os[e O§ “quesvoyd v ‘1ey-ueYg aouaya ‘[M0j—=1ey OsTe og “MOI —= yOoS}-ve puke pAlq == yoas sny yz, ‘oueu Suedsueg ay} yy Teorquapt st (ee) oweu oyloeds ay) a9A0010 Ula1aqA “osoulyD Ul se Ayostoaid 41 sapavead moso soy auieu oyieds any Pue Spilq ][@ 10J USS Sse[o 944 SI Og JOA 7d PA BAN “J9TNIA PxOm 04} 3B aJ0U Baq ‘USIS d119U08 943 Jo a[dwes JoyJOUR say BaRYy 9A eo, ~SCGRLA SES See S Se e >" e eee Ing Ipusw—nyiIy ayeul jo ‘usis ieSeyyg népory] -ueyQ "40.9 Bies- ,uByyO eqiyarya| (cats | TpuUg TV ase] Bq) equal Bled Su0g pury jeoH vu ey ¢ nky -sed w1e0f ew) Byouyyy) aa nhq¢ ‘ee vip eueqd euyyO; eng vemvyg) = efng ‘eq Bue ulead nyo Turyy “TIN 9-SI AT eqyo BSR. | vyoeqaquyo Bayoeyooyy) afyouasyo yy ‘oAWoqsaIN) vayoRyqormryy “PU ORBY YOU) Bqyovyyoyoo yy] vsedeurmmuuipy “SUL “1WEL mp *du09 calc emg ems BMISUIS)|seg ‘ses-woqg sesdog Iseyg ISBYOWO) eSI Sug ‘es zi-rYQ ‘Iseqo SUG IyoIs ying vuyoyd suey jsyey— marq suvry TAs} = nx ‘qua vuvyd tery) = euyoyd yey Suyjecme J, Sa] = Suey) wq-10"0y 3004 PM Ud Y idieg Oe eM BM eM UMN ; Pu pUuly THOT sung eumsung BUN va-tng ea-Sung ‘Sung sunyg sung sung JMOL vig) as) ¥S| WSIS ‘ued vg 94 ysl Bug oun our eur Buy yseuy BS BUD ee al Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 354 eyyoins -ueyo vu s)|-uvtn odj0.14) eqyoies afyon ekyon -ueyo evyquy| -dednod yo15 eqyoreseqyy yoleg way Bpouy ‘Suvjnmyng y ed “ANd BM-BULUT () Suyymy) ‘Suey, AUTO en ies Bsa -fyonod 4o1y 4o1eQ) Tu @] OM By nqung “nqunpy jOO1 8} — eq wey v10qy su01ys Od wvydy Suoyp- leyy mol yd wesnuesoc(y “WesIBW LE) -eygo emu |nAposs mem 1e3 “vyqo eqquiq| wXpors ded “ypubung “huyoyy of£yonod-j019 eyyouses eqnodn eyo = j-equyiwut eu 1weye VI wekary nu |-Suvqyo emup|-lmeqiyim vuy|-IpuaWo vUNUTy|-W >) “eur |-esuoS (omy)| ayes pry vsed : ofqonod-j013 eyqoules eryyodn eqyo |-eqnyyiU “ ed BMLIL-BI dekdy ndg|-sueqyo edug}-rmeqiyym edp| -rpuamo edmy|-up ‘ednadmg '-esuos (ody) g[eu ply eyooedweq eyqo |-yAE “eq feyeluE ofyonod-yorp| -eaed-Sueqyo] -dn-rreqiqytyy VYOI-1pusyy| esedeqnyiti]| -8j¥-e1esu0g puly-pry IPs 4g "198 mpd ryo yedyo ryo- yedq TeAs Wag Ee ae as “By OCU. beste RAN AY ‘oqunupy|-mMQ = ‘1uIqeyuqd 1u,dep wo equa, ota cas edny eyo-uUe AA puegsn yy yool e&} — eq mh, ee eB TST ULB | TH mune gsnoEr BUINIMU LE) owe epoysy| edmok ingg ‘¥g ung ‘Ua epoyy|‘edniduwy ‘u,qjody ‘epoyy| puLy-es1oyy uss Suey, ‘suey Suoly) O19 ‘“su0ID| Tey ‘aey Lsuejeg|usd eg = *esUIG}usty U10Y S.199q SU-O1-4|9u0q 998 WIOFT OM ‘Od vad ued Wd) Seq Wed “ka Og| = pul" SoH nydnay ‘nw Bue BURA “BM CUT VUIR AA “yg ‘mysyg|-eMMA ‘eMEM|eUIO-BA “vUIBA|-MT ‘eM eM! ‘em dnimE A) BqoUY “vq ded 5 Bun YO] -W) ‘eM Sur} “WV ‘suoug ODYAAL Or qARL Suv y|-Suin * Youyyey ehtg pee yey swe yey suie aeqy} euvqd-yny) = eat joydnyy| = Yu-emmey)! = emyoyd- yn «u091qN) pueH (peoy = = | Aa ye} prey |(peoy—e}) wes Sunjq |Suv}) emynyd jpueyje pesyyo | qe peey jo WOSH *‘Wnsog|-nuey “eM-ny| Tey ‘vusey)|-suey, “SUNY | ULI ‘eusepisung ‘weyd dey 4ous B1RS BUN wekwy) ‘nup|-sueyyo vmuy aie VUIUL| IpusMO VUL,W]|‘eqny]A eUU | eIRssUOS OMY] sTRWEZ YvOF) ede yn 4013 vies | 9X1] USIS ysey] B vednidw yy dekdg ‘ndp/-sueyyo edug}eq ‘equyyrm ed) rpuguio vd,wy} evqnyyyut edu) ereSSuos ody a]eul yRoyy "wang bundiuny 10)0G *Huoyyorqun'y *huoLoyoT “phbhbuyvg ‘ysybug s 355 —o Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 1857.] ‘elute ‘emsun ‘siq ou-e ‘fq) ou-1 ‘Au vm-e nde jeuog pue edn nhepy — seq "SIT PUTCUN code ‘ed v os soyjom Aue oxy Sraqjou Am ep x "SUSIS O110UaS OATJOadsaI OY} SUIoq JINIjJ — Is pue ‘;MoJ = em S1otJOUR JOM , UTEJULeTd ,, pom ayy pue aidurs 19yj0ue sqjuasoid ..$%9,, pIOM UJ, (jequesso pure [euioUu Ajyenba sisyqj0 ysow oyIT) UOWWIOD si YOseds JO SopoOM VIILIART, JO DAsliojoVIBYO [BJUaTUBpUNJ siqy Jey} ‘[lejop ul ‘Umoys oq Ajjuaserd [IM 3] OMI, WOM yy yo1e) wep eu) Bor. BINED) “we BAS yy euadtp ] eseu BUlu /) snu We fy) vseu vyqmy) snu ded vsen sun Byorquies elney peseug o-ng epoys euUy)) vioys Meus) Sd BUOATT Bq, Seq Bull Use 1eyP IA sesdeq suv] 1eAg weg ‘noyuy wmeyeyy veyd-ung)-eg “suedeg sunud | yoieg Ayaon -omipig W-Oy ‘mom y qa.1eg we -AuiQ, ‘medi “nymeduny nT] snu we kor snu dedd NSyxNN “sSQNy elnry ny-ng ‘o-ng epoys wvAu ys) aq, Se] sey TRACT eg Puy “ed = ‘ardeg oyd] ofyo “nod iptieqg, visdeyg|-emeq nyo deyy our) ek rnyq nyd-yex emu) "eI eUl-(—) “BIN ey ey uedod emmy) suvqnd emus tedod eda y sueqnd edq tedog suvqug Byo-suery BMvy Bsidd Bsoud epoys emmy und ‘euwmad Tnyg emg ‘uak EMO eddey3 eyyoyoe A, “PM “BdyeqiE A ‘ld BUTT OU “C 1qd eur deq-Sunny ve? wey] suv] Bussey y BM YO-WIRNT equeg Wa =“ yvqsuig§ eqyo | eyqodn ipayg ‘eyyqord epoyg ‘Spuv]s! oy} pue vuUlyQ-opuy ‘edelemipy Sjaqiy, Jo sasensury SuLmMoqgysiau ayy [[e YIIM VsauIyD 03 "SUIvAS [[@ JOJ USIS D1taUeS oY} SI SP1OM JO Salias yxou ayy Jo vf [9A BYD ayy SB [[O4\ SB ‘Sol1as SIT} jo [Ruy vs oY], |, *J001 BYOVS ‘TU-eYO-B[RMS PUL BYO-SU-IM SIOMSUB RS-1E AA || "poom as ‘yxARU d119UIs Sug § oem ul poyeodar eye = ode ‘puly pry 10 Spry Ino = y10q “Way 1mB\e SHU ey YW Tf *ysoy sos ‘HAvU OLiauad VG 4 ‘sfemye jou xujns eu pue pojqnop pe se ‘yoyd pus meq x Is-B ns-Sueg STN “eUr} eq-Ipe'y sueqny o vumuay suvqny o edwy suvquy oqmes vhog Bpoys-o-vmMmWy TOUR ad Wyo oH Ae TN, SN rey eT] suey nk avy y yeqdey BYYoL epayg BX, nakg| qIno TW nySuOy ‘“wegnySuoy ‘ay199 UlezUNO IAL eu “W) “FL VI] OW 4 OW JOO JA vT eT uo0oW suvqnd eum “BOON.AUO UA) 910M OW VW *y AayUOy suevqnd ed ag ‘edniduy siow ody| seu Aayuoyy Sueqng of100y *a10py| pury-Aayuo yy ayuvg plreyo|(Opoy) seTltN whl Blvseg|-Uey) J] [TAL RUIN ITU) (1uBs ] ‘usvpoys emu} epoyH omy a1eyl edsueyy “VM ‘eddeqjeleep] — |lesivay ev UB ‘aapRe ania TAN "qd wormdex |is eep rnp ‘udex ‘eurAeuq = "NN) = Puly-uePAL Teyeypy| owom afar EVAUH INE suv] 1O"M Sa] Spm ‘950M- WBN CNY a 957 Arq *,eqsuig| eyd ys oydog jvor] 9044 BY BIUT vsedepayg -vje = Bpayg que 1S 5) Zi tc Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 356 RMyOY eg ‘euyoy “Ul [YC On Maik Favs $PM~ YOURS qo.1eQ oulpig epteqg ‘oqnyodeny nyo, den | may TRY Una wna way] Ue ad | DOP Tay mae] vULOF VU-SUOFT) VM-BYy “OL Ny |-suoFy *emoyHoTy "yeuseyg Jas-ag| aefg ‘104g BIIg Biseyy | euaq-nyo -deu eduq 321¥%)| owipip ded yn \eptiayq deid gq “edaqnyowre xT x18 VUH Isyvusay] Isvusory Ise] yur BABY ou vhy BuO Vd reqq td 1d eu sun -Asey = “Sun vu-dyy, eqqovN Bquyovy/-Aseyy “Sueseyy sun vddvy, vyyoudg vqyovd)-Aseg — “Sueseg Ban UY | ee eet Bae MUL le ol “nyyBy yw sy weuas /) wefuesy), edeswpq ‘edag Suen Suen suen TeN euney ewms,u0y Suoy edeg jedeg -eq = ‘Wey-1,y07, ‘ypubung | “hupyy ‘TUN "bupdbuys soa ee JJAOD ysep +.youes Y4eq == ULys 901) nfs OURS] Yop BM-,HoqNS OY Sulg|-YOy ‘1s, YOY epaug vpayg epeya vpeqd eASUNpP — 1Ue AT Req wnt wnAlRaes] = “ca “ISAO wer] oquipyinyd- wey ‘wey wipe] wesy eusuoyIg ‘em jjo Suoqiq eul-, Su0F] VfeM|- SuoyT ‘ea nA) e-oyy—ojny vig yeseqo BIg 119g ed epoyg epayq eduy “epouq ed O/-epayq 9 edmy) epayq edmg) epayq ody ou 10 poppe Isel yeu NQ-VBUH iis — .yeu-suvyo| = Tyonuery ‘Sue eweyg yek-eyg wmryg Bing Md Wd “Ud Id sug yul-deyy, ONY BT vu,deyy yur-BUy) SUaIS XIS _ SOSJOA -o1 eS-BUl es-ed = pue pojvod BS-1eM =pue -O1 X9S 4001 is tu 8} SBM ed-deqd |npy “eqnyeg ed deyy|e} os ‘em-eur Bey eily BM] em-Bio eyodary dvues | yo eS,unq, B1198) equog "pqmasy aiedtwod = fuag| — *1qovusndy Suen SUIN SUIN 3UIN I iL | ahd “Bu yNSeY S| ~=em-Su08-Suoy ‘YJ vunsnyg)-1g *jaddnag “YPIVA "buoyyoiquy'y *Au0Loy oT vhbburypg UIyS pury-daays MOpeyYs Sapeys Hes peoy IOAIY [neyo 10 s01y Wey uleyuel Appeg puly-xO ueWOM PIO uett DIO 10 Wy SINN OUBNT oynbsnyy ‘ysy bug 357 y of the Kirdnti Languages. e Vocabular: 4 4 mp Comparat 1857. ] PMVY wnpPy BM-YeqQ ud uety -yoyoury quiy nd-%,urg sury euqrol xPtiq Ays em 3 NOYYO we NT yed euro) vpoys vyquisy vuuss-dueg BYOVTOAT BUSH AN dvyyond wen f ‘cunde ryoig fuindy Sunyg ‘unde Surg ‘Suryeq wndy ‘O}NIP AOMO_ ySueqt Sunygd ueyd Surpyord poo ipsuryt Surg jo04 oywjod iy ededs ‘saojejod = vdefg ‘s}004 yy ‘s}IM4J TG ‘89013 Og ‘TS-1RM paas Sj] ‘Od-1¥M = JO “1034 5nep —= Tul vy ‘uos = emMy} pur BI, ‘Teg IWeMON = salt 31 se [10s st qsaigq § ‘raded raqyo 998 ‘Ysa — es Syxaeq yoy Surs ‘u1ys you $ ysopy ves Susis o11ouas eg 4 *poqeredas 97311] B@ puovag Aen) PA “Pun UX ny Diy ieee I?d 12d OL ? Bin yy WBAROTIS) Svs nA. yey yy 4 od-wy9 vsye dud nysdoy ‘suvs-dny, nyeuD| OLsuy ‘ory avy aosN IOAN edry WRN Ute Ny] edtiory eyq ew wont mony Suny Suny eduias] suny -unyg ‘eduad eioys dedgq| vpoys de{d yg tunyd edag Ie3-Suo0g 193-Su0g tino3-surg akyorduiey, ofyoogsey) vyyouqyoqor qoirg WOT Jarrg Bud ud Md aN. OU GS TRON beak Ae p> Ue NL }QOQ TUG UL. yun VM-suny Udy, Jole)| ust AIT | *[ej959A = epuag, epuiay Ug S09 y Bqnoy WweN ewo Lut “WUY) *wUN-Hoyy)- 1G “eq LUO eM OF NY] uak vd oO vmUld-Sung yyoudyeypie aa “eyyodeqae A be Ga = Nd wyN "TIRMONT BUT-IeIpD “em-eag ‘eut-1g ‘UL LIVMON £ BITRJaSIA — 115ue} Sued ojejod — od-w-iyy vdeds pHuUpuny S ‘OIP UNay Saez est ‘ssess 1 surjz ‘UBMON BU = vITejosea = suey, + ‘yas uns wAT) weu fasod UNS BJO] WR NT K "e] @ ‘uos siq § ey n Suos Aq { 3 eA Suos APY || *l eSuly ‘ypubung suoug eaets| odyng odyes mery Uy, esouang ey OM-VT, “NEY, oduyye x me nay odug x “Auyvy yy | | Sued epry es dle ea mm 2 (ar be aS sued eley y ya PN: © OSB EN CoN ‘mi suod Sued-ey[ vy = Suom By; ng “‘OqeyyL TY, ADL suoMyg Sued ey] ey ‘sucnyg]|-euy = ‘oqeyvuy ifeuyy dued ey vy wAqg)eq — oqeyyey ery Sued vy ey nd yns|-ung iyo wns ayo- sung Sued e] nd yes jest “149,98 ayo, 11H gsouing B) VM-By, “Ney, Sued pe odwuyywe jy |-epyng odwmeyueyy, way ure odiuuy wy ee ‘un fu ey] /-Sueqoun 4ny,4] TOAUILYOOY Y TWIT YO -OF9 TA *Lui- WYO fh wi1yo WLYO-OF-9A) “OY “wUIYOT LUNUUy 1U- Wy nawy WUTULUy me ULORID ve ‘bupd- burg ‘PDE “yeu 0G nz7eq -W0-1 “y G6 03 (Sued-ax ‘1yo-9X -JPq-WWO pa sny Sues -u0d QT pue 6 \UN "19-0N qyjoq uy = “sued sued mo jo Jajneu -dny ‘iyo-yny nyjed = pue 1y sueq mo = tuorisod |-euyy ‘TYOBUy -WOo Wt 2 =. sueq-vyT “avy ngyeddi Og} 1yory "LYOrrT “§ pue Sueq |‘ ‘suedwng ung "Iya wWNg ‘u ‘1yo-wuNnS sued |*y pue tu ‘surd “apy. yo, qorA]-duyy *u “qo, qor ry Sjrpuiue ‘Ajuo vata Surq = |pue ssuigy ‘oy WL. TuNYoes] TULUA LIOR YR Py “"uR- UHR TAT BYABYIOV *puUryour fF) WUYORsy *wUTYO BqyoV|-eqAL ‘yo wy) : myULUe yy vyylueuuey y “1 -WeUUe Fy weulue py lueUuLe ly WBUUG FL “UW Y ‘Huoyyarquoy | ‘buo1oyoT U gl |oeoq oy SoNYaA|SuOMY *suoy eh Wysigg iu ueyD WaAdg | XIS ou) DAL 97] Inoy Wes SEPAth § ISIN OAT, [Je pasuvyoun |‘g ‘q ‘sg susis d1u3uas UG suo uo -Su0 NY “AY -BUIB SY UE -q-O N0-UG o7q| (end ‘satay, My. ‘ayeepmaieyy| peanid “urayy "org “11 te | "u0og "T at paxiw ‘|g OBE IGT ON sylUy 0731Q} feanqd sano x lu] yeanyd Sano x —_ ‘phbh-buypog ‘ys bug 361 nit Language. cird Comparative Vocabulary of the A 1857.] Surdeyesiy ‘uemm auo vulw Suedeyyng “speurue [[# Jo os pur sauoo ¢ id-tpeyues ‘soo Z 1d-tpesiq ‘Moo T 1d- ine ‘gsmoo g ‘moo [| Surd3ueg ft ‘orm Sour | ‘uoul Suvq : sjetaiue pur ssuiyy Lyo f90Y aay oY pesuvyoun ny + ‘JoynauU oie sjewtue ‘A;UO UAT A0J Surg : AaNeU St “4Sat 1OJ IYO ‘UO AOJ IT x 9.18 Ar) | SA ld 1a) la Px Iq) ugyideyg ‘Id 7d Iq ‘eq| ‘e1og Iq) IgA, ‘UT IY} ssouling IPuryAl ‘N jou SLue-eyy |: sr you your); = Byy-Sueyy ‘oulyjueyy| = UBL“ pueyyl SuIppetn Iyosur yy 5,UIPP tn Tyy-UBIA| UIs “MONI A -efxy Sup urepy sunt] st you Suen "1d tq] CIM = “!49d eM ‘Td 1d sun] a SuDN Sonn} wo ‘yay V VY) 89 ‘V Vv Buy vu ok “a ty) sasar Ag og SUIP oy [euosiad ‘uo0AT Burg] ‘sueg bites ele BNld Iq ‘sueg Suoyeg, ‘suvg ‘savg Suig| eoo] ‘worg ois ee oes ee oe ee ee ee oO (Apjounl : ‘ -sIp — pasu vy Buy usya ydeoxa wy ‘Ig Od od TIN WW WML eu TT) (099!) HN P89IMO) “9M jo *998 12 saoyq [eYy wary pney -odyys = yey odyes [eq yf, ney | -jeyyueypey,’ req “neyL, “(eT “ney- Teqs | weype sa 'Z, 9a8 "US [Te Suod,dj| jy ‘u ‘wu Suoddy y (4) weq q-1= Z ino Sued d-t 9100S Suod 8,uodd]|¢ — Suse ouy wnip Suod- a vuy| joy-1yord IN suod .1y yoked iNT wnkp 103 Suog wine|-suiswe suo S t | Suoqd IN| Suise,SuoMy doy ‘dey ‘oy ‘suod,d] Sued Sug iy OL Naed-n} |-Susg “1yo-Suvg mnfp joy nao aatjoo(pe st sunou Z JO IST poipunyyT Ay Aylog AQUI L Aja J, Udy aun eee Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 362 vé-ngny 118d 1qva “wa eau} = tqiyddit.o ow-yoyqysuy vyny aa s| BAT, vAlq ob: CLAD. | 1qeuy yecy “DI “phodvy Iqueye x WA igyeusiquy “1qey 98-V a SIU sungd-vuyy B-psiq I-V oyehuy weUlY 01949H weysQ oTqe Leys] vuseuy Bfyoug "dyoug iL ‘ypubung | ‘buynyy ofoyy "1eqouy odaoqmy nf eqyed 1d rqeq te idvimmy! yoy “iqeyfe BIPADA 1und-nyy mod YM py BeANL 1UBIIN nN qe id-vyy|suedey “iqudey iqmeyex| BAdow ciuayy| Dhol “1q0qK Iqaz} !don ‘vidon; nsoy ‘Iqoy 1yseuy vdoqi-V BU-9 X vi sig VUELOS BUUlaS jokuy 989 X UIST] OPH oll’ A opma per O19 /lOUM *opoJ0y NT o1VoPUN OCTOYT] C[FOM *O[00 ousoyy ofay, "MAT, "ny-049 idoyyo nyyideyg “2un ‘bupdbuns "NPIDE nyd-Su9 pqrun yy |ideany ager ia PIN-9 9" ADGA ¥[- 07 V|aptsyno] ‘gno §ynouylLAA *9q7-SU0G} 400 $31 ‘aquiny|ep-najy ‘of; Vv UL U10}30q sj bi ‘ouamynyy|andy tnkey OWL “NI ip akidy OL ‘“Npmayy) WA “naydSuo0g "n4,4e A ‘ip nfal ¥ aujop|odue py ‘oqsue yy eyes ul 4eyy ‘ndTyeyy | aeET "oy ORO = “NAL PIN *82PHAN sy “Ary 249K WN “OqQUN| “MAIST ‘aqoSy|"ex, “aeye UL SIU afs-y|fep yeyy Uasy| ‘Wasy ‘ras-y 1] UIeURG WYsu yeyy zas-e|¢ AVp yysra SUE AA Bp-Bua A TAL 2 WOOT 4eY3 1° H niy Bay Bulqmey;|weuery *meuy euvin J euoy AO “you vuopuy|-RPA “BuO; yoy Buoy yew» weuy BuBuy [ouooy *aw1} -YOlOST ‘you jeuoyy siyy AHO , you, Sopziad ‘vuoyyor nuryidsuo py eu ‘nmamynyy|-ug ‘epndepy aqsurry ‘aqyog npmay|idsuog ‘nyjaA\| eaney, *210], ‘BuoyyorquyyT | ‘buosoyoy | ‘vhbbuyng ee ee useMjoq a[ppiu uo ‘MOOT mojj0q uo] aaoqgy do uo | g 104 S19, a10 ff Aepiaysa x MOJIIOU-0 7, Aep-og, ¢ UOT AN qry ‘ust y, qef ‘uay Ay MON qyeou -3q ‘lapuy uodn ‘ug ‘ysybug y of the Kirdnti Language. wwe Vocabular: Comparat 1857. | ‘Ny []@ siOo1 yeqiaa forsaqaIg ‘ey-eay ‘eyW-1g © ‘ayey for-ig Z ‘Wey ‘-Ig aM0d 0} OYD-NX ‘du su0d 03 oYs-ny amog Bijeus ‘yxoeq oF ‘uo OK ‘0M Id ‘jaAaT UO BMD Suryyo oA-Suny Sueyyo) Sunn ‘On 0}: WeyA| xu | OIN -ald eq yog xyyns ‘J ‘xyoid vy MOS “of “URN te-e IK vq SsuBsyowy ‘9D “Ue-Tey) PaLUy “9D ous-om (Omid) oaeas-wak ul amoy Buel IQ? IN EEN § twoydwa yy 03-au3] woyduey way, 9qoH 9108 9QoUL,T, BUl-WeUINY TyoIYoV aysiu Suvry9N “9N wvydan “huey “Suvyy| = Bdn-Ayy vh-eqy | vh-3u0y-01y) eh-089 OX UBS VA ae | TIN eN xygns ‘is xyoid ‘eiy = “*xyead ‘ueyy 9-OTN puvn Busuy vuty|sunyyouy "aX ounde yy 1d Tex tusydweay oye}-UB woydmay, 21,0 9q°H a1qed eqouL! OAK °091,0 ofyoiqu eqqo- ns, vusiqa| Imqnk ‘WeN ndyyo snquo su0in tejdoyy ‘ey-ny ¢ fay-ny Z ‘-ny aud [ ‘om-n& umop ewog ‘om-nfk dn swog ‘em nf ‘umop smog "sueX ON ‘omid BRB “NO aUI0L) -em ny ‘dn smog ‘aully == youoT L suosard Seyy-1g ‘ok-ey ‘atig 3 ‘eus-ey 4a0 eus-ig ny ¢ fak-ny Z feuS-ny ‘dn awoo 7 ‘om-id ‘je Jase, UO BWOD *OM-VI ‘aMI0D ‘omid oleMs wy Sul auog ‘omer ni-jepy Sdn oxy ‘Ig ‘ey ‘NK ‘umop ‘ous-njs (oad) vpoye wah ‘no ‘suiyegq § ‘OMB] BYIOU SOMET ‘ome! nd-vp Sumop ox ‘oW1y == BUDO] » oq “OIG La Ge a 8 | (pioM 33 Joqyye Uu $9.10j BN |-9q Sue) u—suy xyut ‘IN xygns ‘uiyy eueus-9H} av “BUvIN eusoy ax oF LA Buy y, ody Bqy-apusy uRU ® y ns eatqoalpe SU0S ‘BS OX! Os[y Suog OX) puy sAlitq /a RIN; = -tyoud Won xyoad Suey xugns “in lepy =‘ oyyaq| earqtumad ‘on Ja.1B.) B- YB; aaljesou ‘ony 9A ORT BOA Suogyue py BYy1 Ie IN *ISNUU-SUBULT "OYD AR ¢ ATM af 30UE moyyeg) = ANT IVT A yoyury oyyey ¢ MOL yeuy pue oyy ey jaatqztsod pure vdyopoy, Byy ‘eyy-231"N| YOp-opT ‘HOpy|AvmsiqqgoyyaR]| *ja1100 ‘snqy, *3}30N youy-ope yy, OUI ‘[91109 ‘0G 10IUK TN] oyy4ey "Jaa sy opyoidy qoirg BA-YO oystg| ¢ youu MOP] owdoyy yonw os "eM UY yonw se o1ynd AEQoupeg Ad “As-aqq oyrA you ANqyoo OAT OW SI IY TYo-B aT asrq j001 sur} Iqung BION YO] you-Suvy |-Surn "UaN ‘uqy-5uaN IvaN OWley, yorsury os “OM |4RE “RQRig Ie yy Sey easy “Ipeasy opis ninksyoH aq Yo] nfissuopHlay episuy s9y |-ur “ur Sarat [No. 5) nti. Language. wd ei Comparative Vocabulary of the wi 364 as-nig as Wy] ausny, ayooul aA yn 18,10 ¥ re oX-,Sunky, akoyg Any ‘“od-nde¢ Suvyyoseg Ssueqyoiy, Osi], 05] 9H ‘rpmbuneg of-Ing of surly BS Suey, ee wey Qa BusumO J, 9A! | | bunpuy eyo" TUrYyo- BsIqy) [eantq *IN) yeuq = "tyo) eSnyq) “Ur mpo-waqigy “[Rany | ‘wu esdy ‘jeug Iswy| “iyo esdy ‘esdy gles ‘unu veuondg ‘jeEnq nyo nu e e pe aucUly] -onG§g nuotG ‘q Sulu vyon ‘q@ ‘yo eyony eUODA ‘q ‘uly enog "@ {y9 Bod [Od |-e80g ‘gq ‘uru eyody ‘q ‘iseqody ‘vul-y "eyo dy ‘q ‘uu vusng ‘q ‘1yo vused ‘OUSNG( |suseqT, “vUSNyL ‘d “a esiy Ta ‘tuts ‘g ‘142 esiy ay tq ‘eyo auRyoT -ayp] royo aieyoy] "ESIYakOyOT “avyorA|-shy “ods osty) *q ‘tu es0g °9}}9 050g | aoe ‘ojua[sog =| aulyeq ‘u80g| ‘a8og ‘ouayO|'asyog ‘ox0g *q ‘iu es suv wy *q ‘iyo |-my ‘oyoosdy] "Tq Soudy “BSW ‘BSW oyjomMy ‘amy|'q ‘asdy ‘od dy auusun(d ‘ayoosun(y ‘q ‘wnueu |a-sunq 9} ‘Iq Souny, -Snuyy, ‘q ‘nyo |-jaut yoyo ey ‘d ‘asuy| . =! . Qe a ajjem Sung o-Sun} ousny, { | "iq fwunu vyg ‘qd ‘wnu es ou 1eYO "Iq ‘ou ee ‘Teng ‘nyo oyg ‘q ‘um eyg [-eqg ‘q ‘nyo ‘ayo ley. «| eng ‘es e¢ nit ougta igo RYO “O4D, Kesey "Youp ‘oh-oyg ‘eeyD] ‘omer ‘omeg 9339 Ul ofnks Suvs vsy ouBsy BYUSIC|[RsNVD Suvs-vSV afnks OA-SUB fA] sus UU suvy-1 Byyoly Suvs-suvuly oABie pl BUSWI A)! ud Buy vAIU Suvwy Ble IN nig ‘osnks) qyvsy ‘eBsy BSVY ‘OleSV BU0-99 vSV nag “nag wo iy eusoyy SOUS, “ysoUy yopuy, joieg| yeqy = wayy BAIVRSO1IO} nig, usy ojesy ‘es Su0-ag qairg|-ur ‘neg “nds euswey “tk “Wey vu OV Wale A “BK "IWOJ “SOHOPT = “ONOTK O-OJN| POVVUO K “BuO X OW Way ‘wes . WE yu ‘eusMay “Wap -sOYON “OYON 9-0 YOlVN “@N OST] wax 9A 7a NV OCS EG fast et ung) bupdbuys YvIvgr ‘huoyyoiqun'yT| ‘buosoyoT ‘phhbuyng | SU ee ee SS ee \ one AL daaj\g quid sO § Kpoq Auy Ssuiyy Auy é HUM ‘QAI{RSO.A19}UL EYOIT[A.10 OTT AL, "19.1109 Soya 10 OY AL BAI}BIII ‘qyoryas 10 OU AK WH, mr Te ead ‘SL l Oo “ys bug 365 Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 1857.) pooS jou ‘tu-nu ‘ pood st siqy ‘nu-oS1 { poo’ st 4vq3 ‘nu-oyy ofl ‘oA-Suvdtg Ata ownywyy 299U sae | LAD afeydoqour jy oq-30 aheusig ¢ aunt oAnyywyry ayovuy oA-doy ayo-ou yy BPE ey0uy . oan We ees Mf Iq) “yu-yo—‘uvrg *huoLoyoy ‘phbburyvg ‘poos jou sijeyy ‘nou ew wom {poosd st sty} “nou WAR y d nu ‘gq nyo "qd Suu Seatg emmy) u-tye—‘esnyqg' 1uU-1qo— opyymyy tg = “eunpuey ¢ - PIN) «= aeIyo— gan yo eydry) — ru-1yo—edry ayyoouy) u-1y9—"ywY Nd) yu-1yo—"eueg @ Mag Coed BAN}-TBAW 1B AA eyouy) ru-1yo—‘edeqy ny ‘“eusigig suryo “suvarg ‘d “uu euryg °q ‘iyo TuU-1y9— “eu “Buyyd) §=¢ [esneo ep ul ‘q ‘uu vung ‘q ‘1yo vung Tu-1yo— ‘oq ‘ewng)| eumory ‘eueyg ‘q‘ulu esnfog | *g ‘iu vusny ‘q ‘iyo esnd "q ‘iyo ‘esnk- yoqieusnx “Buonx ral ‘Ulu eyodax ‘q ‘igo ey od aX ‘eqak “oda x |-oX ju-1qo-eq *Bpuo] xog ‘d ‘uiuep | ‘gq “a epeqyy 1D) Me @ Me tC “a ‘iyo “epoyy epeqyyepeyy *peqy ‘qd ‘ulu eq "qd ‘ju vq “eq ‘ag ‘yo |-equg “a ‘yo eqeq "equd\equyy, ‘equal, ‘d ‘ulu esnyyng | ‘g ‘iu e8 ang *q ‘Tyo Bsn] "gq ‘iyo “IN —“SNYN|es oyQ *esayp *q ‘uluusjoM “7 “aU Pate) Oe een a ‘YooJaMNYOIYD | *1t]9 UeU.sON,, *JoM-RYOIYO “UvU- ayo UT ‘q Sulu veqeay ‘d ‘u eqey "@ ‘iy9 eqeyuyT | ‘q ‘yo equ "eqryy > *BqEH SURE "qd ‘auly) ayo— "g ‘esI9 ‘ayq ‘austq| “oaory au e—|‘*g fou URAL | ayoa— *q ‘ays auIg]-URAA “OUR A\| au v ‘qd ‘auryemyy | eyo ——— ‘q ‘ays | “SUN PUL] |-eM 5) ‘OYBMH| 2001 10 HBA oue—| ‘gq ‘oulsiN[ ayo— *q ‘949 ‘augg|-SIN ‘OAS *q fourdey ou e— *q ‘ays eyo—|- dey °0s kue 0} IS) OW 03 } asp uny UMOP HIS dn purys op amo, ‘asod-aK ‘aqax|-suoyq ‘odvy ‘door ou e— "gq ‘eseT ayI—/aaoqe aas “opeyy) ‘om-vry ‘OvrT sue—| ‘|g ‘au lg asyo—| ‘q ‘aS Ig SUP ela ee ‘Id ‘ouryeag ou e—— *q ‘as ayo—— |-yraMgq ‘oy ‘asNud-wne J |-emg “oy-,yog|1aqgn ‘u ‘yRodg ou ea ou 1YeMQT ayo ‘aS YRaqyT O83 n-SUO ‘(aus aq} ‘aja N-SuoK | |g pue ‘q) ‘ad-nyoigg} — foyaaqeqr] ‘Id ‘eury ouvgeyyT j-ouy ‘gq fas ‘ayo—|-youy, ‘OF *OqRA|-WPAN ‘oyOUN UsTIs og daa my B au weso doyy, : *g ‘ek manu *q ‘okeus F epmoq, “o pw, ‘a “ato “q ‘ou 4) yoy 3 ‘fapoaepueyy, |felyo spuety, *9}U2[- OU, ‘q ‘as 4 'g ‘epucyy} “g “epueqy, epueyy nye nqj}9y,L| e}0[doy += "eqoy ‘asodayy | YoY *04-YOY dn vy *q ‘of wnu ns *q ‘oAtu -sunk ‘qd jipuvag “dd - ‘arqois,SunX |‘eryo epueny “q ‘ou te a ‘s ‘es Sung| © ‘g ‘apuguy nA “ny, ns-nX nSs-y0 Bs-Sun Xk aS-HNA |g ‘es if ‘ope uAMOp nT Ss SSUIQ] oWeqy = f'9U WRZQaYYyeT S ‘d ‘eAsutu "q ‘okvus a "ayo oyyoqy ‘qcaayy =e SPU a — Put ‘d MOGI fel “aqgeqyey [ey ‘fas | ‘alyo opeyy =| ‘atyo 039eN "sSutag (993943 ‘oS pue |g eq oloy eS ‘g ‘ak-eyy| © ‘g"enedy 2}043] n&- (ey yy 0999UTE AYO “eqVG | «= ONeZ Fonaqey| ey fr okjey heme oyuy, < au = *medepey ke “q ‘aku “ayo — ‘q ‘ou yy na “nu Sel, “a ‘d ‘okeus caddepuy id "a ‘as 14 SS ‘oryoom Bey, |-Tg ‘q ‘erya nddep ‘gmoo pue jig 407g > ‘g‘em-5UTiq "§ ‘epld opld nd-yygi-Suex ‘nddeg ey-deqy| 23%) eee ‘owy = *OANEY Sug “eqaey > ‘ou Wed 3 ~ ‘gud a1ag —*ag nS "gq ‘eXuanu | 1g ‘efeus 9g “jou pas [esneo |g ‘au 17 Bg S Jag *q ‘alyo |jeng ‘1y9 eg Si] *aip ‘arts | ‘q ‘ays I apag *g ‘apag] “Surg ‘apag apag NyIg DES BIBG] JO [SMO “epeg 13 vg OES TM 2 eu WRU OF ae ‘gq ‘eAuinu ASL ORESOF ‘= JON ‘[eng ‘uguisqjyeio Aq jg fauid 17 s Satyo JON ns-,doX ‘aqng ‘emoyT | *q ays diz, = ‘Bug ‘a1-ON af eX op,uayy| “Ray ‘soz nwo7y euay, ‘ayjem-mo'y ‘odi yz, -od-nd yz, ONLI = OM-¥Ig Aue ‘od-ep woly eqdory, ‘O1eTT “aT qe =a OAR okey “ON gory} eieyyy ON] «= ABU ON] «= B39U BN] ‘poSueyoun oy) = equy ‘oduNy -ynmmy = 9N] mod youbung “Huyoyy "UNG bundiungy °10]0 "HugyyorquyT *bu040”oT | ‘phbbuypg ‘ysybug 366 Comparative Vocabulary of the Kiranti Language. 367 1857.) OS Se ee ee "gq {suey “VIN ‘d ‘ayo Suay "§ ‘Sugy ‘d ‘Ten a ‘aryoy = *g ST ‘d ‘nu ueUIn Ny "q ‘ergo “ON *S ‘UN ‘d ‘ofuunu-n'T ‘q ‘eryo “NT ‘s ‘ek-n] *q ‘a4, uiau -ok- IN ‘aryoad UNL "S ‘e4- QL ‘d ‘ak wunueUa ‘a ‘ayo uaz "§ ‘ou-9% *q ‘ak um Te leat a ILS "q ‘ayo vq “DLS: “eG ‘d ‘of mun "a ‘ero "s “PA-DTT DIN ‘8 “eAD IN ed ,yeqyg vdnAueyy ae edniny ‘qd ‘eus eed ‘1y9-9998| gq "§ 09°, “eT “q 935%1¢ *g ‘ofeu wey ‘q ‘odrun ry "S “op, wey ‘qd ‘oktu en ‘a ‘QAI "IN “§ SedIN 0731G d ‘odtu-n yy ‘a ‘QAL yqyo edniu “NY ‘ediunyy edniny 93,4-9'T q ‘93,3919 ISO], 033! DIN au WIA nu X 0331d oN “heme oyez 0} 2418 *nkq oyuodt ‘yesneo § Leave aye} ‘yok ayuak fyesnvo ‘ayuoM £08 ‘uy ‘1IBMON © “Keme oye} 03 osned (odjed oyvy) fokjedey £08 03 asnvo va “1 ‘Lume oyv3 ‘oAje] $05 ‘omery 4 "aum0d 0} asneo fofjed oAytd $ au0d 03 ‘1d jo Tesneg y "d ‘vep vd ‘eS: soa Erte) ‘a ‘ts ‘yeh |-ynuox ‘ed jeep edyiqyg eunfiquody)y nd ‘eyyndiyo}-mwax es dox} — “eq- 11449 iq ‘eep eqndAu “oT eee auTUNNy eyyadk seu vita ou = eep equiuepy des] ‘ouvsy) ‘eyyuu-yndnn|-woyg ‘eryo-wsy, = *eq-nduepy “nu ust ‘eyou YNN poos jou - |g ‘eepeqniny "elyd YUN |*q ‘ts veep eqn ‘duyy “8u-nN eqy-ndny rak-nyr AN teq-DAN au west |Aue 03 fopog ‘ayo— +s a 03 SIpORg ns] esn[uny "as]T) “4999 fousOS ou wey— =*g ‘aut WI_y ‘eyo— = |'q “as any] OATIA Seo aN “ONIN Oya ou urem— | *g ‘au UINT syo— ‘q ‘aysiu nua q eswmoyy "oW9T] S]|-IN ‘OU-IN omed vy “OQnDp A ‘23U01, “d ‘gq ‘ou eg ‘oumy ‘q ‘aq ‘g ‘ayo OIG) ‘asu0y, ‘oqnqd|-sey~T ‘omeg "xIgns lu 3 xy -aid 9 [vquoa ou-esn {Ay ‘q ‘ou-vqy ‘ALIG pues eur ‘ayo— ‘a ‘ays eg ‘doig ‘epwunyy ‘a}jeT + ‘“esnyy‘oMeg *O-¥g PI°D Peg poo) O}eII 10 []9T, puvysiopug Iva jou oye i A 1 od (No. 5 Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 368 “ues "-q “enya 4UON farqo nuuey yf BUY SAY gat i0 Ih ‘g ‘nuU-UByyT ed, Sueygq| = eds ueyg TuUvy yy Sunu-usyy| eyy-ndi-nunyo¢ afnu- wry "ey "elyo ayy" “[BQA0A 6 by tay Bus 13 WLU yy sarsese ie { ‘eus YLT ‘ayo CUM dny n ayy Tay "s “Uy edvqy edoyy tats ‘dnyq-n-Aqy} eqy-nd- I yy eT ‘q ‘uns ef a *q ‘eryo jou ung *g ‘ung ed rey anf Ln) n4,118 By MA-ng) ro wry *e7,UIS . *JO9MS We J ‘ou yy wT ‘eus yn wry "gq ‘may eI PU UNE [See “q ‘arya nkiwary |sou} ‘juny wary “g ‘wary eduwiary war] yur] my) *eyy-nd-cayy|“u-wayy ved wry 5 : “(qaza) *g ‘03 oy vf yrd wn], Z ‘eu ¥v} “7 ‘es =O} eM nj OF wun gy, *[ *9usd 14 nie . -eMN ‘OPA wn, *2} wHy, ee eae “nq “OeUT ed nf-nqy, ‘ed wow ny, “og ‘ys, un | vd meyq ays OL «‘Woyujeg/-w-ng==deung) ceqyed néngy) — ‘ed-,wowng Riu “7 ‘ousuem oyeunque yy é BIYO ‘q ‘aryo ‘Tyovujosur fy "ed win} uel Suey) ‘oyeMnpueyy ‘ed- meye yl ‘ ‘Suey Bins) eqns) "Np, UIA Inge] BL ANeSaN] = ted oan} vay ‘asNy "A OPIN “eUTIAL “q ‘arya But euiyos| net ny O'S “OY BUIO[SOT WH AN Md “PH ny ‘ouny|-niny “3se-uog i: ie ‘ynubung | “Suypys TL "bupdbups "PIPL ‘Buoyyaiquogy | “bup.oyoT ee eed = cong "q ‘Is veg "eq- WY on nthe smMOspur fy “7 ‘eed "Seed ae ma ‘eed *q@ ‘Is erg *eq-anks rag inog *g ‘veg ‘C ‘Is veg “aurti qO0Mg 7 ‘erq ‘d ‘is erg fyi CU te MOTTA, “Se *By-, SULT odiy "q “erp 1 oqoy "qd ‘Is Rep TPiSgoy "Iyyeyoy, (a90I8) avy ‘qd ‘erp ways Bs 9 aad lng Beep Wasa] *Wa[s-9]5 107 “phhuyvg "ysybug Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 369 1857.] *{ ‘aryoos T"N °C ‘o5-eYd 13 *g ‘ostyT DI "a fatqooy ~JEyRU 993] odyenm "d ‘Tyo By-VYeY -od ye “§ foyay od 121 gq Satya By AeyRu oyyo,doyo “eA ‘d *1yoRy oyyo - doyoie yy "g foyyo - doyyoiry *q ‘oyors uo oa (hie @ Ne “ug ‘gg ‘WO oad: ‘aftyo yeyo yeyoye yy ‘g ‘Tyo ed PlBYOXe PAL "S “eqovyoye ed- Su0s myyye A mng-ng IYO, WeIyoryO| eusuns-suny suvyo edreayq I-rUy ‘S ‘nd eds, ueqqr Tl Fh AB: lke | "est = I8-vud ¢ peq ‘ynk is-vud £ pood ‘y-ndnu f uryo-vy ‘Suryeq ur ey !xyoid ‘k3 wey y ed-Suog edie vdoy ny ea ed-rydiqg eee yy edyyeley ed-e] ey wanqng| edtoj-teq wo ed-asog ed-y1Y9 ndayo,AeA|-eq2A OF ed-o1gy ye] epeyy yuou- OL) asnd-yoyy Joys ey urd ou- Yor, NY-dun'y] Sunu tu wayyy ed Sueqq-n PY is!eqy “nyo -nfseus-nyoq |. ‘syd- qayy aru yndnu nyo) eyy-,ynd oy *y-nk-oy VQUM-BIP yni-g "eyy-,nd- WO qud-yeqy "ey nA-v yy vd Ylty Surg *ed- 31,0 BYYNOG “110g eyynd iseus "ey aqry ‘okey oA eytul By) ‘Balle adr ‘ey-Ig = “Burd “ey IU BITS) “oATe "oh Le of 40.0 ‘ou y-ouy eyLyo— *aA-suayO oAny- Suny] BSTI-W-TIR Sy “USI EY » pee ho LY g Ste 8 Vee cee | ee ee wivky-ei yy oul suns Suny "eq- Wodpeyy vq wokg Bq- WAY IY Su0T usa peat Sut MA yor peyooig WYSIVIVG AIS [No. 5. | Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 370 "g funy, Aly) oysndyoyeqg "d ‘eAto -dodwy "a ‘49 -1ydod-wy ‘g ‘dod-wq eu jedeg ¥ bit ll "a “1y9 AUTGPPI “Cd ‘yo-luqd “9 ‘Wd = ‘os1yq "qd ‘ayory “AMV “d “1qo-ayoynyD "S “NYO s0 Sued, ynyow sp "Id ‘aktyoos Ppa cist | ie UI ‘osvyo,uny, ed *s ‘osuny) -Suosteyyoq ‘d ‘tYo -ey-amMau a 25 aly ‘osvyoour i | in i ‘osaumayprg *d ‘arya “05 unjr IK ‘d “ery - UNL, "Ss rd ‘osuny, ‘uny) - Suosteyyog edyeyy oy ye A "meqoIqh, ed-,3u0s ‘ypubung “buynyy nundng eu JOUAOUY] edroyp wmoAyoIquy, moAYoIqyL ed Suog we kqorqry, edimq eyedexyy ox,jndng “ox,nydnyg Oma vd dayp-mqQ eddayyon;, ‘oytdri-syyon33 9, ox1d11-0339 *eding ‘hundbung ANAT Ng] CAAT WTLALH. dem-Suv ynk-Suo0y, ‘ed Suvmour Aa) ‘BYyy-,ynk-suoy, And nays, ed-aqq "eyy- yudnoyy, Pry Tjeus ynd-1yoryay "Byyo-eda | “BUY- yak 1yo TW y-nd-tn A sAis-YB pL} “BUY yA-cn AA eqy- nd dokq-yPeM = “Ando eyy- [nd On AA dis-49, “yond GA ‘PIPL “HuoyyoiquyT ‘ak YNS ANY afeyedary ofuund wmng ‘sumuind wing ‘a{ny-Suoy, “BuSUaASUa A, ep— equ eIyo— "IS eep— ‘eyoq ‘e-9ug ojouxyy eyyad-usiqyy ‘ud- y ns I ‘ed- das, | wa-1d eu nu As IQ|-P 3 uyoey Ree ORAL “nu, wi = jeqe, oqyed ‘q1oys ‘adsyey) “eqeloyyesq 112} ‘efoy ‘ange ‘oT Bq-¥T nsyvhy, jeqroyfouxag ‘ok, SHV) VqrogfoyyeAg “huowoyoT ‘whbuyog axenbg yeo om- ndng|-11ayds ‘punoy IPT SULIIGYIY yy) -nos19 Spunoy eal Teag (a0]) 1049 (4514) [1®L Woyg ‘ys bug =~. Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 371 1857.] oF! ynyg ed rok e ea ud ednuag pus ayy, vs¥s oS junu * NUN] Bu-TAyy) eT Oe | USI Out *q ‘oAryo “05927 ‘ose, Ol "IY O59] *g feum9} “wy = “9297 “a ‘ayo -03 qeyeur ut. SPE 1yo day gq "a *sq08y “BP, 18P 19 Mong *s§ “ep oe -yepigodeyg|-moyd woyg edroyg vuvuny Bu- wns | | Ou teP a ou -a{qd wajyq) oy-wayd wey) PIPL POP PDLII LP PDAL IID PA LRALI ILA APIA OFlU0y vyo-edoyy =| eyynsyar usyoy oygry|ed-gyq nu,wy_) eyyour rey Wes] Ly bots Baus yeg PUL, We AA SUITE AA BU Te AY tes of) APA *CYAPA ens | ey ,w04 -Suvluay, “yng BU-, Way, J2d@)|}-su0}7 = Suejuag, ed-yoyd yoqg eyuerany ws]-UY A anu- “WR | poos ‘sqns 4vy ol’s BU Ie AA SuyiyA vu -W9T, eu- ii Se jad eq wey *unilor yy ‘o[our) poos Ysey evqnoues ey njyAVAp nyRAg id ®P,19PV "eq-, wok | (aea]) uly eq Jasunyy IST, SSOULIvA AY urd se ‘jaaary possaidap ‘our «=/jO passaid "mal )"Woo Senr 372 English. Air (wind) Affection, love Abuse Abode Agriculture Agriculturist Amaranth (grain) Aqueduct Ancle Arm—all Arm—fore Aunt, Pat. Aunt, Mat. Ant Anus Arrow Ax Alder tree Bag. Basket Barley Bamboo Bark of tree Back Back bone Belly Beast, quadruped Box, chest Bat kind Bird kind Bird, male Bird, female Bird, young Beer Bread Bitch Birch tree Bed Bed chamber Bed time Bee Blacksmith Blood Buttocks Battle, fight Boat Bear» Beard * The h thus marked h’ denotes the abrupt tone which is of very frequent occurrenc) The h is often omitted as Cho’mi, little; To’po, strike ; Cho’no, the nose, &c. ‘ i] + The repeated final vowel marks the pausing tone which is as common as the abrupt ton} + a is the crude, = Sontal and Uraon Da, and wo, mi, are the suffixes of gender. ; § Kh, uttered like kw, deep in the throat. Vayu Vocabulary. Viy'u Vocabulary.—By B. H. Hovesoy, Lsq. Nouns Substantive. Vay'u. Hojum Chhansa Jesi Mailing No word Kédduvi. No word Dunri. Tilém Léthulung Got Got Nini Yeng-yeng Chikibula P6-ching Blo Khoyong Licbhing Guh’mi* Saka Pholo Sing kokchho Sénti Gatachu Muli (organ). Bimli (whole) . No name No word Pdkchein Chinchi Loncho chinchi Mescho chinchi Bengali chinchi Soe. Swe Pipra Mescho tri Toura Blem’chum’ Imlung Imsing Singwo Got thutvi. chingtuvi Vi Petuna Pat Dunga No word No word Vikpovi Khak- English. Boar Body Burden, load Bone Breast Breast, nipple Bow Bowman Bottom, lowest part Boy Buffalo kind Buffalo, male Buffalo, female Buffalo young Bull Breath Branch, bough Brother Brethren, uterine Calf Calf, male Calf, female Can, cup Cart Cat kind Cat, male Cat, female Cat, young Carpenter Cheek Chesnut tree Chin Child kind Child, male Child, female Clay Cloth Cloth, cotton Cloth, woollen Clothes, raiment Cloud Cold (frigor) Colour Cane (calamus) Cock Cousin, Pat. Cousin, Mat. _ a Ta [No. 5.) Vay'u. Loncho pok Chho Ripcha Chuschu Liwo Liwo-wo Hutti Loncho, choo. Mechho Loncho mechho Mescho mechho Mechho choh’mi or | cho’mi mechho Loncho gai (see ox) Hemchi Rama Bolo, elder. younger Bolungcho Gai cho’ mi Léncho gai cho’ mi Mescho gai cho’ mi Boguna No name Dana Loncho dana Mes’cho dana Cho’mi dana Sing chuk’vi Gwong-gwong Se’lu Kumching Choo. Tamtawo Tawo 2 + Tami bt Nakchyongk6 Jéwa Rowa jéwa Belisong jéwa Jéwa Kowal Jungsa No word Di H Loncho khocho§ || — Bolu. Balu { (see brother) Tawo | Balu, 1857.] English. Cow Cough Copper Cowherd Cotton Crow Daughter -Daughter-in-law ‘Dance ‘Day Dust Darkness Death ‘Desire, wish Deer Dispute Dog Dog, male Dog, female Dog, young Dog, wild Dream Drink ‘Earth, the Earth, a little Ear Egg Elephant Elephant, male Elephant, female Ewe Eye Eye brow Elbow Exorcist Earthquake Face Feather ‘Feast, festival Father _Pather-in-law : My father Thy father His father 1 Aer father ‘ts father —Tever fair, market Tear ? | erry . Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Gai Khwen khwen No name Gai ttinvi Rowa Gagin Tami Choyongmi Holi Nima, Pinko Kwung-kwung No word Daksa Kéchho Phwé Uri Loncho tri Mes’cho tri Uri cho’mi Gharimu uri. Amiung Tuntaang Ko Ko Nok’-chun’g Chalung Hati Loncho hati Méscho hati Méscho béli Mék’ (abrupt tone) Mék’ kwiyu Koko-chus’-chu Balung Dukku Gnaru Chinchi swam (= bird hair) No word pt Chakhi Ang tipi Ung api A apa. Wathim tpia. Ynung ipa. Minung apa The same The same Jun’gsa Inglungthamlung (buy- ing and selling place) Ramsa. Ram Theklung. Lit. cross- ing-place Némo. Béne tri English. Fire Fire-place Field, arable Finger Finger, nail Fellow-countryman Fellow tribeman Fish Fist Flavour, taste Flesh Flint Flour Flea Flower Ford Fly Food Fog Fowl kind Fowl, wild Fowl, male Fowl, female Fowl’s egg Foreigner, m. and f. Forehead Filth, dirt Foot Form Forest Fruit Frog Garlic Girl Glue, cement Grandfather Grandmother God Gold Goat kind . Goat, male Goat, female Goat herd Grain Groin Hammer Hammerer Hand 373 Vayu. Mé Phulung Wik. Vik Blemen Demen, got demen Angki mulung-wo-mi. Angki namsang-wo-mi Angki thoko-wo-mi Kwan. Kon Bo-chha lumphu Madi Ri’ michhing Pung’mi Theklung Jama Jatang Kow-al Khocho, or Khwocho Rikkho Loncho khocho Mescho khocho Chalung. Kho-cha- lung Gyetinam’sang-wo-mi Tanglang Sé. Si Boyukwong. cho is toad) No name Tami. Méschochoo.* Cho’-mi No word Kiki Pipi Caret (Bhim Sen is the usual object of ador- ation Heldungmi, the yellow) Che’li Loncho cheli Mescho cheli Cheli tunvi Jomsit Chhlagaliing Topchyang To’vi Got (Khwo- (Lit. in eee a ae Se ee ee PE Se ee ee a a _ * Choo is probably cho-wa, a male child, and cho’mi, a girl, answering to ta-wo and ta-mi. Sut cho’mi is now chiefly used for a little one and rather adjectively than substantively. 8 ¢ 374 English, Handle Spade handle Hair Hair of head Hair of body Véyu Vocabulary. Vayu. Luéichyang (English th Chukha lu¢dchyang (English th) Swom Puchhi swom Dukhu swom Herdsman Gai. Mechho-tunvi Head Pichhi Heart Thum Heel Konteng Hail Bopum Hemp Lapchhyo Hen Mescho khochi Hip Gangpangra Hope No word Hoof, cloven, solid Khokhek Hog kind Pok’ Hog, male Loncho pok’ Hog, female Mescho pok’ Hole Hom (like kh). Homlung Hoe, spade Chokha Husk Ingsu Hook, peg Khondu Horn Ring Goat’s horn Che’li rang Honey Singwo khudu Horse kind No name (Goda used) House Kém Home, dwelling-placeMudung Hunger Suk’sa Husband Rocho My husband Ang rocho Thy husband Ung rocho Her husband Ynung rocho, Minung rocho, Wathim ro- cho. A rocho Instrument, Imple- Pochydng ment Intestines Chyot Iron Khakchhingmi (Lit. the black) Jaw Ra Joint Thulung Juice Bulung Knife Yukchyang Knee Khokali Knot No name Kitchen Khoklung King Pogu Lamp, torch Tuphi Language, speech Dabo. Davo Lip Kumching Leaf Lé English. Tree’s leaf Leather Leg—all Leg—true Light, lux. Lightning Life Liver Louse Lungs Loom Load Maize Master Mark Market Mason Mankind Man, male Man, female Man adult, Maker, doer Madder Mare Mill—hand Mill—water Millet (kangni) Millet (kodo) Millet (juwar) Millet (sama) Milk Mist Manner, mode, way Monkey. Macacus Monkey. Semnopi- thecus Measure Medicine Mind Moon Month Music Mother My mother Thy mother His, her mother Mountain Mountaineer Mouth Moustache Moschito * Buying and selling place. + Mukchhu swom = mouth hair, [| No. Vayu. Sing 16 Kokchho Lé Poktélo Dang-dang Dangdang bikup Héwmchi (breath) Ding Be’ mere Tot’ Punc’hyang Kholi. Khiéli Makai M6 No name Inglung thamlung* Kem povi Singtong Loncho Mes-cho Bangcho, male, mi, female Povi Laru Mes-cho goda Rechyang The same Levi Dusi Densom Nawéali Dudu Kokcho (cloud) Ba Phoka Phoka Ba Pokchyang No name Thum Cholo Cholo Dumku Umu Ang timu Ung amu Tnung imt. Mynu amu. Wathim tno A amu. Chaju Chhajuwo. mut’ vi Mukehu Mukchhu swomt Kaénanang Chhaju 1857.) ‘Mouse Nose Nostril Navel Oor Oil Oak tree Odour, smell Onion Ox kind | Ordure Pain Palm of hand ‘Penis Place | | Plant Pleasure Plough -Ploughman | Plain A native of the plains | Plate,.dish. Platter : Parent Plantain Pine (tree) Pepper | Potter | Peach Priest Rains—the Rice in husk Rice unhusked Rice, boiled River [islet Root 4 ad | English. Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Chuyu Chaschu Sangma Chhidi Ming EKksa, Yeksa No name Pichyang. Chuschung | Cho’no Cho’no humlung* Sélipun’g Yo’king Ki Chyakphen Namsang No word No word. used Epi. Yepi Yansa Penteng Tholu Liang (in composition with verbs only) Levi Bong Rukchyang Rukvi. mif Tengteng Tengteng-wo-mi. Teng- tengbe mutvi Talung Phokvi. Risa Thong chhing No name Ko-chonvi Powanset None (Pater familias performs the part) Loncho-beli Chuyu Nanum Nannum tokvinima§ Boja Chhan’ga Ham Bingmu Gang Ro-chhing Kee No word Gai is now Rukcho-wo- Bok’ pingvi ) * Place where nose is perforated. Tt Wo is masculine suffix: mi, feminine == hal-wala-wali | ¢ Sé= fruit, generic sign, as Phum is for trees, | § English. Road Rope Roof Rhododendron Salt Silence Spade. Spud. Hoe Spear Shape, form Sheep kind Spirits (distilled) Spindle Spinner Skin Scull, P. Shoe, sandal Sole of foot Seed Seive Sleep Sail of boat Sand Spittle Silver Sport, play Sisterkood—the Sister Sitting chamber Spider Smith Snake Sky Son-in-law Son My son Thy son His, her son Shoulder Shepherd Side Star Summit, top Snow Summer Storm Steam Smoke Literally, rain-pelting days, or rainy season. 375 Lom Damla No name Than-kapu li Chia, culinary. Jikhom, other Giwon Chokha No word Narung Beli (Bhenglung is the Barwal) Buke’ha Chingchyang Chingvi Kokchho Puchhi ra Khokhek Lé pengteng Ru (bone) Yayang [mpi No name No word Cheku Dawangmi. Lit. the shining, the white No word Nunung-cho Nunu, elder. younger Mialung No name Khakching tovi Hobu Nomo (sun) Janwai Tawo Aung tawo Ung tawo AX tawo. Wathim tawo. TYnung tawo. Minung tawo Phaka Beli tunvi Yakaju. Khwamen Wani Livi Jekhom nima Kungjum Hilili Kulu Diyu, Khuk 376 English. Strength Song Sow Sun Sunshine Sunrise Sunset Still Stone Stomach Shade, shadow Straw Sword Tail Testicle Tiger Thigh Thirst Tooth Turmeric Toe Toe nail Tongue Time Thread Thunder Thief Theft Tree Tree bark Uncle, Pat. Uncle, Mat. Urine Man’s urine Goat’s urine Vein Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Choli Kwom Mescho pok’ Nomo, Numa Lo-gang Nomo-loksing Nomo-thipsing Bukcha pochyang Lunphu Muli (the organ) Veli Khisti No name Mun Chalung (egg) Bilu Phekteng Tidaksa Lia Sinphi Lé blemen Lé demen Li No name. Sing in com- position with verbs) No word Nomo Sangma Khitumtn Khutu Singphum* (Phum in composition) Sing kokchho (= tree leather)* Pongpong Kuku Chipi. Chepi Singtong chipi Che’li chépi Vichho lom Vegetable, wild herbs Chokphi setung and roots Vetch, pea Village Victuals Vice, sin Voice Valley Vulva Wall Water * See tree’s leaf where sing is only used. So also in branch of tree, root of tree, flower or With the entire tree of all sorts phum fruit of tree, No word No word (Mulung = dwelling-place is used) Jatang No word Sangma No word Juju Khoksu Ti Newari is the same si hau = sing lo, English. Water spring Drinking water Cooking water Washerman Washing water Weight (instrument) Weight, heaviness Wife My wife Thy wife His wife Our wife is) = Your wife Their wife Our wife f Our wife = ) Your wife Their wife Wax W heat Winter Wizard Witchcraft Witch Wealth Weaver Weed, g:ass Woman Wood Wool Work Wound Wrist Year Pronouns. I, ego Thou He, She, It We two incl. excl. is suffixed, as risa phum, plantain tree = kela ma Newari. + The possessive m, mu is repeated or not and given either with the pronoun or with the numeral thus : ‘of them the two the child’ is Wathim nakpom cho’mi or Minung nakpo cho’mi. { Wife or wives is the same, ‘he plural sign khata is seldgm or never added to the ngun when the pronoun conveys the sense. Vayu. Ti vok lung Dakmune ti Khoschyang tf Up’vi Upchyang ti Poke’ hyang No word Romi Ang romi Ung romi Wathim romi. A romi.) Minung romi. Tnung) roml . Angchi romi, excl. Ungchi romi, incl. Ungchi romi Achi-romit A ae romi | Angki romi, excl. Ungki romi, incl. Unni romi A khata-romi. khata-romi. khata-romi or Mie« nung khata-romi Dikphi No name Jungsa nomo Jochhang pdévi Jochhang Jeva pungvi Buma Jochbang povi | Penku. Gosta | Moksa Mescho Sing Beli swom | No word. Kam _ is) used ee Got thulung Thong o ] , Go Gon Wa'thi. Mi. T. A Gonakpo | — Se ) 1857.] English. Vayu. Ye two Gonchhe* They two Y nakpo. A nakpo. 7 Wathi nakpo.* Mi- nakpo We all Gokhata incl. excl. Ye all Gone. Génekhata They all Mikhata, Wathikhata. Tkhata, Akhata This I, all three genders That A, Wathi, Mi, ditto, (a, ' is rather possessive) These, dual nayung: n. Y khata: m. f. n. Wathinakpo, A nakpo. Minakpo, m. f. Wa- thi nayung, &c. n.f Wathikhata 1 These, plural Those, dual Those, plural Mikhata a ue = A khata Self, selves None Mvself, Thyself. None Himself Own, my, thy, his own None Any, some (koi) per- Su ; Suna, D. Su nakpo, Pl. Sukhata or Susu; m, and f, subs. and adj. son Any, some (kucch) Mische: n, subs, only. thing Mische nayung, D. Mische khata or Mis- che Miscke, Pl. ' Many, much Chhinggnak (m. f, n. Few, little Yanggnak subs.and How much, many Hatha adj. and adv. So much, many Mitha | all No word | The whole Khiri, Khulup in num- bering ‘Half Phak: com, gen. subs. and adj. Ba, adj. only Vayu Vocabulary. I nakpo: m. andf. T 377 English. Vayu. Which, What, Who, Hanung, subs. and adj. Relative, of allgen- Hanung nakpo, m-.f. : ders, subs. or ad- Hanung nayung, n.: jectival, and Dual. Which? What? Hanung hanung= or Interrogative, rela- Hanung khata, Pl.: tive, Which of se- m. f. n.: inter, and veralexhibited per- _relativet sons or things: subs. adj. m. f. n. Who? Su. Suna, m. f. Suna nakpo, Dual. Susu, Suna suna or sukhata, P]. m.and f,: subs. and adj. Whoever Sunado What ? Mische, n.: subs. Mis- che nayung, Dual. Mische khata. Mis- che mische, Pl. Whatever Mischeda Either Y ki wathi. Y ki mi Both Nakpo, m. f. Nang- mi, f.[ Nayung, n. Several No word My Ang ] Thy Ung His, her, its A cen three Wathim f genders Ynung | Minung J { Our Angchi. excl. Ungchi incl. = | Your Unchi =< Their Tnakpum.§ Minak- = pum. Wathim nak- | pum. A nakpum or Achi ae Angki, excl. Ungki, incl. rg | Your Unni = 4 Their A khata. Wathim kha- a ta. Minung khata. g Tnung khata * Chhe the dual sign of 2nd pronoun is not used with Ist and 3rd. The numeral two _ (nakpo) is substituted. Hanung gothoto’pungmi mii nomi, the hand with which I struck pains me. Literally, what hand with I struck that pains. re. 2. However much the Tartar tongues eschew relative pronouns, they still can and do use them in this way, and Newari which is one of the simpler Himalayan tongues herein agrees with Vayu which belongs to the complex class. So also you can say for ‘*call the wan who has come” Hanungdo dongmi mii khamto, or, more usually, Phista khamto. ft See numerals. Nakpo, m.; Nangmi, f.; Nayung neuter, is no doubt the proper form, But these signs are passing out of use and Nakpo is now often used for all persons, male or female, § Inak pum or Inung nakpo or Inung nakpum. The possessive nung is peculiar to the demonstratives which it distinguishes from the adverbs of time and place. Inungmu or minungmu, of him, Inhemu Minhemu, of here, of there. Ithemu Mithemu, of now, of then. 378 Viyu Vocabulary. [No. 5. ! English. Vayu. English. Vayu. Mine Ang mu ( Our’s Angchimu. excl. Thine Ung mn ~ | Ungchimu. incl, His, her’s, its A mu. Wathim mu.| 3 1 Your’s Unnimu Minung mu. Tnung| ~~ (Their’s Wathim khatamu. Mi | mu - khaétamu. IY khiata- | ( Our’s Angchimu. — excl, mu.* A khatamu. | Ungchimu. — inel. Potius. ty | Your’s Ungchimu Minung khata mu. | = + Their’s Achimu, Wathim nak Inung khata mu | a | pomu. Minung nak pomu. ITnung nak le pomu. * T or inung, that is, the genitive sign is repeated at pleasure. Nung and ni, as well as | m and mu (and also mi) are genitival and inflexional. Inung of this person: Ini of this place, | 1857.] Good Bad Cunning Deceitful Candid Truthful Malicious Benevolent Industrious Idle True False Passionate, hasty Placid, patient Cowardly Brave Constant minded Unchangeable ; Inconstant Changeable \ Wasteful, profuse Niggardly Kind, gentle Unkind, harsh Obedient Disobedient Mad, idiotic Licit Thlicit Bodily, physical Mental Hungry Thirsty Naked Libidinous, man Libidinous, woman Viyu Vocabulary. 379 Vayu Adjectives.— Vocabulary. Crude. Affixes. mas. fem. neuter. Noh’ka wo mi mu. Mang noh’ka wo mi mu. Chek pangsing wo mi mu. , bas is m, f. Mang pingvi f ie fie. Diksa hotvi | agate Noh’kathum gotvi Ae affix. | Participal, like all Yangsa havi i . of the same form Bae. 2 ditto 6ng havi that follow. Kam povi | Hanvi Mutvi pute { Kam mang povi Diksa wo mi mu, 1 Diksa hotvi no affix. ‘ Mang diksa wo mi mu. 4 Diksa mang hotvi no affix. Risi bukvi m, f. / Risi not’vi no affix. Risi wo mi. Mang risi bukvi notvi m, f. no affix. 1 Mae risi ——_ ~=owo mi, Ranvi | m. f, Gam not’vi Mang ranvi fa affix. Ramma not’ vi Wonvi ditto. Mang wonvi Hokcho wo mi. Ho’vi: m. f.: no affix. Khali wo mi: no neuter. Yansa manghavi no affix. Yansahavi: no affix. Honvi m. f.: no affix. Manghonvi no affix. Thumnasidumta ;: no affix. Patang: n. no affix. Mang patang ditto Chhomu “? hacia \ genitival, n. Suksa wo mi mu.* Saks metvi m. f. Suksa meta no affix. Tidaksa wo mi mu.* Tidaksa metvi Wa. f: meta no affix, Gunangsenti wo mi mu. Luphta m. f. 0. : no affix. Mescho daksa metvi m.: no affix. Loncho daksa metvi f.: no affix, * Wo and mi for rationals: mu for other beings. 380 Gluttonous Drunkard, drunken* Foul mouthed Vayu Vocabulary. Chhing gnakjovi Chhing gnaktunvi Jit’ vi Abusive Jisi : Kenki Alive \ Gotvi Dying Met’ vi Dead Me’ta Sick Met’kenvi Sickening Mang phat’ vi Sick, sickened Met kinta Healthy, healthful Phatvi Sleepy, asleep Invi. Impi yot’vi Healthful Imta. Impi yos’ta Wakeful, waking Sivi. Bok’vi Awake, intr. Sipta. Bokta Awakened, tr. and Sipta. Sip pingta causal Pokta. Pok pingta Young Cho’mi Youthful Tthijila (== small) Mature, in prime of life | ea Old, aged Chokta Strong Bey Choti notvi-khotvi Mang choti Weak Mang choti khotvi Confined Thikta Free, Freed Teshta Bing-cho Handsome Bing-mi Bingmu Ugly Mang bing-cho Tall, high Short, low Great, big Small, little Fat, fattened Thin, thinned Tired, weary Fresh, not tired Lame, Lamed Blind, blinded Deaf Dumb Alone, solitary Companioned Wise Foolish Learned Ignorant Jongta Mang jongta Honta Cho’mi Ithijila Lonta Gerta Jyopta Mang jyopta Khokhappovi Mang khokvi Mang yenvi Mang thatvi Mang hot’vi Chhaling Kacho gotvi Juk’vi. Set’vi Mang jukvi. Setvi Lista Mang lista ew [ No. 5. m. f.: no affix. ditto. m. and f.: ditto, wo, mi. m. f. wot mi mu, m.f. No sign. m. and f, m. and f. | Participal. No affix ft of gender, m. f. m. f. : Ditto. Ditto. m. f. n: no affix. m. f. m. f.n: no affix. wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. &c. m. Tf. 7. wo mi no affix, m. f.n.: no affix. m. f. n.: no affix. mu. a } rationals. n. and c.: bestials, mi mu. m. f.n.: ditto, ditto. no affix, { ditto. ditto. m. f. n.: m. f. n.: ditto. m. f, n. no affix, m. f. n. no affix. no affix. m. f.n.i. e. rationals and beasts. m. f. n. cho, m,: mi, f.: mu, n. &c. m. f.: no sign. m. f.: no sign. ditto, m. f.: no sign. ditto. * Drunken = drunk cannot be applied to a being, any more than heard, though The inherence of the passive sense in the past participle beaten, seen, &c. can. ho a8 : ae generally is the reason why the present participle of transitives is aoristic. is he who drinks or drank. Tunta is what is drunk. + Wo, vo, and mi for mas, and fem. of rationals: mu for irrationals but often used for all, as a sign of common gender, Tunvi 1857.] Rich Poor Noisy, talkative Silent Dirty Clean Cleansed Married Not married, single Taxed Exempt Old New Ready, prepared (clothes, food &c. Unready, not ready Ready Unready Common, abundantly procurable Scarce, rarely procur- able Public, assert, revealed, patent Private, secret, con- cealed, latent Successful Prosperous Unprosperous Unsuccessful Saleable Viyu Vocabulary. 381 Got’ vi Penkhu | Mang gotvi m, f.: no sign, wo, m. mi, f, no, neuter. wo mi, m. f. partie. Mang penkhu Penkhu mang gotvi Davo povi* jis m. f.: no sign. Botvi Giwon ponvi* m. f.: no sign. Penki wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. &c. Penki notvi. Wota m. f. n.: no sign. Penki mang notvi. Ro-choy m. Ro-mi f Ro-cho-gotvi, f.; Romi gotvi, m. Bia pota m. f, Mang rocho m. Mang romi f. Bia mang pota c. Ro-cho-romi mang gotvi. Phengvi Mang ree Yukhang Mithong Nyesi Chusta Minta Mang chusta. 3 Mans minta. Tering Mang tering ane: Chhing gnak lingtang. m. f.n. Participal. bwo, m. mi, f. mu, n, and c. wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. and c. } n.; no sign. wo mi wo mi mu, mu. $Yang guak lingtang. Khunta m. f. n. No sign, Khista Hokvift Hokta Hoktang {Msn hokvi. fm f. n. of all 3 times. Mang hokta. Mang hoktang. Thamtang m. f. n. * From pako and ponche respectively. + Rocho and Romi are so generally used substantivally for man and wife that there is some hesitation about the adjectival use of them, though ‘‘ cho and mi” as suffixes are demonstrably equivalent to wo, vo and mi. Still as they are some- what obsolete the latter are often now superadded, bing-cho-wo = pulcher, bing-cho- mi = pulchra. also used in the same chomi, Other words of the same form, as Bangcho, adult or an adult, are two ways, viz.: Bancho, bangmi and Bangchowo, bang- Compare Lon-cho, a man and Mes-cho, a woman among the substautives. Bo-chho = the white-bodied, a white man, is quite a different affair. $~ Hok’, a neuter verb, is the source. 3D 382 Sold Purchaseable Purchased Similar Dissimilar The same Different Another Easy Difficult Changeful Changeable Changed Changeless Unchangeable Unchanged Orderly, set in order Disorderly, disordered Having possessed of tenens Dispossessed Ousted Not having Ornamented Plain Useful Useless ) Mang tota Vayu Vocabulary. Thamta m. f.n Ingtang m. f. n Ingta m. f. n. Totvi m. f. n. Mang tot’ vi. > us aie 5 ri genitival, all genders. fo} Gyetti. Gyeti Mang chamta m. f. n. Chamta m. f. n. \ past participles. Jyapvi ( Participles pr. and f.: m.f. n.z Jyaptang* No sign. Jyapta PrPart. Mang jyapvi Mang jyaptang }pr, and fut. participles. Mang Jyapta Tophta (Tosta) Khalim khulim pota m. f.n.: participial. m. f. n.: participial. Got’vi. Tovi Mang gotvi Mang gota m, f.: participial. m, f.: participial. Thosta Bing chopota Mang bing chopota Kamu, genitival Mang kammu. kam mang povi. kam mang pachyang. Plakvi Quick moving, active m, f.: no neuter. Slow moving, lazy, inert Gatvi m. f.: no neuter. Wholesome, eatable Jatang n Unwholesome, uneatable Mang jatang n. Manufactured wrought, Pota n. Unwrought Mang pota. Sharp Ye’vi n. (verb yep’.) Sharpened Yepta. Yeppingta, Blunt Gnumvi n. (verb Gnun.)} Blunted Gnuta. Gnut’pingta Grinded Reta } Woven Pungta | Spun Chingta |. Past participles. Platted Pungta Spacious, wide, ample Byengta J) Contracted, narrow Mang by-engta Moving, capable of motion Duk’ vi m. f. n. Moveable, capable of being moved Thuktang mi: £. m2 Motionless, n. Mang dukvi m. f. n. Moved, a. Thukta m. f. n, Moved, n. Dukta m. f. n. [No. 5. Kampachyang,n.: participial. * These agree as being derived from intransitive verb jyapehe. what changes; Jyaptang who or what is wont or liable to change. Jyapvi, who or pels 14857. ] Immoveable Figured Figureless Figureable Unfigureable Luminous Shining Illumined Alluminated Illuminable Dark, obscure Darkened Flaming Burning-self Kindled-self Kindled Lighted other Inflamed Burnt, consumed by fire Burning, in process of destruction by fire Extinguishing self, going out, dying (flame) Extinguished self, gone out Extinguished by other, put out, The upper, superior ‘The lower, inferior Vayu Vocabulary. 383 Mang thuktang. Narung 5 Natung notvi. Narung ma notvi. Mang narung wo mi ¢Narung patang. @Narung hatang. Narung mang patang. eee mang hatang. { Dang dang mu. Dang dang dumta, Dang dang notvi. Dang dang pota. Dang dang thumta. Dang dang ma patang. ba kung mu. Kung kung no’ta. yKung kung pota. Kung kung thumta. Navi, candle, Jotv’i, fire. Nata josta. wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. and c. mu. Nata. Josta.* Nat’ pingta. Jot’ pingta. Dupta. Yemta, general. Umta, a corpse. Yemvi. Met’ vi, Me’ta. Met’pingta. Sishta. Lonkha Yonkha cho mi mu. cho ml mu. * One great defect of this language (largely participated by the cognate tongues and even by English) is rendered peculiarly observable in its adjectives, owing to their being so very commonly the same with its participles. The defect is this, that all sorts of verbs (neuter, reflex and transitive) and even the various forms of the same verbal root, are confounded in the participles ; that is they take identical forms as participles, though the senses be often very different. Thus Nache, kindle thyself or be kindled, and nako, kindle it, and nato, kindle it for him, all alike give navi and nata; and, as there is no separate form of the agent, navi is also the kindler. Pains are taken by the multiplication of roots to keep the several sorts of action distinct; but the further distinctions of active, intransitive and transitive action are lost in the participles by defects of structure in the language. Thus sishta is self-killed and killed by another, and nata is self-kindled or kindled by another, though natpingta, the causal, may be used to express the latter sense. The defects of English aggravate those of Vayu. Thus a lamp that has been lighted, while it burns, is a burning lamp or lighted lamp, though the last word seems to infer what is past. In Vayu you can similarly say navi or nata tuphi, though navi (trans.) be also the lighter, not the lighted. In English you cannot say the lighting lamp for the lamp that is kindled and burning. In Vayu you cannet ase the word burning which is appropriated to destruction by fire. o84. Right Left Central Eastern Western Northern Southern Passable Accessible Impassable Cultivated (soil) Uncultivated Cultivable Uncultivable Fruitful, rich (soil) Barren, poor sterile Sandy Clayey Calcarious Saline Muddy Dusty Brackish (water) Fresh Flowing Still Deep Shallow Mie } weather tormy Fine, fair Cold Hot Cloudy Sunshiny Rainy, wet Dry, fair Moist, full of vapour Moist, sappy Green (wood) Juicy (fruit) Juiceless, dry Wooden Leathern Stony, made of stone Stony, stone bearing Wet (clothes) Dry Wooded (land) Open, naked Vayu Vocabulary. 7} Jaja-mu Khanja-mu Madum-mu Nomo loklung mu Nomo thiplung-mu Liriphum-mu Lonkha-mu Yonkha-mu Khoktang. Khokmung. Mang khoktang, Mang khokmung. Rukta. Dota. Mang rukta. Mang dota. Ruktang. Dotang. Mang ruktang. Mang dotang. Hokvi. Mang hokvi. No name. Chotang. Chunmu. Jikbommu Pes-chyongmu. Pinkumu. Jikhommu. Daktang (desirable.) Chhumta (sweet.) Gik’vi Mang gikvi. Kho (s) ta. Mang kho (s) ta Hojumpovi. Nob’kamu, Jungsamu. Jeta. Jekhommu, Kokchhomu, Kokchho-not’vi. Logangmu Genitival, Logang katvi Participal. Nanummu Nanum tok’vi Nanummang tok’vi Kowal not’ vi Genitival. case sign. | J ditto. Chha’langmu Genitival, Genitival. Participal, Bulummu Bulum notvi Bulum ma notvi. Sosomu. Mang bulummu. Singmu. Kokchhomu. Lumphumu. Lumphu notvi, Nata. Dungta. Bo’ta, Thimthimmu Lakalakamu Sunta. } Genitival. [ No. 5. Mu is the genitive 1857.] Coloured Colourless Colourable Fit to be coloured Red White (thing) White (man) Black Blue Green Yellow Sweet Sour Bitter Ripe, ripened Ripening Raw Rotten Sound, fresh Coarse Fine Rough Smooth { Polished Unpolished Straight Crooked to touch to eye » Full, filled Empty Self-emptied Emptied by another Causal of the last Solid Hollow Heavy Light (levis) Great Small Long Short Wide Narrow High Low Angular Round Spherical Pointed Edged Broken Burst Broken, long things \ round things Vayu Vocabulary. Chikta. Blekta Mang chikta Mang blekta Chiktang. Blektang. Langchhing Dawang Bochho Khakchhing No name, Girung Heldung Chhingjimu. ‘ Participal. wo mi mu, Juta (from Juto, make sour.) Khata (from Khato, make bitter.) Minta, Jishta. Minvi. Jitvi. Chhalang Ri (s) ta, Wonta, wo mi mu. Mang ri (s) ta. Mang wonta. Hokhro Napi Hokhro Liku Likyep Likyep pota. Likyep ma pota. Cheng-cheng Kojulang Kwonghhet Phul Damta Polang Polang no’ta, dumta, Polang pota. Polang papingta. Phul Polang wo mi mu. no sign, m. f. n, wo mi mu. wo mi mu. wo mi mu. Lista (Li, root ; Lita trans.) Oksang Honta (size or rank.) Cho’mi (size and rank.) Ithijila (young) Phinta Mang phinta Byengta Mang byengta. Jongta Mang jongta Tesre No word. Teltel Kulkul Kyerkyer Ye’vi. Yepta Reta (self) Kheta (by other). wo mi mu. n.: no sign. n.: no sign. ditto. ditto. all genders: no sign, ditto. wo mi mu, Jekta (self.) Chikta (by other.) 385 886 Vayu Vocabulary. No. 5. Torn Jekta (self.) Jita (by other.) Split Chita.* Intire By negative prefix to all or any of the above 7 words. Porous Jot’ vi. Imporous Mang jot’ vi. Opening Hovi. Open Hota. Shutting Thikvi. Shut Thikta. Spread Chhya (s) ta. Folded Kho (s) ta. Expanded, blown (flower) Bo’ta. Expanding (ditto) Bot’ vi. Closed, shut = not ex- , ’ panded (ditto) Bs Unblown, not blowing Mang bot’vi. Tight Khwasta. Slack Woso. Wosomu. Loose, unsteady Shaking | ok Hoktang. F Shakeable Fixed, firm Do (s) ta. Unsbakeable Dot’ pingta. Unshaking Mang hoktang. Mang hokvi. Cooked Khosta. Boiled Tibe khosta. Roasted Sonta Grillea Chota \ Melee khosta. Hen Swom gotvi Participal. y Swom mu Genitival. Hairless Swom ma got’vi. Mang swommu. Feathered Chinchi swommu. Chinachi swom notvi. Falling (on ground) Rukvi m. f. Falling (from aloft) Dukvi m. f. n. Fallen Rukta. Dukta. About to fall Ready to fall } Ruktang. Duktang. Falling (tree) Likvi. Fallen (tree) Likta. Felling (man) Photvi. Felled (tree) Phosta. About to be felled Phostang. Rising. Standing Tvi, Buk’vi. Erect. Risen Ipta. Bukta.t Raised. Made erect Ippingta. Bukpingta. Pukta. Lifted up, aloft Re’ta. Guta. Pat down Tota Sitting Mutvi. Seated self Musta (Muphta.) Seated by other Mut’pingta. Lying down. Recumbent Likvi m. f. n. Laid down. Reclined Likta (self) Prostrated. Laid down Likpingta (by other.) Wakened Aeehe n. and a. Sipta. * These six are nearly equal to ‘Urdu and Hindi tuta, tora; phuta phora phata, phara. + Ipta if previously seated: Bukta if lying down, 1857. | Viyu Vocabulary. — 387 Awakened, causal Sippingta. Waking Sipvi. mi Wakening Sippingvi. Sleeping Imvi. Asleep Imta. Sleepy Impi yot’vi. Put to sleep Iwpingta. Foreign Gyeti namsang wo-mi-mu.* Home-bred, ofone’s own { Angki namsang wo-mi-mu. race Angki thoko wo-mi-mu. Written Blekta. Read Lista. Desirous Yotvi, dakvi. Desired Yosta, dakta. : Yostang, yot’mun ele Daltans : Daeene! Baten Jotat Drank Tungta, Loving Chhanvi. Loved Chhanta. Amiable, fit to be loved Chhantang, Payable Phengtang. Phengmung Paid Phengta Well odoured Noh’ka namsang WwOemi-mu, Stinking Mang noh’ka namsang wo-mi-mu. Tibetan Chhugong wo-mi-mu. Nepalese Hengong wo-mi-mu. Of the plains of India Gagin wo-mi-mu,. Woollen, made of wool Beliswommu n. Woolly, wool-bearing —Beliswom notvi m, f. Wooden, made of wood Singmu n. Timber-bearing, woody Singnot’vi. n. Golden Heldung-mi, f. ? Tron, adj. made of iron Khakchhing-mi, f. ? Silver, adj. made ofsilver{ Dawang-mi, f. Hairy, made of hair Swommu n. Hairy, bearing hair Swom not’vi m. f. * Literally of another smell, smelling differently from one’s own folk. + The English senses of the participles eating and drinking must be variously expressed by the participles, infinitive and gerunds, thus, Don’t hinder the eating man, Jovi or jovi singtong tha thikto. By dint of eating or by excess of eating he will get ili, Jahe jahe nomi (no to be illand to be). Hating is better than drink- ing, Tungmungkhen jamung noh’ka. By drinking to excess he got intoxicated Chhinggnak tungtungha vimi. { These last three words mean literally the yellow, the black and the shining or white. Very much as in English, they are of the same form as substantives and adjectives. They appear to be regarded as feminines because they have the feminine suffix formative, or mi. 388 As great as he Greater than he Greatest of all As small as she Smaller than she Smallest of all Vayu Vocabulary. Comparison of Adjectives. Wathim bdéhamu honta. Wathim khen honta. . _* treated: i khen honta, or Sabim khen-honta. Wathim- Minung- ( Wathim- ghand 2 Wiwene- \ khen cho’mi, Inung khata- Minung khata- \ bahamu cho’mi, } khen cho’mi, or Sabim khen-cho’mi. [No. 5. Very great Chhing gnak honta. Very small Chhing gnak cho’mi. Very cold Chhing gnak khimta. Very hot Chhing gnak jeta, or jikhommu. Cold Khimta. Colder { “a : Lichen khimta. ini- Coldest ae \ ichata khen khimta, or Sabim khen khimta. Hot Jeta, Jekhommu. Hotter cae. i Khen jeta, or jekhommu. ¢( Ini- Khata khen jeta or jekhommu, or Sabim khen Hottest ¢ Mini- jeta. Vayu Numerals. Separate. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter and common. Kom-pu Kwomi 7 Kola Kwong-pu Kwongmi biol 2, Na-yung Na-k-po Nang-mi Nayung 3. Chhu-yung Chhu-k-po Chhung-mi Chhu-yung 4. Bli-ning Bli-k-pu Bli-ng-mi Bli-ning 5. U-ning Ung-pu? Um-mi? U-ning 6, Chhu-ning Caret Caret Chhu-ning Viyu Adverbs. Adverbs of time. To-day Tiri. To-morrow Nukun. Yesterday Tenchong. Day after to-morrow Niha. Day before yesterday Nithibuk. This year Tin thong. YIthong. Last year Ninganung. Year before last Chhukthongnung. Year before that Blikthong. Coming year Ningahe. Year after that Chhukthonghe. Year after that Blikthonghe. * Yand Mithe demonstratives make ini inung, mini minung for casus con- structus; but as khata the plural sign seldom admits of inflexion, the sign of the genitive which is required by the preposition, is attached to the pronoun in sin- gular, sometimes to both, inung khatam. Newari agrees so far that in all the construct cases it rejects the plural sign. Thus Ji-ping, we, wo-ping they, make Ji-mi, wo-mi our’s their’s, 1857] Now Then When? When Since when ? By and by Instantly At once Before, priorly After in composition Afterwards Since Till, until Till now Hitherto Till then Till when ? From. when ? Formerly, long ago At present Now-a-days Whilst Henceforth Hereafter Thenceforth Thereafter Ever Never Often Sometimes Harly (shortly) Soon (quickly) Late (slowly) At night, in the night in the day All day Daily At sun rise At cock crow At dawn At sunset At dusk At night fall From night till morn Noon Midnight Till noon At noon To-morrow morning, to-morrow at dawn Yesterday-night Yesterday at night In 2 or three days In 1 or 2 days In 3 or 4 days -How long ? At once, at one time, Once Twice Thrice Four times How often 7 Vayu Vocabulary. 389 Abo. Ythe. Umbe] ithi-he — in this, and mithi-he Mithe \ = in that (time). Hakhe. Hakhaning. Interrogative and relative. Hakhanengkhen. Omop’he, Later. Omhe. Waliga. Kophe (Kophi he.) Hubong, Honko Khen, Nungna. Hakhanungkhen. Bong. pes bong. [tham bong. Abobong. Abonung bong. ? 5 Mithanung bong. Hakhe bong, UHakhanung bong, Hakhekhen. Hakbanungkhen. Mithong. Honko. Tiri nukin. Not’he (in the being). Ithekhen. Umbekhen. khen. Mithekhen. Mithongkhen. Mithongnunkhen. No word. Hakhele. Giri giri. Kophi nak’ phi Mithong bong. Mithe bong. Abokhen. Tirikhen. Ithong- i Plak’plak’ha. Gat’ gat’tha. Eksahe. Eksa nung. Yeksa-nung-he. Numa nung, Numa he. Numa khiri. Hatha numa, Nomo loksinghe. Khochho oksinghe. Dangdang dumsinghe. Nomo thipsinghé. Kungkung dumsinghé. Eksa dumkhen. Eksakhen nomolok bong. _ Khangse numa. Khangse yeksa. Khangse numa bong. Khangse numa he. Nukun dang-dang dum he. Tenchong eksa. Tenchong eksa dum he. Nak buk’chhuk buk’he. Kwong buk’nak buk’he, Chhukbuk blik buk’he. Hakbuk’. Kophe ‘| Ko-phi &c. are regarded as compound sub- Kophi | stantives in the nominative case. In the Nakphi l locative, Kophe &c. best agree with Cbhhukphi f our idea of adverbs. But they are used Blikphi |. in either case, All are regularly declin- Hakphi J) able. 3 E 390 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 5. Again Gessa. Adverbs of place. Here and there Ttha dokha. Hereward Inirek. Inungrek. I tha. Thereward Minirek. Dokha. Minungrek. Wathimrek. Here Inhe. There Wathe. Minhe.* Where 2 ae ae also relatively and minhe correlatively. i o also the interrogative of time. Hence Tnikhen. 4 Thence Minikhen. Wathimkhen. Minungkhen. Whence ? Hanikhen. Hanungkhen. Which way? By what way? Hanung lom. Hanung jom khen. By that way Wathim lom khen. By this way I lom khen. This far Inibong. Inungbong. That far Minibong. -Minungbong. Wathimbong. How far Hanibong. Hanungbong. By that way TMi. Wathi lom khen. Near Khe’wa. In the near Khe’ wabe. From the near Khewakhen. Far Kho’lam. In the far Kho’lam be From the far To, up to, the far How far ? Thus far How near ? This near That near Kho’lamkhen. Kholam bong. Hatha kholam. Inhe bong. Hatha khewa. Ytha khewa. Mitha khewa. Nearer Inikhen-khewa. Minikhen-khewa. Nearest Minung khata khen khewa. Very near Chhing gnak khewa. Rather near Yang gnak khewa. Further Inikhen-kholam. Minikhen-kholam. Furthest Inung khatakhen-kholam. Minung khatakhen-kholam. Rather far Yang gnak kholam. Very far Chhing gnak kholam. Down Yonkha. Up Lonkha. Above Wanhe (wani-he, in the top). Below Huthe (buti-he, in the bottom). Form above Wanikhen. From below Hutikhen. From top to bottom Wanikhen hutim bong. * ¢¢Tn,” the locative, has 2 forms, bé and é or hé. Wathé = wathi-he and minhe — mini-he, in that. So wanhe = wani-he in the top. Again, in the hand, eye, head, fire, is bé; gotbe, mekbe, puchhibe, mebe. In the house is kemé and in the tree singphum-é. The present gerund has hé, phit-he, Also nung, phit- nung. The words for place and time or ‘‘ lung” and ‘‘ sing’’ cannot be used with pronouns, only with verbs (mu-lung = place of sitting ; lok-sing = time of rising) ; and hence now and then, here and there, are but in this or that. There is no real difference between the two. The inflective signs ni and nung are equally applicable to both. + Mini or Minung lomkhen and Wathim lomkhen are the inflected phases of the term. They are as usual and more correct. 1857.] Under, by under way Over, by the top Towards Upwards, towards the top Downwards, towards the bottom Between, in the midst From between By the middle By the midway On the right On the left From the right From the left Towards the right Towards the left Out In Through Across On this side On that side On both sides From this to that side Round Before Behind Aside, at, or on the flank To the side By the side Face to face Opposite Abreast Straight Onwards Forwards, on Backwards, back Adverbs How? Thus, in this way Thus, in that way Why? How much? How many ? As much So much As many How often ? How great ? How small ? Well, rightly Ill, badly Neither well nor ill Wisely Foolishly Hungrily Thirstily Angrily Vayu Vocabulary. Hutikben. Kudi kha. Wanikhen. Kha khakha. Rek. Wanim rek, Hutim rek. Madumbe. Madumna. Madum khen. Madum na. Madum lom. Jaja be. Khanja be. Jaja khen. Khanja khen. Jaja rek. Khanja rek. Tong ma. Bhitari, Thekthekha (crossing). Kudikha (undering). Madumna (midways). Khak khakha (overtoping.) Imba., Hémba. Imba homba. Imba khen homba bong. Vinvinha, Honko., Nungna. Khukbe. Khukrek. Khukkhen. } Kakphang. Chelchelha, Kwongha. Kakphang. Chyeng chyeng ha. Honko. Nongna. of manner, cause, quality, quantity, &e. Hagna. Hagnaha. Hanung baha. Ymha, Inung baha., Mimha, Minung baha. Mischepa. Hatha. Hayung, n. Hakpu, m., f. Hatha. Hayung. Mitha. Hakpu, m. f. Hathaphi. Hakphi. Hatha honta. Hatha. Cho’mi ithijila. Bingchoha. Bincho baha. Mang bingchoha. Mang bingcho baha, Bing chole ma. Mang bing chole ma. Sit’sitha Juk’juk’ha. Mang sitsitha. Mang jukjukha. Suksa met’met’ha. Tidaksa met’ha or met-met’ha. Risiha. Risi not’ha. Risibukbukha,. 391 392 Gladly Joyfully Willingly Unwillingly Strongly Weakly Gently Noisily Silently With blows Evenly, straightly Unevenly, crookedly Much, a great deal A little Neither more nor less More Most, very much Less Least, very little Again (afresh) Back (the same) Thoroughly Completely Partially By halves Heavily Lightly Tightly Slackly Greatly Increasingly Trivially Decreasingly In cowardly way Boldly Modesty | Impudently Secretly Openly Hastily Stowly Jestingly Seriously Mortally Skin deep Together Separately Singly One by one Solitarily A foot On horse back or mounted Truly Falsely Vayu Vocabulary. Bongbongha. Bongnibong. Yot’yotha. Yot’ni yot’. pee yot’yotha. Mang thumha. Mang thumsengha. Chotiha. Mang chotiha. Pomha. Pomhana. Tamtamha. Tamnitam. Giwonha. Topnitop. Chyengchyengha, Kwonchyangving chyangha. Chhing gnak. Yang gnak. Chhing gnak le ma yanggnak le ma. Khapkhapha. Chhinggnak khapkhapha. Yang yang ha. Chhing gnak yang yang ha. Gessa. Liplipha. Chhingenak. Khulupha. Tthi. Phakha. Lid’lid’ha, Oksangha. Khwat’khwat’ha. Woso-woso-ha. Woso baha- \ Chhinggnakha. } Yénggndkcha. Ramram ha. Mang ramram ha. Khot’khot’ba. ‘ Mang khot’khot’ha. Khita baha. Khit’khit’ha. Khunta baha. Khun-khunha, Plak plakha. Waliga. Gat’gatha. Pomhana. Wasong papaha. Wasong panipa. Diksa papaha. - Met’bong. Kokchho bong. Kolube.* Ko’na. Gege gege. Kwongpu kwongpu, m. Kolu kolu, n. Chhale chhale, Khokkhokha, Changchangha. Diksa papaha. Mang diksa papdha. humha. | No. 5. Thumsengha. Mang yot ni yot. a | * Kolube, literally in one, means in one place. used only with verbs. Lung, the affix of place can be 1857. | Viyu Vocabulary. 393 Similarly Tot’tot’ha. Kolu baha. Differently Mang tot’tot’ha. Mang kolu baha, Look upwards, up Lonkha chusto. Look downwards, down Yonkha chusto. Look forwards Kakphang chusto. Honko chusto. Look backwards Nongma chusto. Look here and there Ytha dokha chusto. Collectives. 5. Kolu got’ khulup, = one hand intire, or 5 fingers. 10. Nayung got’ khulup, = two hands intire, or 10 fingers. 15. Nayung got’ khulupha kolu got’ khulup = two hands, plus one hand. Na- yung got’ khulupha ba khulup, = two and half (ba) of the whole hands. 20. Le got’ khulup = hands and feet or fingers and toes complete. 20. Choldk —a score, also kolu cholok. 40. Nayung cholok = two score. 60. Chbuyung cholok = three score. 80. Blining cholok = four score. : 100. Uning cholok = five score or, Kolu got’ cholok = one hand of scores. Ordinal Numbers. There are none such. No first, second, third, &c. Adverbial Numbers. No firstly, secondly, thirdly, &c. Once K6phi. ) And so on to 100 by adding * phi,’’ _ Twice Nakphi. | a turn or bout, tv the numerals,— Thrice Chhikphi, The interrogative particle ‘‘ ha’ can Four times Blikphi. { be similarly used. How many Five times Kolugot khulup-phi. r times ? Ha-k-phi. Phi is the crude Ten times Nayung got khulup phi. | of the verb to come, thus K6-phi Twenty times Le got khulup phi or cho- = one coming, &c. lop phi. 3) Numeration of weights, Numeration of days. 1. Koti. 1. Ko buk’. 2. Nakti. 2. Na buk’. 3. Chhukti, 3. Chhu buk’. 4, Blik ti. 4. Bli buk.’ 5. Ukti or Kolu got khulup ti. 5. Ubuk, or Kolu got khulup buk.’ Remark.—The last are declinable like the others and may be regarded as com: pound substantives, which should therefore in strictness be put in the locative case, thus kophe phine, come ye all at once. But this nicety is little regarded and kophinakphi la’lam is = he went once or twice. So Newari has as the equivalents of the above chha ko lang wa and chhako niko wana. In general the adverbs, when not gerundial, are subject to declension like the nouns, Declensional signs. G. Mu, ni, nung, Ni and nung to pronouns only. If two substantives come together, the sign is usually omitted. D. None. Ac. None. Abl. Khen, with inflexion if pronoun, Inst. Ha, without inflexion in any case. Loc. Bé, He, é. Both commonly used with ; the latter, always if the governed word be pronoun, Up to. as far as, Bong. With usually ; always if pronoun. — Towards, Rek ditto ditto. — On, upon, Wanhe —_— Off, under, Huthe } ditto lh 294 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 5, Viyu Prepositions. At this time the (itha-hé) At that time Mithe (Mitha-he ) Wathe (wathi-he.) At this place Inhe (ini-he.) tha. At that place Min-he (Mini-he), Dokha.* In this year Tthong-he. In a little time, shortly Omop, he. By and by, after a little more delay Omhe. During, pending this year [thong not’he. Pending his coming Wathimang phitbong. At home Kém-é. At our house Angki keme. In the house Kémé, In the wilderness Ghari-bé. In my hand Ang got be. In, at Darjiling Darjiling-é. Go into the house Keme la’la or kem bhitar bekla. In me, thee, him Angbe, Ungbe, Minungbe. Come into the house Kem, bhitari bek’. Go into the house Kemmu bhitari bekla. Go into the water Tibe bekla. Come out of the water Ti khen lok’. Inside the house Kemmu bhitari. Kem bhitari. Outside the house Kemmu tongma, Out of the house Kem tongma. Come from the outside of the house Kemmu tongma khen bek’. Come out from the house Kem khen tongma lok. Come out from inside or within the house Kem bhitari khen lok’. Go with me Ang nung la’la. Sit by me Ang be musche. Come near me Ang khewa phi. Sit beside me Ang khuk be musche. Sit on my knee Ang bimli be musche. Sleep in his bosom A bimli be imche. Put on my shoulder Ang phaka be cho’ko. Put in or on the fire Me be tako. Put on (above) the fire Me wamnhe tako. Take from off the fire Me wanikhen thosto. Put on, upon, the table Mech wanhe tako. Take from off the table Mech wanikhen thosto. Get on the horse , Megane Mode | Ghorabe cbyanche. Get off the horse ‘ : Dismount from the horse \ Ghora khen lische. Put on the horse (goods) Ghoramu wanhe (or senti be) tako. Take from off the horse Ghora wani (07 senti) khen loko. On the head Puchhibe. Puchhi wanhe. Under the feet Le huthe. Put cap on head Puchhi be topi chupche. Puchhi wanhe topi chupche. Put straw under thy feet Ungle huthe-khisti tako. From above the head Puchhi wanikhen, From below the feet Le hutikhen, * Ttha dokha = idher udher; inhe, minhe = ihan, uhan or hither and thither and here and there; the first with less of rest and definiteness. . 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 395 On the head Puchhi wanhe. Under the >} touching feet } Le huthe. Above ‘) ..} Puchhi khenlonkha. Higher {ee head | = | than | = eth + & ¢ Le khen-yonkha. nder Ee eles the feet | 3 | than 5} Above the mouth is the Pe the Poth ia 1 Mukcbhyu wanim rek cho’no: mukchhyu hutimrekra. chin To, up to, as far as Bong. As far as him Inung-bong. To, as far as, Nepal Nepal bong. Towards Nepal Nepal rek. North of Nepal Nepal khen liriphumbe. Near Nepal Nepal khewa. Far from Nepal Nepal khen kholam. Towards night Eksa dumhe. Cruel toward his children Ang tamtawo rek yansa povi. Sit above me Angkhen lonkha musche. Sit below him Minung khen yonkha* musche. Between us two Ungchi madumbe. On me (touching) Ang wanhe. Under me (touching) Ang huthe. The water comes from above and goes below On the top of the hill Chhaju puchhibe wanhe, In the mid ascent of the Lonkha rek khenti yumi, yonkha rek giklam. hill Chhaju madumbe. At the base of the hill Chh4ju phumbe huthe. From top of hill Chhaju wanikhen. From middle of hill Chhaju madumkhen. From base of hill Chhaju hutikhen. He dwells above ine Ang khen lonkha muschem. He dwells below me Ang khen yongha muschem. Sit on me Ang wanhe musche, Pressed under me Ang huthe napta. Underneath the chair Chouki buthe. Lower than the chair (in position) Chouki khen yonkha. Put under the table Mech huthe or hutibe tako. Take out from under the table Mech hutikhen thosto, Go through the door Kamung khen lokla. Go through the hole Hom kudikha, or Hom madumbe thekla. Go through the river (wading) Gang thek thekha la’la. Go over the river (by boat) Gang thek thekha la’la. Go over (by over) the couch Khat lumlumha la’la. Go under (by under) the couch Khat homlung khen lok’la or kudikha la’la. * Lonkha and yonkha refer mainly to the course of the water in this mountain country and to relative position on a hill slope. 8396 Come with me Go without me Strike with force Strike without force Sit before me Sit behind him Before-behind the door Opposite, in front of, vis-a-vis Sit at my side on my flank Towards the side Before nizht fall After night fall At night fall Just as night falls Since dawn Since I came After my arrival After to-morrow By night fall Up to-night Until night Towards night Towards dawn At dawn During the night While it was night By the time I arrive Before my arrival After my coming Round about the house About the house In the middle of the village On this side the river On that side the river He pierced him through the body Go by the door At a distance from the house Near to the fire Near me After that Before that Instead of that In lieu of him For the sake of me For the leve of me On this side of, short of, not so far as, the house On that side of, or beyond the house Far from the house With a house, i.e. having Kem not’he or govhe. Without a house want- 1 Kem mang not’he. ing With me accompanying Without me leaving >. Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5. Ang nung phi. Ang ma nosa la’la, Chotiba to’po. Choti mang khot’khot’ha to’ po. Ang honko musche. Anungna musche. Kamung-honko-nungna. Kakphang. Ang khuk be musche. Khuk rek. Eksa madumsa. Eksa dumkhen. Eksa dumdumha, } Eksa dumhe. Nomoloksing khen. Ang phitv’ khen. Ang dong khen nungna, Nukun khen. d Eksa bong. Eksa dum bong. Eksa let’he. Dang dang dumhe. - Nomo lokhe.. Eksa nung. Kksa not’nung, Ang dongsinghe, Ang dong singkhen honko. Ang dong singkhen nungna. Kemmu thelim phoksiv. Kemkhukhe itha dokha. Mulungmu madumbe. Gangmu imba or Gang imba. Gang homba. Chho chepchepha sastum. Kamung lomkhen la’la. Kem khen kholam. Mé khewa. Ang khewa. Minung nongna. Wathim honko. Inung let’chhing. Inung jyapcbhing. Minung jyapcbhing. Ang lisi. Ang duli khen. Gochbhan chhanha. Minung honko. Kem khen imba or Kemmu itha. Kem khen homba or Kemmu dokha. Kem khen kholam, Kem not}khen, Kem mang Kem not?nam, Kem mang nosa. not’khen. Ang nung. fait: Go wat’watha, Angma nosa, 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 397 For the purpose of, on account of, the house Kem lisi. In the middle of the house Kem ma dumbe. Even with the table, on level with table Mech nungteng tengha. Through the house Kem kudikha. Kemmu madumna or madum khen. Through the thigh Phekteng sat’sat’ha or madumna, With a will (Bongré) Bong ni bong. Bongbongha. Bongha. Without, against the will ; (Malgré) Marg bongbongha. Mang bongha. Willy, nilly Bongha mang bongha In spite of her husband Rocho mang-honhonha. For the love of her busband Rocho chhan-chhan’ha. After the manner of the Newars Hengong-wo baha. In the form of a fish Ho narungmu. After the manner of the Tibetans Chhogongwo baha. In the guise of a Tibetan Chhogongwo narungbe or ndrungha. Conjunetions. And No such word. Also, likewise Lé. Nung. Or No word. Ki is used. Nor Mang (not.) Nor this, nor that Ti mang, ma mang, Moreover Mekhen. Besides Wanikhen. In excess of Wanhe. Than (comp.) Khen. As Hagnado. So Mimha. As, so TYmha, Mimbha. As well as Hagnado noh’ka As ill as Hagnado mang noh’ka. But No word, Nevertheless ? Notwithstanding Newword: Though, yet Mithele.* If Sa. Nam, with present tense. Phenf with preterite. 4 aa Can only be used with a verb; mang nosa, if there nless 7 ; Recent be not. Mapo nam, if he do not. p Whether or not Nole ma nole, In the meanwhile the. Thereon, upon that Mithe. To wit, that is to say Id@he. It’he. Because Since t Mischepa. As Wherefore ae For this cause } eee * Passionate yet good; or, though passionate (he is) not harsh or eruel, Risiwa mithele noh’ka, or Risibuk’vi mithele yansa mang povi. + If I come or shall come Phignonam. If I had come Phisung phen, 398 Therefore Mipanung. For that cause Yes (assent) No (dissent) Verbal negative Verbal prohibitive Noun primitive Alas ! Bravo! Hurrah! No words. Tha (prefix.) No words, Vayu Vocabulary. Wathi panung. Mang (prefix.) Mang. Ma (prefix). Vayu Verbs.—Vocabulary. English. Cause, tr. Cause not Be born, n. Cause him to be born, tr. Cause thyself to be born or to be born for thyself Cause me to be born, &c. Beget or give birth to Beget or produce me, or for me Beget or produce for thyself Beget for another Cause to beget or to be begotten, or produced Cause thyself to beget, or to be be- gotten for thyself The same for another Cause me to beget or to be begotten Be not born Cause not to be born Beget not or give not birth to Beget not for self Beget not for another Beget not for me Live, n. Live not Cause him to live Cause me to live Cause thyself (or for thyself) to live Cause to live for him, for his sake Do not cause to live Do not cause thyself to live Die, nu. Die not Cause to die Enable to die Cause thyself to die Cause me to die Or Vayu. Pha-(s)-to. Pingko (see on).* Thapha-(s)-to. Tha ping. Bok,’ Bok ping ko. Bok pingche. Bokpingsung Pho’ko (Phok-ko), Phoksung. Phokche. Phokto. Phokpingko, Phok pingche. Phokpingto. Phok pingsung, Tha bok’. Bok’ tha ping. Tha phok’, Tha phokche. Tha phokto. Tha phokgno. G6 Tha go. Got’phato (phasto.) Got’pingko. Got’pingsung. Got’phassung. Got’pingche. Got phasche. Gotpingto. Got phasto. Got tha pha’to. Got tha ping. Got tha pinche. Got tha phasche. Met’, Tha met’. Met’pingko, Met’pha’to (phasto.) Met’ pingche. Met’pingsung. [No. 5. * These two verbs are used to make causals. Pingko and Phasto are often iden- tical, at other times more or less discriminated in a way that may be best appre- ciated by a sample, thus Khut pingko is, cause to steal, and Khut phasto, make a thief of. 1857. Cause not to die Cause not thyself to die Kill, tr. Kill thyself or for thyself, or do thou thyself kill, int. Cause to kill or be killed Cause thyself to kill or to be killed, or to be killed for thyself é Cause him to klil or be killed for another Kill me or for me Kill me not or do not kill for me Cause me to kill or be killed, or for me Cause not, &c. Be, n. Be not Cause to be Cause to be for self Cause to be for me or me to be Cause it to be for him Do not cause to be Do not cause me to be or it to be for me Become, n. Become not Cause to become Cause to cause to become Cause me or for me to become Cause thyself or for thyself to become Be able, ac. intr. Enable, tr. Cause to be able or to enable Do, perform, make, tr. Do not Do for me Do not for me Do for self Do not for self Do for him Do not for him Do me, passive Do self (see grammar). Cause to do or to be done Cause me to do or to be done to me or to do or be done for me Cause thyself to do or be done to or for thyself Cause to do or to be done to, for another Keep doing, intr. Cease doing. Desist, intr. Cease doing it, tr. Desist from it Suffer, endure bodil Submit coyectt f sired Brace thy mind to sufferance Observe, take heed of, examine, think, intr. c Vayu Vocabulary. 399 Met’ thé pha’to. Met’ tha ping. Met’ tha phasche. Met’ tha pinche. Sishto. Sishche. Sit’ pingko. Sit’ pingche. Siv’ pingto. Sishsung. Tha sit gno. Sit pingsung. Sit tha pinggno. No. Tha no. Not’ pingko. Not’ pingche. Not’ pingsung. Not’ pingto. Not’ tha ping. Not’ tha ping gno. Dum. Tha dum. Dum pingko. Thum pingko. Thum sung. Thumche. Phasche. Wonche. Pha’to. Phasto. Wanto. Phat pingko. Won pingko. Pako. Thapo. Pasung.* Tha pagno. Panche. Tha panche. Pato. Tha pato. Posung.* Ponche. Papingko. Thumto. Dum pingche. Papingsung. Papingche. Papingto. Panapa nd. Papaha musche. Wasche., Wa’ (s) to. Ronehe. These two reflex verbs serve to convey the only and very vague idea of passivity. W onche. Chikche. Chusche. * See remarks on the verbs Péko, Tako and Jako. Sn ar 4.00 English. Observe it, take heed of it, think of it, tr. Observe me or for me Cause to observe or to observe it, or it to be observed, tr. Cause to observe or to be observed for thyself or thyself, intr. Cause me to observe or me to be ob- served, quasi passive Understand, intr, Understand it, tr. Cause to understand or to be under- stood Understand me or for me* Understand thyself or for thyself or simply understand Understand it for him or on his account Understand not Understand it not Remember, intr. Remember it, tr. (see observe) Remember not Remember it not Do not cause to remember or to be remembered Forget, intr. Forget it, tr. Yorget me or for me Forget me not Forget thyself (= err.) Forget not thyself or do not thou forget Forget him or it Forget him not Cause to forget (= deceive) or to be forgotten Cause me to forget or to be forgotten Cause thyself to forget or to be for- gotten Cause him to forget or to be forgotten on a third party’s account, or cause it to be forgotten by him Desire, n. and p. Desire it or make him desire Cause to desire or to be desired (per alterum, hand per se) Do not cause to desire or to be desired Cause me to desire or be desired Vayu Vocabulary. | [No. 5. Vayu. Chuphto (Chusto.) Chikto. Chussang. Chiksung. Chut pingko. Chik pingko. Chut pingche. Chik pingche. Chut pingsung. Chik pingsung. Sesche. Seko. Set’ phato (phasto.) Sesung (Sessung.) Sesche. Sesto. Tha sesche. Tha se. Chikche. Chikto. Tha chikche. Tha chikto. Tha chik pha’to (phasto). Mangche. Mangto. Mang sung. Tha mang gno. Mangche. Tha mangche. Mangto.t Tha mangto. Mang pingko. Mang pingsung. Mang pha’to (phasto}. Mang pingche. Mang pingto (pingkto). jected transitive) Dak.t Dakto. (Doubly ob- Dak pingko. Tha dak ping. Dak pingsung. Dak pha’to (phasto). Tha dak pha’to (phasto). * The word, when used in the latter sense, with lisi, on account of, is frequently put in the transitive form ang lisi seko, understand it for me. results from the imperfect development of the voices. + Compare the transitive and eausal transitive, Sénto, Pato, &c. or the transitives in ko. The transitives in po have this form, thus topo has topto; ipo, ipto; pipo, pipto, &c. t Dak, like Bot: tell, is used rather as a passive than active. Its form passive; its sense both apparently. Dak gnom I desire or am desired. Daksung- mi I desired or was desired. In Khas, Newari, &c. it is much the same. The alternative Verbs in t6 have no form = 1857.] English. Cause thyself to desire or be desired Cause him to desire or be desired on another’s account, or him to desire it Love or love it, trans. Love thyself or love simply, intr. Love me, p. Love him, tr. Love not Love not it or him Cause to love or to be lnved Cause me to love or to be loved Cause thyself to love or be loved Cause him to love or be loved on an- other’s account Hate or hate it, trans. Hate thyself or hate simply, intr. Hate me, p. Hate him or for him (see note voce forget) Cause to hate or to be hated Cause thyself to hate or be hated Cause him or it to hate or be hated for another’s sake, or him to hate it Be modest, n. Cause to be modest Laugh, ac. intr. Laugh at, fer Tride, : Cause to laugh Weep, n. Weep for, tr. Cause to weep Dance, intr. and tr. Sing, intr. and tr. Hope Fear, n. Fear not Frighten, tr. Frighten not Frighten me Frighten thyself Cause to frighten or be frightened Cause me to frighten or to be frightened Cause thyself to frighten or be fright- ened Cause him or it to frighten or be frightened for another’s sake Tremble, ac. intr. Cause to tremble by own act or make him tremble, tr. Cause to tremble through another’s agency or cause him to be made or - to make to tremble Tremble not Make him not tremble Cause him not to be made to tremble or to make tremble Be good, n. Make good, tr. Viyu Vocabulary. Vayu. Dak pingche. Dak pingto (pingkto) Chhanto. Chhanche. Chhansung. Chhanto. Tha chhanche. Tha chhanto. Chhan pha’to. Chhan pingko. Chhan pingsung. Chhan phasung. Chhan pingche. Chhan phasche. Chhan pingto. Chekto. Chekche. Cheksung. Chhan pha’to (phasto). Chekto. Chek pha’to. Chek pingche. Chek pingko. Chek phasche. Chek pingto. Kho. Khét’ pha’to (phasto). Yische. Chek phasto. } Yishto. Yit’pha’to (phasto). Ok. Okto. Okpha’to (phasto). Holi panche, intr. Kwom panche, intr. No such word. Ram. Tha ram Ram pingko. Kham to (Arabic kh), Ram tha ping. Tha cham to. Ram pingsung. A/famsung. Ram pingche. Ahamche. Kham pingko. Kham pingsung. Holi pako, tr. Kwom pako, tr. Kham pingche. Kham pingto. Hokche. Hokto. Hok pingko, Tha hokche. Tha hokto. Hok tha ping. Noh’ka dum or ponche. Noh’ka thumto or pako, 401 402 Vayu Vocabulary. English. Vayu. Make thyself good, intr. Noh’ka thumche or panche. Be glad or gladden thyself, ac. intr. Bongche, Gladden, tr. Bongto. Gladden me Bongsung. Gladden thyself or cause thyself to be gladdened Cause him to gladden or to be glad- dened Cause him to gladden or to be glad- dened on another’s account Cause me to gladden or to be gladdened Be not glad Gladden not Be sad, vexed or sadden thyself Sadden, vex, tr. Cause to sadden or to be saddened Cause thyself to be saddened Cause to sadden or to be saddened in lieu of or on another’s account Cause not, &c. &c, Speak, utter, n. Utter not Utter thyself or for thyself, intr. Do thou not utter for self Utter in lieu of another, or for him Utter not for him Cause to utter or to be uttered Speak to, tell, narrate, talk to, tr. Speak to me, tell me or for me Speak to thyself or tell it for thyself Cause to tell or to be told Cause not to tell or not to be told Tell on his account, tell his tale Tell on my account, tell my tale Let speech be had Tell on your own account, tell your own tale Cause his tale to be told for him Cause thy own tale to be told Cause my tale to be told Be silent or let silence be, n. Silence, tr. Cause to silence Silence me Silence thyself Silence him on another’s account or for another * This last root, bot’ to tell, is only used as a passive. Bosungmi, I was told. + All theae three are used actively also, Cause me to tell mine. + Compare Davo pasung. This refers to the agent, do thou make speech for me, whereas Giwon posung refers to silence as governing the verb, let silence prevail See remarks on the verbs Pako, Tako and Jako, thyself to tell thine. for me. Bong pingche. Bong ping ko. Bong ping to. Bong pingsung. Tha bongche. Tha bongto. Thukche. Thukto. Thuk pha’to. Thuk pingche. Thuk pingko. Thuk ping to. Thuk’tha pinn. Thuk tha ping to. Hot’. Davo panche. Tha hot.’ Davo tha panche, Hosche (the s like English th.) Tha hosche. Hophto (Hosto.) Tha hophto (hosto.) Hot’ pingko. Ishto. Chhisto. Davo pako. Ishsung. Chhishsung. Bo’sung.* (Bo’to, the transitive is lost.) Ishche. Chhishche. Itpingko. Chhit’ping ko. ping ko, It tha ping. pa tha ping. Davo pato. Davo pasung. Davo ponche. Chhit tha ping. Davo panche. Davo pa pingto. Davo pa pinche. Davo pa pingsung.t Giwon ponche. Giwon pako. Giwon pa pingko. Giwon posung.t Giwon panche, Giwon pato, Cause him to tell his tale, true passive struggling into existence against the genius of the language. [No. 5. Davo pa- Davo Bot’guom, I am told. Cause They show signs of a & 1857.] English. Call. Summon, tr. Summon me or for me Summon for thyself Shout, vociferate, intr. Shout to, for him Learn ( = teach thyself,) intr. Teach or teach him, tr. Read, intr. Write it, tr. Write for thyself or write simply Cause to write Ask, question, tr. Ask for self, or ask simply, or ask thyself Ask for me, or me Ask it for him Ask it not, tr. Ask not, intr. Ask not for me or me Ask not for self Ask not for him Answer or answer him, tr. Answer self or for self or answer simply Answer me or for me Answer him, or for him Beg, intr. Beg it, tr. Beg me or for me, p. Beg for thyself, intr. Beg it for him, tr, Approve, like, intr. Approve it, like it, tr. Cause him to approve or to approve it, or it to be approved Approve not Approve it not Approve me or for me Approve thyself or for thyself Approve him or approve for him Cause me to approve or be approved Cause thyself to approve or to be approved or cause it to be approved for thyself Cause it to be approved or cause him to approve it 3 Cause it to be approved for him See, intr. See it, tr. See thyself or for thyself See for him See me or see for me Cause to see or be seen Cause thyself to see or be seen, or to be seen for thyself Cause to see or be seen for him Show, intr. Show it, tr. Vayu Vocabulary. f Yorpingte 403 Vayu. Rangto. Khamto. Rangsung. Khamsung. Rangche. Khamche. Tamche. Sangma-panche. Tamto. Sangma-pako. Lishche. Lishto. Lische. Blekto Blekche. Blek pingko. Jiko. Lishche. Jiche. Jisung. Jito. Tha ji. Tha jiche. Tha jigno, Tha jiche. Tha jito. Chhisto. Chhische. Chhissung. Chhisto. Biche (see Buy). Biko. Bisung. Biche. Bito. Yosche. Yophto (Yosto). Yot’ pha’ to. Tha yosche. Tha yot’. Yossung, Yosche. Yophto (Yosto). Yot’pingsung. Yot’ pingko. Yot’ phasche. Yot pingko. Yot pingto. Yengche. Yengko. Yengche, Yeng to. Yengsung. Yeng pha’to. Chusche. Chuphto (chusto). Yeng pingko, Yeng pingche. Yeng pingto. Khunche.* Khunto. * The underlined AA” has a harsh Arabic sound. 4.04 English. Show me or for me Show thyself or for thyself Show for him Cause to show or be shown Cause thyself to be shown or to show Cause me to be shown or to show Hide, ac. intr. Hide it, tr. Hide thyself (lie hid) Cause thyself to lie hid Let me hide myself Cause him to lie hid Cause me to lie hid Cause it to be hid Cause thyself to be hidden or cause it to be hidden for thee Hide me Cause me to be hid Cause it to be hid for him Hear simply or hear thyself, intr. Hear it, tr. Cause thyself to hear or be heard Cause him to hear or be heard Hear me Cause me to hear or be heard Hear not Hear it not Hear not me Cause me not to hear or be heard Taste, ac. intr. Taste it, tr. Taste for thyself or thyself Taste for him Taste for me or taste me Cause to taste or to be tasted Blow, apply breath, intr. Blow it, apply breath to it, tr. Smell, ac. intr. Smell it, tr. Smell for thyself or thyself Smell for him Smell me Cause to smell or to be smelt Cause to smell or to be smelt for him Smell not Smell it not Smell me not Cause me to smell or be smelt Cause thyself to smell or be smelt Touch, ac. intr. Touch it, tr. Cause to touch or to be touched Cause thyself to touch or be touched Cause it to touch or be touched for him Touch me or for me Touch me not Eat, ac. intr, Eat it, tr. Eat not Viyu Vocabulary. Vayu. Khvunsung Khunche. Khunto. Khun pingko. Khun pingche. Khun pingsung. Kinche. Khiko. Kinche. Kin pingche. Kin sung yu. Kin pingko. Kin ping sung. Khit’pingko. Khun pha’to. Khit’ pingche. Khisung. Khit’pingsung. Khit’ pingto. Thasche. Thako. That’ pinche. That pingko. Thasung. Ang davo thako. That’ pingsung. Tha thasche. Tha tha. Tha tha gno. Tha that’ ping gno. Homche. Hompo. Homche. Homto. Homsung, Homping ko. Hosche. Hosto, Namche. Napo (Nampo). Namche. Namto. Nawmsung. Namping ko. Namping to. Tha namche. Tha nam. Tha na (m) mo. Nampingsung. Nampingche. Dusche. Duphto (Dushto). Dut’ping ko. Dut’ pingche. Dut’ping to. Da (s) sung. Tha dut’gno. Janche (see buy). Jako. Tha janche, | No. 5. 1857.] English. Eat it not Eat me Eat for me Rat for thyself or do thou thyself eat, or eat thy own share Eat for him or eat his share Eat not me Eat not for me Feed, tr. Feed thyself, intr. Feed not, tr. Feed thyself not Feed me Feed me not Cause to feed or to be fed Cause thyself to feed or be fed Cause it to feed or be fed for him Cause me to feed or be fed Drink—water Drink not—water Cause to drink or to be drank water Cause not to drink or be drank water Drink—beer, spirits, ac. intr. Drink it, beer, &c. tr. Drink not, beer, &c. Drink it not, beer, &c. Cause to drink or to be drank Cause to cause to drink or to be drank Don’t cause to drink Don’t cause to cause to drink or be drank Don’t cause to cause thyself to drink or to be drank Don’t cause him to drink if, or it to be drank by him in lieu of another Drink me Drink not me Cause me to drink or to be drank Cause me not to drink Vomit, ac. intr. Vomit it, tr. Cause to vomit Sleep, ac. intr. Sleep not Cause to sleep Cause not to sleep Cause thyself to sleep Help to put him to sleep Help to cause him to be put to sleep Cause thyself to be put asleep Wake, n. Wake not Awaken, tr. Awaken not Cause to awaken or to be awakened Vayu Vocabulary. 405 Vayu. Tha jo. Josung (see posung). Jasung. Janche. Jato. Tha jogno Tha jagno. Khwa (s) to®¥ Khwasche. Tha Khwat’. Tha Khwasche. Khwa (s) sung. Tha Khwat’gno. Khwat’? pingkos Khwat pingche. Khwat pingto. Khwat pingsung. Ti dak’. Ti tha dak’, Ti dak’ pingko. Ti dak’ thaping. Tunche. Tunko. Tha tunche. Tha tun’. Thunto or Tunpingko, Thunpingko. Tha thunto. Thun thaping. Thun thapingche. Thun thapingko. Tun sung. Tha tun gno. Thunsung, Tha thun gno, Lipche. Lipto. Li’po. Lip’ pingko. Imche. Tha imche, Im pingko. Im tha ping. Hem che. Hem to. Hem ping to. Hem ping che. Buk’, Sipche. Tha buk’. Tha sipche. Po’ko or Pu’ko.f¢ Sipto. Tha puk’. Tha sipto, Puk’pingko. Sip pingko. Hempo. Tha hem. * Kh = harsh guttural Arabic. + O aud u, like e and i, are hardly separable. 3 G 406 English. Cause thyself to be awakened or to awaken Cause me to be awakened or to awaken Awaken me Awaken me not Awaken thyself or do thou thyself awaken him Awaken for him Awaken not for him Dream, intr. Dream it, tr. Dream not Dream it not Cause to dream or to be dreamt Cause thyself to dream or be dreamt of Fart, ac. intr. Fart at, tr. Shit, n. Shit it upon it, tr. Piss, minge, intr. n. Piss it, on ei t A Tr. Imminge Kiss—give or take (osculor), tr. Cause to kiss or be kissed Cause thyself to kiss or be kissed Kiss me Kiss me not Kiss him for me Kiss him for him Kiss (coe), tr. Cause to kiss or he kissed Cause thyself to kiss or be kissed Kiss me Cause me to kiss or be kissed Kiss not Kiss me not Sneeze, ac. intr. Sneeze not Sneeze at, or make sneeze Do not sneeze at or make sneeze Cause him to sneeze at or him to be made or to make to sneeze Cause not, &c. Do thou make me sneeze, &c. Cause me to be made to sneeze, &c. Do not sneeze at me or do not make me sneeze Cause thyself to be made to sneeze, &c. Cause not thyself to be made to sneeze or to sneeze or be sneezed at Spit, ac. intr. Spit at, on, tr. Cause to spit or to be spat at Viyw Vocabulary. Vayu. Puk’pingche. Puk’pingsung, Puk’sung. Tha puk’gno. Puk’che., Puk’to. Tha puk’to. Amung yengche. Amung yengko. Amung tha yengche. Amung tha yeng. Amung yengping ko. Amung yengping che. Peshche. Peshto. Dak’. Epidak. Dakto. Epidakto. Chepidak. Cheche. } Chepidakto, Cheto. Chugup pako. Chugup paping ko. Chugup paping che. Chugup posung. Chugup tha pogno. Chugup pasung. Chugup pato. Hepto. Hep pingko, Hep pingche. Hepsung. Hep pingsung. Tha hepto. Tha hepmo. Khikche. Tha khikche. Khikto. Khi’ko.* Tha khikto. Khik pingko. Khik tha ping. Khiksung. Khik pingsung. Tha khikgno. Khik pingche. Khik thaping che. Tokche. Tokto. To’ko.* Tok pingko. [No. 5. * Khi’ko and To’ko like Li’po, vomit it, are falling out of use because of the homophones, But they are the true forms and the others refer to a third party. See the word exchange. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 4.07 English. aye. Cause to spit or be spat at on another’s account Tok pingto. Spit on me or make me spit Toksung. Cause me to spit or to be spat at Tok pingsung, Cause yourself to spit or to be spat on Tokpingche. Belch, ac. intr. Garat panche, Belch at, tr. Garat pako. Cause him to belch or to belch at or to be belched at Garat papingko. Belch me or for me Garat posung. Belch him or for him Garat pato. Cause me to belch or be belched at Garat papingsung, Cause him to belch or to be belched at on another’s account Garat papingto. Cough, ac. intr. Khwen khwen panche. Cough at, tr. ihwen khwen pako.* Cough me, cause me to cough by own agency Khwen khwen posung or pasung.* Cause me to cough or to be coughed at through another’s agency Khwen khwen papingsung. Cause thyself to cough or to be coughed at through same Khwen khwen papingche. Hiccup, ac. intr, : ' Tukum panche, Yawn, intr., tr. Wakum panche, intr. Wakum pako. tr, Cause to yawn Wakum papingko. Cause me to yawn Wakum papingsung. Cause thyself to yawn Wakum papingche Do thou thyself cause me to yawn Wakum posung. Wakum tha po. Do not thou cause me to yawn Wakum thapogno. Yawn not, intr. and tr. Wakum tha panche. Lick, ac. intr. Popche. Lick it, tr. Po’ po. Cause to lick or be licked Pop pingko. Lick me or for me Popsung, Lick thyself or for thyself Popche. Lick it for him Pop to. Cause me to lick or be licked Pop pingsung. Cause thyself to lick or to be licked Pop pingche. Cause him to lick or be licked Poppingko. The same, on account of, or in lieu of, another Poppingto Suck, a. intr. Pipche. Suck it, tr. Pi’po (Pip-po). Suck me or for me Pipsung. Suck thyself or for thyself Pipche. Suck it for him Pipto Cause to suck or to be sucked Pip pingko Cause me to suck or be sucked Pip pingsung. Cause thyself to suck or be sucked Pip pingche. Cause him to suck or be sucked Pip pingko. Bite, tr. Chi’ko (chik-ko). * Hence you can say in active intransitive knwen khwen pachungmi I coughed =I made myself cough; in the transitive, knwen khwen pakungmi I coughed at him, very often used ‘‘ for I made him cough’ which is properly khwen khwen paping-kungmi; and in the passive, khwen khwen posungmi I was coughed = was made to cough, which latter is more nicely expressed by khwen khwen pasungmi shewing also the active agency. 2a 2 408 English. Bite not Cause to bite or to be bitten Cause not to bite or be bitten Bite me Bite me not Bite thyself Bite him Bite it for him Cause me to bite or be bitten Cause me not to bite or be bitten Cause thyself to bite or be bitten Cause him to bite or be bitten The same on another’s behoof Kick, tr. Kick not Kick me Kick me not Kick thyself or kick simply Kick not thyself or do not kick Kick him Kick him not Cause to kick or to be kicked Cause me to kick or be kicked Cause thyself to kick or be kicked Cause him to kick or be kicked The same on another’s behoof Strike, tr. Srike not Strike thyself Strike me Cause him to strike or to be striken Cause thyself, &c. Seratch, tr. Scratch thyself Push, shove, tr. Push not Pull, tr. Pull not Walk, ac. intr. Walk not Walk it or cause it to walk, thou thyself Walk it not Cause to walk or to be walked by another’s agency Walk me thyself, cause me to walk or be walked, by thy own agency Cause to cause me to walk or be walked, or have me walked Cause thyself to walk or be walked or have thyself walked Run, intr. Run not Run it, cause it to run, thyself Cause it to be run by another Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Tha chik’. Chik pingko. Chik tha ping. Chik sung. Tha chik gno, Chikche. Chi’ko. Chikto. Chik pingsung. Tha chikping gno, Chik pingche. Chik pingko. Chik pingto. Theshto (Eng. th). Tha thet’. Thé (s) sung. Tha thet’ gno. Theshche. | Tha thesfche. Theshto. Tha thet? Thet’ pingko. Thet’ pingsung, Thet’ pingche. Thet’ pingko. Thet’ pingto. To’po (top-po). Tha top’. Top che. Topsung. Top pingko. Top pingche, Phokto. Phokche. Theko. Tha the, Khinto. Tha khinto,. Khokche. Tha khokche, Khokto. Tha khokto. Khok pingko. Khoksung. Khok pingsung, Khok pingche. Lunla. Lun. Tha lunla,* Lunto. Lunphato. [ No. 5. * Lun without the la makes the passive lungnom, which being also the neuter form, lun lagnom, from lunla, is preferred to express the neuter sense though 14 also makes lagnom. 1857.] English. Cause me to run or be run Cause thyself to run or be run Run away, flee, intr. Cause to flee Creep, intr. Jump, hop, intr. Jump it or make it jump, tr. Cause to make jump Leap, intr. Leap it, tr. Cause to leap Fly, n. Cause to fly Enable to fly Swim, intr. Swim it thyself or cause it to swim by, thy own account Cause it, him, to swim by other’s agency or have it swam Swim me, cause me to swim or make me swim thyself Cause me to be or made to swim by another’s agency. Cause thyself to swim or be swam Wade, ac. intr. Dive Sink f 2° intr. = sink thyself Sink it, make him dive, by thy own agency Cause to make dive or sink by other’s agency, or have it sunk Bathe = bathe thyself, intr. Bathe him Cause him to bathe or to be bathed Wasb, intr. = wash thyself, only body Wash him Cause him to wash or to be washed Dress, ac. intr. = dress thyself Dress it Cause it to dress or be drest Dress me Dress thyself Undress (thyself), intr. Undress it Undress me Cause it to undress or to be undressed Don’t undress it Be naked, n. Denude thyself, ac. intr. Denude him Denude me Denude it for another Cause to denude or be denuded Cause thyself to denude or be denuded Cause me to denude or to be denuded Cause me not to denude or to be denuded Be hungry, nu. Make him hungry or cause him to be made hungry Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Lunphasung, Lunphasche. Rula. Ru. Ruto. Rut’pingko. Hobu baha khokche, Tuche, Tuto, Tupingko. Hopche. Hopto. Hop pingko. Bon. Bonpingko. Bonphato. Hanche, Hanto. Hanpingko. Hansung. Hanpingsung. Hanpingche. Thekche. Thamche. Thamto. Thampingko. Denche. Dento. Denpingko. Upche. Upto. Up pingko. Chupche. Wasche. Chupto. Wasto. Chup pingko. Wat’pingko. Chupsung. Wassung. Chupche, Wasche. Lusche. Luphto (Lusto), Lussung. Lut’ pingko. Lut’tha ping. Gunang senti dum or ponche, Gunang senti panche. Gunang senti pako. Gunang senti posung (pasung). Gunang senti pato. Gunang senti papingko. Gunang senti papingche, Gunang senti papingsung, Gunang senti tha paping gno. Suksamet’. Suksametvidum. Suksa met’pingko not’ pingko, 409 410 English. Make me hungry or cause me to be made hungry Make thyself hungry or cause thyself to be made hungry Be thirsty, n. Make thirsty Make me thirsty or enable me to make or be made thirsty Make thyself thirsty or cause thyself to make or be made thirsty Be not hungry Make not hungry Be not thirsty ~ Cause not to thirst Be sleepy = cover sleep, n. Make sleepy Make not sleepy Be cold (being), n. Be cold (thing) Make cold (being) Make cold (thing) Make not cold (being) Make not cold (thing) Be warm, n. Warm him or it Warm thyself Cause thyself to be warmed or to warm him Cause him to be warmed or to warm another Warm me Cause me to be warmed or to warm another Be dirty (become) n. Dirty thyself, intr, Dirty it, tr. Dirty it for him Cause to dirty or to be dirtied Be clean, n. Be not clean Clean thyself, intr. Clean it, tr. Clean it for him Clean not thyself Clean it not Be angry, n. Make angry, tr. Abuse, revile, tr. * Any state of body that continu expressed by the active participle—if past or passive participle, thus impi yotvi is sleepy; impi yosta, asleep. Véyu Vocabulary. CR [ No. Vayu. Suksa met’ pingsung. Suksa met’ pingche. Tidaksa met’, or Tidakvi dum.* Tidaksa met’ pingko. Tidaksa met’ pingsung, Tidaksa met’ pingche. Suksa tha met’, Suksa met’ tha ping. Tidaksa tha met’, Tidaksa met’ tha ping. Impi yot’ or yosche. Impi yotvi dum. Impi yot’ phato. Impi yotvi thumto. Impi yot tha phato. Impi yotvi tha thumto. Jumsa met’. Khimche, Jumsa met’ tha ping. ‘ Do. do. do. phato. Khimto. ( Jumsa met’ tha ping. t Do. do. do. phato. Tha khimto. Jekhom ponchedum. Jeto. Jekhom pako. Jeche. Jekhom panche. Je pingche. Je pingko. Je sung. Je pingsung. Penki or Penkimu dum. Penki or penkimu no (be), Penki or Penkimu panche. Penki pako. Penki pato. Penki papingko. Wota dum. Wota tha dum, Wota panche and woche, Woto. Wota pako. Wota pato. Tha woche, Tha woto. Risi bok.’ Risi phokto or pho’ko. Jishto. Wota thapo. es or is to come, like thirsty, sleepy, is it be supposed complete, like asleep, by the Met, == die, and suksa met’ == die of hunger: tidaksa met’ = die of thirst, or literally, of want of water, 1857.] English. Cause to revile Abuse thyself Abuse me Quarrel, n. Cause to quarrel Cause me to quarrel or be quarrelled with Cause thyself to quarrel or be quarrelled with Cause him to quarrel or be quarrelled with Be friendly Be united or reconciled, intr. Make friendly Unite Reconcile, tr. Cause to unite or to be united Be not united = unite not yourselves Unite not, tr. Fight, n. Cause to fight or to be fought Cause not to fight or to be fought Cause me to fight or be fought with Cause thyself to fight or be fought with Cause him to fight or to be fought Be victorious, n. Make him victorious Cause to make victorious Make thyself victorious Make me victorious Cause me to be made victorious Conquer him, tr. Conquer thyself Conquer me Cause him to conquer or be conquered Ask aid to conquer thyself Cause me to be conquered or to con- quer Be conquered Succumb, n. Cause to succomb by thy own act Cause to succumb through another’s agency Cause me to succumb by thy own act Cause me to succumb through another’s agency Work, trans. Work for self, do own work Work for him, do his work Work for me, do my work Cause to work or be worked Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Jit’pingko. Jishcbe. Jishsung. Phwe. Phwet’ pha’to (phasto/. Phwet’ phasung. Phwet’ phasche. Phwet’ phato (phasto). Tosche.* Totnachhe, D. Toschine, Pl. Tophto (Toshto), Tot’ pingko. Tha tosche.* (Tha toschine, P.) Tha tot’. Pat. Patnachhe, D. Patchine, P. Pat pingko, Pat tha ping. Pat ping sung. Pat ping che. Pat ping ko. Then. Thento. Then pingko. Thenche. Thensung. Thenpingsung. W onto.t W onche. Wonsurg. Wonpingko. Wonpinche. Wonpingsung. i Yang. Yangla (see note at Run), Yangto. Yang pingko. Yangsang. Yang ping sung. Kam pako. Kam panche. Kam pato. Se pasung. am papingko. ALL * The genius of these tongues requires such a phrase as ‘ be reconciled’ to be set down in the dual or plural. So also fight, &c. + The comparison of the roots then and won will show how these tongues attempt to fend off the equivoques resulting from imperfectly developed grammar, Wonto is'used as a neuter with transitives, and phasche (not wonche) replaces it with neuters, Top won tungmi, I can strike. Im phaschungmi, I can sleep. 412 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5. English. Vayu. Cause thyself to work or thy work to be done Kam papingche. Cause to work for him or his work to be done Kam papingto. Play = amuse thyself, intr, Hanche (s’ amuser). Make him play or do thou thyself amuse him, tr. Hanto (amuser). Cause him to be made to play or have been amused (per alterum) Hanpingko. Play with me Ang nung hanche.* Amuse me Hansung. Cause me to be amused Hanpingsung. Be tired, n. Jyop’.f Make tired or tire it Jyopto. Tire thyself J yopche. Tire me J yopsung. Cause me to be tired or to tire Jyop pingsung. Cause thyself to be tired or to tire Jyop pingche. Cause him to be tired or to tire Jyop pingko. Be rested, take rest, rest thyself Nekche. Rest it, give rest Ne’ko (Nek-ko). Cause to give it rest Nek’ pingto. Cause thyself to have rest Nekpingche. Do thou give me rest Neksung. Cause me to have rest Nek pingsung. Take not rest Tha nekche. Give not rest Tia nek’. Move, n. Duk’. Move it, trans. Thukto. Duk’ pingko, Cause it to be moved or to move it Thukpingko. Be still, move not Tha duk’. Make still, move it not Tha thukto. Be quick, ac. intr. = quicken thyself Plakche. Quicken, tr. Plakto. Cause to quicken or to be quick Plakpingko. Do thou quicken me Plaksung. Cause me to be quickened Plakpingsung. Cause thyself to be quickened Plakpingche. Be slow, be dilatory, delay, n. Ga Cause to be slow or delay it Gat’ pingko. Stay, stop, stop thyself, intr. Thikche. Stay him, stop him, tr. Thikto. Cause him to be stopped or tostophim Thik pingko. Let him depart Lat pingko. Be intoxicated, n. Vi Intoxicate, tr. Vit’phato. Tell the truth Diksa hot, n. Diksa ishto, tr. Cause to speak truth Diksa hotpingko, Diksa itpingko, Mang diksa ishto. Budhia hato. Cause to lie Budhia hanpingko, Believe, obey, tr. Honko. Mang diksa hot’. Tell falsehood * Literally, amuse thyself with me, along with me. The sense is quite different from that of hansung in which I am solely the amused party. + From jyop comes the Newari jyapu, a labourer, though one tongue has lost the noun; the other, the verb! See Twist. 1857.] Viyu Vocabulary. 413 English. Vayu. Cause to believe or obey, or to be obeyed , Honpingko. Disbelieve, disobey Tha hon. Forbid, tr. Davoha thikto. Prevent, tr. Thikto. Present, offer. tr. Cho’-ko (chokko). Offer not Tha chok’ Accept, intr. Dosche. Accept it, tr. Doko Accept it for self Dosche. Accept it for him Dosto. Accept not or refuse Tha dosche. Accept it not or refuse it Tha do. Choose, select, tr. Lwko. Luksung. Lukche. Lukto. Cherish, protect, tr. Tunko. Cherish thyself or thy own Tunche. Cherish me Tunsung. Cause me to be cherished or to cherish Tunpingsung. Abandon, neglect, leave, tr. Was’to (WAsto). Confine, imprison, tr. Thikto. Set at liberty, tr. Teshto, Have, intr. Gosche. Ungbe-penku né or dum. eink want Wigs gosche. Ungbe penku tha nd or tha dum. Cause him to have Got’pingko. Wathim bepenku-thumto. ee 6 have Tha got ping, Wathim be penku tha thumto. Give, trans. Hato. Mumto. Give me or to me Hasung, Mumsung, Give to or for thyself Hanche.* Mumche. Give to him or for him Hato. Mumto. Give not Tha hato. Tha mumto. Cause to give or to be given Hapingko. Cause not to give or not to be given Ha tha ping or Tha ha ping. Give it back, return it to him Lipto (see take back). Cause to return or to be returned Lip pingko. Give again (more) Gessa hato. Take, intr. Lasche. Dosche.} Take it, tr. Lasto. Doho. Take for thyself, i. e. appropriate Lasche. Dosche. Take it for him Lashto. Dosto. Cause to take or be taken Lakpingko. Dot pingko. Take it back, quasi, return it to self Lipche (see give back). Save, preserve, cure, him (life) Cholko. Save, cure thyself Cholche. Save me Cholsung. Destroy (life) Sishto (see kill). Keep, preserve (thing) Tako (see keep). * Compare “Take.” The pronominalization of the Vayu verbs prevents a good deal of that difficulty which the Turanians generally experience in furnishing simple equivalents for the words ‘give’ and ‘ take,’ because the genius of the languages exacts on all occasions a rigid attention to the results of action, the objective as well as subjective results. Different roots or different modifications of the same roots must necessarily convey the idea involved in each case. + See remark at buy. The result of taking is appropriation by self. Hence the intr, verb. The words give and take might alone suffice almost to prove the unity of the Turanian languages. 3 H AVA English. Spoil (thing) Be handsome Make handsome Adorn Adorn thyself Adorn him Adorn it for him Adorn her Grow, animal plant, n. Grow it, or cause to grow, tr. Decay, n. Decay it or cause to decay Be adult or mature Make mature Steal, tr. Steal for thyself Steal for him, for another Cause to steal or be stolen Steal not Cause not to steal or be stolen Deceive, cheat, tr. Deceive thyself Deceive not Deceive me Cause me to be deceived Accompany, intr. Leave, quit, tr. Remain with, intr. Sit, = seat thyself, intr. Seat, tr. Cause to seat or to be seated Cause thyself to be seated Sit not Seat not Cause not, do not cause, to sit or be seated Stand, intr. | Make stand Make stand for another Cause to make stand, to be erect Stoop, intr. Make stoop, tr. Cause to make stoop Lie down, intr. Lay down, make lie down Cause to be laid down or to lay down Get up, if recumbent Get up, if sitting Remain standing, intr. Fall, on ground, n. Cause to fall, ditto Fall from aloft, n. Make fall or throw down or let fall Do not make fall * Final cho and mi are proper to the sexes. Vayu Voeabulary. Vayu. Nasi pako. Bingcho dum.* © Bingmi dam. Bingcho thumto. Bingcho pako. Bingcho panche. Bingcho pako. Bingcho pato. Bingmi pako. Jongche. Hon (khon). Liche. Jongto, Honto. Lito. Ri. Rila. Rito. Ripingko. Bangcho dum. Bangho pako. Khbuko. Khuche. Khuto. Khu pingko.t Tha khu. Khu tha ping, Mangpingko (see forget). Mangpingche. Tha mangping. Mang pingsung. Mang pa pingsung. Ko’na lala. Minung khokehe. Was’ to. Ko’na musche. Musche (S’asseoir). Muphto (Mushto). Mut’pingko. Mut’ pingche. Tha musche. Tha mut’. Bangmi dum.” Mut’tha ping or tha mut’ping. Ipche = ereet thyself. Vpo = erect it or him. Ipto = erect it for him. Tppingko. Khungche. Khungto. Khung pingko. Likehe. Likla. Li’ko (Lik-ko). Lik pingko. Buk’ (see Wake). Ipche (see stand). Ipipha musche. Lik. Ruk’. Ruk’la. Ruk’ pingko. Duk’. Duk’la. Tu’ko (Tukko) tuksung, tukche, tukto. Duk pingko. Tha tuk’. Duk’ tha ping. See adjectives, + Khu pha’to (phasto) make a thief of him. No. 1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 415 English. Vayu. Get on, mount, n. Changche. Mount him, cause to mount Changto. Get off, dismount Lische, n. Listo, tr. Put down. Place. Put, tr. Tako. Put down or place for me Tasung. Ditto ditto for self Tanche. Ditto ditto for him Tato. Lift up, raise* from ground, tr. Reko, without force. Guko, with force. Lift up for self Resche. Gukche. Ditto ditto for him Resto, Gukto. Ditto ditto for me Ressung. Guksung. Throw, tr. Jupto, jupsung jupche. Catch with open hand or spread cloth, tr. Doko. Catch with open hand for self Dosche. Ditto ditto for him Dosto. Catch by grasp, tr. Chhuko. Ditto ditto for self Chhusche. Ditto ditto for him Chhusto. Keep, tr. Snatch from, tr. Throw away, tr. Squander, tr. Squander your own Be near, n. Approximate thyself Approximate it Tako (see put.) Lato, lasung lanche, Hopto. Hopche. Khewa n6. Khewa ponche, Khewa panche. Khewa pako. Be distant, intr. Khosche. Kholamdum. Distance him, tr. Khot’phato. Kholam thumto. Distance thyself Khot’ phasche. Bring, trans. Pishto. Bring me or for me Pishsung. Bring thyself or for thyself Pishche. Bring him or for him Pishto. Fetch, comp. Fetch it Fetch it for me or fetch me Fetch for thyself or do thou thyself fetch Fetch for him Cause to fetch or be fetched Bala (= to bring go). Pishto (Bala has no trans.) Basung. Banche, Bato ?? (obsolete trans.) Ba pingko. Take away, tr. Lakto. Take yourself off or take it away for thyself Lakche. Cause to take away or to be taken away Lak pingko. Send, tr. Pingko. Send it for thyself Pinech Do thou thyself send or send thy own Pere Send it for him or on his account or send his things Pingto. Send me or for me Pingsung. Send him or it Pingko. * Raise on the ground is ipo, = erect it or him, as ipche is erect thyself = sit up or stand up. For get up, to a sleeping man, you say sipche, to a sitting man, ipche, to one lying down, buk’. Rise, as respects beings, is ipche or buk’ therefore, but as respects the heavenly bodies the equivalent term is lok’, appear. Spe- cialization is the soul and body of these tougues, which remedy defects of grammar by multiplication of terms, so as to fend off mistakes in the best way available. See note on Kuko. Quoad falling, ruk’ and duk’ apply to beings only. The word for things is lik.’ oH 2 416 English. Cause to send or be sent Carry, bear, trans. Carry it for thyself Carry it for him Carry it for me or me Cause him, it, to carry or to be carried Cross over Cross it over Cross under Cross it under Hold, take in hand, tr. Grasp, tr. Hold up, support, tr. Let it fall or let it be fallen Fall, n. (things only). Throw down, tr. Enter, n. Cause to enter Admit. Insert, tr. Issue, n. ; Cause to issue, expel, drive out Ascend, go up, n. Ascena, come up, n, Descend, go down, n. Descend, come down, n. Cause to ascend or to be ascended Cause to descend or to be descended Arrive, n. here there Cause to arrive, tr. Depart, n. Precede, n. Follow, n. Attend on,n. Appear = show thyself, n. Make it, him, appear Cause to make appear Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. Vayu. Ping pingko. . Ping phato. Kuko.* Kunche, Kuto. Kusung. Kupingko. Lumthe. Lumto. Kudikhalala, Kudikha latpingko. Kuko (see carry). Chhuko, chhusche chhuphto. Doko (see catch), Liklayu. Lik’la. Lik. Li’ko (Likko) liksung, likche, likto. Bek’. Phekto, pheksung, phekche. Bek pingko. Lok’. Lokto, loksung, lokche. Bek’. Jok’. Yonkha la’la. Yu. Bek’pingko. “Jok’pingko. Yonkha lat pingko. Yut’ pingko. Dong, Dongla. Thongto. Lakche} (see take away). Honko ponche. Nongna ponche Ko’na ponche. Khunche, Khunto. Khunpingko. Yu la. Disappear, n, — hide thyself, or lie hid Kinche. Make disappear, make hide or make lie hid Cause to make disappear Make disappear thy own person or goods Make disappear for another Make me disappear Be lost Lose, n. Lose it, tr. Cause to lose it Lose it not * Kuko, like all transitives of its class, gives both the active and passive of 3rd person, preterite; thus, kukum, he carried or was carried. must call the passive has no imperative. form Kuyu, let thyself or him be carried. senses of the imperative are conveyed, and hence the causal forin is often to be regarded as the only representative in these tongues of the passive, as for example, in Newari. \ Damla. Khiko. Kinpingko. Khit’pingko. Khische. Khisto. Khissung. Dam. Thampo, thamsung, thamche, thampto. Thampingko. Tha tham., + Lakche = va-t-en in French. La, to go, is the root. But what we From yu, to descend, you can indeed In the causal form of the verb both 1857.] English. Cause it not to be lost or cause him not to lose it Search, tr. Search not Search me or for me Search for thy own or for thyself or do thou thyself search Search for him, for his, on his account Search not for him Find, tr. Find not Cause to find or to be found Find me or for me Find for thyself or thy own Find for him Cause to find for me or me to be found Cause to find for self or thyself to be found Cause to find for him or him to be found Begin, n. Begin it, tr. Cause it to begin or be begun Continue End, n. End it Cause it to end or be ended Come, n. Cause him, it, to come or to be come Cause me to come or to be come Cause thyself to come or be come Cause him to come or to be come Cause him to come on another’s account Come not Cause not to come Go, n. Cause to go Go not Do not cause to go Get out of the way Clear the way. Make get out of the way Clear the way for me * Wait, ac. intr. Wait for, expect, tr. Wait for me Wait for him Cause to wait Arrive, (1.) here, (2.) there. Cause to arrive Depart, n. Dismiss, tr. Return, intr. Vayu Vocabulary. 417 Vayu. Tham thaping. Hoko. Tha ho. Hosung. Hosche (Hoche). Hophto ? (Hosto) Hoto ? Tha hot (ho). Lenko. Tha leng. Leng pingko. Leng sung. Leng che. Leng to. Leng pingsung. Leng pingche. Leng ping to. Teshche. Teshto. Tet pingko. The root is repeated with the substantive verb to show continued action, as gik nagik nomi, it is flowing and flowing. Topna top nognom, I am striking. Chusche. Chuphto (chusto), Chut pingko. Phi (see on). Phit’ pingko. Phit’pingsung. Phit’ pingche. Phit pingko. Phit pingto. Tha phi. Phit tha ping. La’la (iterated root). Lat’ping ko. Tha la’la. Lat tha ping. Khikche. Khikto. Khiksung. Rimche. Rimto. Rimsung. Rimto. Rimpingko. (1.) Dong. Dong pingko, Lokla. Lokto. Lishche. (2.) Dongla.* Thongto. * So also Bek’ = enter, is come in, and Bek’la, is go in. 418 English. Make return, tr. Increase in height, n. = grow Heighten it Heighten me. Make me grow Increase, in bulk, n. Increase thyself = grow Increase it, tr. in bulk, tr. Increase me in bulk Increase in length, n. Lengthen it Lengthen me Decrease of all sorts, n. Decrease it Add to, tr. Deduct from, tr. Cultivate (land), tr. Cultivate it for me or my land Cultivate it for him or his land Cultivate for self Dig, tr. Dig for self Dig thy own Dig for him, dig his field Dig me, for me, my field Cause to dig or be dug Cause thyself to dig or cause thy own field to be dug Cause him to dig for another, or an- other’s field to be dug for him Cause me to dig or my field to be dug, or (if the field spoke) me to be dug Dig not Cause not to dig Plough, tr. Plough for self Plough for him Plough for me or, (if the field spoke) plough me Plough not Plough not for self or plough not thy own field Cause not to plough, or be ploughed Sow, tr. Cause to sow or be sown Cause not to sow, or be sown Sow for me or sow met Sow me not or sow not for me Transplant, tr. Transplant not Véyu Vocabulary. [No. Vayu. Lishto. Jongche. Jongto. Jongsung. Honta dum. Honche.* Honto (hard h), Honta thumto. Honsung. Phinche. Phinta dum. Phinto. Phinta pako. Phinsung.. Yang. Yangila. Yang pingko, Khapto, khapche, khapsung, Yangto, yangche, yangsung. Vik yé ko.+ Vik yeksung. Vik yekto. Vik yekche. Duko. Dunche. Duto. Dusung. Du pingko. Jongta dum. Du pingche. Du pingto. Du pingsung. Tha du. Du tha ping or Tha du ping. Ruw’ko Ruk-ko, Rukche. Rukto. Ruksung. Tha ruk’, Tha rukche. Tha ruk’ ping. Chho’ko (chhok-ko) chhoksung, chhok- che, chhokto. Chhok’ pingko, Chhok’tbaping. Chhok’sung. Tha chbok’gno. Luphto (Lusto) lussung, lusche. Tha lut’. Cause to transplant or to be transplanted Lut’pingko. * H underlined thus, h. is a guttural. + This word means ‘ clear the jungle’ and alone suffices to show the state of the country and of the people. + Sow me, (what the seed would say) is the true grammatical sense. But the other is widely, nay alone, in use, the constructio ad sensum still overruling the grammar. 1857.] | Vayu Vocabulary. English. Reap, -tr. Reap not Cause to reap or to be reaped Cause not to reap or be reaped Gather, pluck (flowers), no¢ greens, tr. Gather not Gather (cotton) 1 er Pluck (fruit) f" Gather not (cotton) Gather (greens), tr. Pluck up by roots, tr. Eradicate not Fell—tree, tr. Fell not—tree Breed cattle, tr. Breed not Slaughter cattle, tr. Graze, intr. and tr. Flay or decorticate, tr. Flay not Peel fruit Shear, tr. Shear not Buy, ac. intr. Buy it, tr. Cause to buy or be bought Buy it not Buy not for him Buy me or for met Do thou thyself buy it or buy it for thyself Buy it for him Buy it Sell, tr. Cause to sell or to be sold Sell me or for me. Sell thyself or for thyself, or thy own Sell him, it, or for him or his Sell not Exchange or change, ac. intr. Exchange it Exchange me or it for me Exchange it for him Exchange not Exchange it not Exchange it not for him Exchange me not or not for me Vayu. Peshto, pessung, pesche. Tha pet’. Pet’ping ko. Pet’tha ping. Tuko, tusung, tunche, tuto. Tha tu. Seko, sesung, senche, seto. Tha se. Peshto (see reap). Photo phosung, phonche. Tha photo. Phoko, phossung phosche. Thapho. Tunko, tunsung, tunche, tunto. Thatun. Sishto (kill). Yukto (cut). Gupche, intr. Gupto, tr. Ta’ko, taksung, takche, takto. Tha tak, ‘ Keko, kessung, kesche, kesto. Yo’ko, yeksung, yekche, yekto. Tha yek’. Ingche.* Ingko, ingsung, ingche, ingto. Ing pingko. Tha ing. Tha ingto. Ingsung. Ingche. Ingto (Ingkto).t Ingko. Thamto. Thampingko. Thamsung. Thamche., Thamto. Tha thamto. Jyapche (see buy). Jya’ po (Jyap po). Jyap’sung,. Jyap’to.t Tha jyap’che. Tha jyap’. Tha jyap’to. Tha jyapmo. 419 * See eat and take. In every act, of which the result returns to self, this form is preferred to the transitive. The French tongue affords a good clue. + I have already said that buy me seems to be the truer sense, whence the passive ingsungmi, I was bought. But in the class of transitives to which ingko belongs, ingsungmi is also the present and future tense of the active voice, viz. I buy it or will buy it. Ingche, the intransitive, gives ingchung mi in both tenses, I pay (i. e. will buy) and I bought, ~ This form solves the difficuity as to two transitive signs following a verbal root, and enables me often to reach the primitive monosyllabic type of words—a thing of the highest import to special and general philology. A420 English. Lend, tr. Borrow, intr. Pay debt, tr. Pay not Count, tr. Count not Measure or weight, tr. Weigh not Plaster, tr. Make house, tr. Make clothes, tr. Make not clothes Make clothes for me Make for self Make for him Spin, tr. Spin not Weave, tr. Weave not Sew, tr. Sew not Grind, tr. Work mine, tr. Work iron, tr. Work wood, tr. Work clay, tr. Cook, tr. Be cooked = be ripe, be prepared, n. Boil, tr. Boil not Roast, tr. Ditto for me Ditto for self Ditto for another Grill, fry, tr. Cut, tr. Cut not Cut me or for me Cut thyself or for thyself Perforate, tr. Pierce (being), tr. Tear, tr. Tear thy own, tear for thyself, tear thyself Split, tr. Break , tear (long things), tr. Break it, in pieces Burst it (round things), tr. Be broken or be burst, n. Brew, tr. Distill, tr. Filtrate. Deficate, tr. Be sharp, n. Sharpen, tr. Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5. Vayu. Penku hato, hasung, hanche. Penku lasche (see buy),—lassung, lasto. Thengko, phensung, phengche, phengto. Tha pheng. Hito, hisung, hinche, hito. Tha hito. Po’ko vel Puwko, puksung, pukche, pukto. Tha pok’. Suto, susung, sunche. Kem pako. Jewa piko, pisung, pinche, pito. Jewa tha pi. Jewa pisung. Jewa pinche. Jewa pito. Chenko, chingsung, chingche, chingto. Tha cheng. Pungko, pungsung, pungche, pungto. Thapung. Piko. Tha pi. Reko, resung, renche, reto. Khani duko (dig). Khakchingto’po (beat) topsung, topche, topto. Sing chu’ko (plane) chyuksung, chukche, chukto. Ko chyako (knead) chyassung, chydsche, chyasto. Khoko khossung, khosche, khosto. Min, minko, minche, minto. Khoko. Tha kho. Sunko. Sunsung. Sunche. Sunto. Chuko, chusung, chunche, chuto. Yukto. Tha yukto. Yuksung. Yukche. Sa (s) to. Chhepto, chhepche, chhepsung. Jito, jisung, jinche, jito. Suto. Jinche, Hakto. Chito, haksung, hakche, hakto, Chi’ko (chik’-ko), chiksung, chikche, chikto. } Kheto, khesung, khenche, Jik’. Jikla. Réla or Ré, Swe pophto, possung, posche, posto. Bukchapako. Chi’po, chipsung, chipche, chipto. Yep. Yep phato. Chho’po. Chho’po, gives chhopsung, chhopche, chhopto. 1857.] English. Be blunt, n. Blunten. Shake, tr. Move, n. Move it, tr. Be still, n. (= move not). Make still, tr. Make blunt, tr. Vayu Vocabulary. 421 Vayu. Gnun. Gnito, gnisung gnunche. Hok’to, Hoksung, hokche. Duk’. Thukto, thuksung, thukche. Tha duk’. Tha thukto. Contain or hold, (= Be contained and contain it). Vek, vekche, n. Vekto, vekphato, tr. Make contain or cause to be contained Vek pingko. Retain, sustain, tr. Retain, intr. Cause to retain Ooze out, n. Make ooze out Stop it oozing out Be full—belly (fill own belly), intr. Fill it—belly, tr. Be full—vessel Fill it—vessel Be empty, n. Empty it, tr. Shine, as sun, n. Flow, as water Cause to flow Blow, as wind, intr. Grow, as tree, ac. intr. Cause to grow, or grow it Decay, rot, nu. Make decay Flower, n. Cause to flower Fruit, n. Cause to fruit Be ripe, n. Ripen, tr. Ripen it for him Be raw, n. Make raw, tr. Be cold (things only) intr. Make cold, tr. Be hot, intr., n. Heat it, tr. Be luminous, n. Make luminous Be dark, n. Darken it, tr. Light it (candle), tr. Light, intr. (Be lighted) Kindle it (fire), tr. Doko. Donche. Dot’ pingko. Jot’: Jot’ pingko. Rito, rdsung, rinche. Tamche. Tamto, tamsung, tamche, tamto, Chinche. Dam. Phul dum, Damto, dampingko, Phul pako, Chinko. Polang dum. Polang pako. Kak. Chok’. Gikla. Dengla. Gik pingko. Hujum ponche. Liche. Lito, lisung, liche, lito. Rila. Méla. Rit phato. Met’-pha’to (phasto). But’. But’ pha’to, phassung, phasche, phasto. Sé Set’pha’to (phasto). Min. Minko, minsung, minche, minto. Minto. hhalang-no-dum.* Chhalang pako, posung, panche, pato. Khimche. Khimto, khimsung, khimche, khimto. Jeche. Jekhomdum or ponche. Jeto. Jekhom pako. Jeto gives jesung, jenche, jeto. Dang dang dum or ponche. Dang dang pako. Kung kung dum or ponche. Kung kung pako. Nako, nasung, nache, nato. Nache. Du’po, dupsung, dupche, dupto. Jos- to, jossung, josche, josto. Kindle, n. or Be kindled ac. Josche. Dupche. Kindle thyself intr. * N6=be. Dum = become. 4.22 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5. English. Vayu. Burn, i. e. destroy by fire, tr. Yemto, yemsung, yemche, yemto. Be burnt (= go burnt, n. Yemla. Burn thyself or burn it for self, ac. intr. Yemche. Burn, corpse, tr. Umto, umsung, umche, umto. Bury, corpse, tr. Khumpo, khumsung, khumche, khumto, Melt, n. Yekla (see run), Melt it, tr. Ye’ko (see cultivate). Cause to melt Yek pingko. Congeal, n. Ningla.* Nengle. Congeal it, tr. Ningto. Nengto. Congeal thyself Nengche. Congeal me Nengsung. Cause to congeal Ningpingko. Share out, apportion, tr. Pleko, plesung, pleche, pleto. Bring together, collect, tr. Ko’na pako. Hupto. Collect for thyself, intr. Hupche. Collect for me or me, p. Hupsung. Separate, tr. Gege pako. Divide, tr. Thuto, thusung, thunche. Scatter, tr. Hampo. Join, what broken, tr. Thuphto (Thusto) thussung, thusche. Disjoin, undo, tr. Chhako, chhassung, chhasche, chhasto, Mix, tr. Khunto, khunsung, khunche. Unmix, tr. Thoto, thosung, thonche. Save (money), tr. Hupto, hupsung, hupche. Squander, tr. Hopto, hopsung, hopche. Spread ete. hal posung, poche. Hampo, hamsung, . hamche. Fold, tr. Khoko, khossung, khosche. Be shut, intr. Thikche, Shut it, tr. Thikto. Be open, open for thyself, intr. Honche.f Open it, tr. Honko. Press, squeeze, compress if, tr. Napto. Compressed be, or compress thyself or compress with own hand Napche. Depress, tr. Phimto. Be depressed, depress for thyself Phimche. Express, tr. Pelto, Be expressed, intr. Pelche. Turn over carefully, tr. pa ct Lokswng,.qokoehey Turn topsy turvy. Put in disorder Khalim, khulim, pako. Spread in sun to dry (grain), tr. Blento or Bento, blensung, blenche. Roll up, tr. Ku’ko (Kukko) kuksung, kukche, kukto. Unroll, tr. Chhako, chhassung, chhasche, chhasto, Be loose, be slack, n. Woso dum. Woso ponche. Loosen, slacken, tr. Woso pako, posung, panche, pato. Be tight Khwa (s) ta dum. Tighten thy own or for thyself Khwasche, Tighten, tr. Khwa (s) to khwassung, khwasche. Cause to tighten Khwat’ pingko. Gird thy loins, a. intr. Kikche. Bind, tr. rr hee pansung, panche. Wampo, wamsung, wamche, wamto. * e and i, like o and u are constantly commuted. + Thikche and honche, shut thyself, and open thyself, addressed to the door. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 42 English. Unbind, tr. Pack, tr. Unpack, tr. Load, tr. Unload, tr. Put on, tr. Take off, tr. Take off (from fire), Put in, insert, tr. Take out, tr. Pour in, tr. Catch as poured in, tr. Pour out on ground, tr. Suspend, tr. Take down what suspended, tr. Take hold of, tr. Quit hold of, tr. Throw, tr. Catch as thrown, tr. Stay, stop, intr. Stay it, stop it, tr. Stop me Let go, tr. Enable to go, tr. Be clean, n. Make clean, tr. Wash—things only, tr. Wash thy own, intr. Wash me or mine, p. Rub or rub it, tr. Rub thy own or rub simply, intr. Rub me or mine Be polished Polish it, tr. Polish it for thyself Cover, tr. Cover thyself Cover me Uncover, tr. Uncover thyself or thy own Shoot, with arrow, gun, tr. Shoot me or for me Shoot thyself or for thyself Shoot it for him, tr. Stone, hit with stone, tr. Wring its neck, tr. Wring not its neck Wring clothes, tr. Wring not clothes Twist rope, tr. Go Vayu. Chhako (see unroll). Khuli pako. Khuli chhako. Ku pingko. Khuli tako, tosung, tanche, tato. Cho’ko (chokko) choksung, chekche, Luko, lusung, lusche, lusto. Yo’po, yopsung, yopche, yopto. Kheko, khessung, khesche, khesto. Thophto, thossung, thosche. Kheko, khesung, khesche, khesto. Chosto, chhossung, chhosche. Chisto, chissung, chische. Veko, vesung, vesche, vesto. Luko, lusung, lusche. luto. Chhuko, chhusung, chhusche, chhuto. Teshto, tesche, tessung. Jupto, jupsung, jupche. Doko, dossung, dosche, doto. Lat’pingko. Lat’ phato. Wota dum. Woche. Woto, wosung, woche. Chhunche. Chhunsung. Khissung. Liku ponche. Liku pako. Liku panche. Supto. Supche. Rumsung. Supsung. Honko, hongsung, honche, hongto, Wo’po (wop-po). Wopsung, Chasto, chassung, chasche. Khi’po (khippo) khipsung, khipche, Tha £hip’. Pelto, pelsung, pelche. Tha pelto. * In Newari Khipo is used only substantively, a rope. Just so the root kai means the hand and to grasp in Telegu and Tamil, but to grasp only in Newari, Whosoever will ¢hus search may discover the true extent, quoad words, of Tura- nian affinities, not otherwise. See Tire. 312 424 English. Untwist rope, tr. Resemble, be like Cause to resemble or liken simply Cause to cause to resemble, or cause to liken Be unlike Make unlike Be white, n. (things, animals) Be white (rationals only), Whiten it, Whiten him, Whiten me tr. Whiten thyself or it for thyself or do thou thyself whiten him or it Whiten it for him Be ripe (fruits) Make ripe (ditto) Be ripe (grains) Make ripe (ditto) Be wet or wet thyself Wet it Cause it to be wetted Be dry (things only) Dry it Dry it in sun Dry it at fire Be flavoursome Flavour it, tr. Be sweet, n. Sweeten it, tr. Be sour Make sour Be bitter Make bitter Be knotted, intr. Knot it, tr. . Be great, n. Make great, tr. Be heavy, intr. Make heavy, tr. Be light (levis) Make light, tr. Be hard, intr. Harden it, tr. Cause to harden or to be hardened Be soft, n. Soften it, tr. Be crooked Crook it, tr. Vayu Vocabulary. Vayu. Chhako (see loosen). Tosche. Totvi dum, Tophto. Totvi pako. Tot’ pingko. Mang totvi dum. Mang totvi pako. Dawang dum. Dawang ponche. Bochho, dum, ponche. Dawang pako. Bochho pako. Dawang. Bocho, posung or posung. Dawang. Bochho, panche. Dawang pato. Ji. Jito, jisung, jinche. in, Minko, minsung, minche, minto. Na’-che (nasche). Na’-to, nassung, nasche. Nat’pingko. Dungs, \ Dung pingko. Boko or Bloko,* blosung, blosche, blosto. Sungko, sungsung, sungche, sungto. Chhumche. Chhumto, chhumsung, chhumche Chhinji, dum or poncle. Chhinji, thumto or pako. Jusche. Justo. Khasche. Kha (s) to. Rupche. Rupto. Hon (Khon). Honto. Honta thumto. Lishche. Lishtadum. Lishto. Lit phato. Oksang dum. Oksang pako. Chamche. Chamto, chamsung, chamche. Champingko. Nalcho dum. Nalcho pako. Khokche. Khokta dum. Kho’ko. Khokta-thumto, khoksung, khokche, khokto. * Every initial labial followed by a vowel admits ad libitum of an interposed liquid, thus boko vel bloko and so bekto vel blekto = write. I may here add that v and y are constantly used both to keep apart concurring vowels and to facilitate the utterance of initial vowels. 1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 425 Adverbs and Prepositions compared. English. Vayu. Come, n. Phi. Come in Bhitari phi. Bek’. Come out Tongmaphi. Lok’. Come back, to rear Nongna phi or ponche. Come on, to front Honko phi. Honko ponche. Come up Lonkha or Wanhe phi. Jok’. Come down Yonkha or Huthe phi. Yu. Come back = return Khalip phi or Lische. Come again Gessa phi. Come once Kophi phi. Come twice Nakphi phi. Come thrice Chhukphi phi. Come four times Blikphi phi. Come at once or in one place or together Kolube phi. Come at once, at one time Kophe phi. Come near Khewa phi. Come close Ko’na phi. Come apart Gege phi. Come far away Kholam phi. Come with Ko’na phi. Come with me Ang nung phi. Come alone Chhale phi. Angma nosa phi. Ungma nosa phi. Come without me—thee—him eeemahe Come towards—me—thee—him { ce aie Ae i Ey ULSI Come up to me, as far as my position Ang bong phi. Come as far as this—that Tnung bong phi. Minung bong phi. Come quickly Waliga phi. Come slowly Pomha or Pomhana phi. Come by and by, after awhile Omophe phi. Come silently Giwonha phi. Come noisily Tamnitam phi. Come early Honko phi. Come at sunrise Nomoloksinge phi. Come at sunset Nomo thip singhe phi. Come late Nongna phi. Come loiteringly Ga’ gat’ha phi. Come over—by top eee khen phi. Khak Come under—by under way Hutti phi. Hutim khen phi. Come through, between Madumna phi. Come across Thekche phi* or Thek thekha phi. Come to this—that side Imba phi. Homba phi. Come constantly Phina phi ponche. Come sometimes Kophi nakphi phi. Come ever No such phrase. Come never Hakhele} thaphi. * Equal ‘ to cross and come,’ that is, crossing come = having crossed come, thek thekha phi. The gerund of present time, theklie; is never used on such occasions. + Hakhele can only be used with the negative, like jamais in French, 4:26 English. Never come again Come by this side Come by that side Come to the right Come by the left Come from the west Come to the east Come towards the east Come towards the west Go towards the plains Go as far as Nepal Give a little Give much Give secretly Give openly Give gladly Give sulkily Give to-day Give mutually Give continually Strike forcibly Strike gently A house Of a house To a house A house In a house From the house By (inst.) the house ee \ the house nto ae } the house As far as house Towards the house Before the house Opposite, in front of, the house Behind the house To the rear of house On, upon, the house Above the house From upon house Beneath house Below the house From under house Near the house Far from house At the house On account of house In lieu of a house Through the house Beyond the house To right of house To left of house On this side the house Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. Vayu. Hakhele gessa thaphi. Inikhen phi. Mini— Wathim—khenphi. Jajabe phi. Khanja khen phi. Nomothip lung khen phi. Nomolok lung be phi. Nomolok lung rekphi. Nomothiplung rekphi. Gagin mulungrek la’la, Nepal bong 14’1a. Yanggnak hato. Chhinggnak hato. Khinta baha hato. Khunta baha hato. Yot’yot’ha or Bong ni bong or Bong- bongha hato. Mang yot’yot’ha-hato. Tiri hato. Haha, panachhe, pochhe, Duals. Hanaha pako. Chotiha to’po. Pom hana to’po. (no Dat. or acc. sign). Kem be. Kem khen. Kem ha. Kem bhitari. Kem tongma. Kem bong. Kem rek. Kem honko. Kem kakphang. Kemmu bimli be. { Kem nongna, Kem senti be. Kem wani be. Kem khen lonkha. Kem wani khen. Kem hutti be. Kem khen yonkha, Kem hutti khen. Kem khewa. Kem khen kholam. Kem be. Kem mu lisi. Kem mu let’chhing. Kem mu madumna., Kem wathe or kem homba, Kem mu jaja. Kem mu khanja. Kem mu imba or kem imba. 1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 427 English. Vayu. On that side the house Kem mu or kem homba. From this side the house Kem inikhen. Kem imbam khen. rum that side the Ranke Kem wathi khen. Kem mini khen., Kem hombam khen. With (having) a house Kem nothe. Kem got’he. Without (wanting) a house Kem ma notvhe. Kem ma got’he. SRA PRA BRA RDAAARADAADAD LLP LV LIL SPI PSF LDL I LISI ne a at Riis Lay f "i JOURNAL OF THE PerAlTiCO SOCIETY. PLP DL DLP PLIOOPOPDPYVPLPIPPVIPF PPYIPVYIVYIV IF PY VI No. VI. 1857. ~~. PEPALDIIYIYIYJYIVI Iv aad Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of Neépil.—_By B. H. Hopason, Hsq., B.C. SN. Continued from No. V. Vayu DEcCLENSION. 1st of Pronouns. Personals. Singular. N. I, Go. “G. Of me, Ang, conjunct, = my.* Angmu, disjunct, = mine, oa tee +66. No sign. In, at i. ew: fang Bee Ab, from me, Ang khen. Ins. by me, G’ha (go- ha). Soc. with me, Angnung, Priv. without me, Ang ma nosa.f Dual. N. G6 nakpu, m. f. G6 nargung, n.f * Ang the constructive form of g6, means my, before a substantive or qualitive used substantivally, but before a transitive participle it means me or of me, e. g, ang tovi, who beats me, or the beater of me. Yet ang topchyang is my club, topchyang being the neuter form of tovi, used as a noun. + There is no proper privative particle, nor consequently, case. Ang ma nosa or g6 ma nosa=if I be not, I not being, or my not being (present). In Khas, man na bhai: in Newari, ji ma dusa. Nakpo, nayung is the 2nd numeral which is gendered when used apart, but doubtfully I think, and still more so when used as a dual sign. I find, however, nakpu, nangmi, nayung for the three genders. Also hic et hee nakpu, No, XC.—New Senizs, Von, X XVI. 3K 430 Vayu Vocabulary. Conjunct. G Angchi, excl. Ungchi, incl. i Disjunct. Angchimu, excl. Ungchimu, incl. D, Ac. Gonakpu, m.f. Gonargung, n. 1.. - Angchi be, excl. Ungchi be, incl. Ab. Angchi khen, excl. Ungchi khen, incl. Ins. G6 nakpu ha or Gha nakpu ha. Soc. Angchi nung, excl. Ungchi nung, incl. Plural. N. Go khata. Conjunct. G Angki, excl. Ungki, incl. oy : Disjunct. Angkimu, excl. Ungkimu, incl. D. Ac. G6 khata. No sign. L. Angki be, excl. Ungki be, incl. Ab. Angki khen, excl. Ungki khen, incl. Ins. Go khata ha or Gha khata ha. Soc. Angkinung, excl, Ungkinung, incl. Second person. N. Gon. G. Ung, conjunct = Thy. Ungmu, disjunct. = Thine, D. Ac. Gon. No sign. L. Ung be. Ab. Ung khen. Ins. Gon ha. Ss. Ung nung. Dual. N. Gonchhe. G. Ungcehhi, conj. Ungchhimu, dis}. D. Ac. Gonchhe. No sign. L. Ungcbhi be. Ab. Ungcbhi khen. Ins. Gonchhe ha. Soc. Ungcbhi nung. Third Personal, N: Wathi. All 3 genders. - G. Wathim, conj. Wathimmu, disj. D. Ac. Wathi, No sign, L. Wathim be. Ab. Wathim khen, ° Ins. Wathi ha, Soc. Wathim nung, Dual. N. Wathi nakpu, m. Wathi nangmi, f. Wathi nayung, n. c, aforegone. { Wathim nakpum, conj. \ | Wathim nakpumu, dis). G J Wathim nangmim, con}. be : Wathim nangmimu, dis}. | Wathim nayung, conj. kn aoe Ree ( Wathim nayungmu, disj. f° : D. Ac. Wathinakpu, m. Wathi nangmi, f. Wathi nayung, n. and c. | No. 6. See note Loc. Wathim nakpumbe, m. Wathim nangmi be, f. Wathim nay ung be n. and c, 1857. ] Vayu : Vocabulary. 431 Ab. Wathim nakpum khen, m. Wathim nangmim khen, f. Wathim nayung khen, n. and c. Ins. Wathi nakpu ha, m, Wathi nangmi ha, f, Wathi nayung ha, n. and f. Soc. Wathim nakpum nung, m. Wathim nangmim nung, f. Wathim nayung nung, n. and c, Plural. N. Wathi khata, m. f. n. G. | Wathim khatam, conj. Wathim khatamu, disj. D. Ac. Wathi khata. Loc. Wathim khata be. Ab. Wathim khata khen. Ins. Wathi khata ha. Soc. Wathim khata nung. Near demonstrative. N. Y, All three genders. : Tnung, conj. Inungmu, disj. D. Ac. Y. No sign. Loc. Tnung be. Ab. Inung khen. Ins, Tha. Soc. Inung nung. Dual, N. Inakpu, m. Inangmi, f. Inayung, n. and ce ( Inakpum, con}. | Inakpumu, disj. | Inangmim, conj. = 1 Inangmimu, dis}. } : pene ee tn, and c. | Inayungmu, disj. D. Ac. Inakpu, m. Inangmi,f. Inayung, n. L Inung nakpumbe, m. Inung nangmimbe, f. Inung nayung be, n. Ab. Inung nakpum khen, m. Inung nangmim khen, f. Inung nayung khen, n. c. Ins. Inak poha, m. Inangmiha, f, MInayung ha, n. and c. Soc. Inung nakpum nung, m. Inung nangmim nung, f. Inung nayung nung, n. c. Plural, N. Ykhata. All genders. G Inung khatam, conj. Inung khatamu, disj. D. Ac. Ikhata. Loc. Inung khata be. Abl. Inung khata khen. Ins. Ikhata ha. Soc. Inung kKhata nung. Remote demonstrative. N. Mi. All genders. G. Minung, conj. Minungmu, disj, &c. as in the last. Interrogative and distributive pronoun, m, f. Who? Any one, Some person. Suor Suna. Subs. and Adj. nN. Sa. Suna. G. Sam. Sanam, conj. Sumu. Sunamu, disj. mene, Sa. Suna. Loc. Sabe, Sunabe. Abl. Sakhen, Sunakhen. Tus. Suha, Sunaha. Soc. Sunung, Sunanung. 432 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. Dual. N. Su or Suna nakpu, m. Su or Suna nangmi, f. &c. as before. Plural. N. Sa or Sunakhata, &c. as before. Interrogative and distributive pronoun, n. What? Any or something. Mische. a. Mischem, conj. Mischemu, disj. &c. Dual. N. Mische nayung, &c. Plural. N. Mische khata, &c. Relative, interrogative and distributive pronoun and pronominal adjective which, what, who. N. Hanung, m, f. n. G. H4nung,* conj. Hanungmu, disj. &c. Dual. N. Hanung nakpo, m. Hanung nangmi, f. Hanung nayung, n. | Hanung nangmim, f, 3 Hanung nayung, n. \ Hanung nakpumu, dis}. ( Hanung nakpum, m. conj. G. | Hanung nangmimu, | Hanung nayungmu, And so on, like wathi, except that hanung has no inflexional shape (itself being inflexional). Hence it has hanung nakpo and hanung khata, where wathi has wathim nakpo and wathim khata. And this is likewise the case with the possessive pro- nouns, all of which, though but genitives of the personals, are regarded as inde- pendant and declined like the personals. Thus also are declined the interrogative and relative of number and quantity, with its correlative, or hatha, mitha = how much or many? and so much or many.. Thus also the adverbs of time and place, Inhe, here, Wathe and Minhe, there. Hanhe, where? Ithe or Umbe or Abo, now; Mithe, then; Hakhe, when? with all the rest of the adverbs that are not gerunds. Observe that these adverbs are derived from the demonstratives in the locative case. But, where, f, Miand Wathi, the pronouns take the inflexional m, or nung, (whence come inungmu and wathimmu = his) the corresponding adverbs have no inflexional mark, but remain immutable, only adding the declensional signs m or mu, be, khen, &c. ; and thus we have ithamu and inhemu, of here, and ithakhen, inhe- khen, from here, and abomu, of now, abokhen from now, not abommu, abomkhen, Observe also that the conjunct possessives (genitives of the personals) are inde- clinable, but that the disjunct are declinable like the personals, Ang, ung, wathim, inung, minung, are inflexional forms merely, therefore angkhen = from me. But angmu is a possessive pronoun proper, whence angmukhen-be-ha = from mine, in mine, by mine. * The conjunct form of the genitive of this pronoun has no sign, being marked by position alone, as when two substantives meetis always admissible. Hanung is itself a genitive — of whom, of which, e. g. hanung got ha, of which (and which) hand, Hanungmu = whose, apart, or in reply. Hanungmu got = the hand of whom. Hanung got = which hand. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 433 IIl.—Dercuession oF Nouns. Substantive. Ist.—Substantives proper. Léncho, a man, m. N. Loncho. G. Loucho, conj.* Lonchomu, dis). D. Ac. Léncho. L. Lénchobe. Ab. Loénchokhen. Ins. Lénchoha. Soc, Lénchonung. Dual. N. Léncho nakpo.t G. Léncho nak pum,t conj. Loncho nak pumu, disj. D. Ac. Léncho nakpo. Loc. Lénchonak pube. Abl. Léncho nakpukhen. Ins. Loéncko nakpuha. Soc. Loncho nakpu nung. Plural. N. Lénchokhata.t G. Loénchokhatam,{ conj, Léncho khatamu, dis}. D. Ac. Léoncho khata. L. Loéncho khabe. Abl. —- Léncho khata khen. Soc. Loncho khata nung. Thus also is declined the feminine noun mescho, a woman, the epicene noun singtong, mankind, and all such without reference to gender. Neuters also are similarly declined. But I add a specimen. Sing, wood, a neuter. i Sing. G, Sing, conj. Singmu, disj. &c. Dual. N. Nang sing (nang is a contraction of Nayung) or Sing nayung. c. Nang sing, conj. Nang singmu, disj. &c, * The first of 2 substantives is by position alone a genitive, as loncho got, the man’s hand. Sut apart, it must have the sign, as lonchomu, the man’s, + Generally in the Himalayan languages, the dual and plural signs are eschewed in regard to substantives proper except where ambiguity would arise from omitting them. In regard to appellatives and qualitives used substantivally, as all may be, these signs are always annexed and also those of gender, because such words, (and pronouns of the 3rd person also, to which the same rule applies) unlike the former tell nothing of themselves on these points. Vayu, however, freely applies its dual and plural signs and its sex signs, where it has any, to all nouns and pronouns, though the structure of its verb renders such use of the dual and plural signs superfluous, e. g. béli imchimem, the sheep are sleeping. Newari, though void of such help, lacks a dual and plural of neuters, ~ We should rather read nakpu and khata for the reason given in a prior note. Yet my informants, though they never apply the genitive to the conjunct form of this case in the singular, do so in the dual and plural. 434 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. Plural. N. Sing khata. G. Sing khata, conj. Sing khatamu, disj. &c. 2nd.—Participles used substantivally (Remark. When they are used adjectiv- ally, which they all are to a great extent, they precede the noun and are immutable, like all other adjectives), T6’vi, he or she who beats, the beater, m. and f, N. To'vi, m; f. iG; Toé’vi, conj. To’vimu, dis). D. Ac...) To’vi, é&e, Dual, iN. To’vi nakpu, m. To’vi nangmi, f. G. To’vi nakpu, m. conj. T6’vi nangmi, f. conj. Té’vi nakpumu, m. dis}. To’vi nangmimu, f. dis}. &c. as before. Plural. N. Td’vi khata, m. f. G. T6’vi khata, con}. To’vi khatamu, disj. &c. as before. Topchyang, neuter of the above, what one strikes with, as club, stick, &c. ine Topchyang. G. Topchyang, conj. Topchyangmn, dis). &c. Dual. N. Nang topchyang. G. Nang topchyang, conj. Nang topchyangmu, disj. &c. Plural. N. Topchyang khata. G. Topchyang khata, conj. Topchyang khatamu, disj. &c. So also Topta, who or what has been beaten, m. f. n. with the requisite adap- tation of nakpu, nangmi or nang (nayung) in the dual. 3rd.—Qualitives used substantivally, e. g. Khakchhing-wo, m. Khakchhing-mi, f. Khakchhing-mu, n. and c. This and all the like are declined as above. And so also are the qualitives which substitute the formative ‘‘ cho” for “wo’’ in the masculine, as Bang-cho, a mature man; Bing-cho, a handsome man, &c. The feminines of these are in ‘‘ mi’’ as in the last. They have no neuters in this form; but they can superadd the usual m,. f.n., signs, as bang-cho-wo, a mature man, bang-cho-mi, a mature woman, bang-cho-mu, a mature thing, and then of course they have the complete hic, hec, hoc of gender, 4th.—The numerals, inclusive of the adverbial ones. 5th.—Derivative qualitives formed from abstracts, as Daksa-wo, the covetous man, Daksa-mi, the covetous woman, from Daksa, covetousness. Choti-wo, the strong man; Choti-mi, the strong woman, Choti-mu, the strong thing, from Choti, strength, Suksa-wo, the hungry man; Suksa-mi, the hungry woman, from Suksa, hunger ; and all such. 6th.—Nominal as well as pronominal genitives, which, with the m or mu forma- tive, are all treated as distinct substantives, e. g. singmumu, the wooden one. (Remark. The cacophonous iteration of the mu (though often truncated in the second syllable, singmum) owing to the coincidence of the genitival and formative signs, makes the use of such words rare when a possessive case meaning must be assigned to them. They are used, however, freely in all other cases). 7th.—Simple or compound words indicating one’s country, profession or avo- == the black one, being or thing. 1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 435 cation and the like, and which are not expressed participially,* form yet another class of substantives, as Chhugong-wo = a Bhotia, or native of Tibet; Chhugong- mi, a Bhotini or female of Tibet; Héngong-wo (m.), Hengong-mi (f.), a male and female of Nepal proper ; Gyétimnamsang-wo-mi, a male and female stranger or foreigner; Rakcho-wo-mi, a male and female ploughman, Bdéchhé-wo-mi, a male and female European (white-body) Gaginmulung-wo-mi, a male and female of the plains. In short, nouns of whatever sort (and the above enumeration has been made here, though not strictly germain to grammar, expressly to show the various sorts of nouns and their mode of construction) and pronouns also, wherever used substantivally or disjunctly, and therefore declinable, all follow the above single form of declension, And, on the other hand every noun and pronoun when used conjunctly, that is, preceding a substantive which is thereby qualified, is always indeclinable, and, for the most part, altogether unchangeable, having no expressed grammatical affections whatever, the signs of genders being neglected in use even where they exist. Indeed qualifying and qualified words seem to be as much as possible regarded as constituting a single compound term ; and, the more effectuslly to ensure this, one of the two elements (the one that goes first in the compound) is customarily truncated; thus risa, a plantain, and singphum, a tree, make risaphum; and topmung, to strike and ramum, I fear, make topramum. And so also the inflexional forms of the personal pronouns which are used as qualifying or adjectival words, are to be regarded as quasi agglu- tinated and perfectly immutable prefixes of the substantive, entirely distinct from the correspondent pronouns of the possessive kind, which latter stand apart and are liable to declensional changes after the above model, like all other qualitives used substantivally or disjunctly. * The participles (in vi, ta, and tang) being inherently relative, assume a sub- stantival character without the necessity of suflixing the usual appellative form. atives in wo velcho, and mi, though these may be superadded, if to mark the sex of the agent be specially required. Thus to’vi, the striker, the he or she who strikes, is not only an adjective, as to’vi ta’wo, the beating boy, but an inde- pendant noun, the beater. Nevertheless would you specify the sex, you can say to’vi-wo, the male striker and to’vi-mi, the female striker, 436 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6. Vayu VERBS. 1st.—Conjugation of neuters, conjugated froni the Sheer root. Verb Phi to come. Infinitive Mood. Affirmative.— Phit’mung to come or to have come, aoristic.* Negative-—Mang phit’mung, not to come, &c. Gerunds. Phit’he F § Phit’he with verbs in present tense, ive ee ( Phitnung with verbs in preterite. Phit’hephithe, or Phit’nung phit’nung, contiuuative present. Phit’phitha, Past, having come. Phit’singhe, Present or Fature, when coming. Phit’khen. Past, after coming, after having come. Participles. Phit’vi. Present and future, who or what comes or will come. Also the comer substantival. Phis’ta. Past, who or what has come or came. Phit’tang, 7 Verbal nouns, | Phit’chyang, + Phit’lung, Phit’sing. N. B.—The medial t’ and s’ are merely enunciative, not formative. Imperative Mood. These forms expressing respectively passive futurity or fitness or habit, and instrumentality, locality and time, are hardly or not at all useable, save with verbs more or less transitive. See on to them in sequel. Singular. Dual, Plural, Phi, Phicbhe. Phine. Negative. Tha phi. Tha phichhe. Tha phine. Indicative Moed. Future tense, used also for preeent. Singular. Dual. Plural. : Phi chhokmi, excl. Phikokmi, excl. 1, Phignom. Phi chhikmi, incl. ee incl. 2. Phimi. Phi chbikmi. Phinem. 3. Phimi. Phi chhikmi, Phimem. Preterite tense. = A ¢( Phi chhongmi, excel. Phi kikéngmi, excl. 1. Phisungmi, 2 Phi chhingmi, incl. 1 Phi kikengmi, incl. 2. Phimi. Phi chhem., Phinem. 3, Phimi. Phi chhem. Phimem. Subjunctive Mod. Present tense. , Phi chhoknam, excl. Phi koknam, excl. nee { nam hike { Phi chhiknam, incl. Phi kenam, inel. 2. Phi-nam-sa Phi chhiknam, Phine nam. 3. Phi-nam-sa Phi chhiknam. Phime nam. * The infinitive is also used adjectivally and is nearly the same as the participle n “fang. 1857.| Vayu Vocabulary. 437 Preterite. ey Phi chhong phen, excl. Phi ki kéng phen, excl. ee Phen. Phi chhing phen, incl. Phi ki keng phen, incl. 2. Phi phen. Phi chhe phen. Phi ne phen. 3. Phi phen. Phi chhe phen. Phi me phen. Interrogative Mood. Present tense. Singular. 1. Phigno ki ma. And so on, as in the subjunctive; that is, the terminal 2. Phi ki ma. m or mi is dropt and ki ma, = or not, is added in lieu 3. Phi ki ma. of the subjunctive signs, nam or sa and phen. Negative Mood. There is no separate negative verb. The affirmative verb is conjugated with ma, the particle of negation, before it, Ma phi gnom. Ma phi sungmi, &e. Potential Mood. Singular. Se ate . (For all tenses, phasche being aoristic except in dual z ae ee i peg and plural. Phasche, the reflex form of the verb pha, 3. Phit’ ai ee, is conjugated with the root phi to express power. ; P haa For phasche see im’che in sequel, or 5th conjugation. Precative Mood. Singular. Present. Preterite. 1. Phi gno yu, Phisung yu. ¢ Drops the final m or mi of the ordinary verb 2. Phi yu. Phi yu. and substitutes for it the immutable verbal 3. Phi yu. Phi yu. particle ya, Another form of the precative mood, equivalent to that which is usually joined with the imperative in English (let me come, come thou, let him come, &c.) is formed by compounding the infinitive of the main verb with the verb to give used as an auxiliary, thus :— Singular. Dual. Plural. 1. Phimung hasung. Phimung hachhong. Phimung hatikong. 8. Phimung hato. Phimung hatochhe, Phimung hatome. The first ordinary form of the precative may be best rendered in English by O! that I may or might come, &c.; this, by, Let me come, Let him come &c., liter- ally, give me to come, give him to come, and so on for the dual and plural according to the model of transitives in “to’’ in sequel. Optative Mood. Singuiar. , : é and so on throughout the verb dak 1. Phit’ dakgnom, Phit’ daksungmi, to desire or oe which see in Peek dak, Bt Capes sequel. The root of the pri- 3. Phit’ dakmi, Phit’ dangmi, ; mary verb is prefixed. Remark.—Duty, necessity and propriety, as well as desire, are expressed by this mood, often in the impersonal form, mihi oportet vel decet, thus go phit dakmi, I must, I ought to, come. It is necessary or proper for me to come. Inchoative Mood. Singular. 1. Phit’ teschungmi, } and so on according to the paradigm of intransitives in 2. Phit’ teschem, ; che; this mood being constructed from the root of the 3. Phit’ teschem, main verb and the reflex form of the verb to begin. OL 435 Vdyw Vocabulary. LNo. 6. Finitiwe Mood. Singular. 1. Phit’ chuschungini, and so on, as before noted, chusche being the reflex 2. Phit’ chuschem, ; form of the verb to end. 3. Phit’ chuschem, Duty and necessity are expressed by the same word as wish or want, dak: con- sequently the optative mood includes the former two. What it is good for one to do, what is expedient or right, is expressed neariy as in English, e. g. Go phimung noh’ka, = it is good for me (mihi) to come, &c. ‘Causal Mood. Present. Preterite. Sue : eile , dual and plural _ Phit? ‘ hit? ie and so on for 1 2 EA pingeungmi, Bhi ning bang (""iyroughout the verb plasko 3, Pit? pingrals Phit’ ping kum, which see. The i of the primary verb is prefixed. Continuative Mood. Present Tense. Singular. Dual. Plural. , io yaa f Phina phit’nochhokmi, Phina phit’nokokmi.. ee Phina phit’nochhikmi. Phina phit’nokem. 2. Phina phit’nonum. Phina phitnochhikmi. Phina phit’nonem. 3. Phina phit’nomi. Phina phit’nochhikmi. Phina phit’nomem. Preterite. ¢ Phina phit’nochhongmi. Phina phit’nokikongmi. ¢ Phina phit’nochhingmi. Phina phit’nokikengmi. 2. Phina phit’nonum. Phina phit’nochhem. Phina phit’nonem. 3. Phina phit’nomi., Phina phit’nochhem. Phina phitnomem., Reciprocal Mood. Present Tense. 1. Phina phit’panchung- ( Phina phit’panachhokmi. f Phina phit’pachikokmi. mi, Phina phitpanachhikmi. | Phina phit’pachikem. 1, Phina phit’nosungmi. 2. Phina phit’panchem. Phina phit’panachhikmi. Phina phit’pachinem. 3. Phina phit’panchem. Phina phit’panacbhikmi. Phina phit’pachimem. Preterite. 1. Phina phit’panchung- f Phina phit’panachhongmi. f Phina phit’ pachikongmi. mi. Phina phit’panachhingmi. | Phina phit’pachikengmi. 2. Phina phit’panchem. Phina phit’panachhem., Phina phit’pachinem. 8. Phina phit’?panchem, Phina phit’panachhem. Phina phit’pachimem, Remark.—Of the above two the first mood is formed by the root repeated with intervening reflex sign, and the substantive verb nd, to be. The second is formed by the same treatment of the root and the reflex form of the verb pa, to do, for which see conjugation V. The 2nd or reciprocal mood is hardly useable in the singular number. According to this paradigm of the neuter verb to come, are conjugated also the verbs Ga to be dilatory, Ji, to ripen (fruit), Ri, to rot, Sé, to fruit, Gd, to live, Ya, to descend, Vi, to be intoxicated, Phwé to quarrel, and, in a word, all words presenting a cree ay in the imperative and which are all neues Essentially the same is the conjugation of neuters having added to the sheer root a conjunct and now (quoad force or meaning) obsolete consonant* which conso- nant, however, according as it is labial, guttural or dental, occasions some slight * Compare the so-called “euphonic additions’ to the root in the cultivated Dravirian tongues. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 439 variations in the form of conjugation. Nasal endings make no change (e. g. dong gnom, dongmi, dongmi). I subjoin a sample of each variation, 2nd,—Conjugation of neuters with a conjunct guttural, Dak’, to desire (Da-k) . Infinitive Mood. Affirmative. akmung Negative. a dakmung, but ate Gerunds. Participles. Dak he, ‘’) Dakvi, Bek te, | Dalia | Dok dak Fa, i pu supra, Vesa Houiha! fut supra. Dak sing he, | Dak chyang, | i ahaenie Dak khen J ei lung, , ; ak sing, The negative of all is formed as in the infinitive, Mang dak he, Mang dak vi, &c. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual, Plural, Dak’ Dakchhe. Davgne. Negative Imperative. Tha dak. Tha dakehhe. Tha dangne. Indicative Mood. Present Tense. Singular. Dual. f Plural. 2 ee Dak chhokmi, excl. f Dak kokmi, excl, ; ; Dak chhikmi, incl, Dak ken, incl. This conjugation changes the radical k into ng and lengthens the vowel SS ee ee 2. Dakmi. Dak chhikmi. Daknem. 3. Dakmi. Dak chhikmi. Dakmem. Preteriie. Dak’ki kongmi, or Daki 1, Daksungmi Dak chhongmi. kongmi. ; * ) Dak ehhingmi. Dak’ki kengmi, or Daki- kengmi. 2. Dangmi. Dak chhem, Dak nem or Dangnem. 3. Dangmi. Dak chhem. Dakmem. The other moods as before. Thus are conjugated Buk’, to get up, Bok’, to be born, Bek’, to enter, Lok’, to issue, to appear, Gik’, to flow, Kak’, to shine (sun), Chok’, to glow (sun), Jik’ to be broken, Jok’, to come up, Duk,’ to fall from aloft, Ruk’, to fali on ground, Ok’, to weep, Juk’ to be wise, and all such words, as also the compounds épidak cacare, chépi dak mingere, Tidak, to be thirsty. 3rd.—Conjugation of neuters with a conjunct labial (m or p): I. in m. Dam to be full and to be lost, or to fill and to lose in the intransitive senses.* Infinitive and participles as before. Imperative. Affirmative. Dam. Damche. Damne. Negative. Tha dam. Tha damchhe. Tha damne, * The Vayu neuter and passive conjugations coincide and the expressions often tally with the equivalent English ones as daémi, it is lost, and it is filled or full, that is, self-lost and self-filled. But the Vayu reflex verb, like the French, can express the latter meaning otherwise, viz. by damchem which is equivalent to daml used neutrally. Dam 1a lam is another equivalent form answering literally to Khogiya in Urdu though Vayu never forms its passives like Urdu. ole 440 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6. Indicative Mood. Present Tense. A @ a aa 1, Damum (Dam- { Dam chhokmi, excl. Dampopmi, Ss i} St mum), Dam chhikmi, incl. Pphunen. 33 aS 2. Dami, Dam chhikmi. Damnem. e * 48 3. Dami. Dam chhikmi. io eee gaee Preterite, r & : s i Dam chhongmi, excl. Dampi kongmi. Beoge cis cies il Ss Dam chhingmi, incl. pee ee 8 gq laa 5 2. Dami. Dam chhem. Damnem. es ape 3. Dami. Dam chhem. Damem. Jaen Ras The other moods as before. In subjunctive, Damonam, Damnam Damnam. Thus also conjugate Ram to be afraid, Dum to become, &c. II. in p. Jydp’ to be tired. Imperative. Aff. Jydp.’ Jyop’chhe. Jyémne. Nie Neg. Tha jyop. Tha jyop’chhe. Tha jydp’ne. ae a) Indicative. nS & an © Present. eats Jyop chhokmi, excl Jyoppopmi S af 54 1 ep ma. Jyop chhikmi, incl. Jyoppem. rs a & 2 2, Jyop’mi. Jyop chhikmi. Jyopnem. s 22 a 3. Jyop’mi. Jyop chhikmi. Jyopmem. BAT 2 LJ : Jyop chhongmi. Jydépikongmi. FCS w Tae ee Jyop cbhhingmi. eee Of y a 2. Jydmi. Jyop chhem. Jyémnem. 28750 3. Jyomi. Jyop chhem, Jyémem. Ju 4 Other moods as before. Subjunctive has jyop’monam, jyop’nam, jyopnam Jyopsung phen, JyOm phen, Jy6m phen. Thus also conjugate Thip, to set, (sun), Yép, to be sharp-edged, &c. 4th.—Conjugation of neuters with conjunct dental (t). . Hot’, to utter, talk. Infinitive and participles and gerunds as before. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural. 5 ES Aff. Hot’. Hoschhe. Hone. i = Si Neg. Tha hot’. Tha hoschhe. Tha hone. 22 a Indicative present. a a oO = Hoschhokmi, excl. Hot’kokmi. wo OD a % ’ =| a 1. Stee: Hoschhikmi, incl. {for ken, | fe 2. Hot mi; Hoschhik mi Hot’nem. bras ee E 3. Hot’mi. Hoschhikmi Hot’?mem. a Sie 3 > Preterite. & a a Singular. Dual. Plural. = 8 & a 14 : Hoschhongmi. Hotikong mi. ) = of Sree Hoschhingmi. Hotikeng mi. 2 aa 5 2, Hénmi. Hoschhem. Hoénem, ea oe J* S58 3. Hoénmi. Hoschhem. Hoénmem. Ce Se 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 441 Thus conjugate Pat’, to fight, Met’ to die, But’, to flower, &c. Remark.—The verbs dung to be dry, dong to arrive, then to win, Yang, to lose or decrease, Min, to be ripe, Hon, to be big, Bon, to fly, Lun, to run, and all others ending in a nasal (n or ng) follow without change the sheer root paradigm, or phi aforesaid, 5th.—Conjugation of reflex or active intransitive (including also some neuters) verbs in che, that is, which have this (the only) reflex sign added to their root in the imperative which always strikes the key note to the several conjugations, always having the formative affix whenever there is one. Im, to sleep. Infinitive Mood. Aff. Immung. To sleep or to have slept Neg. Mang immung. Not to sleep, &c. Remark.—Y-mung is as often used as immung. So that { may possibly be the root, not im, } aoristic. Gerunds. Participles, Im he, 7 | Imvi (fnvi), +) Im nung, | Imta (imta), Im im ha, tut supra. Imtang ee Im sing hé, | Verbal nouns aaah aX put supra. Im khen, J Imchyang, Imlung, Imsing, y} Negatives, as in infinitive, that is, by prefixing mang. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural, Aff. Imche. Im nachhé. Imchiné, Neg, Tha imche, Tha imnachhé. Tha imchiné. Indicative Present. 1 it Se Tmnachhokmi. Tmchikokmi. F an Imnachhikmi. Imchikem. 2. Imchem, Imnachikmi., Imchinem. 3. Imchem. Imnachikmi. Imchimem. Preterite, Pipachunemi, Imnachongmi. Tmchikongmi, Imnachingmi. Imchikengmi. 2. Imchem. Imnachhem. Imchinem. 38. Imchem. Imnachhem. Tmchimem. Thus are conjugated all reflex verbs whatever, having the che sign whether they be primitive or derivative (and all transitives can be so commuted) as chikche, to remember, mangche, to forget, lische, to learn, musche, to sit, ipche, to get up, khokche, to walk, pipche, to suck, sipche, to wake, lipche, to vomit, popche, to lick, kinche, to lie hid, lunche, to run, dénche, to bathe, upche, to wash one’s self, tesche,* to begin, chusche, to end, khwenkhwén panche, to cough, khikche, to sneeze, liche, to grow (plant only), gosche, to be rich, vekche to contain, dosche, to sustain or hold up, dunche, to dig for one’s self, phasche, to be able, * Tesche gives, teshto set free, wonche, gives wonto, in comparison, be able, 442 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. wonche,* to master one’s self, be patient or firm, bongche* to be happy, giwdén ponche, to keep silence, rusche, to flee away, kwompanche, to sing, yangche, to decrease or lose, jonche, to grow or increase (animal only), yukche, to cut one’s self, sische, to kill one’s self, tanche to put for one’s self, senche, to know one’s self, or to know simply, hanche, to give to one’s self, phokche, to beget or give birth to for one’s self, ingkche, to buy, jyapche, to exchange, khwasche, to tighten one’s self, Khwasche, to feed one’sf self; tinkoche, to drink, janko- che, to eat, chénche,t to piss, topche, to beat one’s self, yosche, to like, &c. &c. Remark.—These verbs are aoristic in fact, though in the dual and plural they are obliged to accommodate themselves to the inflexable forms of those numbers and such (by and by will be seen) is the case also with the aoristic transitives in “to.” The reflex duals and plurals however always retain their own special signs or na and chi which are interchangeable for the sake of euphony, na being pre- ferred to “chi’’ in the dual to prevent cacophonous repetition of the ch. 6th.—Conjugation of transitives in “to” not having a precedent sibilant. The verb ha, to give. Infinitive Affirmative, Hamung, to give or to have given, aoristic. Infinitive Negative. Mang hamung. Not to give, &c. Gerunds. ae he. } Present, giving {oe main verb in present or future with anung. main verb in preterite, Hahe hahe. i 5 Continuative present, continually giving. Hanung hanung. } ane? ; oe Haha ha. Past. Having given. Ha singhe. Present or future. When giving. Ha khen. Past. After having given, after giving. Participles. Havi. Who gives or gave or will give, aoristic. The giver. Hata. Past (passive). Who or what has been given, - The given. Hatang. Future passive. What will be given, what customarily given, what fit to be given. Verbal Nouns. Expresses the instrument, as hachy4ng gdt, the hand that Hachyang. gives. It is also used substantively in a neuter sense, thus topchyang, a hammer. Hammerer is to’vi. Halang. Expresses the place, halting, the place of giving. Hasing. Expresses the time, hasing, the time of giving. The negative of gerunds, participles and verbal nouns is expressed, as in the infinitive, by the prefix mang, mang hahe, mang havi, &c, Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual, Piural. Aff. Hato. Hachhe. Hane. Neg. Tha hato. Tha hachhe. Tha hane. * Tesche, gives, teshto, set free, wonche, gives, wonto, in comparison be able. tT Kh underlined is the Arabic guttural. { Chénche of this sort from chént. 1857. | | Vayu Vocabulary. 443 Dual and Plural of Odject. Dual. Hatochhé. Give to them two. Plural, Hatomé. Give to them all. Negative. Tha hatochhé. Tha hatome. Indicative Mood. Present or future. Singular. Dual. Plural. x , -++ Hachhokmi, excl. Hatikokmi, excl. 1, Hatungmi. { 4-Héchhikmi, incl. Hatikem, incl. Dual and Plural of Object. y 1. f£ Hatungchhem. I give to them two. 1. | Hatungmem. I give to them all. 2... Hatam. -++-Hachhikmi. -++Hanem. Dual and Plural of Object. 2. +-Hatochhem. Thou givest to them two, * fa -+-Hatomem. Thou givest to them all. 3. +--datum, -+ Hatochhem. -++ Hatomem. Dual and Plural of Odject. y J 3. -+Hatochhem. He gives to them two. 3. -+--Hatomem. He gives to them all. Preterite. , : Hacbhongmi, excl. j Hatikongmi, excl. eenpra. HAchhinomi, incl. 1 HaAtikengmi, incl. Dual and Plural of Object. 1. Hatungchhem. I gave to them two, * <1. Hatungmem. I gave to them all. 2. Hatum. +-Hachhem. -+- Hanem. Dual and Plural of Object. y J 2. Hatochem.° Thou gavest to them two. 2. Hatomem. Thou gavest to them all. 3. -+-Hatum. +-Hatochhem. -+-Hatomem. Dual and Piural of Object. 3. -+-Hatochhem. He gave to them two. 3. + Hatomem. He gave to them all. Negative Mood. Singular Indicative present. Dual and plural in like manner, merely by prefixing the negative particle ma. N. B.—Hato and all other transitives of its class, are essentially aoristic. See remark aforegone. 1. M4 hatungmi. 2. Mé hatum, 3. Ma hatum. * The bracketed portions express peculiar forms of this language. The mark -+- before any form signifies that it belongs also to the passive which see. The difference is expressed in such cases by the use of the separate prefixed pronouns in the instrumental case for the active; in the cbjective or accusative case for the passive, or g’ha, gonha, wathiha, and go, gon wathi for the three per- sons singular and so on for dual and plural. AAA Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6. Interrogative Mood. Singular Indicative present. 1. Hatung ki ma. Dual and plural in like manner and all the rest of 2. Hato ki ma. the verb also; that is, cut off the final mi or m and 3. Hato ki ma. substitute ki ma. & to . Ha wontungmi, . Ha wontum, . Ha wéntum, Potential Mood. Singalar Indicative present. and so on through the rest of the verb; wénto, to can, being conjugated like hato, the root of which is prefixed merely (wonto is used with transitives and phasche with intransitives). Optative Mood. Singular Indicative present. 1. Ha dakgnom, and so on through the rest of the verb dak, to wish or 2. Ha dakmi, want, as before given. The root of the main verb 3. Ha dakmi, is prefixed as before. Precative Mood. (That I may give). Singular Indicative present. 1. Hat And so on, after the manner of the interrogative mood 9. cue o as to the main verb, to which is added the immutable 3. sho ae verbal root expressive of wish in the nature of ae prayer, hatung yu= oo! si mihi accedat dare. Remark.-—The solicitive form, let me give, let him give, ha hasung, ha hato is seldom used owing to the iteration of the same root in two different senses. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Preterite. 1. Hatung nam. Hatung phen, 2. Hato nam. Hato phen, and so on for dual and plural. 3. Hato nam. Hato phen, Continuative Mood. 1. Ha na ha nédgnom,* 2. Ha na ha nonum, and so on as in the neuter verb phi. 3. Ha na ha nomi, . Ha na ha panchem, Reciprocal Mood. Ha na ha panchungmi,} pr so on as before with reflex of the root ache, pa, to make, conjugated like im-che. * The reflex form of the verb mu, to sit, imperative musche, is often used in this sense ha na ha muschungmi, muschem, muschem, &c. like imche. So Newari has biye chona = I sit giving, I remain giving. + The transitive form of pa, to do, is sometimes preferred to the reflex, Haha pangmi, pdmi, pomi, &c. See conjugation 10th. 1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 445 Causal Mood. Imperative. Singular. Duai. Plurat. Aff. Ha pingko. Ha pingchhe. Ha pingne. Neg. Ha tha ping. Ha tha pingche. Ha tha pingne, Indicative present, and so on according to the form of conjugating the ? 4 ingsungml, : ~~» pi : transitive verb pingko, which see in sequel and to = Ee which the root of the main verb is prefixed when oo pEgm), causation is expressed.” Passive Voice. Imperative Mood. Aff. Hasung. Hachhong. Ha ki kong. Give thou to me. Give thou to us two. Give thou to us all. Neg. Tha hagno. Tha hachhok. Tha ha kok. | Dual and plural of agent. Hasiing cbhé. Do ye two give to me. Hastng né. Do ye all give to me. Tha hasing chhé. Thhasdug x6. The negative forms. Indicative Mood. Present. Singular. Dual. Plural. , : Hakokmi, excl, ives Yd Hechhokmt, excl, Hakém, incl. ++ Hachbikmi, incl. i: to me. ice NS RR er == gives to us all (sub- ee ; audi ille vel iste). Dual and plural of the ayent. 1. Hagnochhem. Give to me they two (or ye 2). 1. Hagnomem. Give to me they ail. 2. Hami., -++ Hachbikmi. -++- Hanem, Dual and plural of agent. 2. Hami. Give to thee they two. 2. Hami. Give to thee they all. 3. +-Hatum. +-Hatochhem. +. Hatomem.t * Causal verbs have all the complete forms of conjugation proper to primary verbs; and, as they are constituted by transitives, they take, like transitives, the reflex and passive and double objective forms, being conjugated from pingche and pingsung and ping (k) to, as well as pingko. The reflex of hato is hanche, conju- gated like imche: the quasi passive is hasting, for which see on, Hato has no doubly objected form. Itself expresses give it to him or give him. + The forms marked with a cross precedent (+) are common to both voices, See active. There is no infinitive of this quasi passive, The causal transitive which carries a passive as well as active sense has it, thus Hamung, to give, ha- pingmung, to be given, more properly, to cause to give. So Newari has biye, to give, biyeke (ke the causal sign) to be given or cause to give. Newari has no other semblance even of a passive. Vayu with its suffixed objective forms of the pronoun has, as above seen. But this again is weakened by the special restriction of the suffixes, thus hanum, gives or gave to thee, Z on/y and no other, 3 L 446 3. +Hatochhem. 3. +-Hatomem. Singular. 1. Hasingmi. 1. Hasungchhem. 1. Hasungmem. 2. Hami. 2. Hami. +2. Hami. +3. Hatum. 3. -++Hatochhem. A +-Hatomem. Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. Dual and plural of agent. Give to him they two. Give to him they all. Preterite. Dual. Hachhongmi, excl. Hachhingmi, incl. Plural. Hakikongmi, excl. + Hakikengmi, incl. Dual and plural of agent. Gave to me they two (or ye two). Gave to me they all (any). -++ Hachem. -+-Hanem. Dual and plural of agent. Gave to thee they two. Gave to thee they all. -+ Haétochhem. -+-Hatomem. Dual and plural of agent. Gave to him they two. Gave to him they all. 6. A second passive may be formed by the passive participle and substantive verb, of clear meaning, but eschewed owing to the relative sense inherent in the par- ticiples. 1. Hata négnom. 2. Hata nonum. 3. Hata ndmi. Passive potential, (I can be given). Present singular. 1. Ha wéngnom. 2. Ha wonmi. 3. Ha wontum. Preterite. 1. Ha wonsungmi., 2. Ha wonmi. 3. Ha wontum. Indicative present singular. And so on through the verb né, to be—an irregular i verb which is given in the sequel. this responds havi négnom of the active voice. Bes Passive precative. Baa ol] A Goce | a a ee: (That I may be given). | 4 | 48 r A gee GS ess Present singular. ris Ss so ies oO ae 1. Hagnoyu. | hE % =| C525 2. Hayu. r£52° ya ~ i a mo 3. Hatoyu. a9 ap eis : Es] stcseans Preterite. a *S oO ba 90 ° ao S Os woe | 1, Hasungyu. ean ee ds 2. Hayu. een a mo o | 3. Hatoyu. es dropt, and theimmutable ver- Remark.—To bal particle ya, subjoined. Remark.— Observe that in the potential mood, as in the causal below, the expres- sion of the passivity is transferred from the truncated main verb, which shows only its crude root, to the secondary verb. Passive Causal, (I am caused to be given (or to give)). 1. Ha pinggnom. 1. Ha pingsingmi. Present. 2. Ha pingmi. 3. Ha pingnum. 2, Ha pingmi. 3. Ha pingmi. Preterite. And so on through dual and plural, following the conjugational forms of the passive voice of the verb pingko, to send, which see. 1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 447 Passive Subjunctive. (If I be given). 1, Ha gno nam. 1. Hastingphen. 2. Ha nam. Present. 2. Ha phen. Preterite. 3. Hato nam. 3. Hato phen. Like the precative, only substituting the subjunctive particles for the single precative one. And the interrogative mood of the passive merely substitutes the particle of interrogation or kima, hagnoki ma, &c. ~ Special forms, Active or passive, = agento objective. ist.—I to thee. Hanum. Give or gave to thee I only. Hanochhem. Give or gave to you two I only. Aoristic. Hanonem. Give or gave to you all 1 only. 2nd.—Thou to me. yHagnom. Givest to me thou (or he). — y Hagnochem, Give to me ye two (or they two) Present tense. Hagnonem. Give to me ye all only. } y Hasungmi. Gavest to me thou. y Hasungchhem. Gave to me ye two. f Preterite.* Hasungnem. Gave to me ye all. Thus are conjugated all transitives in ‘‘td’’ that have the root only precedent, as Woto, to cleanse, Lato, to snatch away, Chito, to split, Jito, to tear, Photo, to eradicate, Chéto, immingere, Rito, to cause to rot or rot it, Lito, to cause to grow, or grow it, &c. The verbs with a “p” before the sign, as lipto, to vomit, napto, to compress, change the p into m in the plural imperative and in the second person plural preterite, as namne, do ye all compress, and namnem, ye all compressed. Those with a ‘‘k” before the sign, as thikt6, to shut, khikto, to cause to sneeze, change the k into ng, as thingne, do ye all shut, and thingnem, ye all shutted it, No other precedent letter makes any change, save the sibilant to which we shall next proceed as forming a different conjugation. Meanwhile conjugate as above yangto, to decrease, bongto, to please, Mangto, to cause to forget or to forget him, phimto, to depress, khamto, to summon, shamto, to frighten, Thento, to cause to win, Yemto, to burn, Umto, to burn corpse, Wodnto, to win, to be able,t Pélto, to wring or extract juice, Tamto, to cry out, Damto, to fill, &c, &c. 7th conjugation of verbs in ‘‘t6” having a precedent sibilant (always palpably felt in the reflex, sometimes not so in the transitive, wherein something like an abrupt tone, however, indicates in such cases its latent presence, or else a sound like English th, or ph, as pha’to, maphto, héthto for phasto, masto and hésto. But observe, there is no true tone as in the 8th and 11th conjugations (to’po and pho’ko) and the real euphonic intercalary letter is the sibilant, s). * The forms preceded by the mark vy are not special but are repeated here to illustrate such as are special. Compare the whole with those of the Peruvian language of America apud Markham, p. 397. There are slight differences indicating diverse degrees of decomposition, but the resemblance in substance and principle is wonderful. I commend it to those who so dogmatically tell us it is not legi- timate philology to heed such coincidences. + This neuter sense of wonto is restricted to its use as a compound, and it is so used only with transitives. With intransitives the reflex form of pha to be able is employed: top wontum, he can beat : imphaschem, he can sleep. ae 448 Pdyu Vocabulary. [ No. 6. The verb si, to kill. Infinite. Aff. Sit’mung, to kill, to have killed, ] Neg. Mang sit’mung, not to kill, &c. JP ay destde Gerunds. Participles. Sithe, Sitnung, | apie Sit’he sit’he, t } eae t Sit’ sitha, oe supra. ista, ut supra. Sistang, Sis’ singhe, Sit’ khen. Verbal Nouns. Sischyang, Sitling, ut supra. Sitsing, Their negatives are formed by prefixed mang, mangsit’he, mangsit’vi, &c. Imperative. Singular. Dual. Plural. I. Sisto. Sischhe, Séné ? Sitne. Dual and plural of object. TT. Sistochhé. Do thou kill them two, IIT. Sistome. Do thou kill them all, Negatives. I. Tha sit,’ Tha siscbhe. Tha séné ? Sitne. II. Tha sit’chhik. Kill not them two. III. Tha sit’me. Kill not them all. Indicative present. Singular. Dual. Plural. ae Sischhokmi, excl. Sitkokmi, excl. Tate Rae a9 Sischhikmi, incl. oF 1 Sitkem, incl. Dual and plural of agent. 1. Sinchhem. I kill them two. 1. Sinmem. I kill them all, 2. --Sitmi. +-Sischhikmi. -+-Sitnem. Dual and plural of object. 2. Sischhikmi. Thou killest them two. 2. Sitmem. Thou killest them all. 3. +-Sitmi.f +-Siscbhikmi. -+Sitmem. * Another form, = sinmi, sitmi, sitmi, is sitvi nognom, sitvi nonum, sitvi nomi, and so on, formed by active participle aud substantive verb. + Compare with sinmi, sitmi, sitmi, the correspondent syana, syata, syata of Newari. The root (si, sa vel sya) and the augments (n and t) are alike and alike disposed, that is, the augment following the root. So also in both tongues the augment of the 2nd and 3rd person, or t, constitutes the passive in all 3 persons si-t-gnom ; si-t-mi, si-t-mi == Newari sya-ta, sya-ta, sya-ta. The si-t of the one is precisely the sya-t or sha-t of the other, the t being that mark of action, apart from one’s own, whereby the passive (with the help of the separate prefixed objec- tive pronoun in both tongues alike) is denoted. And yet these two languages have all the superficial marks of wide contrariety and opposition. In the vocabulary I have pointed attention to identical roots or words used verbally in one of these tongues, substantivally in the other, or of which the one has the primitive, the other the derivative. What I would imply is that identical roots and constructive principles may be found in this family of tongues where one would least expect to find them. 185 OS ce ot = wn = Lo One * me. and Sitne. 7 . +Sischhikmi. . +Sitmem. . Sistungmi. . Sistungchhem. . Sistungmem. . Sistum. . Sistochhem. . Sistomem. . +Sistum. . *+Sistochhem. . +Sistomem. Present, Ma sinmi. . Ma sitmi. . Ma sitmi. &e. Present, . Sinki ma. . Sitki ma. . Sitki ma, . Sit wontongmi. . Sit wontum. . Sit --wontum. Present. . Sit -+-dakgnom., . Sit 4--dakmi. . Sit --dakmi. * { Sischhongmi, excl. Vayu Vocabulary. 449 Dual and plural of object. He kills them two. He kills them all. Preterite. 2 Sistikéngmi, excl. Sischhing mi, incl. Sistikéngmi, incl, Dual and plural of object. IT killed them two. I killed them all. -+-Sischhem, Dual and plural of object. +-Sénem ? Sitnem.* Thou killedst them two. Thou killedst them all. -++Sistochhem. -+Sistomem, Dual and plural of object. He killed them two. He killed them all. Negative Mood. Preterite. 1. Ma sistungmi. 2. Ma sistum. 3. Ma sistum. &e. &e. Interrogative Mood. Preterite. 1, Sistung ki ma, 2. Sisté ki ma. 3. Sistd ki ma. Potential Mood. Aoristic. though in dual and plural it is tensed and also in and so on, like hato which also is aoristic in singular, the passive voice. Optative Mood. Preterite. 1. Sit +-daksungmi, 2. Sit +-dangmi, f &c. like dak aforegone. 3. Sit 4+dangmi, Sénem, like Séne in the imperative must be an error though insisted on -to Séko, to know, gives Sénem and Séne, regularly as Sisto, to kill, gives Sitnem In the intransitives we have respectively senche and sische, 450 Viyu Vocabulary. [ No. 6. Precative Mood. (That I may kill). Present. Preterite. 1. Sin yu. 1. Sistung yu, 2. Sit yu. 2. Sisto yu, &c. as in the uncompounded verb. 3. Sit yu. 3. Sisto yu, Subjunetive Mood. Present. Preterite. Ne ae P, Ste ns Pee nd so on as in the uncompounded 2. Sitnam, 2. Sistophen, wen 3. Sitnam. 3, Sistophen, 1 ; Continuative Mood. Present. Preterite. 1. Sit’nasit’ nognom. Sit’nasit’? nésingmi «he : he a > and so on conjugating the auxi- 2. Sitnasiv’ nénum. Sitnasit’ nonum, Kear after (ae eae oi 3. Sit’nasit’? ndmi. Sit’nasit némi, ati eee Reciprocal Mood. *.9 *.3 ya Ya * 1. Sit nasit panchungmi, &c. after the model of imche, which, like all 2. Sit’nasit’ panchem, : ae : : yen Silt eR hay intransitives in che, is aoristic. 3. Sit’nasit’ panchem, Causal Verb. As before in all respects. See Hato. Passive VEBB. Imperatwe Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural. Aff. Sisstng. Sischhéng. Sisti kong. Neg. Tha sitgno. Tha sischhok. Tha sit k6k. Dual and plural of agent. Af Sissungchhé. Dv ye two kill me. * (Sissungné. Do ye all kill me. Neo, § Pha sitgnochhé, Do ye two not kill me. ““°S* 0 Tha sitgnoné. Do ye all not kill me, Indicatwe present. Singular. Dual, Plural, 1. Sit gnom +Sischhokmi, excl. +-Sit kékmi, excl. =kills me (sub- -FSischhikmi, incl. +-Sit kém, incl. audi ille vel iste). = kills us two, = kills us all. Dual and plural of agent. 1. Sit gnochhem. Kill me they two (or ye two). 1. Sit gnomem. Kill me they all. 2. +-Sitmi. +-Sischhikmi. +-Sit?nem. Dual and plural of agent. (2. Sitmi. Kill thee they two (or we two). (2. Sitmi. Kill thee they all (or we all). “fF Sitmi. +f Sischhikmi, -+-Sitmem. 1857.] on oo 09 . +Sischhikmi. . +Sitmem. . Sissungmi. . *Sissunechhém. . Sissungmém., . Sinmi, . Sinmi. . Sinmi. . Sistum. . Sistochhem. . Sistomem. Sista not’nung, dumnung, nét’mung, to be Vayu Vocabulary. Dual and plural of agent. Kill him they two (or ye two). Kill him they all. Preterite. +-Sischhdngmi, excl. +-Sischhingmi, incl. -+-Sistikéngmi, excl. +Sistikéngmi, incl. Dual and plural of agent. Killed me they two (or ye two). Killed me they all, Sischhem. Dual and plural of agent. Killed thee they two (or we two). Killed thee they all (or we all). Sistochhem. Sistomem. Senem ? Sitnem., Dual and plural of agent. Killed him they two. Killed him they all. SECOND FORM OF THE PASSIVE. Infinitive Mood. killed. Pies dimung, to become $ Cuts mang not’mung, not to be killed 2 mang dimung, not to become ; Gerunds. Sista nét’he, dimhe, 3) | Sista not’not’ha, dumdumha, _—¢- ut supra. Sista not’singhe, dumsinghe, | Sista not’khen, dumkhen, a Participles. Sista not’vi or dumvi, Sista no’ta or dumta, Sista no’tang, dumtang, ut supra. Verbal nouns. Sista not’ or dum-lun £> Sista not’? or dum-chyang, ut supra. Sista not’ or dum-sing, Negatives by mang prefixed, Singular. Aff. Sista, nd dum. Neg. By prefixed participle tha, Imperative present. Dual. Plural. : noche. : none. Bista dumche. \ ome dumne. * Brackets before the repeated numbers (answering to 3 persons of verb), and the crosses (+), as before explained. 452 Vayu Vocabulary. | No. 6. Indicative present. 1. Sista ( négnom. i ; ¢ damum, | nee nénum, | And so on according to the paradigms phi Bi Risks dimi. c and dam. ‘ a nomi. | 3. Sista Bates J Remark.—This form of the passive has a correspondent active form, sit’vi, nog- nom vel dumum, and both are singularly free from doubt as to the sense, and singularly correspondent with our English idiom, I am killing, I am killed, the phrases being in effect, I am the killer and I am the killed. But, owing to the inherence of the relative sense in the participles, these forms are eschewed. The following correspondent forms in Khas and Newari are equally available in those languages and equally eschewed for the same reason. Khas. Active. Passive. 1. Hannya hin. Hanyako han. 2. Hannya hos. Hanyako hos. 3. Hannya ho. Hanyako ho. Newtrr. 1. Ji syahmakha, or ju. Syanahmakha, 2. Chha sy4hmakha, or ju. Syanahmakha, } kha or jalo.* 3. W6 syahmakha, or ju. Syanahmakha, Special forms of action between the 2 first persons. First form, I to thee. S. Sit’num. Kill or killed or will kill thee I only. D. Sit’nochhem. Kill or killed or will kill you two I only. P. Sit’nonem, Kill or killed or will kill you all I only. Second form, Thou to me. S. Sit’gnom. Killst or wilt kill me thou (or he). Pekar aud D, Sit’gnochhem. Kill or will kill me ye two (or they two). Fut ms P. Sit’gnonem. Kill or will kill me ye all only. ata S. 7Sit’sungmi. Killedst me thou (or he). D. ySit’sungchhem., Killed me ye two (or they two). Preterite. P. Sit’sungnem. Killed me ye all only. The negative merely prefixes ma as in active voice. The interrogative drops the final m or mi and substitutes ki ma, as in active voice. The potential is conjugated with the passive form of the secondary verb wonto. Present and future. Preterite, 1. Sit’wéngnom. 1. Sit’ wénsingmi. oS ae 9. Sie weami 2 SAG atts an only pene . Sit’wonmi. . Sit?won : fo 3. Sit'wontum. 3. Sit’wontum. like passive of Hato Optative mood precisely as in the active voice, dakgnom, meaning I desire and I am desired, and the passive expression being removed from the truncated main verb. * Kha and ja are substantive verbs in Newari, whereof the former is immutable, and the latter becomes jalo in the preterite. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 453 Precative Mood. Present. Preterite. 1. Sit’ gno yu. 1. Sissung yu, and so on, by dropping final m or 2. Sit’ yu. 2. Sin yu, mi of the passive and substituting 3. Sit’ yu. 3. Sisto yu, immutable precative particle yu. The subjunctive mood resembles the above, taking only its own signs in lieu of yu, the precative sign. Causal. Present. Preterite. 2. Sit pingmi. 2. Sit pingmi, sive forms of the verb pingko, 1, Sit ping gnom. 1. Sit pingsungmi, and so all through all the pas- 3. Sit pingmi. 3. Sit pingkum, which see. According to the above paradigm of sisto, conjugate also pisto to bring,* khisto to rub, khwasto, to feed, phasto, to enable (pha’to), chasto, to hit with stone (cha’to), khwasto (khwa’to), to tighten, dosto, to sustain for another, (dophto) musto, to seat (muphto), testo, to set at liberty or cause to begin (tezhto), thesto, to kick (thethto), chusto, to finish it (chuphto), chisto, to suspend, isto, to tell, risto, to rot it, josto (jopto), to kindle, chhisto, to relate (chhi’to), wasto, to abandon, yosto, to approve, like, nasto, to wet (na’to), lusto (luphto), to transplant, thos’to (thophto) to take out, tosto (tophto), to reconcile, to unite ; lis’to, to teach and to return; pes’to, to reap; las’to (lathto), to take for another, &c, &c. N. B.—The intercalary silibant varies to sh, ph and English th. It is least obscure with the vowel i; most so with the vowels 4, ti and 6. 8th,—Conjugation of transitives in po, not having a nasal (n. ng. m) before it. The verb top’, to strike (potius, t6).+ Infinitive Mood. Aff. To’mung, Neg. Mang to’mung, BORStIGE Gerunds. Participles. Top’he, | To’ vi, a Topnung, | Topta, Toptopha, Lut supra. Toptang, Topsinghe, | Topki t "Qe dpa J Verbal nouns. pat snpip Topchyang, Toplung, f Topsing, J Negatives of all by prefixed mang. Imperative. Singular. Dual, Plural. To’ po. Topchhe. Tomne. * Kh of khisto is a very peculiar sound verging upon a vague th, or hard h or Sanscrit ksh: 4H, is hard Arabic, without the least vagueness. + The root is properly to, equal to ta vel da of Chinese, Newari, Sontal and tha, the same aspirated, of Kuswar. The dubious adherence of the transitive sign, or p, is highly significant, 3 M 454 To’ pochhe. To’pome. Tha top’. Tha topebhik, Tha top’me. 1. To’mi* 1. Tomchhem. 1. Tomem. 2. Tomi. 2. To’mem. 3.--To’mi.t { 2. Topchhikmi. 3.-+-To’pehhikmi. 3.4+-To’mem. 1. To’pungmi, 1. To’pungchhem. 1. To’ pungmem. ' 2. To’pum. 2. To’pochhem. 2. To’pomem. 3. --To’ pum. 3. +-To’pochhem. 3. -+-To’pomem. Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. Dual and plural of object. Do thou strike them two. Do thou strike them all. Negatives. Tha topchhe. Tha topne, Kill not them two. Kill not them all. Indicative present. To’ popmi, excl. Topchhokmi, excl. 4. To’ pem, incl. Topehhik mi, incl. Dual and plural of object. I strike them two. I strike them all. +Topchbik mi. -+-Topnem. Dual and plural of object. Thou strik’st them two, Thou strik’st them all. +-Topcehhikmi. -+- To’mem. Dual and plural of object. He strikes them two. He strikes them all. ' Preterite. eee nerae excl. 4. To'pikongmi, excl, Topchhingmi, incl. To’pikengmi, iucl. Dual and Plural of object. I struck them two. IT struck them all. +Topchhem. +Tomnem, Dual and plural of object. Thou struck’st them two, Thou struck’st them all. +-To’pochhem. --To’pomem. Dual and plural of object. He struck them two. He struck them all. Negative by prefixed ma. Optative mood by conjugating the verb to desire suffixed to the unchanging form top’ of the main verb. * It is noticeable very that the verbs in po have no mark of the first person singular of present tense, so generally contradistinguished from the 2nd and 3rd, or all other persons. past daya, dala, dala). Even Newari preserves this distinction, daye, dayu, (in the + Tomi with the prolonged tone instead of the abrupt one, means he places, whereas to’mi, is he hits. to’po = hit. The former comes from tako = place; the latter from a Se 185 t. 2. 3. 7. Vayu Vocabulary. 455 Interrogative Mood. Present. Preterite. Tom’ ki ma. To’ pung ki ma, &c. by dropping the mi or +Top’ ki ma. To’po ki ma, m final and substituting ki +Top’ ki ma. +-To’po ki ma, ma. Subjunctive by substituting nam in present and phen in past for the interro- gative ki ma. 1. 2. a. 1. 2. a £ Qo bo tl ag Potential Mood. Present and Past (Aoristic). Top wontungmi, Top wontum, &c. as in Hato and Nishto potentials. +-Top wontum, ! Precative Mood. Present. Past. Tom yu. 1. To’ pungyu. -+-Top yu. 2. To’ poyu. fe &c. -+-Top yu. 3. +To’ poyu. Continuative Mood. Present tense. Top na top nognom, *and so on, conjugating the auxiliary verb Top na top nonum, n6 after the manner of phi, in dual and Top na top nomi, plural. Reciprocal Mood. . Present. Pop na top panchungmi, ia so on, conjugating panche after the model Top na top panchem, of imche, Top na top panchem. Causal Verb. As before in all respects. See prior samples. Cause to strike, top’pingko (see trans. ‘‘ inké”). Passtve VERB. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural, Top sung Top chhong To’pi kong == Hit me. = Hit us two. = Hit us all. % Top na top muschungmi (from musche, to sit) may also be used, = ddya chona of Newari. So also the reciprocal can be expressed by top na top pangmi or the transitive which moreover is apt to blend in sense with the continuative. So also you can express the habitual present tense by to’ vi nognom, literally I am the striker. 3M 2 4.56 Top sungchhe, Top sungne. Tha topmo. Tha topmochhe. Tha topmone, Singular, 1. To’ mum = hits me (suban- di, he). 1. To’ mochhem. 1. To’ momem. 2. -+-To’ mi. 2. To’ mi. 2. To’ mi. 3. +-To’ mi. J3. Top chhikmi, ‘3. ° Top’ mem. Singular. Topsungmi. 1. Top sung chhem. 1. Top sung mem. 2. To’ mi. Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. Dual and plural of agent. Hit me ye two. Hit me ye all. Negatives. Tha topchhok. Hit me not ye two. Hit me not ye all. Indicative Mood. Dual. Plurai. \itm chhokmi, excl. \ To’ popmi, excl. Tha to’pok. -+-Top chhikmi, incl. To’ pen, inel. = hits us two. = hits us all. Dual and plural of agent. They two (and ye two) hit me. They all hit me. +Top chhikmi. Dual and plural of agent. They two (and we two) hit thee. They all (and we all) hit thee. -+-Top chhikmi. Dual aud plural of agent. They two (and ye two) hit kim. They all hit him. +Top nem. --Topmem. Preterite. Dual, Plural. { ¥aeP chhongmi, excl. {bine pi kong mi, excl. To’p chhingmi, incl. Dual and plural of agent. They two (or ye two) struck me. They all struck me. -+Top chhem. -+-Tom nem. Lo’pi keng mi, incl. N. B.—The brackets and the initial crosses (+-) refer, as before explained to forms of the verb scarcely reconcileable with our ideas of conjugation and yet not easily separable from such as are so, and to forms common to the active and passive voices, see on for another view of the subject. Dual and plural of agent. f2. To’ mi. i2:. To’ viii: 3. --To’ pum. They two (or we two) struck thee. They all struck thee. +To’ pochhem. Dual and plural of agent. -+-To’ pomem. They two struck him. J3. 4'To’ pochhem. L3 + They all struck him. To’ pomem. A second form of passive is constructed from the past participle and the auxiliar verb, as aforenoticed, thus— 1857 4 Vayu Vocabulary. 457 &c. according to the model of sheer neuters (see 2. Topta nonum, phi) 1. Topta nognom,* 3. Topta nomi, Special Forms. I.—I and thou. S. Top num, I (only) strike or will strike or struck thee. + D. Topnochhem, I (only) strike or struck you two. Aoristic. P. Top nonem, I (only) strike or struck you all, J II.—Thou and 1, S.y Top’mum. Thou strik’st or wilt strike me. Binene sen D.y Top’ mocbhem. Ye two strike or will strike me. pa a Le Top’ monem. Ye all strike or will strike me. ais Saat S.y Top sungmi. Thou struckedst me. D. Top sungchhem. Ye two struck me. Preterite P. Top sungnem. Ye all struck me. The optative passive is precisely similar to the optative active. The negative mood is formed, as before, by merely prefixing the particle of negation, or ma. Interrogative Mood. Present. Preterite. 1. To’ mo ki ma, Topsung ki ma. Dual and plural by dropping m 2. +-Top ki ma. Tom ki ma. or mi final and substituting the 3. -+-Top ki ma. +-To’po ki ma. interrogative form. Subjunctive mood by substituting nam and phen for ki ma, according to tense. Potential Mood. Present (or future). Preterite, 1. Top wongnom. 1. Top wonsungmi, and so on, conjugating with 2. Top wonmi. 2. Top wonmi, the passive of wonto like 3. #Top wontum. 3. +-Top wontum, the passive of hato. Precative Mood. Present. Preterite. 1. To’mo yu. 1. Top sung yu. Dual and plural as in the 2+Top yu. 2. Tom yu. indicative, substituting yu 3+-Top yu. 3. +- To’po yu. for the final m or mi. Causal Verb. Formed as before with the passive of pingko added to top’. Top pinggnom, &e., Top pingsungmi, &c. Like the above paradigm of roots in ’po are conjugated also, chi’po, to defecate, wo’po, to shoot, i’po, to raise (make get up) du’po, to kindle, khi’po, to make rope, pi’po, to suck, po’po, to lick, yo’po, to take off, chho’po, to sharpen, and all others having no consonant but an abrupt tone (stand- ing for truncated p) before the transitive sign. 9th.—Conjugation of transitives in po having a nasal (m. n, ng) before it. * See prior note at Sishto. Here we have for Vayu to’vi nognom and topta nognom, = khas kutnya hon and kutyako hon and dahma kha, daya’hma kha, Newari. 458 Véyu Vocabulary. [No. 6. The verb hom, to taste. Infinitive Mood. Aff. Hommung, to taste or to have tasted.* Aoristic. Neg. Mang hommung, not to taste or to have tasted. Gerunds. : t HGH ES Présent, Tasting With main verb in present or future - H with main verb in preterite. om nung, Hom hom ha. Past. Having tasted. Hom sing he. Future or present. When tasting. Hom khen. Past. After tasting. After having tasted. Pariticiples. Honvi or Homvi. Who tastes, did or will taste. Aoristic. Homta or Howmpta. What is or has been taSted. Past and passive. Homtang or Homptang. What will be tasted, what is usually tasted, what fit to be tasted. Future passive. Verbal Nouns. Expresses the instrument as homchyang li, the tasting tongue. It is also used substantively hom chyang, the taster (organ, not man.) Hom chyang. Hom lung, expresses the locality, external to self, Hom sing, expresses the time of tasting, The negative forms of all the above are made by prefixing the privitive parti- cle mang. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural. Hompo. Homchhe. Homne. Dual and plural of object. Hompochhe. Do thou taste those two. Hompome. Do thou taste them all. Negatives of the above. Tha hom. Tha homchhe. Tha homné. Tua bomchhik. Do not taste those two. Tha homne. Do not taste them all. Indicative Mood. Present tense. {tiem chhokmi, excl. Hom popmi, excl. f 1, Hom sungmi. tHom chhikmi, incl. ih Hom pem, incl. Dual and plural of object. ° fi. Hom sungchhem. I taste them two. 1. Hom sungmem, I taste them all, 2. +Hom mi. --+-Hom chhikmi, -+-Homnem. Dual and plural of object. f2. Hom chhikmi. Thou tast’st them two. (2. Hom mem. Thou tast’st them all. 3.4-Hom mi. +- Homehhikmi., -++ Homnem. * Also used quite like au adjective hommung ti, drinking or palatable water water fit for tasting or being tasted. 1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 459 Dual and plural of object. 3, Homchhikmi, He tastes them two. 3.-++- Hommem. He tastes them all. Preterite. {++Hom chhongmi, excl, gare kongmi, excl, 1, Hom pungmt Hom chhingmi, incl. Hompi kengmi, incl. Dual and plural of object. Jf1. Hom pungchhem. T tasted them two. UI. Hom pungmem. I tasted them all. 2. Hom pum, -+- Hom chhem. + Hom nem, Dual and plural of object. 2. Hom pochhem., Thou tastedst them two. 2. Hom pomem. Thou tastedst them all. 3. Hom pum. -+ Hom pochhem. -+Hom pomem. Dual and plural of object. pH pochhem. He tasted them two. flom pomem. He tasted them all. Negative mood by prefixed ma. Optative mood by conjugation of the verb dak suffixed to the root (hom) of the main verb Hom dak gnom, &c. Interrogative mood by dropping final mi or m and substituting the interrogation form ki ma, thus— Present. Preterite. 1. Hom sung ki ma. Hom pung ki ma, 2.-++ Hom kima. Hom po ki ma. 3.-+-Hom kima. -+- Hom po ki ma. Subjunctive mood by substituting nam in the present and phen in the past for ki ma, thus hom sung nam, if I taste; hom pung phen, if I had tasted, &c. Potential mood by conjugating the aoristic transitive wonto after the root hom. Precative Mood. Present. Preterite. 1, Hom sung yu. Hom pung yu. cae merely substituting the 2. - Hom yu. Hom po yu. precative particle for the in- 3. + Hom yu. + Hom po yu. J terrogative. Continuative Mood. Hom na hom nognom, 7 Hom na hom nonum, ~&e. as before. Hom na hom nomi, J Reciprocal Mood. Hom na hom panchungmi, ‘ Hom na hom panchem, -&c. as before, Hom na hom panchem, J Causal. By conjugating the root hom with the causal verb pingko, as before. 4.60 Singular. Aff. Hom sung. Neg. Tha hommo. Aff. Hom sungcbhe. Aff. Hom sungne. Neg. Tha hommochhe. Neg. Tha hommone. Singular. 1. Hom mum. J1. Hom mochhem. Ll. Hom momem. Singular. 2. + Hommi. 2. Hommi. 2. Hommi. 3. -+Hommi. 3. -—- Hom chhikmi, 3. +Hom mem. 1, Hom sungmi. Hom sungmem,. +1; Hom sungchhem. Ls 2. Hommi. J 2. Hommi. 2. Hommi. 3.-+- Hompum. 3.-+ Hom pochem. 3.-+- Hom pomem. Hompta nognom, Hompta nonum, Hompta nomi, Payu Vocabulary. [No. 6. PASSIVE. Imperative Mood. Dual. Plural. Homchhong. Hom pi kong. Tha homchhok. Tha hom pok. Dual and plural of agent. Do ye two taste me. Do ye all taste me. Do ye two taste me not. Do ye all taste me not. Indicative Mood. Duai. Plural. Hom chhokmi, excl. Hom popmi, excl. Hom chhikmi, incl. Hom pem, incl, Dual and plural of agent. They two (or ye two) taste me, They all taste me. Dual. Plural, -+- Hom chhikmi. ++ Homnem. Dual and plural of agent. They two (and we two) taste thee. They all (and we two) taste thee. -++ Hom chhikmi. + Hommem, They two (and ye) taste him. They all taste him. Preterite. { + Hom chhong mi, excl. 4 a kongmi, excl. Hom chhing mi, incl. Hompi kengmi, incl. Dual and plural of agent. They two (or ye two) tasted me. They all tasted me. -+-Homchhem. -+-Homnem. Dual and plural of agent. They two (or we two) tasted thee. They all (or we two) tasted thee. -+- Hom pochhem. + Hom pomem. Dual and plural of agent. They two tasted him. They all tasted them. 2nd form of the passive. ae as before throughout the auxiliary verb. 1857. | Véyw Vocabulary. 461 Special Forms. I.—I and thou. 8. Homnum. I (only) taste or will taste or did taste ae 3 D. Hom nochem. I (only) taste or tasted you two. Aoristic. lg Hom nonem. I (only) taste or tasted you all. | I1.—Thou and I. S.y Hommum. Thou (or he) tast’st or wilt taste me. Present D.y Hom mochhem. Ye two (or they two) taste &c. or will ee taste me. Future. ine Hom monem, Ye all taste or will taste me. ae Preterite. S.y Hom sungmi.* Thou (or he) tasted’st me. 7 D.y Homsungchhem. Ye two (or they two) tasted me. Preterite. P Hom sungnem. Ye all (only) tasted me. Negative Mood. Is formed, as in active voice, merely by prefixing the privative particle ma. Optatiwe Mood. Concurs with the same in the active voice, dak having an active and passive sense, and the neuter form dakgnom being also the passive form, dakgnom I desire or am desired; the latter sense transferred to root. With the synonymous verb yot’, to like, the voices can be distinguished, yosto being the active transitive and yosung the passive, hence we have as optative active and passive. Active voice. Passive voice. 1. Hom yonmi. Present iense. | 1. Hom yotgnom., Present tense. 2. Hom yotmi. Tee taste Wee Hom yonmi. I like to be 3. Hom yotmi. """ | 3. Hom yostum. tasted. 1. Hom yostungmi. 2. Hom yostum. Preterite. 3. Hom yostum, 1, Hom yossungmi. 2. Hom yonmi. Preterite. 3. Hom yostum. Interrogative Mood. Simply by dropping m or mi final and substituting ki ma. Subjunctive Mood. Simply by dropping the mi cr m and substituting nam for present and phen for past tense, Hommonam : Homsungphen, &c. Potential Mood. By conjugating the passive of wonto, as before, added to the root hom. Precative Mood. By dropping the final m or mi, and substituting yu: Hommo yu: Homsung yu, &c. * The mark vy placed before some of these forms indicates that they are in- cluded in the more ordinary forms of conjugation. They are repeated here for illustration, The change of sense in dual and plural of preterite shows, in con- junction with the whole system of conjugation, how restive the language is under these trammels. ON 462 Vayu Vocabulary. [| No. 6. Causal Mood. As before by pingko added to the root. Thus are conjugated, nampo, to smell; thampo, to lose; Ahumpo, to bury; hempo, to cause to sleep; hampo, to spread; and all similar words. So also are conjugated all transitives in ko having a nasal before them (n or ng) as pingko, to send; chinko, to spin and to fill; punko, to weave; hdnko, to uncover; honko, to obey; chhunko, to cleanse; tinko, to drink spirits and to cherish; sunko, to dry at fire—only that the terminations dependant on the transitive change with that sign, and as bompo makes hompopmi hompem, so pingko makes pingkokmi pingkem. 10th.—Conjugation of transitives in ko not having any consonant between the sign and the root. The verb Ta, to place. Infinitive Mood. Aff. Tamung. Ma Neg. Mang tamung. } Aoristic. Gerunds. Participles, Tahe, 2) Tovi, Tanung, | Tota, ut supra. Tataha, fut supra, Totang, Tasinghe, Taékhen, Verbal nouns. Tachyang, Talung, ut supra. Tasing, Se Negatives of all by mang prefixed. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual, Plural. Aff. Tako. Tachhe. Tane. Neg. Tha to. Tha tochhe. Tha tone. Dual and Plural of Object. Takochhe. Put down those two. Takome, Put down them all. Negative. Tha tochhik. Put not down them two. Tha tome. Put not down them all, Indicative Mood. Singular. Dual. Pluraé. i ’ Ta chhokmi, excl. . Takokmi omi,* aay : 5 : 1. Tangmi. { Ta chhikmi, incl. i Takem. Dual and Plural of Object. 1. Tangchhem. I put down them two. 1 Tangmem, I put down them all, 2.4-Tomi. +-Tochhikmi. +-Tonem. * Also Tovi nognom, as elsewhere explained. 1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 4.63 Dual and Plural of Object. 2. Tochhikmi. Thou putst down them two. 2. Tomem, Thou putst down them all. 3.+-Tomi. +-Tochhikmi. -+-Tomem. Dual and Plural of Object. ¢ 3.+- Tochhikmi. He puts down them two. ' (3.4 Tomem. * He puts down them ail. Preterite. Singular. Dual. Plural, ee : , Ta chhongmi, Takikongmi. caer. 14 chhingmi. Takikengmi, Dual and Plural of Object. 1. Takungchhem. I placed them two. 1, Takungmem. I placed them all, 2. Takum. Tachhem, Tanem, Dual and Plural of Object. 2. Takochhem. Thou put’st down them two. 2. Takomem. Thou put’st down them all. 3.4-Takum. + Takochhem. + Takomem. Dual and Plural of Object. 3. Takochhem. He put down them two. +3, Takomem, He put down them all. } Negative mood by prefixed ma. Optative mood by dak conjugated after the ta root, as before given. Interrogative mood by cutting off final mi or m and substituting the querying formula ki ma. Subjunctive mood by like truncation and substitution of nam for present and phen for past tense. Potential mood by conjugating wonto after the root ta. Precative by the immutable particle yu substituted for final mi, m. Causal by conjugating pingko added to root. Continuative Mood. - Ta nata nognom. and so on, conjugating the substantive verb no, to be 2. Ta nata nonum. after the model of phi to come and prefixing the 3. Ta nata nomi. iterated root with na interposed. Reciprocal Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural, . " Ta a - 7, ‘ be . 4 A 4 - . . Pa nats Ponchungmi. ( a nata panachbok mi, Ta nata pachikokmi, (Ta nata panachhikmi. Ta nata pachikem, 2. Ta nata panchem. Ta nata panachhikmi. Ta nata pachinem, 2. Ta nata panchem. Ta nata panachbik mi. Ta nata pachimem. And so on for the preterite after the model of imche and all reflex verbs in che. This is formed by the reflex of the verb pa to do, which is pauche added to the iterated root as before. The construction ad sensum, which is the chief rule of this tongue, restricts the reciprocal mood in use to the dual and plural. 3N2 464 Singular. Aff. Tosung. Neg. Tha togno. ( Tosungchhe, oe ¢ Tosungne. Ne Tha tosungchhe. B- Tha tosungne. Singular. Tognom. (1. Tognochhem. U1. Tognomem, 2.-+- Tomi. 2. Tomi. 2. “Tomi. 3.-+- Tomi. 3. Tochhikmi, {+ 3. Tomem., 1, Tosungmi. 1. Tosungchhem., . Tosungmem, 2.) Ler. 2. Tomi. 2. Toru: 3. + Takum. — 3.+ Takochhem, 3.4 Takomem. 1 Tota nognom, 2 Tota nonum, 3 Tota nomi, Vayu Vocabulary. PasstvE VOICE. Imperative Mood. Dual. Tochhong. Tha tochhok. Dual and plural of agent. Plurat. Tokikong. Tha tokok. Do ye two place me. Do ye all place me. Place me not, ye two, ye all. Indicative Mood. Dual. Tochhokmi. Tochhikmi. Plural. f Tokokmi, excl. Tokem, incl. Dual and plural of agent. They (or ye) two place me. They all place me. * +Tochhikmi. -+-Tonem. Dual and plural of agent. They two (and we) place thee. They all (and we) place thee. +-Tochhikmi. +-Tomem. Dual and plural of agent. They two (and ye) place him. They all place him. Preterite. Tochhongmi. Tokikongmi, excl. Tochhingmi. Tokikengmi, inel. Dual and plural of agent. They two (or ye’ placed me, They all placed me. Tochhem. Tonem. Dual and plural of agent. They two (or we) placed thee. They all (or we) placed thee. -+ Takochhem., Dual and plural of agent. , =+ Takomem. They two (or ye) placed him. They all placed him, 2nd form of the passive, &c. as before, [ No. 6. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 465 Special forms. I.—I to thee. j Tonum. I (only) placed or will place thee. D. Tonochhem. I (only) placed or will place you two. Aoristic. P. Tononem, I (only) placed or will place you all. IIl.—Thou to me. S.y Tognom. Thou (or he) placest &c. me. Present D.y Tognochhem. Ye two (or they two) place me. and Ly Tognonem, Ye all (only) place me. Future. Preterite. S.y Tosungmi. Thou (or he) placed me. D.y Tosungchhem. Ye two (or they two) placed me. Preterite. is Tosungnem. Ye all placed me. Negative Mood. By prefixing ma merely. Optative Mood. T4 dakgnom, &c. as in active voice. Ta ping dakgnom (the last as a neuter) seems to be more correct, but is eschewed, though dakgnow, if allowed to be a passive, could hardly (one would suppose) create the passive sense in the main verb in either form of this mood. Interrogative Mood. Togno ki ma. Tosung ki ma, and so on, dropping the final To ki ma. To ki ma, m, mi and substituting the -+ To ki ma. -+-Tako ki ma, interrogative ki ma. Subjunctive Mood. As in the interrogative but substituting nam in present and phen in ‘past tense for the interrogatory form. Potential Mood. &c., like the passive of hato aforegone. Here also the Ta won genom ; : a; ns ? | passive sense lost in the truncated root is trans- Ta won mi, ferred to the secondary verb. Taping omi -+T4 wontum, y . Taping wonchungmi, I am able to be put down, is also admissible. Causal Mood. Ta ping chungmi. \ Ta ping gnom, *) &c., by the reflex or passive Ta ping chem. | Ta ping mi, | causal of pingko conju- Ta ping chem. rLa ping mi, gated like imche and Iam put down by my | lam set down by an- | hompo, respectively. own will, &c. J) other’s will, &c. Continuative Mood. Ta nataé pognom, &e., the iterated root conjugated with the passive Ta nata pomi, of the verb pa, to do, which agrees with ta, to Ta nata pomi. place. Thus are conjugated jako, to eat, pako, to make, Thako, to hear, Nako, to kindle, Chhako, to loosen, Chhuko, to seize, Doko, to catch, Khiko, to hide, Duko, to dig, Seko, to understand, Reko and Guko, to lift up, Khoko, to cook, Boko, to dry and all others having a nude root before the ko sign. But observe 466 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6. that tako, jako and pako change their 4 into 6 as in the aforegone paradigm, whereas the rest suffer no such alteration, All alike take a half nasal betore the intransitive sign che. It has already been remarked that transitives im “ko” having a nasal before the sign, as pingko (potius pingko) to send, are conjugated like transitives in po with a similarly placed nasal. But as pinko is the great former of causatives I give it, before closing the conjugations, observing by the way that the root ping, which is merely nasalized pi, seems to explain the Dravirian causative sign. Imperative. Singular. Dual. Plural. Aff. Pingko (Pinko). Pingchhe. Pingne. Neg. Tha ping. Tha pingchhe. Tha pingne. Dual and plural of object. Aft Pingkochhe. Do thou send them two. * | Pingkome. Do thou send them all. Nee { Tha pingchbik. Dual. ©" ( Tha pingme. Plural. Indicative present. Singular. Dual. Plural. " Pingchhokmi, Pingkok mi. 2. Fingsungmt. 1 + Pingchhilkmi. { us Pingkem. Dual and plural of object. 1. Pingsungchhem. T send them two. 1, Pingsungmem. I send them all, 2.+ Pingmi. -+- Pingchhikmi. -+Pingnem. Dual and plural of object. 2. Pingchhikmi. Thou send’st them two, 2. Pingmem. Thou send’st them all. 3.-+ Pingmi. -+- Pinchhikmi. -+ Pingmem. . Dual and plural of odject. 3. + Pingchhikmi. He sends them two. 3. + Pingmem. He sends them all. Preterite. ; : Pingchhongmi., Pingkikongmi, a ghang kumi) { ite Pingchhingmi. Pe OR Dual and plural of object. 1. Pingkungchhem. I sent them two, { 1, Pingkungmem, i sent them all. 2. Pingkum. ++ Pingchhem. -+ Pingnem. Dual and plural of object. 2. Pingkochhem. Thou send’est them two, 2. Pingkomem. Thou send’est them all. 3.4 Pingkum. + Pingkochhem. + Pingkomem, JS 43. Pingkochhem., fay 3. Pingkomem. Dual and plural of object. He sent them two. He sent them all. Aff. Pinsung. Neg. Tha pinggno. Pingsungchhe. Aff. Pingsungne. Neg. Tha pingsungchhe. 1. Pinggnom. 1, Pinggnochhem, 1. Pinggnomem, 2.-+- Pingmi. 2, Pingmi. 2. Pingmi. 3 -+ Pingmi, { et 3. Pingchhikmi. 3. Pingmem. 1. Pingsungmi. Pingsungmem, 4 Pingsungchhem, i. 2. Pingmi. 2. Pingmi. Pingmi. 2. 3.-+ Pingkum. 3. Pingkochhem. { ‘a 3. Pingkomem, Vayu Vocabulary. Passive VOIcn. Imperative Mood. Pingkikong. Tha pingkok, Pingchhong. Tha pingchhok, Dual and plural of agent. Do you two send me. Do you all send me. Tha pingsungne, Indicative Dood. Present Tense. { + Pingchhokmi, Pingchhikmi. Pingkem, raaet es Dual and plural of agent. They two send me, They all send me. +-Pingchhikmi. +- Pingnem. Dual and plural of agent. They two send thee. They all send thee. ++ Pingchhikmi. + Pingmem. Dual and plural of agent. They two send him. They all send him. , Preterite. op Eimechhowe mi. ats Pingkikongmi. Pingchhingmi. Piugkikengmi., Dual and plural of agent They two sent me. They all sent me, -++ Pingchhem. + Pinguem. Dual and plural of agent. They two sent thee. They all sent thee. -+- Pingkochhem. -++ Pingkomem. Dual and plural of agent. They two sent him. They all sent him. 467 11.—Conjugation of transitives in “ko” having an abrupt tone (equal iterate sign) between the sign and the root, The verb Phd, to beget, or give birth to. Infinitive Mood. Aff. Phok mung. Neg. Mang phokmung, 468 Gerunds. Phokhe. Phoknung, &c. Aff. Pho’ko. Neg. Tha pho’ko. Pho’kochhe. — ee ee Tha phokme. Singular. 1. Phongmi. 1. Phongchhem. 1. Phongmem. 2. Phokmi. 2. Phokchhikmi. 2. Phokmem. 3. Phokmi. 3. Phokchhikmi. 3. Phokmem. 1, Pho’kungmi. Pho’kungmem. da Pho’kungchhem. UE 2. Pho’kum. Phokomem. AG: Phokochem. Ds 3. Pho’kum. ie Phokochhem. ay Phokomem. Reciprocal continuative, &c. compound with phok and the verbs nd and panche as before. No infinitive or participles save in the causal form phokpingmung, phokpinghe, phokpingvi, &c. Tha phokchhik. Vayu Vocabulary. Participles. Phokvi. Phokta, &c. Imperative Mood. Phokchhe. Tha phokchhe. Dual and plural of object. Do thou beget two. Do thou beget all. Do not beget two. Do not beget all. Indicative Mood. Dual. Phokchhokmi, excl. Phokchhikmi, incl. Dual and plural of object. I beget them two. I beget them all. Phokcbhikmi. Dual and plural of object. Thou begett’st them two. Thou begett’st them all. Phokchbhikmi. Dual and plural of object. He begets them two. He begets them all, Preterite. Phokchhongmi, excl. Phokchhingm], incl. Dual and plural of object. I begot two. I begot all. Phokchhem. Dual and plural of object. Thou begott’st two. Thou begott’st all. Phokochhem. Dual and plural of object. He begot two. He begot all. Passive Voice. [No. 6. Verbal nouns, Phokchyang. Phoklang. Phoksing, &c. Phonene. Tha phokne. Plural. Phokkokmi, excl. Phokkem, incl. Phoknem. Phokmem. Phokikongmi, excl. Phokikengmi, incl. Phongnem, Phokomem. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 469 Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual, Plural. Aff. Phoksung, Phokchhong. Pho’kikong. Neg. Tha phokgno. Tha phokchhok. Tha pho’kok. Dual and plural of agent. A Phoksungchhe. Do ye two beget me. * | Phoksungne. Do ye all beget me. Ne Tha phoksungchhe. *¢ Tha phoksungne. Indicative Mood. Singular. ‘) Dual and plural and agento-objective as in the last 1. Phokgnom. conjugation, only substituting phok for td, of 2. Phokmi. which the latter shows the ta root, internally 3. Phokmi. modified and the former, the iterate transitive were ye Preterite. sign, elsewhere suppressed, here brought forward, 1. Phoksungmi. for phok-gnom and phongmi both depend on ' 2. Phongmi. pho’-ko being really phok-ko, 3. Phongmi. a Thus are conjugated ta’ko, to decorticate, kho’ko, to crook, pu’ko, to awaken, chiko, to bite, ne’ko, to give rest, lu’ko, to choose, li’ko, to lay down or throw down, cha’ko, to put upon, to make come up, ye’ko, to shear or clear the ground for cultivation, chho’ko, to sow, po’ko, to weigh or measure, chwko, to plane wood, lo’ko, to turn over, &c. Observe that in all these the latent iterate sign of the imperative whose presence is only indicated by the abrupt tone (ta’ko) is pre- served in the conjugation, whence from a common crude, or ta to place and to decorticate, comes all the difference of tangmi, tomi, tomi and tangmi takmi, takmi in the indicative, whilst in the preterite there is only the difference of the abrupt accent, takungmi, takum, takum, and ta’kungmi, ta’kum, ta’kum. The change of vowel is confined to the three verbs tako, jako and pako. All other transitives in “ko” conjugated from the sheer root as Sé-ko, understand it, follow the paradigm of tako, less that change of vowel; as imperative Se-ko, Se-chhe, Se-ne, indicative, séngmi, sémi, sémi, &c. Compare with the transitives in ’ko as above those in ’po, as to’po aforegone. Both follow the Dravirian rule of iteration only disguised for the sake of euphony. 12th.—Conjugation (of Irregulars). La, to go. Imperative Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural. Aff. La’la, La’chhe. Lane. Neg. Tha 1]a’la. Tha la’ chhik* Tha lane, Indicative Mood. Singular. Dual. Plural. . La’ chhokmi. ( La’kokmi. 1. Lagnom. La’cbhikmi. ( La'kem. 2. La’lam. La’chhikmi. Lanem. 3. La’lam. La’chhikmi. Lamem, * See first conjugation of neuters conjugated from the crude root, 3 0 470 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. Preterite. 25 : La’chhongmi, excl. La’kikongmi, excl. eee ih cea incl. Lé’kikengmi, incl. 2. La’lam. La’chhem. Lanem. 3. La’lam. La’chhem. Lamem., 13th.— Conjugation (of Irregulars). N6, to be. Present Indicative Singular. 1. Nognom. The residue is quite regular (see Ist conjugation) as also 2. Noénum. in the above verb, and indeed the dual and plural of all 3. Nomi or verbs whatever are nearly immutable, as will have been Nom. seen. Remark.— Both the above have an abrupt tone or obscure t’ before the gerund, participle and verbal noun signs, as lat’he; not’he; lat’lat’ha, not’not’ha; lat’vi, not’vi; la’ta, no’ta, also in the infinitive, lat’mung, not’mung. 14th and 15th.—Conjugations (of Irregulars), being those of the verb 14, to go, as used in combination with other verbs, I.—With transitives as top’, to béat II.—With neuters, as im, to sleep. Indicative present Indicative present singular. singular. 1, Top iangmi. >) Dual and plural, 1. Im lagnom. >) Dual and plural 2. Top lam. as in the un- 2. Im lam. are in the se- 3. Top lam. combined verb 3. Im lam. parate verb. Preterite. \ lagnom, &c. Preterite, 1. Top lasungmi. 1. Im la sungmi. | 2. Top lam. 2. Im lam, 3. Toplachem. J 3. Im lam. J Imperative. Topla. Imla. Remark,—In every conjunction of verbs the Ist loses the infinitive sign, and is used in the crude state, whence the peculiar transfer of passive expression to the subordinate verb, as before illustrated. But to this, hato in the sense of let, is an exception, thus, let me strike, is topmung hasung, and topmung hanum, I let thee strike. The above fifteen conjugations with their accessories (see bracketed portions) exhibit the whole scope of Vayu conjugation. But a reference to them will show that it has been necessary, whilst striving to accommodate our forms to the genius of this language, to interpolate into the transitives certain forms expressive of both agent and object, and likewise to append to the passive certain other forms which have been necessarily set apart from all the conjugations; not to mention the perpetual coincidence of active and passive forms. It may now be of use to exhibit the whole matter of conjugation in another shape seemingly more accom- modated to the genius of the language, and which, though exhibiting a deal of repetition, will be found convenient for comparisons when we proceed to the Kiranti language, a language still richer than the Vayu tongue, in pronominal combinations with the verb and wherein consequently many of the mere iterations of the following diagram will take distinct shapes; whence we may infer that decomposition has proceeded a good deal further in the Vayu language than in the Kiranti tongue. 1857.] | Eat thou. 4 $2 CO ST OT C9 te et SNES ———= ~— Os Ye two eat. i Lt ee ———— SO OO NT DS OU Go to — neo Ye all eat. Vayu Vocabulary. The verb ja, to eat. Imperative Mood. Singular. . Janche, self, as agent or object, eat simply. . Jako, It or him. Jato, his or for him. . Jakochhe, them two. . Jatochhe, their two. . Jakome, them all. Jatome, their all. . Jdsung, me. . Jasung, mine. . Jochhung, us two. . Jachhung, our two. . Jékikong, us all. . Jakikong, our all, Dual. . Janachhe, selves. . Jachhe, it. . Jachhe, his, for him. Jachhe, them two. Jachhe, their two. . Jachhe, them all, . Jachhe, their all. . Jésungchhe, me. . Jasungchhe, mine. . Jéchhung, us two. . Jachhung, our two. . Jokikong, us all. Jakikong, our all. Plural. . Janchine, selves or simple action (functional). . Jane, it. . Jane, his, or for him. . Jane, them two. Jane, their two. . Jane, them all. . Jane, their all. . Jdsungne, me. . JAsungne, mine. . Jéchhung, us two. . Jachhung, our two. . Jéokikong, us all. . Jakikong, our all. 302 haa 2 3 4 5 | 6 IT eat or will eat. 7. 8 9 10. We two eat or will eat. eee CON Hom & b ll 12 (13 ore | s De bai We alleator |! 5 will eat. 4 6. 7 8 9 10 (13. Véyu Vocabulary. Indicative Mood. Present and Future. Singular. . Janchungmi, self, as agent or object. . Jangmi, it, him. . Jatungmi, his or for him. . Jangchhem, them two. . datungchhem, their two. . Jangmem, them all. Jatungmem, their all. . Jénum, thee. . Janum, thine or for thee. Joénochhem, you two. . Janochhem, your two. . Jdnonem, you all. Janonem, your all. Dual, { Janachokmi, excl. J anachhikmi, incl. oe nie: excl. ). J selves. aouikemanel. (oo . Jacbhokmi-chhikmi, his, for him. . Jachhokmi-chhikmi, them two. Jachhokmi-chhikmi, their two. . Jachhokmi-chhikmi, them all. . Jachhokmi-chhikmi, their all. . Jomi, thee. . JAachhokmi, thine. . Jéchhikmi, you two. . Jachhokmi, your two. . Jonem, you all, . Janem, your all, Plural. Janchikokmi, excl.) Janchikem, incl. f cee excl. |. Jékem, incl. f*” Jatikokmi, excl. + aeGRefa, incl. selves. lis, feciuita: . Jakokmi-kem, them two. - Jati-kokmi-kem, their two. J4-kokmi-kem, them all. . Jati-kokmi-kem, their all. . Jomi or Jokokmi, thee. . Jakokmi, thine. . déchhikmi, you two. . Jakokmi, your two. . Jénem or Jékokmi, you all. Janem or Jakokmi, your all. 1857. | Viyw Vocabulary. AT3 Singular. ae! 2 | 3 4 5 Thou eat’st a : wilt eat. g. | 9 10 x 12 113 Ci 2 | 3 4 | 5 Y 6. e two eat oe 7 will eat. 8. 9 10. ae Pe | 3 4 | 5 Ye all eat or J ei will eat, 8. (ee 10 EE — bo (— _ Go . Janchhem, self, . Jdmi, it. . Jatum, his, or for him. . Jéchhikmi, them two. . Jatochem, their two. . Jomem, them all. Jatomem, their all. . Jognom, me. . Jagnom, mine. . Jéchhokmi, us two. . Jémi, our two. . Jéokokmi, us all. . Jakokmi, our all. Dual. Janachhikmi, selves. . Jéchhikmi, it. . Jachbikmi, his. . Jéchhikmi, them two. . Jachhikmi, their two. Jdéchhikmi, them all. Jacbhikmi, their all, . Jognochhem, me. . Jagnochhem, mine. J édchhok mi, us two. . Jachhokmi, our two. . Jdkokmi, us all. . Jakokmi, our all. Plural. . Janchinem, selves. . Jonen, it. . Janem, its, his. . Jonem, them two. . Janem, their two. Jonem, them all. Janem, their all. . Jognonem, me. . Jagnonem, mine. . Jochhokmi, us two. Jachhokmi, our two, . Jokokmi, us all. . Jakokmi, our all, 474, ~ 69 00 NTS Ot HR 09 DD He eats or will | 10. eat. | Le 12, 13. ( A 2 3 4 4) | 7 | 8 9 They two eat J 10 orwilleat. } 11 “) 42 =~ COnAor Why = They all eat or will eat. 410. Vayu Vocabulary. Singular. . Janchhem, self, . Jémi, it. . Jatum, his, for him, . Jochhikmi, them two. . Jatochhem, their two, . Jomem, them all. Jatomem, their all. . J6mi, thee. . Jdémi, thine. Jochhikmi, you two. Jachhikmi, your two. Jonem, you all. Jomi, your all. . Jognom, me. . Jagnom, mine. Jochhokmi, excel. Jochhikmi, incl. 2S "7° . Jachhokwi-chhikmi, our two. . Jokokmi-kem, us all. . Jakokmi-kem, our all. Dual. . Janachhikmi, selves. . Jochhikmi, it, him. . Jatochhem, his, its. . dochhikmi, them two. . Jatochhem, their two. Jochhikmi, them all. . Jatomem, their all. . Jdmi, thee. . J6mi, thine. . Jdéchhik, you two. . Jochhikmi, your two. . Jonem, you all, . dJochhikmi, your all, . Jognochhem, me. . Jagnochhem, mine. JS Jochhokmi, excl. _Jochhikmi, incl. Jachhokmi-chhikmi, our two. Jokokmi-kem, us all. us two. . Jakokmi-kem, our all. Plural. . Janchimem, selves. . Jomem, it. . Jatomem, his, its, for him. Jémem, them two. . Jatomem, their two. . Jdmew, them all. Jatomem, their all. Jémi, thee. . Jé6mi, thine. Jdéchhikmi, you two. [No. 6. 1857.] I ate. We two ate. cf a oo (4y 4, 5 ee LDH OOONS oR OO DOE Viyu Vocabulary. 475 . Jatomem, your two. . Jonem or Jomem, you all. . Janem or Jatomem, your all. . Jognomem, me. . Jagnomem, mine. { Jochhokmi, excl. * | Jochhikmi, incl. . Jachhokmi-chhikmi, our two, . Jokokmi-kem, us all. Tus two. 19, Jakokmi-kem, our all. Preterite Tense. Singular. . Janchhungmi, self, own. . Jakungmi, it, him. . Jatungmi, his, for him. . Jakungchhem, them two. Jatungchhem, their two, or for them two. Jakungmem, them all. Jatungmem, their all, or for them all. J6num, thee. . Janum, thine, or for thee. . Jonochhem, you two. . Janochhem, your two, or for you two. . Jénonem, you all, . Janonem, your all, or for you all. Dual, Janachhongmi, excl. : selves, own. Janachhingmi, incl. { Jachhongmi, excl.) thi Jachhingmi, incl. ¢ ey nae oe his, for hin. achingmi, incl. Jachhongmi, excl.) Jachhingmi, incl. ( Jachhongmi, excl, : { Técbhingni, incl. ie excl.) * \dJachhingmi, incl. se epriniiiee excl. * \Jachhingmi, incl. . J6mi, thee. Jachhongmi, thine, for thee. . Jdéchhem, you two. . Jachhongmi, your two, or for you two. Jénem or Jachhongmi, you all. . Janum or Jachhongmi, your all, or for you all. 2 them two, their two, or for them two. them all. beheir all, or for them all. f 176 1. 2. We all ate. Oo Ms | | | 16. ld, ibe (18. Thou at’st or didst eat. eS ee \ — PO DAT ore 99 bo I | = = bo ic i ie) Ye two ate. 3. Viyu Vocabulary. Plural. Janchhikongmi, excl. tS ea bhikenen: incl. SelresiOui- Jakikongmi, excl. Jakikengmi, incl. Jatikongmi, excl. ). : : + Tansee incl. hits, adder iiaeing Jakikongmi, excl. Rabies 4 incl. Nua excl. Jatikengmi, incl. {Jakikongmi, excl, \Jakikengmi, incl. Jatikongmi, excl. Jatikengmi, incl. it, him. them two, t their two, or for them two. them all. } their all, or for them al}. . Jdmi, thee. . Jakikongmi, thine, or for thee. Jdéchem or Jakikongmi, you two. Jatikongmi, your two, for you two. ‘Jdénem, or Jakikongmi, you all. Janem, or Jatikongmi, your all, for you all. Singular. . Janchhem, self, own. . Jakom, it, him. Jatum, his, for him. Jakochhem, them two. Jatochhem, their two, or for them two. Jakomem, them all. Jatomem, their all, or for them all. . Jdsungmi, me. Jasungmi, mine, for me, . Jéchungmi, us two. . Jachungmi, our two, or for us two. . Jékikongmi, us all. . Jakikongmi, our all, for us all. Dual. . Janachhem, selves, own. . Jachhem, it, him. Jachhem, its, his. Jachhem, them two. . Jachher, their two, for them two. . Jachhem, them all. Jachhem, their all, for them all. . . Jdsungchhem, me, . Jasungchhem, mine, for me. . Jéchhungmi, us two. . Jachhungmi, our two, for us two. . Jokikongmi, us all. : Jakikongmi, our all, for us all. [ No. 6. 1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 477 Plural. ( 1. Janchinem, selves, own, |» 4) 6 Neallate. < 7. 8 9 ==) OOM TRO a = They ate. ae ee we ae m oO ell eel oie (0 os OPS la — so COnOO FR DH They two ate. 4 ae: 2. Janem, it, him, 3. Janem, his, its. Janem, them two. . Janem, their two, for them two, . Janem, them all. Janem, their all, for them all. . Jésungnem, me. . Jasungnem, mine, for me. . Jochhongmi, us two, . Jachhongmi, our two, for us two. . Jokikongmi, us all, . Jakikongmi, our all, for us all. Singular. . Janchhem, self, own. Jakum, it, him. . Jatum, his, for him. Jakochhem, them two. . Jatochhem, their two, for them two. Jakomem, them all. . Jatomem, their all, for them all. . Josungmi, me. Jasungmi, mine, for me. Jéchhongmi, excl. Jéchhingmi, incl. Jachhongmi, excl. Jachhingmi, incl. Jokikongmi, excl. J 6kikengmi, incl. } Jakikongmi, excl. \ Jakikengmi, incl., us two. k our two, for us two. us all. our all, for us all. . Jomi, thee. . Jakum, thine. . JOchhem, you two. . Jachhem, your two, for you two. . Joénem, you all. . Janem, your all, for you all. Dual. . Janachhem, selves, own. . Jakochhem, it, him. . Jatochhen, his, its. Jakochhem, them two. . Jatochhem, their two, for them two. . Jakochhem, them all. . Jatochhem, their all, for them all. . Josungchhem, me, . Jdsungchhem, mine. { Jochhéngmi, excl. We ake ais us two. \Jéchhingmi, incl, Continued, 478 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. 11 Jachhongmi, excl. | * \Jachhingmi, incl. f Jékikongmi, excl. a eee incl. has hs Continuation, our two, for us two. They two ate. ‘ : 13 f Jakikongmi, excl. * ‘| Jakikengmi, incl. 14, Jomi, thee. our all, for us all. Jakum, ¢ ; Hien ee . Jéchhem, you two. Jachhem, your two, for you two. . Jonem, you all. Janem, your all, for you all. Plural. Janchimem, selves, own. Jakomen, it him. Jatomem, his its. Jakomem, them two. Jatomem, their two, for them two, Jakomem, them all. Jatomem, their all, for them ail. Josungmem, me. Jasungmem, mine. Jochhongmi, excl. Jochhingmi, incl. _ They all ate. 4 11, J Jachhongmi, excl. * | Jachhingmi, incl. | 12 Jdékikongmi, excl. * | Jokikengmi, incl. eee CONTIGS O1 lam © a = : Al — SPEIRS eNE us two. our two, for us two. us all, Jakikongmi, excl. 13. Jakikengmi, Caen } our all, for us all. 14. Jémi, thee. 15. Jakum, Jakomem, thine, 16, Jéchhem, you two. 17. Jachhem, your two, for you two. 18. Jénem, you all. 19. Jénem, your all, for you all. Remark.—The whole of the above forms will by and by, be seen to exist dis- tinctly in the Bahing dialect of Kiranti, and nearly all in the Bontéwa and Khaling dialects. In Vayu the principle is the same and many of the forms exist ; wherefore we must conclude that the others have been lost; or shall we say that the process of development was staid in mid course? ‘The more anomalies, the more instruc. tion, and it is necessary to put so new and peculiar a matter in several lights in order to judge of it truly. So that instead of apologising for the above almost interminable details, I shall proceed to subjoin a comparison of Vayu and Quichna, the latter from Markham ut supra, cit. Quichna. Vayu. I, I—thee. S. I love thee, Munaiki. Chhanum. feria: Chhanochhem, D. P. TI love you, Munaikichik. Cretan! P. S. I loved thee, Munarkaiki. Chhanum. P. T loved you, Munarkikichik Cece : Chhanonem, P, 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 479 II. He—thee. S. He loves thee, Munasunki. Chhanmi. P. He loves you, Munasunkichik ebkancubieey, Ds : ia ; Chhanem, P. S. He loved thee, Munasukanki. Chhanmi. a aR J Chhanchhem, D, P. He loved you, Munasukankichik. Vehionem P, III. Thou—me. S. Thou lovest me, Munahuanki. Chhangnom. P. Thou lovest us, Munabuankichik, Ona hah = Chhankokmi, P. S. Thou loved’st me, Munahuarkanki. ; Cohansungmi. A nit Obs Chhanchhonemi, D. P. Thou loved’st us, Munahuarkankichik. HE WALatetis P. IV. He—me. S. He loves me, Munahuanmi. Chhangnom. Chhanchhokmi, excl. D f Chhanchhikmi, incl. P. He loves us, Munahuanchik. : ie Chhankokmi, excl. Pp Chhankem, incl, : S. He loved me, Munahuarka, Chhansungmi. Chhanchhongmi, excl. Up eared is Munahuarkanchik. Chhanchhingmi, incl, f° : ved | Munahuarkaiku. Chhankikongmi, excl. |p Chhankikengmi, incl. ; Remark.—Chhan to love in Vayu = Muna in Quichna, is not a good word for comparison because of its being of the aoristic class of transitives in “to.” Ina tensed verb the resemblance to Quichna would have been more apparent. On the other hand, I have given the Vayu dual as well as plural, because its dual form- ative or chhik is almost identical with the Quichna plural sign or chik, whilst the plural one differs, and nothing is more certain than that these signs are apt to mingle and the dual to fall out of use. By referring to the above diagram of the verb ja, to eat, it will be seen that the Vayu has many other forms expressly representative of the agent and object and therefore more significant than some of those here collated with the Quichna forms. In Vayu the only forms which in the present state of the language refuse entirely to mix in the stream of conjugation are those which express the action passing from me to thee and no other. One cannot help imagining a system of conju- gation with suffixed pronouns thus— Ha, to give. To, to strike. Singular. Plural, Singular, Plural. : JS Hakem. j JS To’pem, ]1. Hagnom. WEarteibe 1. To’mum. Br ceny. 2, Hanum. Hanem, 2. Topnum. Topnem. 3 Hat J Hamem. 3. To fTo’mem. ° kmacahaml Hatem. i ei LTo’pem. But the following explanations of the senses of the leading series of these forms which is real (the subordinate is wholly hypothetical) will show how utterly such a notion would mislead. 3P2 480 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. 1 J Hagnom, gives to me thou or he any single person. * | Hakem, gives to us any one in all numbers. 1 y'To’mum, beats me thou or he any one in singular number. ‘| To’pem, beats us any one in all numbers. 9 Hanum, gives to thee I only, Hami, for any other giver. * | Hanem, gives to you all any save I. Hanonem, for me as the giver. 9 fTopnum, beats thee I only. To’mi, for any other beater or beaters. * ‘| Topnem, beat you all, any save I, in all numbers. Hatum, gives to him thou or he or any single person except me. Hatungmi, | for me. 3./ Hamem. No such word. Hatomem, gives to them any person or persons except me: Hatungmen, for me. {To’pum eke him any single person but me. Topungmi, for me. 3. < ’ \strikes him, the present tense is to’mi. | To’'mem, strikes them all any person whatever. Hato, to give, being aoristic hatum, is equally present and preterite. But top, to strike, has for the present tomi, which moreover serves for all 3 persons alike in the singular number. Thus it appears that num and nem alone offer the appearance of uniformly inflected personal suffixes, and that even in regard to these, the singular and plural Senses are diametrically opposite. ; But there are other complications resulting from the plurality of agents or of patients which account at once for the specialities of the above explanations and of those which follow. Thus— 1. Hagnom, gives to me any single person. 2. Hagnochhem, give to me any two persons. 3. Hagnonem, give to me ye all only. 4, Hagnomem, give to me they all only. In the preterite hasting takes the place of hagndm ; and with the verb top’, to beat, we have only the euphonic change of gnom to mum, the residue being alike for both verbs; thus we have— Present. Preterite. 1. To’mum. 1. Topsungmi. 2. To’mochhem. 2. Topsungchhem, 3. To’monem. 3. Topsungnem, 4. To’momem. 4. Topsungmem, If to the above crowding of agents and patients round the action, we add the fact that the distinction of activity and passivity in the action itself is almost lost at the very corner stone of the whole structure of conjugation—because the sign of action kat’? hexokin, viz., its having an object, is precisely that which denotes at once the transitive verb and the passive voice; e. g. ha-to, give to him; ha-tu-m, he is given and he gives—we shall at the same time perceive how difficult it is to make these languages conform to our notions of conjugation (see and compare Tickell and Philipps, voce Sontal) and shall also be prepared to hear that a system at once so complex and so.incomplete has been very generally cast aside either wholly (Newari, Lepcha, Bodpa, Malayalim, Burmah, Malay); or in part (other Dravirian, Dhimali, Namsangnaga, &c.); and in this or that particular mode, one group of tongues rejecting the dual (Dravirian cultivated) ; another, the sex signs (Himalayan complex) ;* a third, the whole system of conjunct pro- * The complex Himalayan tongues are Limbu, Kiranti, Hayu, Kiswar, Sinwar, Dhimali, Bhramu, Chepang, Kusunda, &c, 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 481 nouns (Himalayan simple* and those above cited) : whilst the attempt to blend with the action, agents as well as patients and both in the dual and plural numbers, has been maintained only by Kiranti and some oceanic tongues, the Vayu, Sontal, &c., being now restricted to a duality and plurality on one side only, viz. that of the agents or that of the objects. The Vayu can express (like the Sontal) several agents and one patient ; or several patients and one agent; but not a plurality of both. The Kiranti can express a plurality of both. But neither one nor the other has effected the same sort and degree of amalgamation of its conjunct pronouns in the case of its nouns as well as verbs, as the Himalayan Kuswar and the Ugro- finnic tongues generally have done, which all alike have perfectly blended suffixes for both; whilst the Kiranti with an equal fusion in both cases prefers the method of prefix for the nouns,} and the Vayu, following the same Dravirian order of arrangement has not reached the same completeness of development in ¢his respect (therein further agreeing with Dravirian) though more in others. It has a perfectly Separate set of possessives for combination (Ang, ing, 4 vel i); but to the noun has got blended inseparably the 3rd of these (ang-upa, ung-upa, a-upa or wathim u-pa) and thus a euphonic combination of the whole with the nominal root has been prevented, as in Bodo which, however, as well as Vayu, can and occasionally does, use as perfectly fused{ prefix forms as the Kiranti, and sometimes both the disjunct and conjunct prefixually, and Dhimali likewise. From the verb Bodo like Malayalim and several Nilgiri tongues, has dropt the pronoun: Diméali, like Tamil, Uraon and Male, has kept it: in Vayu, as in Sontal and Ho, the pheno- mena are complex, I refer to the head of pronoun for some more remarks on this subject. In the meanwhile and in conclusion of the topic of Vayu conjugation T beg to suggest attention to the following collation of actives and passives of the several types, in the 3rd persons of the present (or future) and preterite, * The simple or nonpronominalized are Newari, Marmi, Girung, Magar, Khas (mixed), Lep’cha, Palusen or Syar’pa (Serpa), Bodo, &c. Compare Sontal and Kuswar. , apu-ing dal-eng aing. Baba-im. Thatha-im-ik-an, Whorewith apa-m : dal-me-am. Baba-ir. Thatha-ir-ik-an. apa-t dal-e ai. Baba-ik. Thatha-ik-an. T a-pa, my tib-a, T i-po, thy father. tib-i, thou strike. a-po, his tib-a, he t Bodo. Vayu. Dhimali. Its verb. a-pha. am-pa. ka-pa. Dengkhi-ka, na-pha, um-pa. na-pa. Dengkhi-na. bi-pha. a-pa. wa-pa. Dengkhi. § The full pronominal forms with the noun are— angni apha. ang upa. kang apa kang ka-pa. or 4 nang na-pa,. ] Which last nangmi apha. ung upa. nang apa bini-apha or wathim upa. oko apa eko wa-pa. quite agrees nangni napha. with Kuki, bini bipha. ——— [ No. 6. Pdyu Vocabulary. ‘munysuig '¢ ‘uNnySUg “E ‘NIV *¢ sa, 2 ‘andwoy °¢ ‘undwoy “¢ ‘und om ‘¢ "cand 0A, "WINnIYSIS *¢ ‘unjwwmax ¢ "wnyWwak *¢ ‘Bunwusudsutg “SunWSULg ‘sunusuideg sunweg *Sunusuidwo py *(Sunwmmoy) sunwoy “sunvasuiddo jy *(Sunvido jy) Suna .o Ay “sunwsuldys *SUNWIIG ‘sundsuidwa x *(Sunm wad) sunvi x “‘Sueysuidsurg “eysuidsulg *raSurdsutg “guvysulg *eysuld ‘1ADUI ‘Suvysuideg "yy surdeg "rasuideg “suvyed "29d "1A9d “suv suid mopyT *eysuld wo *1ASUId WO Fy ‘Suejwoy “By WO *1AUD Fy ‘Sueysuiddo *eyouiddo srasutddo A *duvjdo A “eydo A "1A OM i suejsuldyis *eysuldyig “IASUIAIIG "SUBIYSIG "eI4S19 TAI ‘Sueysuidua x *eisuidme x *raSuiduns X *duezwo X "eyo "1at9 ‘eaoge ayy JO sop diorqaeg pug SOAIPUYUT "1UsUIg “Z MteDne st "T “wusald ae ‘TWSOIg ‘Z% ‘TUNySUlg “Z ‘tasunysud ‘T ‘msg ‘¢ “ISU °Z ‘puas 0} ‘oySulg ‘eseu e fq papovaid ,oy,, Ul SoAtjIsuBIT, "IUOT °G "iuIsuNsOg *T "IWOd “€ "IMO T °S mune “S ‘yasunyeg *T "med “€ "1MWOT op 0} ‘oye ,,{O 5, UL SAAIjISUBAT, ‘IWUOH ‘ZS ‘IUISUNSWO FL ‘T "1UUO0FT °¢ ee oe ‘mndmoy °% ‘9388} 03 SodwoA, “IU OM °S ‘und OM °% “LUG ° G "MUNJYSIS °SY ‘Tg °G ‘UINJWI °S qwsundwoy ‘T ‘rusunsd OM *T “1wSund OM ‘T "s00Ys 03 ‘odo ,,{0d ,, Ul Saatjisuedy, ‘IWUSUNSSIG *T 2S ‘T "yw Hf smog © ‘7 “119 *jesvu @ fq popadoid od ,, Ul Saatyisue.y, lec *T[E] 07 ‘orysig ‘queyiqis Aq papaooid ..0},, Ul SOAI}ISURAT, "1wUSUNSWIX *T “wWsUNnyWeX ‘T "asua} agldajatlg ‘a.nd 0} fo}WIA A ‘IGNA\ AVIQNNIG NI S@OIOA LO NOLLVITOD “TUTLOM °§ “TLOM °G “TUOM °§ “1H OM G “IMIS “SE TUOIS 6 ‘IWS “gS “LUIS °Z ‘mnjwWaz “gS Iwo Z "manzwaK “¢ ‘mUNJWOK °Z 20} 9) UL SAAI}ISUBAT, “TuUSunjWe x ° ‘asuay Juasald ‘moUssUILg ‘T "1msunssUulg ‘T “mousog ‘T "yusueg *T ‘nWuOY *{ “1mUUNSWOFT *f[ ‘mun OM “T bo CAL LT ‘MOUSIS “T “MWS *T "muNnmMI * er DAISSPG) . aanoy f IA @AISSEg) , aaAIsseg). coe Al Soke iit SAIsseg |, pa It SAlssed |, Stab : aaisseg |, aaroy f TA aaisseg |, aalay f “A dAISSBG dAljO V ‘Al dAIsseg | aajoy f Ul aaisseg | aanoy f il aalsseg | aanoy f | 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 483 A Sprcrmen oF THE Va’yu Lanavuace. Ang ming Péchya nom. Ang thoko Vayu nomi (or Gé Vayu gnom) Khasakhata Hayu itkem. Ungki davo be Vayu ischikem. Go jekta dumsungmi. Hatha bong dumsungmi gha ma sengmi. Lé got kulup chhuyung* wanikhen. Dhankuta mu khakchhing puchhum chupvikhata pdéguha hata vik pachikokmi. Ang ké ma nom. Ang tavo Gajraj Thapa nung nomi. Gonha kdphe nakphe inang munang wathi yengkum. Wathim narung gonha blektum. Wathim chho le pdkum. Honko 4 thum rami. Captanha thim hénung hénpingkum. Ang davo lit’nung blining cholo chupsit khen inhe ¢6 gonha mutpingkum. Davo chinggnak chamchem. Gon sénche. Ungjita davo gha chitnum. Ang thumbe ithaji némi gonha walige latpinggnom. Angki théko kdsi blingmu homba imba mus- chikokmi (our tribe, we). Népal kharal khen Tambakosi bong mus- chikokmi. Gdokhéta Awal be mutvi mang nokokmi. Kuswar, Botia, | Dénwar, Awal be mutvi nomem. Awal mu ramsa ha gang khéva ma muschikokmi. Vik mang pévi, ghadimu chokphi sétung jovi, kem ma povi thoko Kustinda, Chépang bahamu chhaju puchhibe ma muschikokmi. Angkimu kem nomi, vik le nomi; pagnamu vik nom, memha, makai, ddsi, phaphar, boja, levi, rowa, masa, sdkaa, gdhun, laru livi vik nom. Angki muilung kélube, Héngongwo baha. Lap- cha, Limbu baha mang jahe, chhaju madimbe adhd pahe, muschi- kokmi. Chhaju pichhibe bdja ma lichem, jomsitmu ming mische le ma nom. Hanung bong jomsit lichem minung bong lat’lat’ha muschikokmi. Ghakhata ha ruklung be rukkokmi, duklung be dukkokmi. Phalamtt’vi, singchuk’vi, kdchénvi angki thok be m4 nomem. Kampdachyang, bingchopachydng gyétim gdt khen ingchi- kokmi. Angki kem angki gdt ha pachikokmi. Angki wadschyéng angki vik sétang rowa khen rdmekhata ha duri chinchingha jéwa pungmem. Vayukhata khakchhingpuchhum povi (or chupvi) ma nomem. Mische pa gyéti namsangmu séva md pdmem. Jéwa Héngongwo got khen rangai pomem. Ldnchokhata dawangmi jéwa waschimem. Meschokhata rangai pota waschimem Angki mulung ithijila nomi. Nayung gét kulupha bakulup khen chholup* (or 1é got kulup) bong miphta chhaju mddtimbe itha dékha hamta némem a * Phrases of numeration. See Vocabulary. 484 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6. (or hamchimem). Angki kem chhdlung singha pota, diha wamta, hiingling kdha rota, khistiha supta, gége gége pachimem. Kem bhitari nayung kuna nochhikmi; k6élu, imlung; kolu kho’lung. Tawokhata, tamikhata gégé té ma hokmi. Bangchodum khen biak pachikokmi. Nayung got kulup ha ba kulup khen lé got kulup* bong pénku haha ha rome ingchikokmi. Pénku phen mang wontike nam rome upu kembe lat’lat’ha, kam papaha, phengkokmi. Mische ma papaha me’ta singtong kébe khumpopmi. Khdcho, puk, chéli, béli, méchho, jachikokmi, Gai, bhalu, phoka, ma jékokmi. Singwo- khidu, diuidu, chalung, jakokmi. Sdve tungchikokmi, bukchhale tungkokmi (note the 2 forms of the verb). Sdve, angki pota, ching- enak tungkokmi. Bukchha, gyétim got khen ingta, yanggnak tung- chikokmi. Angki chhobe ma blekchikokmi. Nokchhung saschi- kokmi, mescho le, loncho le. Balung khen gyéti suna le ma dak- kokmi. Angki chélvi Balung. Gyéti suna le ma nom. Vayu thoko mu singtong sunaha Brahman Lama ma honmi (or honmem, indefinite). Gyétim lom ma khokchikokmi. Angki vik hakhele ma watkokmi. Upo met’khen tawokhata ha chhinggnak yanggnak ma papdha lingmem. Tamikhata ha mische le ma lingmem. Imhamu dawo dévi angki majhua nomi. Inung wanikhen povi suna le m4 nom. Angki théko gyétim got be lasta, yangta thoko, nati tolgongy bong yapgmi. Finis. TRANSLATION, My name is Pate. Iama Vayu. The Khas tribe call us Hayu, but our own name is Vayu. Jaman old man. I don’t know how old, above sixty. Iam a cultivator of land assigned by the Raja to the soldiers of the Dhunkuta regiment. I have no land of my own. My son is in the service of Captain Gajraj Thapa. You saw him here often and drew his portrait and measured him. He thought that very queer and was a little alarmed. But the Captain reassured him and he consented. I have been here four months to help you to learn our language. It is very difficult. You must judge of all. I can only answer your questions. I hope you will soon let me go home. Our people dwell in the basin of (or along the course of) * A phrase of numeration. See Vocabulary. + A phrase of measure. See Vocabulary. It is equal two handfuls. 1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 485 the Kosi river from near the valley of Nepal proper to the Tamba Kési. We are not Awalias (people inured to malaria or awal). The Awalias dwell in the valley of the river, and are called Kuswar, Botia, Dénwar, &. We can’t live there by reason of the malaria. Nor do we dwell on the hill summits like the Kuisinda and Chépang, who never cultivate, but live on wild herbs and fruits and never build houses. We have houses and cultivate the soil, growing maize and kéddo and buckwheat, and rice, cotton, millets, barley, wheat and madder. We are fixed cultivators, like the Néwars, not migra- tory ones like the Lepchas, Limbus and others. We occupy the central parts of the hill slopes, which we cut into terraces. Rice won't grow on the tops nor any sort of grain. We go up as high as grain will grow. We use the plough or the spade, according to the nature of the site we occupy. We have no craftsmen, smiths, carpenters or potters—of our own tribe. We buy utensils and ornaments from others. We build our own houses and our women spin and weave the home-grown cotton, of which they make our clothes. None of our race are soldiers, nor do we ever take service (menial). The Néwars dye for us, if we need it; but the men wear plain clothes. ‘Those of the women are sometimes dyed. Our villages are very small, usually fifteen to twenty houses scattered along the hill sides. Our houses are built of rough timber, plas- tered and thatched with grass. Tworooms in a house—one for cooking and the other for sleeping. We have no general dormitory for all the grown girls, or boys of the village. We marry at matu- rity, buying our wives. A wife costs fifteen or twenty rupees. If we have no money we earn her by labour in her father’s house. We bury our dead without any ceremonies. We do not tattoo our bodies. Our ears we bore occasionally. We have no priest but the exorcist, who is also our only physician. None of our tribe follow the brahmans or lamas. We abide by our own creed and customs. We eat fowls, pigs, goats, sheep, buffaloes. Not oxen, bears or monkeys, but honey, milk, eggs. We drink beer and spirits. Much of the former, as it is home-made; little of the latter, because we must buy it. Our law of inheritance gives equal shares to all the boys, and no share to the girls. Our head villager decides our disputes. We never appeal from him. Our tribe is a broken one and is reduced to very inconsiderable numbers. 3Q 486 Béhing Vocabulary. | No. 6, BAntine VocABULARY. Nouns Substantive. Air (wind), Ju. Affection, Dwakcho. Abuse, Waita. Khicho. Abode, Bwagdikha. Adulterer, Ryamnipo. Adulteress, Ryamnimo. Agriculturist, Byangsikokba. Amaranth (grain), gosurani. Aqueduct, Kalo. Pwalam. Kh6li michi. Ancle, leg joint, : Arm-all, Arm, nt eT Article, thing, Grékso. Aunt- pat. ener Momo. Anger, Sokso. Ant, Gagachingmo. Anus, Dyala. Arrow, Bla. Ax, Kha. Alder tree, Barsi. Bag, Salama Basket, Bainso. Barley, No name. Jou is used. Bamboo, Palam (all). Rikcho (small). Bark of tree, Singkokte. Back, Ching. Back bone, Chinreisyé. Belly, Koja. Beast, quadruped, { Being, animal, Samthiba, Box, chest, No word. Bat kind, Pakati. { male, Avo pakati. Bat < female, Amo pakati. young, Pakati atami, Birth, No name. Bird kind, Chikba. male, Apo chikba. Bird, female, Amo chikba, ° young, Chikbaatami. Beer, Gnasi. Bread, Shéblem, Birch tree, Phyékulima. Bed, Bldé’cho. Bed chamber, Ipdikha. Bed time, Ipcho béla. Bee, SyGra (wasp, Yakuwéa ) Lékhdlithiba. Lékholimigwakba. Blacksmith, Teupteu’le. Blood, Husi. Buttocks, Kédsidyala. | Battle, fight, Mocho. Boat, Danga. Bear, Wam. Beard, Shé6 song, mouth hair or Yoli sw6n.* chin hair. Boar, Apo po. Body, Ram. Burden, load, Kiara. Bone, Reusye. Breast, Kiachu. Breastnipple, Neucheu. Bow, Li. [nima, f. Bowman, Licha, m. Limicha, or Licha- Bottom, lowest part, Hayu. Boy, Tawa. Buffalo kind, Mésyei. male, Apo mésyeu. Bato} femal, Amo mésyeu. young, Mésyeu atami. Bull, Bing. Boundary, Rélu. Breath, Sam. Branch of tree. No word. Lo’ba, younger. Brother Yawa, elder. Brotherhood he Brethren 1 ee Brother in-law, Chaiwa. Wadyalcha. male, Apo gai atami. Calf Pea Amo gai atami. ‘Pa. Dacho. Grokso (thing). Pwakuticho grokso (water to drink vessel). Cart, No word. Cat kind, Birma. c male, Apo birma. Cat 1 Can, cup, female, Amo birma. young, Birma atami. Carpenter, Sing chokba. Cheek, Chocho. Chesnut tree, Syéli. Chin, Yéoli. Yoli. Childkind, Ta. Gikba. Tawa. Tamitawa. Crinawal Pie a eee emale, Tami. Children, Tadau. ‘Tawatami. * Séng vel Swon vel Swom. is Vague. The broad 6 passes into wa and the final nasal 1857.] Clay, Phélemkhapi. Cloth, W2’. Cotton cloth, Linkhi wa. Woollen cloth, Unke wa. Silken cloth, No word, Clothes, raiment, Wa. Cloud, Kuksyal. Colour, Moba, : unamti ather). Cold (frigor), ee ee ig ) Companion, Warcha. Claw, nail, talon, Gyang. Cane (calamus), Gari. Cousin ee Mat. Cow, Gai, H. Amo bing. Cough, Shetikhé. Copper, No name. Cowberd, Gai theulba. Cotton, uncleaned, Linkhi. Cotton, cleaned, Riwa. Courage, No word. Crow, Gagakpa. Daughter, Tami (girl). Daughter-in-law, Dyalmi. Dance, Sili. Day, Namti. To-day, Ana. Dust, Dyerbakh4pi (flying earth). Darkness, Namring. Desire, wisb, Dwakcho. Ditch, No name, Deer, Kisi. male, Apo kisi. Deer female, Amo kisi. ~|® 4 7 ba young, Kisi atami. Door, Lapcho, Disease, illness, No name. ; Guwapsya. Dispute, *Mocho? Khicho? Infinitives. Dog kind, Khlicha.+ male, Apo khlicha. Dog fe, Amo khlicha, young, Khlicha atami. Death, No name. Dream, Gna’mo. Drink, Tu’mé. Tuchome. Drunkard, Dukba. Tuba. Dyer, Ryakba. Earth—the te Earth—a little | Khapi. Ear, Sdmaneu (see nose). Egg, Di. Badi (Ba = fowl). Béhing Vocabulary. i, i i 487 Elephant, No name, Echo, Thololamstikha. Enemy, No name. Ewe, Amo bhéra. Eye, Michi. Eyebrow, Kur’mi swon’g, Eyelash, Michi swon’g. Elbow, Nyaksi. Exorcist, Jamcha, Earthquake, Khrinyam. Evening, Namtheuba. Face, Kali. Feather, Chikbaswong ( = bird-hairf Feast, acl ; Festival, { PU Father, Apo. Father-in-law, Yeppa. My father, Apa. Thy father, Ipo. His, her, its father, Apo. Fever, Jusara (ague), Bair Jyapdikha, io place. Fear, Nima. Gnima. Ferry, Hamba glidikha. Fire, Mi. Fire-place, Mimudikha. Bwakal. Field, arable, Ra. Byangsi. Finger, Brepcho. Finger-nail, Gyang. Brepchogyang, Dwabo dyelkem. Fellow countryman, | Paso dyel dim- muryu. é Dwabo thokkem. a Adwabo thokkem. Fish. Gaa. Flavour, taste, Bro. Flesh, Syé. Flint, Chichilung. Flour, Phél. Flea, Chukbe. Fence, Khor. Floor, Khapi (earth). Flower, Phung. Ford, Pwaku hambag ludikha. § Fly, Shedmo. Food, Jawame. Jachome. Participles. || Fowl kind, Ba. male, Swaretiiwaba. Fowl female, Chwongkameuba. young, Bukballo. * Khicho, verbal, mcocho practical, dispute. + Khicha is Newari. The insertion of a labial is a common trick of these tonguer. See note on Hayu verbs. { Quill is Basyurima. § Literally, water (of ) far side issuing place. \| Jawame, what he eats. Jachome, what any one eats, an edible substance. 3Q 2 488 Fowl] wild, Sabala ba. Fowl’s egy, Ba di. [ dyelke, Foreigner, Wangmedyeldim. Waugme- Fist, No word. Forehead, Kipi. Filth, dirt, Riku. Foot, Khboli blem. Form, Moba. Forest, jungle, Sabala. Fruit, Sichi. Frost, Phursa. Frog, Krékra. Friend, No name. Garlic, No name. Ginger, Petrim. Girl, Tami. Glue, cement, Kyapcho. Kojacha, m. SO Ge eehae i Grandfather, Kiki. Grandmother, Pipi. Grandson, Chacha. Granddaughter, Chachanima. God, A god, no name. Gold, Syetina. Goat kind, Swongara, Songara, male, Apo swongara. Goat ese Amo swongara, young, Swongara atami, Goat herd, Swongara theulba. Grass, Jim. Grain, Jama. Ghee, Butter, Gyawa. (oil.) Groin, Téchi. Hand, Gablem. Handle, Rising. Spade handle, Rakokchom rising. Hair, Swoéng. Hair of head, Cham, Hair of body, Swong. Herdsman, Bing.—Mésyeu-theulba. Heaven, Dwamu, (sky.) Head, Piya. Heart, Thim. Theum, Heat, Hatlo. Hatnam. Heel, Cheuncheu leu. Hail, Masi. Hammer, Thyakchome. Hammerer, Thyakba. Hemp, Gra. Hen, Amo ba. * Kojachanima a female glutton. Bihing Vocabulary. So khyimchanima a house wife. holder: and so also of all formatives in cha, Koja = belly. [No. 6. Hip, Khélimichi.—or Jilamichi. Hope, No word. hol , Hoof, { Meven pGyakseuled Hog kind. P6. male, Apo po. Hog < female, Amo po. voung, P6 atami. Hole, Gwalyum. Hoe spade, Kokchéme. Husk, Phira. Hook peg, Chachome. Horn, Grong. [horn), Goat’s horn, Swongara agrong (goat its Honey, Sytira. Shara. Horse kind, Ghoéra. male, Apo ghéra. Horse female, Amo ghora. -young, Ghora atami, House, Khyim. Khyimcha, m. Khyimchanima, f. Home, Bwagdikha, Hunger, Soli. Husband, Wancha. My husband, Wa wancha. Thy husband, I wancha, Her husband, A wancha.f Instrument, | Rapachd. Implement, { Grokso. infant Jf Bébacha, m. > | Bébachanima, f. Ice, No name. Intestines, Chisye, Iron, Syal, syal. Jaw, Ka’kam. Joint, Michi. Juice, Pwa’ku (water). Knife Be’tho. ? \.Chwarchom. Knee, Pokchi. Knot, Khingna, (p. p.) Kitchen, Kidikha. King, Ho’po. Hwang. Lamp, torch, To’si. Language, speech, Lo. Lip, Shéo-kokte (mouth leather). Leaf, Swapho. Tree’s leaf, Sing swApho. Leather, Kokte (skin). Leg-all, Kho’li. Householder, See house- Khyim = house. + Wa, Y, A, are the pronominal prefixes of nouns and suffixes of verbs, a thoroughly Dravirian trait and a fundamental. cr Jyul—i I Here is a sample of the suffixes u the Shia Pe a thot bp or place. person = ur, wa or Oo. Jyui—a He. 1857. | Bahing Leg-true (tibia,) Phdphbdl. Liar, Limochalba. Light (lux,) Hathat. Lightning, Ploksa. Life, Sam, (breath). Liver, Ding. Louse, Tasyar. Lungs, Syetipored. Wapachogrokso. ae eo Load, Kara. Dheptecha, m. Lowlander, Bie: tinticntmedl & Mat, Tharkimo bidcho. Maize, Greleuwamo. Master, Ho’po. Hwang. Mark, Syancho. Market, Jyapdikhalédikha. Mason, Khyimpaba. Mankind, Maryeu. male, Wainsa. Man jem Mincha. young, Atami, Maker, doer, Paba. Madder. Deu. Mare, Amo ghora, Marriage, Grochyer. Mill, hand or water, Khuruwa. Millet (kangani), Basara, Millet (kodo), Charja. Millet (juwar), Binkhuma. Millet (sama), Sama. Milk, Neucheu. Mist, Kuksyal. Manner, ) , Mode, eee” Monkey (all), Moreu. Measure, the instrument, Khapcho. Medicine, No name. Mind, Theum. Moon, Taisaba. La. Month, La. Morning, Didila. Music, Tapcho. Mother, Amo. My mother, Ama. Thy mother, Imo. His, her, its mother, Amo, Money (copper), Lalajima. Mountain, Syerte. Syértecha, m. Syértechanima, f. Mountain products, Syértedim. Muryeu ata.* Pabba. Mountaineer, * Wainsa and Mincha are used substantivally and adjectively. Vocabulary. 489 Mouth, Shed. Moustache, Sheoswo6n. Muschito, Syapyél. Mouse, Yeu. Nipple, Netichet (milk). Noise, Syanda. Neck, Sheureu (French eu). Name, Ning. Night, Téngnachi. Net, No name. Needle, Léumje. Noon (day), Nam-helscho, Nose, Néu (French eu). Neighbour, Kwaudaubwakba. Nostril, Neu’lam (nose—way). Navel, Sheupum. Oar, No name, Oil, Gyawa. Oak-tree, Sébusarsi. Odour, smell, Ari. Rf. Onion, No name. Ox kind, Bing, male, Bing. Ox female, Gai. Amo bing. young, Gai atami. Bing Atami, Ordure, Khli. fakhli. Man’s ordure, Muryukhli or Muryu- ae Gupsa khli or Gupsa Tiger’s ordure, 4khii. Pain, Detikha, H. Palm of hand, Gublem agwalla. Penis, Bli. (chiefly). Place, Dikha (in composition of verbs Plant, Waba, P. Pleasure, Gyérsi. Plough, Jdéchome. Ploughman, Jéba, P. Plain, Dyamba. Plainsman, Llanes m. Lowlander, { Dyambachanima, f, Plate dish, Py, Platter, fi Parent, Kikba, p.t Plantain, Gramochi. Plantain tree, Gramochi sing. Plantain fruit, Gramochi sichi. Pine (tree), Tési. Pepper (black), No name. Palate, Kékolyam, Pepper (red), Dukba. Potter, Khapi yalba, Peach, Khwdémalchi. Peach tree, Khwomalchi sing. Not Atami, Man’s chiid or human child is Muryuatami = man his child. Better ata or atawo : See child. Tami is used for the young of all animals. + e.g. Ip dikha sleeping-place = bed t To this answers Gikba child ; or who begets and who is born. kitchen. chamber: Kidikha cooking-place = 490 Peach fruit, Khwomalchi sichi. Price, Thing. Priest, Nokso. Poison Ning. Ram, Apo bhéra. Rat, Yéu (French eu). Rain, Rya-wa. Rains, the, Ryawa namti. Rib, Chakh yamreusye, Rice, unhusked, Bira. Rice, husked, Shéri. Rice, boiled, Mémara. River any, Gilo. Root, Syangri. Rust, Gari. Rudder, No word. Road, Lam. Rope, Gra. Roof, Khyimpa. Rhododendron, T'waksyel. R, tree, Twoksyel sing. R, flower, T'woksyel phung. R. fruit, Twoksyel sichi. Salt, Yuksi. Silence, Licho. [digger). Spade, spud, hoe, Rakékchome(—ground- Spear, Héchéme. Shape, form (and colour), Mdba. Sheep kind, No name. Bhéra used. Spirits (distilled), Héna. Spindle, Ranta. Spinner, Panba. Skin, Kokte. Scull, Piya réusye. Shoe, sandal, Kholidi paschong. Seed, Wachyar. Seive, Riyangma. Sleep, Ip’thi. Sail of boat, No word. Sand, No word. Spittle, Richuka. Snot, Neukhli = nose-filth, Silk, No word. Silver, No word. Sport, play, Chamcho, (inf.) [Brother. Sister, elder, Yawa, younger, Loba. see Sisterhood, Yaba loba bum. Sister-in-law, Wadyelmi. Sitting chamber, Bwagdikha. Spider, Bajeringmo. Smith, Teupteulé. Teupteucha. Snake, Basa. Wali, m. Bera teeta f. Soldier, Kyakyamkhusiba. Buhing Vocabulary. ! } | Summit, top, Gnari. [No. 6. Sky, Dwamu. Son-in-law, Dyalcha, my Wa—ta.* thy Y—ta. see child. his A—ta. \ Shoulder, Balam. Shoulder-joint, Balam michi. Shepherd, Bhéra theulba. Side, Chakhyam, Pum. Star, Sora. Son, Ajuju. Snow, Phimu. Summer, Hau-namti = hot or heat day. Sweat, Gwaulau. Storm, Gnolojai (= great wind). Steam, Sam (breath). Smoke, Kani. Strength, Sokti. Song, Swalong. Sow, Amo po. Khomi. Sugarcane, Byar.t Sun, Nam. Sunshine, Nam, Sunrise, Namdhapcho. Sunset, Namwamcho. Still, Hechopa. Stone, Lung. Stomach, Koja. Shade, shadow, Bala. Straw, Jim (grass). Sword, Bétho (knife), Shield, No name. Tail, Méri. Testicie, Kollosichi. Tiger, Gupsa. Thigh, Jila. Thirst Prakudwakcho. * | Prakudwaktimi, Thumb, Bombo. Tooth, Khieu (French eu). Tobacco, Kuni. Turmeftic, Byuw’ma. Toe, Khoélibrepcho. Toe, great, Kholi bombo. Toe—nail, Gyang. Tongue, Lyam. Time, No name. To-morrow, Dilla. Thread, Sale. Thunder, Buk’bu. : Kuncha, m. ey fein. f. Theft, Kunchaniwa. Tree, Sing. Dhyaksi. Tree—bark,Sing kokte. Dhyaksi kokte. Béla used. * Wa ta-wo, my son: Wa tami, my daughter: Wata my child, Ta is child = Sontal and Uraon Da. But ta is used also for son as sa is child and son in Bur- mese, which language has also the mi suffix, sami a girl = tami Bahing and Hayu. + Sugar is Byar apwaku = juice of cane. 1857. | Bihing Vocabulary. 491 Tribe, Thok. Weaver, Wapaba. Uncle, Pat. Popo. Water, Pwaku. Uncle, Mat. Kuku. Water-spring, Pwaku blo. Urine, Charnfku. Walnut, 4 ee Phoro sing. Man’s urine, Murynacharniku, eas: fruit, Phoro sichi. Goat’s urine, Swongara acharniku. Wife, Ming. Vein, Sagra. Wrist, Gublemmichi. Vegetable, Cheadle pale. Work, Ru. Vetch, pea, Kyangyalyangma. Wizard, Krakra. Village, Dyal. Witch, Krakranima. Willasce Dyalpau, m. Witchcraft, Krakraniwa. ? | Dyalpaunima, f. Widow, Khlimi. Victuals, Jachome. Widower, Khliwa.* Vice, sin, No word. Whore, No name. Voice, Syanda, (sound). Whoremaster, No name. Valley, No word. Wealth, Grokso. Vulva, Twarchi. Wing (bird’s), Baphlem, (ba = fowl). Wax, Khéye. Witness, Kwoéba. Taba. Wound, Banam. Year, Tho. Wool, Bhéda swoén. Yesterday, Sanamti. Wall, Atha. Antha. Yeast, No name. Banning ADJECTIVES. JS Neubat, m. and c. gender. Good, UNeubanima: f Bad, Ma neuba. Negative. Deceitful, ]) Hanba, m. and c. Cunning, { Hanbanima, f. * wa, and mi are suffixes of gender. The formative suffix cha is equivalent to wa, in words like li-cha, a bow man; Kin-cha, a thief, &c. The feminine of wa is mi; Of cha is micha, as Koja-cha, a glutton; Koja micha, a female glutton; or it is nima, as Kun-cha, a thief; Kunchanima, a female thief. Pau and pé are also masculine signs, whereof the former makes its feminine by adding nima; the latter by changing the po into mo, as dyal-pan, a villager; dyal paunima, a female villa- ger; ryamni-po, an adulterer, ryamni-mo, an adulteress. The participial suffix ba, which also makes nouns of the agent, and gives quali- tives a substantival character, as thyak-ba, a or the hammerer: neu-ba, a or the good one, is another masculine suffix, which takes nima for its feminine. But participial nouns in ba are often regarded as of all genders, and when used adjectivally, as all can be used, they take no sign of gender or number, or case ; they precede the substantive which they qualify in their crude form, as neuba wain- Sa, a good man, neuba wainsadau, good men, neuba wainsake, of a good man. The inherent relative sense of the participles enables them to dispense with any formative, but if it be specially necessary to express gender, such words when used as nouns, can take the wa and mi sex signs, and also the signs of number always supposing that their use is substantival. Dravidian participles are formed from the gerunds (fide Caldwell) and need a for- mative to give them the relative and participial sense. Such is not the case with Kiranti participles, though these when used substantivally often takes the m, me, formative and always if the participles be of the impersonated kind. See verbs. Observe that the Vocabulary throughout is so constructed as to be a clue to grammar as well as to vocables, + Participial, like most of the following, See and compare the verbs, Neu to be good. Neu-gna, neu-ye, neu, I, thou, he, am good, Neu-ba who, or what is good, all genders; Dual, Neubadausi; Plural, Neu-badau. Neu—itis good. Root of verb and of noun. So Newari Bhing, which has Ji bhing, Chha bhing, Wo bhing for 3 persons, and Bhing—hma-gu for major and minor of gender, aud Bhing hma, nihma and Bhing ping, for dual and plural. 492 Ma hanba. Neg. Aje. Ajebwakba, Deukha giba, m. ¢, Deukha gibanima, f, . f paba, m. c. Benevolent, 1 Grane | eats, f. Paba. m.c. Pabanima, f. Tal eae m. > ¢ Chwanchanima, f. True, or truth speaking, Aje. Aje bwak- ba,m.c. Aje bwakbanima, f. False, or false | Limo. Limo bwakba, m. speaking, f Limo. bwakbanima, f. Passionate, | Soksa, bokba, m. ec. hasty, fSoksa bokbanima, f. Placid, patient, Soksa ma bokab. Niba, m. c. Nibanima, f. Brave, Ma niba. Neg. Constant-minded, | Theumjasiba, m, Unchangeable, { Theumjasibanima, f. ‘Chonnctal’ ¢ Theum méjasiba, Neg. Wasteful, { Warba, m. c. profuse. { Warbanima, f. Kakachyakba, m. n. Kakachyakvanima, f, Theum neuba, m. c. Theum neubanima, f. Harsh, unkind, Theum maneuba. Neg. 2 Biba, Bisiba, m. c.* Obedient, Bibanima, Pacem f. Disobedient, Ma biba. Ma bisiba. Masculine, Wainsake iW Feminine, Minchake: pGenitival pau Mad, idiotic, Atheum ma neuba. Sane of mind, Atheum neuba,. Licit, Pachome, m, f. n. Illicit, Ma pachome. Bodily, Ramke, Genitival, both of Mental, Theumke, f these: com. gender. Soleumi byakba, m. c, Sdleumi byakbanima, f. Thirsty, Pwaku dwaktimi byakba. Aklancho bwakba, m. Naked, bwakbanima, f. Clothed, Phisiba, m. c. Phisibanima, f. Libidinous (man), Ming dwakba, m. Candid, { Malicious, Industrious, Neg. Cowardly, Niggardly, Kind, gentle, Hungry, * Biba is the transitive, bisiba the intransitive forms. Bahing Vocabulary. [No. 6. Libidinous (woman), Wainsa dwakba- nima, f, Gluttonous, Kojacha, m. Kojamicha, f. Drunkard, Dhékong- Hit f. Drunken, Dukba, m. c. Dukbanima, f. Foul-mouthed, f Khiba, m. ec. Abusive, LKhibanima, f. Alive, Blenba, m. c. Living, | Blenbanima, f. Dying, Byakchopaba, Dead, Byakba,t m.c. Byakbanima, f,' Sickening, , -paba, m. c. Sick, Richo- pean f. Sickened, sick, Riba, m. c. Ribanima, f, Getting well, Swachopaba, Got well, Swaba, m.c. Swabanima, f. Healthy, Neuba, m. Neubanima, f. Made well, Swapang. Strong, Sokticha, m. Soktimicha, f. Soktimathiba, m, Soktimathibanima, f. Sekti manthim, c. Sleepy, Myelchopaba, m. banima, f. Asleep, Myelba, m. Waking, Syainscho- { Weak, Myelchopa- Myelbanima, f. -paba. m. ¢. -pabanima, f. ; -siba, m. c. awake, Spans {AS BS Awakening, Syainsipaba. Awakened, Syainsipana. Young, Akachime, | f Youtstul, Yake,: fon" as Swolacha, m. Adult, Swolami or Swolamicha, Old, aged, Gna-wa, m. Gna-mi, f. Rimba, m, f. n. Handsome, < Rimsokpa, m. Rimsongma, f. Ma rimba, | Ugly, + Marimsokba. >Neg. (Ma rimsongma J ( Laba, com. gen. and m. ¢ Labanima, f. Dékho laba, m. and n. Dékho labanima, f. Gnolo, m. and n. Gnoélonima, f. Me Tall, high, Short, low, Great, big, See verbs. + Byakchopaba is literally who makes to die, and so of all similar words: but the form is doubtful, and in general the participle in ba, which is aoristic is used in neuter verbs exclusively to express both are senses of dying and dead, sickening and sick, the preterite particle being regarded as an appendage of trausitives only. 1857.] Bahing Vocabulary. 493 Small, Akachime. Yake.* See young. Married se ee dyumba, m. ? Syénetiba, m. and n. (well in Gréchya dyumbanima, f. Fat, { flesh). Grochya madyumba, m. Syénetibanima, f. Unmarried, { Grits madyumbani- Thin, Ryamba, m.andn. Ryambanima, f. ma, f, Tired, ) Balba, m. and n. aed Chéba, m, Chébanima, f. b) Weary, J Balbanima, f. Chochome. n. Untired, | Ma balba. Machdéba. Ma chdbanima. fresh, { Ma balbanima, “8. Ma chochome. Neg. Lame, Sokopa, m.n. Sokopanima, f. New, Aninta, m, f. n. Exempt, Lamed, Sokopapana, c. Old, worn out, Amaisam, m. f, n. Blind ae kwoba, m. n. Theumna (finished). ’ (Ma kwobanima, f. Ready, prepared,, Mingba Uidkeseed as Blinded, Ma kwobapana. ‘itn ! food). Deaf Ma Senay ee atu B. Unprepared ms ae ? Jf Ma nimbanima, f. Conac e mingba. ¢ Neg. > Ma kina. Fit ie nimbapana, m. n. ?{ Ma nimbanimapana, f. Read ( Rimsiba (adorned), m. c. eae ( Rimsibanima, f, Ma rimsiba, m. cere | Ma rimsibanima, f. Common, abundant, Tachome, n. Rare, scarce, Ma tachome. Neg. Public, apert, patent, Kwochome. Private, latent, not to be seen, Khleu- Ma bwakba, m. n. at ne bwakbanima, f. Deaf and dumb, { Glatid-wa, m,n. = idiotic, Glatidwanima, f. Alone, solitary, { Ree eens, Warcha thiba, m. n. ee | Wareha thibanima, f. chome. Jdékba. Teuba. Mimba, m.n. Neupaba, caus, pres. part. : ; : : Successful P Wise, | Sokbaiina Teubanima. Mim- P ” 2 Neupana, cau. past. part. banima, f. posperoe Neupachome, c. f. p. Foolish, Majokba. Mateuba. Ma- mimba. Neg. Learned, Parepaba, m. Parepabanima, f, Ignorant, Ma pare paba. Rich, Thiba, m. n. Thibanima, f. Poor, Mathiba,m.n. Ma thibanima, f. Talkative, Bwakba, m.n. Bwakbanima f. Silent, Liba bwakba, m. c.f (silent who remains), Dirty = black, Kekem, m. f. n. es Kekempuana, m. c. peed, Pei autevan. £; Clean = white, Bubum, m. f. n, ’ Bubumpana, m. c. Cleansed, ee tea, f. Ma neupana. Neg. Unsuccessful, } y47¢ neeeaehaien| Saleable, Léchome, p. f. Sold, Lena, p. p. Purchaseable, Jyapchome, p. f. Purchased, Jyamna, p. p. Similar, Deuba, m. n. Resembling, | Deubanima, f. Dissimilar, Ma deuba. Ma deubanima. Myemme or i (that very Myemgno, one) m, f. n. Other, different, Kwagname. Wangme, m. f. n. Easy, doable, Pachome, p. f. Unprosperous, ; Ma neupaba. | The same, * These two words are samples of adjectives proper. Such are very rare in this tongue wherein the qualifying words are mostly participles, usable too substanti- vally, like those formed by the affixes, cha and wa. This is another Dravidian trait ; and the rarity of proper adverbs and prepositions, and the use of gerunds in lieu of the one and of nouns in lieu of the other, (see Adverbs and Prepositions) are two more such traits, to be added to those elsewhere set down. + I, thou, he, am alone, is Wa gicha bwa-gna, Ygicha bwangé, Agicha bwa = my, thy, his loneliness, { The root bwa, to be (sit) and to speak, can hardly be distinguished in the participles. 3 R 494: Difficult, not doable, Ma pachome. Phasiba,* p. n. Phaschopaba, p. n. (about to change). 2 Phasiba (self.) ? § Phana (other, tr.) About to be changed, Phachome, Caused to be changed, Phasipana, c. ref. Phapana, c. tr. Changeful, Changeable, | Changed Ma bulsiba, n, Ma hulba, tr. Ma limsiba, n. Ma lipba, tr. Hulsiba, n. Hulna, tr. Limsiba, n. Limna, tr. About to be disordered, Lipchome. Having, possessing, tenens, Thiba, m.c. Thibanima, f. Not having, { Ma thiba, m. c. Orderly, set in order, Disordered, Disorderly, Wanting, Ma thibanima, f, Ornamented, Ey i Rimsiba, refi. Adorned, R; 3 impana, tr. Ma rimba. Plain, {ws rimsiba. Ma rimpana, Useful, Sichome, p. f. tr. Useless, Ma sichome, Neg. Quick-moving, active, Grukba, m. ec. Grukbanima, f. Slow moving, lazy, inert, Ma grukba, Neg. Wholesome, eatable, Jachome. Unwholesome, Majachome. Manufactured, wrought, Pana. Mauufacturable, Pachome, Sharp, Héba, n. p. Sharpened, Hepana, tr. p. Blunt, Ma héba. Bluntened, Ma hépana. Grinded, Khrina. Grindable, Khrichome. Spun, Panna. Woven, Pana. Platted, Pana. Spacious, wide, ample, Bhyappa. Contracted, narrow, Ma bhyappa. Moving, capable of self-motion, Dukba,t n. part. m.f.n. Dukbanima, f, * Be changed is phaso = change thyself. Bihing Vocabulary. [ No. 6. Moveable, capable of being moved, Duk- chome, tr. p. f. Motionless, Ma dukba, m. n. Immoveable, Ma dukchome, tr. Moved,f self, Dukba. Moved, other, Dungna. Caused to be moved, Dungpana. Figured, self, Ram dyumba, Figured, other, Ram dyumpana. Figureable, Ramdyum pachome. Unfigureable, Ramdyum ma pachome, Luminous, shining, Chyarba (self,) n. Self-illumed, Chyarsiba, refl. Illumed by other, Chyarpana. Illuminable, Chyarpachome. Dark, Namrikba. Darkened, Namringpana. Flaming, burning self, Hoba (fire and candle), Kindled, Inflamed. Made to flame, Kindleable, Inflamable, Burning, in process of being consumed by fire, Deupba. Burnt, consumed by fire, Deumpana. Consumable by fire, Deumpachome. Extinguishing (self) going out, Byakba. Extinguished by another, Byangpana. The upper, superior, Hateungme, m. f. n. The lower, inferior, Hayungme.} Right, Jumrolame, Left, Perolame. Central, Alimbudime. Kastern, Namdhapdikhalame. Western, Namwamdikhalame. Northern, Hateulame. Southern, Hayulame. Passable, Moceusiblhe } Gwakchome. Impassable, Magwakchome. Cultivated field, Jona. Culturable, Jochome. Uncultivated, Ma jdna. Uncultivable, Ma jéchome. Fruitful, rich (soil), Neuba (good). Barren, sterile, Ma neuba. Sandy, No word. Clayey, Phélépheleme. Calcarious, Chunnungme, Hopana. \ Hopachome. Change it is phato. The former gives for participles phasiba and phaschopaba = what changes or is about to change ; and the latter, phaba, the changer, and phana, the changed. + The participle of Neuter verbs is single and aoristic, Dukba, is changing and changed, et sic de ceteris. iy Hateu, top, above: hayu, below, bottom. 1857.] Saline, Yuksinuneme. Muddy, Kyelchome. Dusty, Byerbakhapinungme. Brackish (water), Yuksinungme. prt, {Become Sweet, Broba. Flowing, Gwakba. Still, Ma gwakba. Deep, Gleumba. Shallow, Ma gleumba. Jukhitame. Jtinam.* Windy, stormy (weather), | Battie Fine, fair, Neuba. Junamme. Cold, je byangme, Jukhitame. Haulomi. Hot, | Heston byangme. Haulau dyumme. Sunshiny, Namneume. Cloudy, Koksyalbwalme. ‘Rainy, Ryawayume. Cold (water), Chikba. Gleugleum, conj. air), Tc aera ‘iis}. Moist, sappy green (wood), Apwaku- nungme. Juicy (fruit), Apwakunungme, Juiceless, sapless, Apwakumanthime. Wooden, Singke. Woody, timber bearing, | Singdhyaksi- Wooded, bwagdikha, Stony, made of stone, Lungke. Stony, stone bearing (place), Lung bwag- dikha. Iron, made of iron, Syelke. Iron-producing, Syelgiba. Leathern, made of leather, Kwoksyeuke, Kokseke. Skin-bearing (animal), Kwoksyeu thiba. Kokse thiba. nee clothes, &c. Wooded (country), 1 Open, Aklauchom, (naked). Jungly, Sabala dyumme. Moba. Sheuba. Sabala bwakba. Béhing Vocabulary. Sabala bwakdikha. ; Ryangsiba, self. Coloured, ae by other. Caused to be coloured, Ryangpana. Bubum (white), Colourless, jas ryangna. Ma ryangsiba, Colourable, Ryakchome. Red, Lalam.t White, Bubum, Black, Kyakyam. Blue, No name. Green, Gigim. Yellow, Womwome. Sweet, Jijim. Sour, Jeujeum. Bitter, Kaba. Ripe, Jiba, Ripened, Jiba, n. (self). (other). Raw, Achekhli. That is raw, Achekhli bwakba. That is made raw, Achekhli pana. Rotten, (flesh, fruit, &c.) Jyipba. Rotten (wood, &c.) Chyamba. Coarse, Fine, Rough, Khwarbekhwarbem. Smooth, Phélephélem. Polished, Phélephélem. Unpolished, Ma phélephélem. Straight, Dyomba. Gukba. Crooked, { Gungepung or Gung-gungme. Full, Dyamba. Filled, Dyampana. Empty, Ashéti. Emptied, Ashétipana. Solid, Dyamba, Hollow, Ashéti. Heavy, Hyalba. Light (levis), Hamba. Great, Gnolo. Small, Yake. Long, Jhetba. Short, Ma jhedba, Wide, Bhyakba, Narrow, Ma bhyakba. High, Laba. Jipana tr, No words. * Wind and windy, and cloud and cloudy, &c. are confounded usually : like ‘* cold” in English which is both substantive and adjective. 7 Lalam adjectival. and lal, lal wala or red and the red one. The affixes jokpa (m) and jongma (f) are oftea substituted for me Gigimmo, &c. So also heat and hot, Lalamme substantival = Newari, Hyawun and Hyawintgu So Bubum and Bubumme Gigim aud in reference to colour kyakyajokpa, the black. o B 2 496 Low, Ma laba. Dekholaba. Angular, Kona-bwakba. Round, Khirkhirme. Spherical, Pulpulme. Pointed, Jeujeume. Unpointed, Ma jeujeume. Edged, Hé’ba. Unedged, Ma hé’ba. Broken, ) round Burst, ; things, Bukba, Pwongna. Broken (long things), Jikba. Torn (cloth, &c.), Jiba,* n. China, tr. Split (wood), Yésiba, int. Yéna, tr. Intire, by negative prefix to allthe above. Porous, Chapba, Imporus, Ma chapba. Open, Hongsiba. Opened, Hongna. Opening, about to open, Hongschopaba. Shut, Tyangsiba. Shutted, Tyangoa. Shutting, about to shut, Tyangschopaba. Spread, Hamsiba, n. Hamna, tr. Folded, Plemsiba, n. Plemna, tr. Expanded, blown (flower), Boba. Caused to blow, Bopana. [paba, Expanding, about to expand, Boscho- Closed, shut = not expanded, Ma boba. Tight, Khimsiba, n. Tightened, Khimna, tr. Loose, Thyelvim. Loosened, Thyelvim pana. Unsteady, loose, Ma jasiba. Shaking, M4 jana. Fixed, firm, Jasiba, n. Cooked, Kina. Boiled, Pwakumikina. Roasted, Gryamna, Grilled, Cheuna. Hairy, Swon thiba. Hairless, Swon ma thiba or Swon manthi. Feathered, Swon thiba. {manthi, Unfeathered, Swon ma thiba or Swon Rising or risen (sun), Dhapba. Sitting or set (sun), Wamba. Issuing, coming out or come out (being) Gluba. Entering or entered (being) Woba. Jingna. Jana, tr. Bihing Vocabulary. [ No. 6. Falling (being) Dokba, n. Fallen, Dokba, n. About to fall, Dokchopaba. Falling (thing), U’ba. Fallen (thing), Uba. | Rising (being) Rapba. [bwakba. Remaining, risen or standing, Rapso- Risen or stood, Rapba. Rapso bwakba. Raising, Rampaba, Raised, Ramna, tr. Rampana, caus. Putting down (man), Jyeulba. Put down (things), Jyeulna. - Sitting, Bwakba. Nisiba. Seating, Bwang paba. Ni paba. Seated, Bwapana. Nina. Lying down, Glesiba, Ipba. Laid down, Paiie pba: esipana [mpana, tr. Waking, Syainsiba. Waked, Syainsiba. Awakening, Syainsipaba. Awakened, Syainsipana. Sleepy, Myelcho dwakba, Asleep, Myelba. Sleeping, Myelba. About to sleep, Myelchopaba. Domestic, home made, Dwabodyel dim. Foreign or foreign made, Wangmedyel dim. Rustic, Dyelpo, m. f. Loving, Desirous, (being) Desiring, Loveable Desirable, ¢Dwakchome, Written, Ryangna. Read, Parepana. Eaten, Jana. Drank, Tana (pausing accent). Payable, Chochome. Paid, Choona (pausing accent). Well odoured, Arineubame.f Stinking, Arimaneubame. Having odour (thing) or Nideiee smelling (man), ; f Belonging to a oe all Leuchake, m. tan or native of ee Tibet, Leuchanimake, f. Dwakba, m. Dwakbanima, f. * Bukba, Jikba, as participles of neuter verbs which are aoristic, wear the form of present participles and as adjectives mean breaking as well as broken, &c. + Me, m. affix, is a formative of all 3 genders —hma, gu of Newari, save that these are major and minor of gender. Mé like hma, gu, attaches to all qualitives used substantively superadded to the gender sign as, gna-wa, gwa-mi = old (man and woman) whence gnawame, gnamime= the old ones, male and female. So swalo-cha-mi = mature, male and female, whence swalochame, swalomime. 1857.] Tibetan, or produced | Leuchadyeldim. in Tibet (thing), f Leuchadyelke.* Nepalese, native of Nepal, No name. Belonging to a high- lander or native of Hills, : z Syertedim or Highland thing, ) cyertedyeldim, Of person of the | Dheptechake, m. plains, Dheptechanimake, f. Produce of plains, Dheptedim. European (per- f Bubum-ramcha, m. Syértichake, m. Syértenimake, f. son), Bubum-ramchanima. f. European (goods), Bubum-ramthiba dyeldim. Woollen, made of wool, Unke. Wooly, wool-bearing, Unthiba. Hairy, made of hair, Swonke. Hairy, (bair-bearing), Swonthiba. Iron, made of iron, Syalke. Golden, Syeunake. Silver, made of silver, Chandike. Wooden, made of wood, Singke. Woody, full of trees, (place), Dhyaksi- bwagdikha. [dikha. Jungley, full of jungle, Sabéla bwag- Kye-having (being), Michi thiba. Foot-having (being), Kholi thiba. Wealthy (being), Grokso thiba. Wealthy (place), Grokso-bwagdikha. Grain-having (man), Bara thiba. Grain-producing (field), Bara neudikha, Grain-abounding (place), Bara bwag- dikha.} CoMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Great, Gnolo. As great as this, Yam khwome gnolo, Greater than this, Yam ding gnolo. Greatest of all, Haupe ding gnolo. Very great, Thé gnolo. Small, Kachim. Ak4chim. Small as this, Yam khomekachim. Smaller than this, Yamding kachim, Smallest of all, Haupe dingkachim. Very small, Thé kachim, Cold, Chikba. Colder, Yam ding chikba. Coldest, Haupe ding chikba. Very cold, Thé chikba. Hot, Gleuba, * Ke is the general sign of relation when one substantive only is used. Béhing Vocabulary. 497 Hotter, Yam ding gleuba. Hottest, Haupe ding gleuba. Very hot, Thé gleuba. NUMERALS. Cardinals. 1, Kwong. 2, Niksi. 3, Sam. 4, Lé. 5, Gno. 6, Rukba. 7, Channi. 8, Ya. 9, Ghia. 10, Kwaddyum. 11, Kwaddyum kwong, = ten (and) one, de. tee niksi. 13, is sam, De a 1é, 15 &e. ,, Gno6. 20, Asim, {Kwong 4sim, =a score, |—one score. 21, Asim kwong, { Kwong asim, =a score(and) one.) one score = laewone and one. 22, Asim nikst. Kwongasim niksi, 30, Kwong asim, kwong 4phlo, = one score, one its half, 31, Kwong asim, kwong aphlo kwong, = one score, one half (and) one. 32, Kwong asim, kwong 4phlo niksi, = one _ score, and one half and two. 40, Niksi Asim, = two score. 41, Niksi asim kwong, 42, Niksi asim niksi,, 50, Niksi asim aphlo = two score (and) its half, 51, Niksi asim aphlo kwong. 52, Niksi asim aphlo niksi. 60, Sam 4sim. 70, Sam asim aphlo, = three score (and) a half, 80, Le asim. 90, Lé Asim Aphlo. 100. Gné asim, = five score. 101, Gno asim kwong. 102, Gno asim niksi, = five score (and) two. é Ordinals. None, When two are expressed, the second takes the 4 prefix (his, her, its) unless the relation be local and then dim (diem = in of) is used instead of the 4; e. g. hand of man, Muryu 4 gu. Rice of bazar, bazar dim shéri. + Bwagdikha =the place where is: diklia useable only with a verb: bwag from bwako, esse in loco. 498 ADVERBIALS. Once, Kwabala. Twice, Nip pala. Thrice, Sap pala. Four times, Lep pala. Five times, Gno pala. Six times, Ra pala. Seven times, Cha pala. Eight times, Ya pala. Nine times, Ghu pala. Ten times, Kwaddyum pala. Firstly, f Wanting, save as they coin- Secondly, cide with the last. NUMERAL ADJUNOTS. They are doubtfully ascribable to this tongue, or falling so fast out of use, that what remains is a mere fragment. I shall illustrate by comparison with Ne. wari in which these generic signs are undoubtedly normal and in full use. Ba- hing, like Newari, has no division cor- responding to the fully developed gender, m. f. n. It has not even, as Newari has, a division correspondent to the logi- cal gender, or beings and things, which is equivalent to the major and minor of gender in the plural of Dravirian nouns and verbs also. English. Newari, Bahing. Beings Hma sn Things Ga } Le Rationals — — Brutes — ae Vegetalia | , Me Plants } Mas an Timber trees /Sima, cing Soft trees or | : afl bya he grasses f ue. u ooo Logs ‘Ka pte Weapons \pv ui peat ee L — Pairs Jt a Flowers Phé Li Fruits Go Bwom String of , ee Tya. Ths} Chyarchyar Heap of things |Dén. Pacha |Khumna Herd of pel Bathane: « mals Days Nhu. |Kha In the use of these signs first comes the numeral, then the sign, and then the thing or being specified, e. g. Newari, China ma si ma, Bahing, Kwong sing one (timber) tree. apum Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 6. Chha ma singhali ma, N.; Kwo 4pam Séli apim, B, = one chesnut tree. Sw6 nhu nhi N; Sam kha namti, B, = three days. Nigo santola si, N; Ni bwom santola sichi, B, = one orange. Chhapukhwon, N ; Kwosyal bétho, B, =one sword. Chhago singhali si N; Kwobwom seti sichi, B, one chesnut fruit. BAutIne Pronovuns. Singular. I, Go. Thou, Ga. He, she, it, Harem, Yam, Myam. Dual. We, inclusive, Gosi. We, exclusive, Gésuku. Ye, Gasi. They, Myam dausi. Plural, We, inclusive, Gdi. We, exclusive, Gdku. Ye, Gani. Yam dau. They, / Myam dau, This, Yam. That, Myam. Harem dausi. Yam dausi. Harem dau. j All genders: no sign. Dual. These, Yam dausi. . Those, Myam dausi. Plural. These, Yam dau. Those, Myam dau. Self, Daubo (Dwabo). Dual. Dwabo dausi. Plural. Dwabo dau. Myself, Wadaubo. Tuyself, Tdaubo. His, her, its-self, Xdaubo. Dual, Wasi daubo, excl. * | Isi daubo, incl. . Isi daubo, . Asi daubo. { Wake daubo, excl, * | Ike daubo, incl, 2. Ine daubo. 3. Ane daubo. QS bo Plural, a Any, some, person, Secu: subs. and adj, | ; m. and f, | 1857.] Dual. Seudausi. Plural. Seu dau. Any, some, thing, Mara: subs. only: n, Dual. Mara dausi. Plural. Mara dau: Another, Kwagname. Dual. Kwagname dausi. Plural. Kwagname dau. Many or much, Dhékong: mi f. 0. No dual or plural. Few. Little, Dékho: subs. adj: m. f. -n. The same, Myem. Dual, Myem dausi. Plural. Myem dau. How many? Ssubs, adj. : And how much ? \Gisko, Limi n, As many, much, Gisko, ditto So many, much, Metti, I ‘ All, Hwappe, ditto. Half, Akwaphala. ditto. The whole, Hwappe Haupe. Seu. (Singular. subs. adj. Who ? inter, m. and f, Seu dausi. Dual, Seu dau. Plural. Gyem, sing. subs. adj. miwfsn. Gyem dausi, D. Gyem dau, P. Who? rela.* Béhing Vocabulary. subs. adj. : 499 Myem, Sing. subs, adj. n. Myem dausi, Dual. | Myem dau, Plural. Mara, Sing. subs. adj. m. f. n. Mara dausi, Dual. Mara dau, Plural, What, rel., Mara. What, correl. Maem. Dual and Plural, Like. Interrogative for both. Whoever, )a- subs. adj. Whatever, 1 tisko, { oe a Dual, Gisko dausi, | ,. Plural, Gisko dau, Vaitto, How many ? Gisko, ) As reine Giiak os bois ee So many, Metti. Dual, Metti dausi. Plural, Metti dau. Hither, Yemka. Myemka. Dual, Yemka dausi, Myemka dausi. Plural, Yemka dau. Myemka dau. Both, Nimpho, subs. and adj. m. f. n. Several, No word. Who? correl.: What ? My, Wat Thy, I. His, her, its, A. Dual. My, WaAsi, excl.+ I-si, incl. Thy, I-si. His, her, its, Asi. Plural. Our, Wake, excl. Your, Ini. Their, Ani. Mine, Wake. Thine, Ike. His, hers, its, Ake. Dual. Our’s, Wasike, excl. Your’s, Isike. Their’s, Asike. Ike, incl. Isike, incl, * Gyem takes the 4 prefix and is used interrogatively in a relative sense: which of these persons or things will you take? A-gyemme ladi, wherein the disjunct form is employed, gyemme. + The words father and mother in conjunction with their pronominal adjuncts ; wasi- po are irregular a-pa isivpo i-po isi-po a-po asi-po popo; i-popo; a-popo, &c. wake-po. ikepo. ini- po. ani-po. other relations as popo, uncle, though but iterations of po, are regular, e. g. Singular, Dual and Plural. 7 § Wa- 500 Plural. Our’s, Wakke, excl. Ikke, inct. Your’s Fnike. Their’s, Anike. Own, Dauboke. 1. My own, Wa dauboke. 2. Thy own, I dauboke. 3. His, her, its own, A dauboke. Dual. i Wasi dauboke, excl. : Ysi dauboke, inc. Béhing Vocab ulary. [No. 6. a Y'si dauboke. 3 Asi dauboke. Plural. Wake dauboke. Ike dauboke. Ine dauboke. Ane dauboke. 1. Mine own, Wake dauboke. 2. Thine own, ke dauboke. 3. His, her, its own, Ake dauboke, &c. like the disjunctive mine. 1 2 3. BAHING VERBS. Cause, Pato, tr. Papato, causal.* Cause not, Ma pato. Chapo, tr. Can it, be able for it, Chainco. ipene Do not can it, Ma chapo. Ma chamso. Champato, tr. Cham paso, intr. Cham payi, passive. Champapato, causal, tr. Champapaso, intr. caus. Champaépayi, pas. caus. Enable not, Ma champato, &c, Be born, Giko, n Kiko, trans. Kingso, refi. Give birth to} Kingyi, pas. or beget, Gingpato, tr. causal. Gingpaso, intr. causal. Gingpayi, pas. causal. Cause to beget ee ae or produce ci pas Sa ? _Kingpayi, pussive. Be not born, Ma giko, Neg. Beget or produce not, Ma kiko, Neg. Cause to can or Enable Bleno. (Blenno), n. Blenpato, tr. causal. Blenpaso, intr. causal. Blenpayi, passive. Live not, Ma bleno (blenno). Byakko, n. Byangpato, tr. causal. Byangpaso, intr. caus. Byangpayi, passive. Sato, tr. Saso, reflex. tr. Sayi. passive. Sapato, tr. caus. Sapaso, reflex. caus. Sapayi, passive. Be (sum), Ka. Khe. Gno. Irreg. Defec, Bwakko, n. (sit). Bwangpato, tr. causal. Bwangpaso, intr. caus. Bwangpayi, passive. Dymo, n Dytmpato, tr. causal. Dytmpaso, intr. causal. Dyimpayi, passive, Live, Die, Kill, Bet (maneo), Become, * This is the causative of all verbs and is derived from the root pa, to do or make. causative, also bearing that sense. It answers to the Hayu form “do for another.” In Bahing it is the + These are = wonto and woncho of Hayu, the definite and indefinite of Hun- garian ; potential of all verbs. { Be in a certain place = sit. defectives. in English can it or be able for it and be able simply. Chapo forms the Sheer entity is expressed by Ka, Khe, Gno, 1857.] Higne, puakens fThiwo Neg. Ref. 3 | Bwala, Neg. Def, Make to have, Thiyato, tr. Cause to possess, | Bwalapato, tr. Pawo, tr. Paso, reflex Payi, passive,* Papato, tr. ¢. Papaso, intr. c. Papayi, passive, c. J Pawomukho bwakho, n. Pasogno bwakho, n. Cease doing or to do, Pacho pléno, n, Tyaro, tr. Suffer, « Tyarso, reflex. tr. pani, pas. Do, make, perform. Keep doing, Tyarpato, tr. Cause to suffer, {Tern reflex. Tyarpayi, passive. Kwo-gno, tr. (see). Kwé6-so, reflex. Observe or } Kw6-yi, passive. Examine, Kw6-pato, tr. causal. Kwo paso, intr. causal. Kw6-payi, passive, causal. Teuto. Jokko. Mim- to, tr. gue Teuso. Jongso. Mim- Know, ° Thiok rc gape ee ; Teuti. Jongyi. Mim- ti, passive. Teupato. Jongpato. Cause to un-| 7p pe ores ee eupaso, Jongpaso. derstand, oy get ; E q Mimpaso, intr. c. xplain, Pence ee eupayi. Jongpayi. Mimpayi, pas, c. Feel, { Limleto, trans. Be sensible of,< Limléso, reflex. bodily, | taiaitéyi, passive. Mimto, trans. Mimso, reflex. Fes den Wii Mimti, passive. ? \ Mimpato, tr. causal. Mimpaso, reflex. causal. Mimpayi, passive, causal, Bahing Vocabulary. 501 Plendo, tr. Plenso, tr. reflex. Barges, Plendi, passive. Plen-pa-to-so-yi, causii. Dwakko, intr. Desire, Dwakto, tr. love, Dwakti, passive. Dwangpa-to-so-yi, c. Gramdo, tr. Gramso, reflex. Hate, | : ’ Lust for | Doak reflex. Gramdi, passive. Grampa-to-so-yi, ¢. Syanto, trs. Syanso, reflex, Syanti, passive, Syanpato, &c. c. Be modest, Gniine bédko, n. Guiine bok-pa-to-se- yi, tr. or Gnuine_ pok-ko-so- yi, ir. Recognise, Make modest, Laugh, Riso, n. Make laugh, Risipa-to-so-yi, c. Laugh at, irride, Rito. Riso. Riti, tr. Weep, Gnwakko, n. Make weep, Gnwangpa-to-so-yi, c. Dance, Silimdévo,*+ tr. Make dance, Silimdpa-to-so-yi, c. Sing, Swalong paw6, tr. Make sing, Swalong papato-so-yi, c. Hope, No such word. Fear, Guito, n. Gnipato, tr. ¢ Frighten, rae reflex. c. Gnipayi, passive, Gnipapato, tr. Cause to frighten, {ins reflex, Gnipapayi, p. Khiwo, n. Khipato, causal. Khipaso, c. reflex. Khipayi, c. p. Be good, Nytiwo or Nytba bwakko, n. Become good, Nytiba dyimo, n, Tremble, * Observe, once for all, that the three forms of the transitive (primitive and causal alike) refer to him (any one) to self and to me (the speaker). Thus sa-to, kill him or it; sa-so, kill thyself; sa-yi, kill me; that in verbs like to do, the sense is modified of necessity but without essential change; and that the passive has no imperative of the 2nd or 3rd person. Hence the entry under the Ist, and hence as will be seen in the grammar, the existence in the language of certain special forms of the verb subsidiary to the so-called passive. + Sili— a dance. The verb movo has the separate sense of to fight, but is used with many nouns to verbalize them. 35 Nyuto, tr. Nyidso, reflex. Nytini, passive. Nytiba dyumpato, tr. c. Nydtba dyumpaso, refl. c. Nytiba dyumpayi, pas. c. Be glad, Ithim nyala. Gyerso. Athim nydipato, tr. Ythim nytipaso, reflex. Wathim nyupayi,* passive. Gyérsi pato-paso-payi. Be vexed, snl yaad f Detkha giwo. UAthim manytipato. Be satisfied, Rigno, n. Satisfy, Rapato, c. Bwakko, n. Bwangpato, c. tr. Bwangpaso, c. reflex. Bwangpayi, c. passive. Sddo, tr. Make good, Gladden, Vex, sadden, Utter, speak, Articulate, Relate, tell, speak seg Soéso, refl. to or of, Sdyi. Sddi, pas. Cause to re- (Sopato, tr. | fates to lols. refi. [Bor bath the tell, &e. | Sépayi, p. Talk, eee pawo, tr. : L6 paso, reflex. GISCORTSE, Nao : Lo payi, passive, Lo papato, tr. Cause to talk, < L6 papaso, reflex. L6 papayi, passive. Tell my, thy own, + Naa E Yl 16 sdézno. his, tale, ‘ A 16 ségno. Be silent, Liba bwakko, n. Liba bwang)pato, tr. Silence, < Liba bwangpaso, reflex. Liba bwangpayi, p. Guase'ts Liba Dare papato, tr. : Liba bwa papaso, reflex. silence, } 7; BL Pn ae Liba bwa papayi, p. * Means, may I be gladdened. Be) gladdened, the sheer passive, cannot be expressed. I, thou, he, is gladdened = Wathim nytipayi, [thim nytipane, Athim nypada. The last—he gladdens and is gladdened. are much closer expressions for be glad and gladden. The others are formed from thim or theum, the heart, and the conjunct pronouns, opposite is the phase of the active and passive voices. Bahing Vocabulary. Gyérso and gyérsipato + | Athim nyu pada, [ No. 6. | Bréto, tr. Call, summon,< Bréso, reflex. Bréti, passive, Brépato, tr. Cause to summon, < Brépdso, reflex. Brépayi, passive. Syanda pawo, tr. Shout, vociferate, {ss paso, refl. Syanda, payi. p. Learn = teach thyself, Chayinso, n. Teach, Chayindo, tr. Teach thyself, Chayinso, reflex. tr. Cause thyself to be taught, Teach me, Chayindi, passive. Cause me to be taught, Chayinsipayi, c. p. J No such word. Chayinsipaso, c. r. Read, \ Kwo-gno = see, is used. Ryakko, tr. Write, Ryangso, tr. reflex. Ryangyi, p. Ryakti p. = write for, or to me. ‘( Brecigpees bite Cause to write, < Ryangpaso, reflex. | Ryanepayi, p. Hilo pawo, tr. Ask, question,< Hilo paso, reflex. Hilo payi, p. Cause to ask, pie pag uk or question Ee ee —— ’ Hilo papayi, p. Answer, S6-gno, tr. (see tell). ..« { Puno: (Panne), tr; Beg, solicit, punso. refl. Ponts p- (Pan pato, tr. / Pun paso, reflex. Pan payi, p. Ta-wo, tr. Get, obtain, find, < Ta-so, reflex. Ta-yi, p. Cause to beg, fe veles tr; Cause to get, &c. < Ta-paso, reflex. | T4-payi, p. Active. Athim nydpadu. Athim nytipadi. Passive. Wathim nydpayi. Tthim nytipdne, Athim nyGpada. 1857.] Dwakto, tr.* Approve, ike | Brame, reflex. Dwakti, p. Dwang pato, tr. Cause to like, &c. Dwang payi, p. ce UR ee beatae Ticawaveke Madwangso, &c. pproves | wadwakti, Kw6-gno, trans. See, < Kwo-so, reflex. Kwo-yi, passive. Kwé6 pato, tr. c. Show, EN paso, reflex. c. Kw6 )ayi, p. Hide, lie hid, Khledso, n. and reflex. Hide it, Khleuito, tr. Hide me, Khleati, p+ Cause to be hid, | Ki ieee to be concealed, uae as Aint Cause to cause to ‘Kite papato, tr. Bars, Khleu p4payi, p. Ninno, tr. Hear, Nimo reflex. Ninyi, pas. Nin pato, tr. Cause to bese Nn paso, reflex, Nin payi, passive. Dapto, tr. Taste, {Dams reflex. Dapti, passive. Dam pato, tr. Cause to taste, pe paso, reflex. Dam payi, passive. Marto, tr. Blow, apply breath, 1 Mss reflex. Mayi, passive. Mii pato, tr. Cause to blow, he paso, reflex. Mu payi, passive. (emo or Nammo, tr. Namso, reflex, USanyi, passive. Smell, - Nam pato, tr. Cause to smell, < Nam paso, reflex. Nam payi, passive. Bihing Vocabulary. Dwang paso, reflex. Khleu papaso, refi. 5038 Khito, tr. Touch, < Khiso, reflex. Lknati, passive. Kha pato, tr. Cause to touch, 1K paso, reflex. Khi payi, passive. Jawo. Bawo, tr. Eat,< Jaso. Baso, reflex. Rice Bayi, passive. (Ja pato, tr. Cause to eat, = feed,< Ja paso, reflex. La payi, pas. Tugno, tr. Drink, < Ttso, reflex. \inayi, pas. Tundo, tr. Cause to drink, | Tim, reflex. Tundi, pas. Be intoxicated, Diko.t Neutro, pas. Make intoxicated, {Bans es tap ei ung paso, reflex. or JIntoxicate, D Ane . _Dung payi. Mewo, tr. Vomit, , Méso, reflex. Meyi, pas. Mé pato, tr. Cause to vomit. < Mé paso, reflex. Mé payi, pas. Sleep, Ipo, n. Im pato, tr.c. Cause to sleep, < Im paso, reflex. c. Im payi, pas. c. Ipto, tr. These are equal Gace to in sense to the a Ipso, refl. < last, and exhi- sleep, bit a 2d mode of Ipti, pas. making causals, Wake, Syayinso, n. fevers pato, tr. Awaken, < Syayinsi paso, reflex, [ syayinsi, payi, pas. f Gnamung mowo, tr. Gnamung m6s0, reflex, Gnamung mopato, tr. Cause to [G 5: shies roe Gnamung mopaso, reflex. . Gnamung mdpayi, pas. Fart, Piso, n. Pisipato, &c. causal. Fart. at him, Pito.. Piso, .Piti, tr. Dream, dream, iP * The intransitive is dwakko = approve, whence transitive dwakto approve it like the Hungarian determinate and indeterminate. + In this as in most verbs, the three forms refer respectively to me (Khleuti) to him, or it, any being or thing (Khbleuto) and to self (thyself) (Khleuso) and so precisely in the causal also, Khleu payi, Khleu pato and Khleu paso. { This neuter is conjugated as a passive Dungi, Dunge, Duga. 3082 504 Shit (cace), Wasi pato, &c. causal. Cace supra ali quid vel aliquem, Wato, tr. Piss (micaall ‘Charso, n. ee’ \Charsi pato, causal. Imminge, Charto, &c. tr. Kiss (give and Chuppawo, tr. = Chuppaso, reflex. take osculo), ie Chuppayi, pas. Cause to kiss, Chuppa pato, &c. ¢. Leuwo, tr. (French eu). Kiss (coé), iiss reflex. Leuyi, pas. Be kissed, Leup4so, reflex. causal.* f Hachhin méwo, &c. tr. Sneeze ; ’ ?\ Hachhiin mdpato, &c. causal. Spit, Tewo, tr. Téso, reflex. Téyi, pas. Té pato, tr. Té paso, reflex. Té payi, pas. Té papato, &c. D. C. Byamne mowo, &c. tr. Byamne mopato, &c. causal. Syékhé méwé, tr. Sydkhé mépato, &c. c. J Dikumi dokto, &c. tr. | Dikumi dongpato, &e. c. Cause to spit, Belch, Cough, Hiccup, Dwakko, tr. Swallow, | Doane, reflex. Dwangyi, pas. Hapsa mowo, tr. Hapsa mopato, &c. ce ( Tukko, tr. Tungso, reflex. Tungyi, pas. Tung pato. Cause to lick, {tins paso. Yawn, Lick, Tung payi. Bippo, tr. Suck, < Bimso, reflex. Bimyi, passive. oe pato, tr. Bim paso, reflex. (Bim payi, pas. Krato, tr. Bite, Kraso, reflex, Krayi, pas. Kra pato, tr. Kra paso, reflex. Kra payi, pas. Cause to suck, Cause to bite, Kick, Ta-to, tr. Ta-so, refi. Ta-yi pas. Ta pato, tr. Cause to kick, Ta paso, reflex. | wa payi, pas. Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 6. { Teuppo, tr. (French eu). Strike, 4 Teumso, reflex. | Teumyi, pas. Teum pato, tr. Cause to strike, | ew paso, reflex. Teum payi, pas. Khwaro, tr. Scrape or Khwarso, refiex. Seratch = 4 Khwaryi, pas (violently), vanes Khwarpato, &c. c. Bapto, tr. Bamso, reflex. Bapti, pas. Bampato, &c. causal. Nyapto, tr. Nyamso, reflex, Nyapti, pas. Nyampato, &c. causal. Syallo, tr. Syalso, reflex. Syalyi, pas. Syal pato, &c. causal. Walk, Gwakko, n. Scratch (for ease, itching), Push, Shove, Pull, Gwang pato, tr. Cause to waik, { Goan paso, reflex, Gwang payi, pas. Walk about, f Khirso, n. Take the air, \Khirsi pato, &e, c. Run, Wanno, n. Wanpato, &c, c. Run away, f Jukokato, n. flee, Jingnikapato, &e. c. Creep, Bisa khwongo gwakko, n. = Snake-like walk. Jump, hop, f Préko, n. leap, Prong pato, &c. c Fly, Byéro, n. Byer pato, &c. c. Swim, No such word. Hamba glagno, n. Hamba glapato, &c. c. Wade across, Gwaktako or Gwaksomami- hamba gligno,f n. Sink, Wamto, n. Drown or cause to sink, Wampato, &c. tr. Bathe, Chiso, n. Chisipato-paso-payi, c. Cause to bathe or Ge ies bathe him, Chikti, pas. Cross over, { Syappo, tr. Syamso, reflex. Syamyl, pas. Syampato, &c. c. Dress = dress § Phiso, reflex. thyself, } Phisipato-pAso-payi, c. Wash, * The causal reflex is always used to express an act voluntarily suffered by the party addressed. T Literally, having walked issue on that side. ———————————— ee ——~S— 1857.] Phikto, tr. Phingso, reflex. Phikti, pas. Cause to cause to Phing pato, tr. Cause to dress, ' = dress him, dressor have dres- 4 Phing paso, reflex. sed, Phing payi, pas. Kleuto, tr. Kleuso, reflex. Kleu ie . Klenti, pas.* Kleupato-paso-payi, c. Be naked, Iklaucho dytmo, n. Make naked, Aklaucho pawo, tr. AXklaucho-pa- pato, tr. c. a Sélyumi byakko, n. aes § = hunger by die. Solyumi byang pato, Se. £62: Pwaku dwakko, n. Pwaku dwaktimi, byakko. Pwaku dwang pato, &c. tr. c. Be sleepy, Myeldo, n. Ipthi dwangla, n. Myel pato, tr. c. Myel paso, reflex. c. Myel payi, pas. c. Ipthi dwang pato-paso- ayi, Be cold (to sentient { Jimi byakko, n. being), = cold by die. Make cold (ditto), eh oe Bene Daw: paso-payi, c. Be warm or hot, Gluglum dytimo, n. Gluglum pawo-paso-payi, tre Make warm } Gluglum dyim pAato-p4so- or heat, payi, c. or Gluglum thydmto-thimso- thimyi, c. Be dirty, Kékém dytimo, n. , Kékém pawo, &c. tr. Make tnt, 4 Ken dyumpato, &c. or Kékém thyumto, &c. Be clean, Babim dytimo, n. Make clean, cleanse, Bubtimpawo or bu- bum dytim pato, tr. Cause to jis papato, te Undress, Cause to make naked, Make hungry, Be thirsty, Make thirsty, Make sleepy, Bubum papaso cleanse 5 dak aes ? [Bubum papayi, causal. Béhing Vocabulary. Be angry, Sokso paso, tr. reflex. Make angry, Sokso pawo, tr. Cause to make angry, Soksopapato, &c. c. Kbryakko, tr. Abuse, revile > Fevi'> | Khryangso, reflex. Abase, ‘ Khryangyi, pas. Humble, Khryany pato-paso- Humiliate, payi, causal, Khiwo, tr. Quarrel, 1 Rio, reflex. pas. Khi pato, tr. Cause to quarrel, < Khi paso, reflex. | Khi payi, pas. Be reconciled, Deuwo, n. P Deu pato, tr. Reconcile, < Deu paso, reflex, Deu payi, pas. M6-wo, tr. Fight, < Mo-so, reflex. i. pas. Cause to {i pe oe ae M6 paso, reflex, Sta? M6 payi, pas. Be victorious or win, Glwaugno, n. gee ( Giwau pato, tr. Make victorious J eae . 4 Glwau paso, reflex, or make win, Be Glwau payi, pas. Be conquered, reli aye or Syeuto or succumb, lose, Shvé 1yoto, n. Syeti pato, tr. Syea paso, reflex, Syeu payi, pas. Ra pawo, tr. Work, 1B paso, reflex. Ra payi, pas. Ri papato, tr. Cause to work, SR papaso, reflex. Ru papayi, pas. Play, Chamso, n. or reflex. Chamsi pato, tr. Cause to play, + Chamsi paso, reflex. Chamsi payi, pas. Chamto, tr. J Chamso, reflex. = cause to Chamti, pas. play, Cham pato-paso-payi, causal. Be tired, Ballo, n. Cause to succumb f or lose, Amuse, divert, * My informants say Kleuyi can only be said by the clothes, and that a man must say Kleutigi, or Kleuti, — give me undressed or undress me. Thus to Hindi Or and Pain answer Utar not Utar. Kleuso is objected to. So also T Rupayi, says the work, do me: ripati, says the man, do for me. Compare Hayu posung and pasung. So work is rapawo, and work for him, ripato. Rd is a substantive = work. 506 Bal pato, tr. Tire, Bal paso, reflex. (Bal payi, pas. Bal papato, Cause to tire, ; Bal pis, | Bal papayi, Take rest, Naso, n. or intr, Nasi pato, tr. Give rest, Nasi péso, refl. | Nasi payi, p. Move, Dakko, n.* Yongso, reflex. Cause to Dung pato. Dukto, tr. double causal. causals. move or 4 Dung paso. Dungso, refi. move it, | Dung payi. Dukti, pas. Cause to cause to {f Dung papato, tr. ¢, move or cause< Dung papaso, refl. c. it to be moved, | Dung papayi, pas. c. Yokto, tr. Remove, J Xone reflex. Yokti, pas. Be still, Jaso, ac. intr. Be firm or steady, i Ma dukko. Ma dukto, tr. neg. Jato, tr. Jaso, reflex. Jati, pas. Cause to make Ma dung pato, c. tr. still, or firm, | Ja pato, c. tr. Be quick, Grukko, n. Make still, stabi- litate, or steady, Grung pato. Grukto. Quicken, , Grung paso. Grungso. Grung payi. Grukti. Be slow, Wakha dyumo, n. Make slow, Wakha pawo, tr. Stay, stop,f Jaso, n. ac. intr. Stop it or stay. it, Jato, tr. Stop me, Jati. Cause to be stopt, (¢ Japato, tr. or cause to cause {neyo reflex, to stop, Ja payi, pas. Lacho giwo, La )ato, Lacho giyi, ] _. La an pas. Let thyself depart, pee ne ae ae = ? Let him depart, Let me depart, Be intoxicated, | Paks dyumo or paso, n. Dukba pawo, tr. [ Dukba paso, reflex. Dukba payi, pas. | Dong pato-paso- payi, c. Make intoxicated, - Bahing Vocabulary. E NoNG! Tell the truth, Aje bwakko, n. Cause to tell Aje bwang pato, tr. tr Aje bwang paso, reflex. ruth, ‘J : asc Aje bwang payi, pas. -challo, n. -bwakko n. Limo bwang pato, or Limo chal pato. Tell falsehood, { Limo Cause to tell, &c. Bito, tr: Believe, J Biso, reflex. Obey, Biti, passive. Bipato, &c. causal. wasiallee Ma bito, Dus Ma be, Negative. } Ma biti, Jeullo, tr. (put down, place.) Present, } Jeulso, reflex, Offer, Jeulyi, pas. Jeul pato-paso-payi, causal. Blawo, tr. Blaso, reflex. Blayi, pas. Blapato, &c. causal. Ma blawo, Neg. Sheomi tyakko, tr.t Accept (= take), Refuse or Sheomi tyangso, reflex. forbid, Sheomi tyangi, pas. Sheomi tyang pato, &c. caus, Tyakko, tr. Prevent, Tyangso, reflex. Restrain hinder, ) Tyangyi, pas. Tyangpato, &c. c. Theullo, tr. Theulso, reflex. Cherish, < Theulyi pas. Theulpato-paso-payi, causal. Wardo, tr. (= throw away). Abandon, ee ee desert, Wardi, pas. Warpato, &c. causal. Pleno, tr. Plenso, reflex. Plenyi, pas. Plenpato, &c. causal. fTyakko. See Prevent. Bwala, n. irreg. Have, | nel n, reg. Thiwo, n, reg. Set at liberty, Confine, imprison, * Dukko, if leave not place. + Stay, remain, don’t go, is, Bwako = sit. (word). Yoéngso, if you do. { Literally, hinder by mouth 1857.] Béhing Vocabulary. 507 ( Bwakba t Rim pato, tr. | Thiba 1. -pawo, tr. Make hand- Rimba pawo, com. Bwakba q some, gender, Thiba | -paso, ae adorn Rimsdékpa pawo, mas. Cause to have rene: _ Ri s : f erase 4 Diba bepayi nae imsongma pawo, foem. 7. Pha F Bee Swalocha dyimo, mas. Bwakba) sto. we.c aes ? < Swalomi dyimo, foem, Mlb Ree tee cate ee ; (no neuter). | Thipato-paso-payi. Make mature, fSwalocha pawo, m. Ma bwala. or adult, \Swalomi pawo, f.* Want Ma thiyela. Sokticha dyfimo, m. Ma thiwo. Be strong {Soutiie dyimo, f. (no Giwo, tr. Giso, reflex. neuter) Give, 8 (Giyi), pas. Make strong, ( Sokticha pawo, m Gipato-paso-payi, causal. Strengthen, @ Soktimicha pawo, f. Give back ff Léti giwo-giso-giyi, Grow, Baro, n return, ut supra. Bar pato, tr. Give again f Anaiyo giwo-giso-giyi, ere Rea Bar paso, reflex. (more), ut supra. toi etees Bar p4yi, pas. Blawo, tr. ero Bar papato-papaso- Take! Blaso, reflex, papayi, double caus. Blapato-péso-payi, causal, Syo pato, tr. Léto, tr. Decay it, Sy6 paso, reflex. Take back (see ) Léso, reflex. Make decay, ) Syo payi, pas. return), Léti, pas. Sy6 papato, &c. causal. Lépato-paso-payi, caus. Kiawo, tr. Take again f Anaiyo blawo-blaso-blayi, Steal Kiso, reflex. eal, pane hi (more), ut supra. Rob Kayi, pas. Be saved, Bléno (blenno) (see live,) n. ? | Kapato, &c. c. Blenpato, tr. Kupapato, double c. | Blenpéso, reflex. Murder, Sato (see kill), Save, <4 Blenpayi, pas. Hanto, tr. | Blenpapito-papaso-papsyi, Deceive, } Hanso, reflex. causal, Cheat, Hanti, pas. Be well, Neuwo or Nyuwo, n. Neupato. Neuto, tr. Neupaso. Neuso, reflex. Hanpato, causal. Accompany (Nung , pany ( © | Nung lawo, n, needs a noun or Ps : K wangkho lawo, n. Cure, make } Neupayi. Neuti, pas. pronoun), well, Neupapato-papaso-papa- | Cause to accom: f Kwangkho lapato-paso- yi, c. of neuter. pany, payi, tr. c. Neupato-paso-pay i, c. of tr, Wato, tr. Waso, reflex. Wayi, pas. Wapato, &c. causal. Remain with, Kwangkho bwakko, n. Cause to remain { Kwangkho bwapa- aaa Le Leave, quit, hlamso, reflex. Khlamti, pas. Khlam pato-paso-payi, c. Khlam papato. Double c. Spoil, de- stroy, mar, Rimmo, pn. with, to, causal. Be hand- ) Rimba dyaimo, com. gender. | Sit, Niso, n. compare with the next. some, ) Rimsdkpa dyimo, mas. Nito, tr. Blayi, pas. Decay, Sydéwo or Sheowo, n. Seat or set down, Rimséngma dyumo, foem. Nisipato, c. * Compare Newari lya-hma ju, and lyase ju; lya-hma juye-ki or ya, and lyase juyeki or ya. Also Hayu Bang-cho dum, Bang-mi dum; Bang-cho pako or thumto and Bangmi thumto or pako. The Bahing verbs dyumo and pawo have the usual characteristics, given often afore. Rimo is a primitive neuter, whose causal is rimpato. Béhing Nito, tr. Niso, reflex. Seat,” Niti, pas. Nipato, causal. » UNipapato, double causal. Stand, Rapo, n. Make stand, Rampato, ec. Remain Rapsdgno bwakka, n. standing, | Rapd mokho bwakko, n. Ram _ pato -mokho bwakko.* Rapsogno bwapato. Bwoéko or Bokko, n. (to Be erect, Keep him sanding} recumbent). Rapo (to sitter). Stoop, Khimo, n. Make stoop, Kham pato, &c. c. Lie down, Gléso, n. Lay down, Glésipato-péso-payi, c. Get up (to a sitter), Rapo, n. (see stand). Get up (to a Bwoko, nu. (see recumbent), be erect). Make get up, Bwong pato. Ram pato. Fall (being), Doko, n. Cause to fall, Dong pato-pdso-payi, c. Slip down, { Bhliwo : b} e Slide down, Cause to slip or slide, SUSE payi, c. Get on, mount, Wéeno, n. Cause to mount, W6pato-paso- payi, c. Dismount, Yuiwo, n. Cause to dismount, Yapéto-paso-payi, c. Jydlo, tr. Jyulso, reflex. Put, place, put down, Indies, pas. deposit, Take up, pe kies Guppo, tr. Tikes Back ongso. Gumso, reflex. ; > CBokti. Gumyi, pas ; yi, pas. Bong pato, &c, Cause to take up, Lene pate, ve Grepto, tr. Grepso, reflex. Grepti, pas. Grem pato, &c. ¢. Dato, tr. Daso, reflex. Dati, pas. Dapato, &c, causal. Throw, Catch as thrown, Vocabulary. Jytlpato, causal. Jyulpapato, d. c. on { No. Keep, Jyullo, tr. (see place). Réto, tr. Réso, reflex. Réti, pas. Ré pato, &c. c. Throw away, f Wardo, tr. Squander, | (see Abandon). Be near, Nentha dyimo, n. Approximate, Nentha dyampato, tr. Be distant, Brabé dyafmo. Brawo, n. Brapato, &c., tr. Braba dyumpato, c. tr. Bring (see come, ( Pito, tr. piwo: pito is} Piso, reflex. trans. or caus.) Piyi, pas. =make come), | Pipato, &c. causal, ( Yuto, tr. ) Yuso, reflex. Yati. pas. Yupato, &c. c. Kato, tr. Kaso, reflex. Snatch away, Distance, Bring down (see Yuawo = come down). Bring up (see a Kati, pas. any Kuipato, &c. c. Fetch, Blatha diwo, n. (to take go.) Cause to fetch.) na qe aterpase- payl, tr. c. Lato, tr. Laso, reflex. Layi, pas. Lapato, causal. Phli-gno, tr. Phli-so, reflex. Phli-yi, pas. Phli-pato, &c. causal. Kiro, tr. Kiuarso, reflex. Karyi, pas. Kurpato, &c. c. Take away, Send, Carry, bear, Siwo, tr. Hold, take in } Siso, reflex. hand, grasp, ) Siyi, pas. Sipato, &c. causal. Jato, tr. Hold up, ) Jaso,t reflex. Support, ) dati, pas. Japato, &c. c, Let it fall, Ucho giwo. Fall (thing), Uto, n. and a, Make fall or fell, U'pato, c. and Uto, tr. Enter, Wdégno, n. * In conjugation, this compound verb preserves the trans. of rampato and the neuter of bwakko blended in one conjugation. See grammar. + Jaso gives Jase, it is (self) supported, and Jéso or Japaso must be used for “Be supported,” though there be a passive formed from Jati = support me. All this results from the imperfect development of the passive voice which has no imperative of the 2nd person. 1857.] Cause to enter, f Wo6pato, ce. Admit, insert, | Wondo, tr. Issue, Gigno, n. Cause to issue, Glipato. Glindo. Ascend = climb tree, Wégno, n. Ascend = come up, slope, Kawo, Ascend = go up, slope, Hatru lawo. } = Descend = come down, Yiwo, n. Descend = go down, Hayu lawo, n. Descend = climb down tree, Gligno, n. Jwakdiwo, ; n. there, here. Arrive, ¥ Jwakpiwo, Jwakko, n.* Jwangdipato, Cause to arrive, , Jwangpipato, ¢ tr. Jwangpato, Depart, Gligno (issue). Cause to depart, Glapate, &c. Precede, Gnalla yongso, intr, Cause to precede, Gnalla yongpato or yokto, reflex. Follow, Nétha yongso, intr. ‘: Notha yongpato, ref. Cause to follow, Ean yokto, & Attend on, Kwongkho bwakko. n. Disappear, Khleuso, reflex. (see hide). Khleuto, tr. Khleuti, pas. Appear, Kwainso paso, reflex. Make appear, Kwainso pawo, tr. Make me appear, Kwainso payi, pas. Be lost, lose, Shéoto, n. and a. Cause to lose, lose it, Shéopato-paso- Cause to disappear, payi, c. Lamo, tr. Search, < Lamso, reflex. Lamyi, pas. Lam pato, tr. Cause to search, { Lam paso, reflex. Vian payi, pas. ; Tawo, tr. Find, | Tie, reflez. Tayi, pas. Ta pato, tr. Ta paso, reflex. Ta payi, pas. Begin, Prénso, n. Cause to find, { Prensi pato, tr. Cause to begin, < Prénsi paso, reflex. | prénsi payi, pas. Bihing Vocabulary. 509 End, ? Ryipo, n. Be ended, } Ryim pato, &c. tr. End it, Theumo, tr. Cause to be Theumso, reflex. ended, or Theumyi, pas. . finish, Theum pato, &c. causal. Come, Piwo, n. Rawo, n. Pipato. Rapato, tr. Cause to } Pipaso. Rapaso, reflex, come, } Pipaéyi, Rapayi, pas. Pipapato. Rapapato, d. e. Go, Diwo,y n. Lawo, n. Lapato. Dipato, tr. Lapaso. Dipaso, refi, uapayl, Duipayi, pas. Continue, Bwakko, n. (sit). Bwapato, tr. Bwapaso, reflex. Bwapayi, pas. Get out of the f Yongso, n, Cause to go, Cause to continue, way, ‘\ULam plénno, tr. Yokto, tr. Lamplén- Cause to clear pato, tr. the way or] Yongso, reflex. Lam- plénpaso, reflex. Yokti, pas, ‘ Lim- plénpayi, pas. Wait, Bwakko, n. (sit). Cause to wait, Bwangpato-paso-payi. Rimdo, tr. Rimso, reflex. Rimdi, pas. Rimpato, &c. ¢. ieeeree fhere, ) Jwak diwo, n. there, | Jwak piwo, n. fJwak dipato, &e. UJwak pipato, &c. fenare! eae n. (issue). dwo, n. (go). Cause to depart f Glupato, &c., c. or dismiss, (Lapato, &c. ¢, Return, Léto, n. See take Cause to return, Lépato, &c. f back. Be high, grow, Baro, n. Make high, orfp grow it, L Be large, big, Gnolo dyumo, n, Make big or enlarge, Guolo thyumto or dyimpato, &c. c. Be fat, Syéneawo,f n, mike vet ou of the way, Wait for, Expect, Cause to arrive, ar-pato-paso payi, c. * Jwakko = arrive simple. The adjuncts tell whether by going (diwo) or by coming (piwo). + See ‘‘ take away” lato, = cause to go but not used so. + Syé = flesh : neuba = good: neuwo = be good, whence neugna, 1 am good. ) ry 510 Bahing Fatten, Syéneipato, &e. ec. Be thin, Ryammo, n, Make thin, Ryampato, &c. c. Increase, Baro, n. Cause to increase, Bar pato, &c. c. Decrease, Syd-wo, n. Cause to decrease, Sy6 pato, &c. c. Be good, Neuwo, n. Neuto, tr. Neuso, reflex. Neuti, pas. Net pato, &c. c. Be bad, Ma neuwo, neg. Make bad, Ma neuto, &c. c. n. Gapto, tr. Gapso, reflex. Gapti, pas. Gampato, &c. causal. Deduct from or lessen, Sy6é pato, tr. (decrease). Paposees tr. Cultivate } Ché-so, reflex. (earth), ) Choyi, pas. Chopato, &e. ¢. Koko (kokko), tr. def. Kéngso, (?) refi. indef. Koéngyi.* pas, Kong pato, &c. ec, Jdto, tr. Jéso, reflex. Jéti, pas. Jopato, &c. ¢. Phato, tr. : Phiso, reflex. Bow, Pha si yi,f passive. Phu pato, &c. ec. Khleumo, tr. Kchleumso, reftex. Khleumyi, passive. Khleum pato, &c. causal. Riko (rikko), tr. Ringso, reflex. sa | Siteraee Ring pato, &c. causal. Make good, Add to or Augment, Dig, Plough, Transplant, * Kongyi, says field, dig me. Vocabulary. [No. 6. Cuther Préto, tr. ? “| Naso, reflex. Préso, reflex. pluck Névi Sree A ayi, pas. Préyi, p. owers ) 37," 7 pre, greens, | N&pato &c. c. Prépato, ery Ruko, tr. Rungso, reflex. Rungyi, pas. Rungpato, &c. causal. i Uo, n. and tr. Uto, tr. Uyi, pas. Upato, tr. Cause to fell, | Unis reflex. Upayi, pas. Theulo, tr. Thetlso, reflex. Thealyi, pas. Thedlpato, &c. causal. Chwaro, tr. (cut). Chwarso, reflex. Chwaryi, pas. Chwarpato, &c. caus. Chari pawo, tr. Chari paso, reflex. Chari payi, pas. Chari papato, causal. Wokko, tr. Wongso, reflex. Wongyi, pas.t Wongpato, causal. Krito, tr. Kriso, reflex. {Nace or. Kradicate, Fall, Be felled, Fell it, Breed cattle, Slaughter cattle, Graze, Flay or decorti- cate or peel, chew Kriti, pas. Kripato, &c, Cc. Khwaro, tr. Shave, Khwarso, reflex. Khwaryi, pas. Khwarpato, c. Jyappo, tr. Jyamso, reflex. Jyamyi, pas, Jyampato &c., causal. Dig for me is koktigi, and dig for him koktigiwo. + The reflex and passive forms of the verbs to dig, to plough, to sow and all such are eschewed, because incapable of application by or to a human being and the constructio ad seusum still overruling any feeling of grammatical uni- formity with my unsophisticated informants. The transitive and reflex forms of such verbs often tally with Hungarian definite and indefinite. + Wongyi, says the skin, and Wongso, says man to skin, Wokti or Woktigi, says One man to another, strip off my skin. So also of “shear,” &c. 1857.] Légno, tr. Léso, reflex, Leyi, pas. Lépato, c. Phato, tr. Phaso, reflex. Phayi, pas. Phapato, ec. Jyav giwo, tr. Jyar giso, reflex. Jyar giyi, pas. Jyar gipato, &c. ¢. Jyar olawo, tr. Jyar blaso, reflex. Jyar blayi, pas. Jyar blapato, ec. Ché-gno, tr. Ch6-so, reflex. Cho6-yi, pas. Ch6-pato, ec. Hikko, tr. Hingso, reflex. Hingyi, pas. Hing pato, &c. c. Thapo, tr. Thamso, reflex. Thamyi, pas. Tham pato, &c. c. Khlyakko, tr. Khlangso, reflex. Khlangyi, pas. Khlang pato, &c. ¢. Make house, Khim pawo (see make) Make clothes, Wa pawo (see make). Sale panng, tr. Sale panso, reflex. Sale panyi, pas. Sale panpato, &c. c. Weave, Wa pawo (supra), Phyéro, tr. Phyerso, reflex. Sell, Change or Exchange, Lend, Borrow, Pay debt, Count, Measure or weight, Plaster (wall), Spin, Sew, Phyéryi, pas. Phyérpato, &c. c. Khri-to, tr. Grind; Khriso, reflex. Khriyi, pas. Khripato, &c. c. Work mine, Khani kokko (dig). Work iron, Syal teuppo (beat). Singchokko, tr. (plane), Singchongso, reflex, Work wood, Singchongyi, pas. Singchongpato, &c. c. Khapi lwakto, tr. (knead), Khapi lwangso, reflex. Work clay, Khapi lwakti, pas. Khapi lwangpato, &c. c. Béhing Vocabulary. Kiwo, tr. Kiso, reflex. Kiyi, pas. Kipato, &c.c. Be cooked, be prepared (rice), Cook, Cause to be cooked, a a &c. c. Be ripe (fruit), Jiwo, n. Ripen, Jipato, &c. c. Boil, Kiwo, (cook). Grémdo, tr. Grémso, reflex. | Grémdi, pas. Grémpato, c. Cheowo, tr. } Cheoso, reflex. Cheoyi, pas. Cheo pato, &c. c. Cut with knife by one blow, Cut with scissors, Krito (shear). Séwo, tr. Cut by frequent draw-) Séso, reflex. ing, or saw, Séyi, pas. Sepato, &c. c. Ho6to, tr. H6so, reflex. Hoéyi, pas. Hopato, &c. c. Be torn, Jito, n. Chito, tr. Chiso, reflex. Chiyi, pas. Chipato, &c. c. Be split, Yéso, reflex. Yeto, tr. Yéyi, pas. Yépato, &c. °c. Be broken, Jingso, reflex. Jikko, tr. and n. Jingso, reflex. Jingyi, pas. Jingpato, &c. c. Be burst, Bukko, n. Pwakko or Pukko, tr. Pwangso, reflex, Pwangyi, pas. Pwangpato, &c. c. Kiwo, tr. (cook). Kiso, reflex. Roast, Grill, Perforate or pierce, Tear, Split, Break, Burst it, Brew, Kiyi, pas. \ Kipato, &c, causal. Héto, tr. ie Héso, reflex. Distil, Aa) Héyi, pas. Hépato, &c, e. 372 11 ; Ming-gno. n, \ Chwaro (slaughter), 512 Bahing Phyakto, tr. Filtrate, faecued reflex. Defecate, ) Thyangyi, pas. Thyangpato, &c. ¢. Be sharp, Syamso, reflex. Syappo, tr. Syamso, reflex. Syamyi, pas. Syampato, &c. c. Be blunt, Khlamso, reflex. Khlamto, tr. Make blunt } Khlamso, reflex. (or spoil), ) Khlamti, pas. Khblampato, &c. c. Sharpen, Be shaken, Dungso, reflex. Dukko, n. Dukto, tr. Dungso, reflex. Dukti, pas. Dungpato, &c. ¢. Be still, Be firm, i Jaso, reflex. Make still, 3s, tr. Shake, Jati, pas, Make firm, Japato, &ec. Cc. Be contained, Ringso, reflex. Rikto, tr. Contain, J Ringso, reflex. fiold, Rikti, pas. Ringpato, &c. c. Be sustained, Jaso (see Be firm). Sustain, Jato (see Make firm). Be retained, Tyangso, reflex. Tyakko, tr. Retain, } Tyangso, reflex. Keep in, ) Tyangyi, pas. Tyanzpato. &e. c. Ooze out, Chappo, n. ‘Cham pato, tr. Cham paso, reflex. Cham payi, pas. Cham papato, c. Be full (belly), Ru-gno, n. f Ra pato, tr. RU paso, refiex. Ru payi, pas. Ru papato, &c. c. Be full (vessei), Dyammo, n. Dyam paro, tr. Dyam paso, reflex. Dyam payi, pas. Dyam papato, c. Be empty, Asyeti dyumo, n. Asyéti pawo, tr. Asyéti paso, reflex. Asyéti payi, pas. Asyéti papato, &c. c. Shine, Chyaro, n. Make ooze out, Fill (belly), Fill (vessel), Empty, Vocabulary. [No. 6. ( Be dark, Namrikko, n. Namring pato, tr. Duden: ait paso, reflex. amring payi, pas. Namring papato, &c. ¢. Be luminous, Hauhau dyimo, n. Make luminous. Hauhau pawo, tr. Blow as wind, Khito, n. Byéro, n. (fly). Byér pato, &c. c. BS MEL oe { Kibet ee: Flow as water, Gwakko (go) Cause to flow, Gwang pato, &c. c. Flower, Boto, n. Cause to flower, Bopato, &c. c. Fruit, Sito, n. Cause to fruit, Si-pato, &c. ¢. Be ripe (fruit only), Jiwo, n. Ripen, Jipato, &c. ¢. Be ripe as grain, &c., Ming-gno, n. Ripen, Ming pato, &c. c. Be hot, Glé-wo, n. Heat, Glépato, &c. ¢. Be cold (thing only), Chhikko, n. Make cold, Chhing pato, &c. c. Be rotten, Jippo, n. Make rotten, Jimpato, &c. c. Be raw, Achekhl: dyamo, n. Make raw, Achekhli pawo, tr. Be lighted (lamp), Howo, n. Hopato, tr. é Hodpaso, reflex. Light (lamp), < Hovert aan Hépapato, c. Be kindled (fire), Khryamso, reflex. Cicryatnc i . Khryamso, reflex. Ee) ihicy aie pas. Khryam pato, c. Be burnt (destroyed by fire), Deuppo, n. Deum pato, tr. Deum paso, reflex. r Deum payi, pas. it Deum papato, c. Chwé-wo, tr. Chwé-so, reflex. Chwé-yi, pas. Chwé-pato, &c. c. Be buried (= bury thyself), Thimso, r. Thimmo, tr. Thimso, reflex, Thimyi, pas. Thimpato, &c. ¢. Be melted (= melt thyself), Yéngso, r. Yoéng pato, tr. Melt it, Yong paso, reflex. Yong payi, pas. Yong papato, &c. c. Burn it, Burn (corpse), Bury it, Cause to shine, Chyarpato-paso-payi, c. Be congealed, Jamidytimo, n, 1857.] Congeal it, Jami pawo, tr. Khuppo, tr. Khumso, reflex. Khumyi, pas. Khum pato, &c. c. Be collected, Khumso, supra, Hammo, tr. Hamso, reflex. Hamyi, pas. Hampato, &c. ¢. Yokko, tr. Yongso, reflex. Collect, bring or put together, Spread, Share out, Apportion, } Yongyi. pas. Yony pato, &c. ¢. Separate, Phwakko, tr. Phwangso, reflex. Phwangyi, pas. Phwang pato, &c. c. Set together, Khuppo (see Collect). Chyakko, tr. Chyangso, reflex, Chyangyi, pas. Set apart with- out division, Divide (by cutting, &c. what whole), Chyangpato, &e. c. Khryapto, tr. Khryamso, reflex. Khryamyi, pas. Khryam pato, c. Sapto, tr. Samso, reflex. Sapti, pas. Sampato, &c, c. Unite, join, what divided or broken, Knot it, Join by knot, Unknot, ¢ Prwakko, tr. Loosen, Prwangso, reflex. Unseam, ) Prwangyi, pas. Unfold, Prwang pato, c. Bra-wo, tr. Bra-so, reflex. Brayi, pas. Brapato, &c. ¢. Brapapato, a. c. Hal-do, tr. Hil-so, reflex. Mix, {waa pas. Hil-pato, &c. ¢. Phwakko. (See Separate. ) Grokso pawo, tr. Scatter, Unmix. Separate what mixed, Acquire, gain by labour or earn, ) Grokso payi, pas. Grékso papato, c. Blenpato. Khuppo, tr. Save, (what Blenpaso. Khumso, refl. ee eee Blenpayi. Khumyi, pas. policy); Blenpapato. Khumpato,c. Wardo, tr. Warso, reflex. Squander, « Wardi, pas. Warpato, c. Warpapato, d. ec. Grdékso paso, refl.. Bahing Vocabulary. 513 Plepto, tr. Plemso, reflex. Plepti, pas. Plempato, &c. c. Prwakko, tr. Prwangso, reflex. Prwangyi, pas. Prwang pato, &c. ¢. Hékko, tr. Hongso, reflex. Hongyi, pas. Hong pato, &c. ec. Tyakko, tr. Tyangso, reflex. Tyangyi, pas. Tyang pato, c. Timto, tr. Timso, reflex. Timti, pas. Timpato, ec. Timpapato, d. ec. (aurea, fr: Compress or jim reflex. Fold, Unfold, Open, Shut, Press, Squeeze, Depress, Express, Nimyi, pas. Nimpato, &c. c. Lipto, tr. Limso, reflex. Lipti, pas. Limpato, &e. ¢c. Turn topsy turvy, Haldo, tr. (mix). | Tyallo, tr. Tyalso, reflex, Roll up, i Ee aigaaaad, Tyal pato, &e. c. ‘Prwakko, tr. (see unfold). Prwangso, reflex. Prwangyi, pas. Prwang pato, &e. ¢. Be loose, slack, Thyelvimdytimo, n. Thyelvim pawo, tr. Thyelvim paso, refl. Thyelvim payi, pas. Thyelvim papato, ec. Be tight, Muske dyamo, n. Tighten, Muske pawo, tr. Chakko, tr. Chingso, reflex. Chuingyi, pas. Ching pato, &e. c. Prokko, tr. Prongso, reflex. Prongyi, pas. Prong pato, c. Kura pawo, tr. Kira paso, reflex. Kura payi, pas. Ktira papato, c. Unpack, Prwakko (see unro)). Turn over carefully, Unroll, Loosen, slacken, Bind, Unbind, Pack, 514 Climb or get up, f Wogno, n. tree, &. } Wo6pato. Come down, Yiwo, n. Kwado, tr. Put on (fire), { Knivo, reflex. Kwadi, pas. Nito, tr. Take off (fire), 4 Niso, reflex. Niti, pas. Piko, tr. Wondo, F | Pineso, r. Wonso. Put in Wonvi onyl. Pingpato, &e. Won- pato. Gleando, tr. Glednso, refl. aes cakes See Wogno, get in (solid), | Pine p- Pull out, Sate tks See issue, Take out, te eed | Glugno. &e. ¢. Pour in (liquid), Piko (supra). Dato, tr. Daso, reflex. Dati, pas. Dapato, &e. ¢c. Yuto, tr. Take down [ vis rites, | See Yuwo, 01 | uyl, pas. [ame down. Catch as poured, Bring down, | Yapato, &e. c. Lwakto, tr. Lwangso, reflex. Lwakti, pas. Cees &e. c. Kato, tr. Kuso, reflex. Kiaiyi, pas. Kapato, tr. c. Stop, stay (to going f Jaso (reflect. or man), intrans.) Stop him, stay him, Jato, tr. Stay or stop me, Jati, pas. Cause him to stop, f Japato-paso- stay, payi, c. ( Tyakko, tr. Stay, stop, one who J Tyangso, reflex. flees, or a road, ) Tyangyi, pas. Tyang pato, &c. c. reve s Bara al { Tyakko, supra, Let go, Lacho giwo. Lane chapba pawo, tr. Put up above, See Kuwo, Bring u ere come up. Enable Lane chapba paso, refl. to go, } Lane chapba payi, pas. Lane chapba papato, Kc. d.c. Yallo, tr. Rub, YAlso, reflex. Yalyi, pas. Yal pato, Cc. Bihing Vocabulary. | No. 6. Phélephéle paso, reflex. Phélephéle payi, pas. Be polished, Phélephéle dyamo, n. Cause to be f Phélephéle dyumpato- polished, { paso-payi, c. Sheumo, tr. Sheumso, reflex. Phélephéle pawo, tr. Polish, Cover, ? \LAje dyumsomami. Falsely, Limochelso, Openly, { Kwong kwong paso. * All these are gerundial, like the great majority of the adverbs. But if imperation is involved, the gerund sign is added to the imperative, not to the indicative. + Or with main verb in indicative, ma jogako for present and ma joktako for preterite sense. See note at “wisely.” This is merely the negative form of the same word obtained by prefixing the particle of negation or ma. (The remainder in the neat volume.) Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. we $y 2 | i = i | Range of the Barometer 3 = Range of the Tempera- | “En ES during the day. - ture during the day. = Ze AE Date. on = = 9 $34 | Max. | Min. | Dif. | $& | Max. | Min. | Diff. s = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. |} Inches. o o 0 o 1 30.031 | 30.118 | 29.970 0.148 | 66.8 76.6 60.0 |166 2 099 |} 169 | 30.042 1127 66.7 76.0 59.4 | 16.6 3 .106 .204: .050 154 | 67.5 S41 5 |p0.0 | 17.1 4 Sunday. 5 .097 .150 .050 100 | 70.8 80.0 | 63.5 | 16.5 6 144 214 .099 115 Ve 71 80.2 63.5 | 16.7 7 .094 171 .021 150 | 71.9 81.0 63.8 | 17.2 8 .080 .156 -029 127 72.1 80.3 66.0 | 14.3 9 .095 191 .053 1388 | 69.1 | 77.4 62.8 | 14.6 10 .089 .160 041 119 67.9 76.5 60.7 | 15.8 11 | Sunday. | 12 .099 187 .040 147 67.2 77.4 59.7 117.7 13 A313 .190 .055 .135 65.6 76.0 56.7 | 19.3 14 .092 167 .045 122 | 66.3 76.6 57.4 | 19.2 15 .055 140 | 29.990 | .150 | 66.7 74.9 60.6 | 14.3 16 -060 .130 | 30.018 | 112 66.6 74.3 61.0 | 13.3 17 .037 114 | 29.975 .139 64.6 73.9 57.6) | 16.3 18 | Sunday. | 19 | 29.999! .089| .988| .151| 63.1 | 75.3 | 58.0 |17.3 20 30.004: .090 944 | 146 62.9 W31 54.6 | 18.5 21 .009 .108 .954 154 | 61.8 (eS 52.8 | 20.5 22 29.986 .076 .918 158 62.1 72.2 53.6 | 18.6 23 979 .067 .920 147 62.8 75.0 53.9 | 21.1 24 .968 .059 913 146 63.9 76.3 54.4 | 21.9 25 Sunday. | 26 .938 .015 887 128 | 69.3 81.6 59.4 | 22.2 27 .902 | 29.979 842 137 |, 714 » |. 82.26 |.68.6 | 18.6 28 881 956 833 123 | 73.7 | 84.1 | 65.4 | 18.7 29 .882 .955 .830 125 T3s0 84.5 64.4 | 20.1 30 .873 .951 .818 .133 roi s 84.9 63.8 | 21.1 31 .887 .965 841 124 TAA 84.3 66.4 | 17.9 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during the day. il Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) 5 Walaa So) eR aoe ylinere 5 Sook Shasta roatll a ooh Ute eau ee Secale ace ei ye 2 © 3 a2 tal ee) cp 3 e E = iS) Ne = 2 os Ne Date." Fe, 2 A S 62 | EBs | & Fx J ~~ % io) cs oe mS — ov = i=} Satie 2 e = a= ae) eo8) o's ea = 2 2 | M2) es | Ska! eos S| a) = is iy oe [eee bat i) = } aos Som) 88'6 a-| Pb g PAY ie So |3aea sos = A O A a = < = o o o ty) Inches.| T. gr. | T. gr. 1 61.6 5.2 58.5 8.3 0.498 5.51 | 1.75 | 0.76 2 62.0 4.7 59.2 7.5 .509 64. 59 78 3 63.3 A.2 60.8 6.7 537 94 48 80 4 | Sunday. 5 65.4 5.4 62.7 8.1 572 6.29 91 77 6 66.2 4.9 63.7 7.4: 591 50 78 79 vi 66.9 5.0 64.4: 7.5 .605 63 85 78 - 8 67.7 4:4 65.5 6.6 .628 .88 65 81 9 62.9 6.2 59.8 9.3 .520 5.73 2.05 74 10 60.9 7.0 56.7 | 11.2 469 17 4 69 11 Sunday 12 60.2 7.0 56.0 | 11.2 458 07 28 .69 13 59.4: 6.2 55.7 9.9 453 .03 1.97 72 14 61.3 5.0 58.3 8.0 AD AT .68 17 15 62.3 4.4, 59.7 7.0 518 74 49 -79 16 61.3 5.3 58.1 8.5 A491 43 78 75 7h 58.9 5.7 55.5 | 9.1 450 OL wah 74 18 Sunday 19 58.6 6.5 54.7 | 10.4 438 | 4.87 | 2.02 y(t 20 55.2 7.7 49.8 | 13.1 371 14 .29 .64 2) 55.2 6.6 50.6 | 11.2 381 .26 1.95 .69 22 54.6 7.5 49.3 | 12.8 365 07 | 2.20 65 23 56.1 6.7 51.4 | 11.4 092 38 .03 .68 24, 57.0 6.9 OZ re Ling 402 48 15 .68 25 Sunday. 26 62.6 6.7 59.2 | 10.1 .509 5.62 21 ae 27 66.6 4.8 64,2 7.2 .601 6.60 1.75 we 28 67.8 oan 64.8 8.9 613 71 2.25 75 29 65.9 7.4: O22) 11.1 563 15 ‘69 °>) Sie 30 65.9 7.8 62.0 | 11.7 559 10 .86 .68 31 67.2 7.2 63.6 | 10.8 590 43 72 70 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. ill Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. ‘o 2 . | Range of the Barometer | = 3 Range of the Temperature vor J s 4 4 == for each hour during faa) = for each hour during Hour - = ey the month. ate the month. "loa & as aan ao” ; ’ s 2 : af eS | Max. Min. Diff. sel | Max. Min. Diff. = = Inches. | Inches.| Inches.' Inches. Oo on 0 0 Mid- night, 30.022 (| 30.148 [29.874 0.274 64.2 70.5 56.7 13.8 1 .014: .140 .870 .270 63.4 69.8 56.0 13.8 2 .010 118 .853 .265 62.5 69.0 55.0 14.0 3 |29.998 -106 841 .265 62.2 68.6 54.8 13.8 A .995 102 841 .261 61.5 68.2 54.2 14.0 5 .998 114 847 .267 60.9 67.8 53.5 14.3 6 130.020 13S .856 20d 60.5 Gi 53.0 14.1 7 .043 £55 .883 272 60.2 66.4 52.8 13.6 8 .072 191 .917 274, 62.0 68.6 54.6 14.0 9 .096 207 .936 271 65.9 tose 59.0 133 10 -102 .214 .949 .265 69.1 75.4: 62.0 13.4 11 .086 .201 .930 BAT AA 71.9 79.2 65.3 13.9 Noon. .055 G2 .909 .263-| 74.6 | 81.4 67.8 13.6 1 .018 .143 .876 .267 76.5 83.4 70.3 TS. 2 |29 993 123 .853 .270 Wigs, 84.4 71.8 12.6 3 .977 104, 834 .270 77.9 84.9 72.2 12.7 4, 971 .108 .830 .278 76.1 83.4 709 125 5 .973 38 .820 .293 74.7 816 69.0 12.6 6 .980 121 818 .303 72.0 78.8 66.2 12.6 v4 .997 .126 .838 .288 70.0 76 0 64.3 11.7 8 |30.017 .152 -856 .296 68 4 74.8 61.6 13 2 9 .030 .163 .873 .290 67.2 73 6 60.6 13.0 10 -035 By ir .879 .298 66.1 | 726 59.4 13.2 11 .032 .162 875 287 65.5 71.6 58.5 131 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the Observations made at the several hours during the month. iv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta, in the month of January, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) 2 . 2 |. S oe | sae tees | 3 | = So A S -_ ee B-|-S ee © o 5 =| “no D> = Som ole ee E > eh Q oer oe Se 403 a2 E 25 Baa iso Hour. BS | s a 3S e. es yo eel © 8 = s 2 ® ae Ss = Se ee hh ee =i) S 3 su vO ea Pe, | eee & 8 ef) a ais = = stim || Sef] obs ae | ie ee ewe gee) BSL ees 2 = a tS) a = Seo hae gé oy) 0 0 0 Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. he 60s | 34 | sea’! we poses | sea | nace) os 1 60.3 3.1 58.1 5s! AQ1 AT .06 84 2 59.5 3.0 57 A 5.1 480 .36 0.99 84 3 59.1 3.1 56.9 5.3 472 27 1.02 84 A: 58.7 2.8 56.7 4.8 469 24 0.92 .85 5, 58.0 2.9 55.7 5.2 A538 .08 .96 84 6 57.7 2.8 55.5 5.0 450 .05 .92 .89 7 57-5 27 55.3 A.9 AAT 02 .89 85 8 58.7 3.3 56.4 5.6 464 18 1.07 83 9 60.8 5.1 57.7 8.2 485 BF .69 76 10 62.3 6.8 58.9 10.2 504 56 2.22 72 11 63.6 — 8.3 59.4 12.5 O43 61 87 .66 Noon. | 64.7 9.9 59.7 14.9 518 65 3.55 61 1 65.5 11.0 60.0 16.5 023 .67 4.08 28 2 65.5 12.0 59.5 18.0 O15 57 AT 56 3 65.7 12.2 59.6 18.3 L6G 59 4) .55 4, 64.6 11.5 58.8 17.3 .503 46 Riri My 5 64.8 9.9 59.8 14.9 220 .66 3.97 .61 6 64.9 7.2 61.3 10.7 046 .99 2.51 71 7 64.2 5.8 61.3 8.7 046 6.01 1.99 “75 8 63.3 5.1 60.2 8.2 527 5.82 .80 .76 9 62.6 4.6 59.8 7 A, .b20 S75 .60 78 10 62.0 4.1 59.5 6.6 O15 70 .40 .80 Lt 61.8 3.7 59.6 5.9 516 a3. .20 82 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants, Meteorological Observations. v Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1857. Solar radiation, Weather, &ce. “i ecirro cumuli. ed |e | So-8 |S.a0 .| 28 |S & 8) Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. 2; 43 [83° of the Wind. 4 tas] Al a” |ged fe) Inches 1} 130.0 .. (iN. W. Cloudless till 6 a. M. scattered i till 8 p. M. cloudless afterwards. 2} 126.0 SN Cloudless. 3} 130.9 a N. W. & W. Cloudiess. 4) Sunday. 5| 135.5 a. JIN. We & S.-W: | Cloudless till 10 a. mM. scatd. \i & “i till 5 p.M.cloudless & foggy afterwards. 6} 136.0 a, Variable. Cloudless till 4 Pp. Mm. scatd. i after- wards, also fogey after sunset. Wetae>,|-., |N.& N. W; Cloudless till 1 p. mM. scatd. -i till 6 P.M. cloudless afterwards. Also fogey in the morning and evening. 8} 131.0 . | Variable. Scatd. \i & “i till 9 a.m. cloudless till 11 a. M. scatd. 7i till 4 Pp. m. cloud- less afterwards. 9} 129.2 N. W. Cloudless ‘till 7 a. m. scatd. “i till Noon, cloudless afterwards. 10) 127.0 Lica fl Ns Coo WWE Cloudless. 11) Sunday. 12) 133.5 a UNS NW: Cloudless. 13, 131.0 eT Ne Cloudless till 7 a. Mm. seatd. +i & \i till 6 pe. M. cloudless afterwards. 14) 129.0 . |W. & Calm. Cloudless till 6 a. mM. scatd. “i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 15) 115.0 s W. Scatd. “i till Noon, scatd. i till 6 P. M. cloudless afterwards. 16} 111.5 N. Cloudless till 2 a. ., cloudy till 6 p.m. ) cloudless afterwards. 17) 131.0 é N. W. Cloudless till 6 a. M. scatd. \i & i till 6 ep. M. cloudless afterwards. 18) Sunday. 19) 133.0 ea ANN. WW Cloudless. 20) 129.0 Bae tal WM Cloudless. 21) 133.0 eo leave We Cloudless. 22) 132.0 - N. W. Cloudless. 23| 1380.4 N. &N. W. Cloudless. 24! 133.2 He N. W. & N. Cloudless. 25| Sunday. 26} 138.2 Calm & 8 Cloudless. [ing. 27| 141.0 Variable, Cloudless and heavy fogs in the morn- 28) 141.0 Ss. & W Cloudless and foggy in the morning. 29) 140.0 are Ss. W. Cloudless. 30) 143.0 ae N. W.&S. W. Cloudless. 31{ 134.0 se 8. & W. Cloudless. Mi Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, VW~i nimbi, —i strati, Vi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly «Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of January, 1857. Montuty REsvtts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, we 30.022 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 4. M. on the Gth, .. 90.214 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 6 P. M. on the 30th, .. 29.818 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, 7 w. =: 0.896 Oo Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ia es 68.0 Max. Temperature, occurred at 3 P. M. on the 30th, oe ea 84.9 Min. Temperature, occurred at 7 A. M. on the 21st, ae 15 52.8 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, , 32.1 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, By. 61.9 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb na ecm iz 6.1 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, Be 58.2 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Daw Point, ne 9.8 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, ... ae . 0,493 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, ie “Se dee 5.44 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, ie 2.09 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.72 Inches. Rained No. days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ... ro Nil. Total amount of rain during the month, a3 m. &. Nil. Prevailing direction of the W tdi seas mat hs N.W.&N. Meteorological Observations. Vil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1857. Montuny REsvUtts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour, Si |é 5 | 3 S é Ae Cae A= ae el SEs] .|SF Slee] N.|ce 477, [ce PIS: 08 bon [ot IB oe ts Ink IS | | of days. | Midnight. A 1 , 5] Fl PQ) PO F565 1 5 1 15] fa 72 9) 14 2 4 1 PAL Fal Pal) [lop tos 3 A Al 42) 1] 12) 7 4 4 A M3) t 3h Pa AB) is 5 Ay | 2) |3l 73! fll dg 6 6} | 1 2 a el EL D 7 5| § 4 1 2 2, 43 9 1 8 7 5 1 2 1-3 400 PBI 9 Cilla ari 1 ime 15 a Ve 6 10 10 5 12) gai 13 5 11 il A, 1 Zz He 2 6 Noon. 5) 15 ery Pay Pl We if 5} fl 4, 4) 113 2 4. 6 6} {11 3 2 a DAW GL iit 8 Da 4 3) 3 8} 13 5 2 2 8) |15 6 i) 0 ia 6} {11 a 6 1 2 2 5| 111 1 8 7 2} 13i 73 ful 7a 9 9 3) [2] T3l jsi fal 10 8 3 2 4, 18) 72 11 7 3] 13 3 8 2) | | | | | ‘ ee Shee : a ' ny és ‘ = : 2 = ia oe “a BS Se te Se te Oe | - 2S ae } a E oe Se ee ee - i ) a 5 =a A NR Ca ORS a ALES Ta : : : : ; [o ~ y Z ; i “ - ~ : a — = *; ao) Se Ree —~ os = > : ee 2 ~ aS : pa: 1 fe 4) Sb SPAS oF Sd GT SS te ‘. = = 3 Sage ie pes ee fet pS 5 As I. ee we = _ ee FE 5 = Pa i == aa 2 “ 4 és a = ‘ : 4 - ~ > ae - i j = ot a a | = — pana I Et NR A ADS A ———— SE SS Be oe ni Ne OF ale (=D ~~ ad SY a j ; =. = a E : Se 2 =— | _ : i ag wd! Chen Riker ari ‘ 4 sameeren ahs: die ni vhhir -Spreangrhemiet Abani Meteorological Observations. 1x Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of February, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 24” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. oo 5 2 o.3 Range of the Barometer 2 g Range of the Tempera- Sp 2 = during the day. a 5 ture during the day. oS ° Hos as 3 ao? : = 2 d £ Son Max Min Diff. Se Max. | Min. | Diff Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 ) tr) ft) 1 | Sunday. 2 | 29.903 |29.987 | 29.850 0.137 74.5 83.6 67.2 | 16.4 3; .915 | 380.001 845 .156 73.1 84.2 63.2 | 21.0 4 ! 914 |29.989 | .853 | 136 | 75.4 | 860 | 68.0| 18.0 5 .928 | 30.006 .858 148 72.5 80.8 65.6 | 15.2 6 -985 .082 .926 156 70.2 78.9 62.8 | 16.1 7 ES oh .078 912 .166 rious 79.0 62.2 | 16.8 8 | Sunday 9 906 | 29.983 856 27 72.3 84,4 62.4 | 220 10 .956 | 30.043 .906 137 73.1 82.6 65.0 | 17.6 il 945 .038 881 od 71.6 81.1 64.4 | 16.7 12 .923 021 .858 163 69.9 79.8 62.0 | 17.8 13 879 | 29.961 .798 163 71.0 82.4 60.5 | 21.9 14 -869 947 807 140 73.3 84,2 63.6 | 20.6 15 =| Sunday. 16 890 968 .829 139 “iS 86.0 72.0 | 14.0 17 903 985 847 138 Udit 87.2 71.6 | 15.6 18 .962 | 30.043 1909 134 77.2 85.8 71.6 | 14.2 19 951 049 .862 187 76.1 86.1 69.4 | 16.7 20 902 | 29.995 .819 176 75.6 86.0 66.0 | 20.0 21 .832 908 787 151 77.2 86.0 40.8 | 15.2 22 | Sunday. 23 774 862 711 151 78.4 89.8 69.3 | 20.5 24: 817 904 .760 144 77.2 87.8 68.2 | 19.6 25 .805 874 £735 .139 78.6 87.9 70.0 | 17.9 26 “794 872 127 ol45 79.3 88.8 72.6 | 16.2 27 775 846 BOT 149 79.2 88.4 2 | Mega 28 odio 851 (7A 1 .140 79.4 89.7 @1.8:| 29 Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. x Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, Sor the month of February, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. } E Cae ag Bo 2 ° A o 5-5 ¢ 8 = * a 8 2 2 SS eae ee al = = o & s wee. he & = Bs 3 ‘oS c= 5 = S Date.| @ = E 3 = se - Lelos o S = am OS | alo Bi koe at a Rh = 2i\ 68 | 2 | bee ae oO s 3 =) een Sos sd ma 2. = a s = | 230/62 & wo a : a re | S> | $8 |B aa) 8 88 = A Oo Q = = < = o oy) | 0 o Inches. | T. gr.} TT. gr. 1 | Sunday. 2 66.4: 8.1 62.3 12.2 | 0.565 6.16 | 3.02 | 0.67 3 65.2 7.9 61.2 B19 044 5.95 | 2.84 | .68 4 69.3 6.1 66.2 9.2 .642 6.99 AA | ,.74 5 65.5 7.0 62.0 10.5 009 Lt om) 72 6 62.1 8.1 58 0 12.2 489 5.38 .67 | .67 7 61.4 8.7 57.0 13.1 473 .20 83 65 8 |Sunday. 9 64.2 8.1 60.1 12.2 .525 RAS) 83 | .67 10 64.9 8.2 60.8 12.3 537 88 91 .67 11 61.5 40.1 56.4 15.2 464 .08 | 3.32 61 12 60.7 9.2 56.1 13.8 459 05. |, 2008 .63 13 62.7 83 58.5 125 498 45 80 | .66 14 65.7 7.6 61.9 11.4 557 6.09 75 .69 15 |Sunday. 16 72.1 5.8 69.2 8.7 -708 7.67 49 76 | 71.9 5.8 69.0 8.7 -704 .62 48 | .75 18 70.5 6.7 67.1 10.1 .661 i ad 46.| 72 19 67.9 8 2 63.8 12.3 593 6.45 3.18 | .67 20 66.9 mw 62.5 13.1 .568 18 30 | .65 21 69.0 8.2 64.9 12.3 615 .69 .26 .67 22 |Sunday. 23 69.9 8.5 65.6 12.8 .630 82 AQ .66 24 70.0 7.2 66.4 10.8 646 7.01 2.94. | .71 25 70.9 Met 67.0 11.6 .659 12 3.26 .69 26 "19 7.4 68.2 11.1 .686 41 a8.) 76 o, | 726 | 66 |-693 | 99 | mua | .67| 289-| .78 28 73 3 6.1 70,2 92 .732 1 71 75 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. x1 Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of February, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. c s Range of the Barometer for| = a Gia, See See ee aio 2 ; = 2 ture for each hour , uring the Hour. o zB iz: = 3 month. mn: ——— ,- As Ae of oO e+ | Max. | Min. | Diff Si | Max. | Min. | Diff. = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO oO 0 re) Mid- nia 29.896 |29.984 |29.773 0.211 70.8 75.3 64.0 | 11.3 1 .889 .990 759 231 70.1 74.8 63.6 | 11.2 2 874 O71 745 DIG), Coat 74.0 63:7 | 103 3 863 .959 £734 225 69.0 13.5 62.4 | 11.1 4: 861 .952 .728 224 68.4 73.2 61.6 | 11.6 5 .869 .968 742 .226 68.0 Taek 61.2 | 11.9 ig 886 .983 763 .220 67.5 72.6 60.6 | 12.0 7 912 /|30.010 .800 .210 67.4: 72.8 60.5 | 12.3 8 .939 .048 .820 .228 70.0 75.8 64.0 | 11.8 | .961 074: 844: .230 73.5 79.2 68.2 | 11.0 10 1p .955 .066 .839 227 79.1 84.6 face ) ELA 971 .082 84.6 .236 76.4 82.3 71.4 | 10.9 | Noon.| .929 .040 .809 238 81.5 86.9 736 | 130 : 1 892 .003 ie .226 83.4 88.8 76.5 | 12.3 2 860 | 29.966 747 219 84.4: 89.4 "768 | 11:6 | 3 | .836 | 946 | .705 241 84.7 | 89.8 | 78.9 | 10.9 4 826 932, .697 .235 84.2 89.6 78.0 | 11:6 5 .826 .926 702 224 82.6 88.6 76.6 | 12.0 6 833 .939 715 224 79.5 84.0 73.6 | 10.4 7 848 .946 £726 .220 76.9 82.0 71.5 10.5 8 .869 979 .762 217 75.2 79.5 69.8 9.7 9 .889 .988 £784 «204 73.9 79.4 67.8 | 11.6 10 .900 991 .788 .2038 72.6 77.6 67.3 | 10.3 mt .899 .989 .786 .2038 71.6 76.4: 65.0 | 11.4 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month, ; Xil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of Hebruary, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Elygrometrical elements dependent thereon. E 3 S © © +e aoe 4 2 2 2 2 Gee hy 5 PS MSS eee es o Aa cS) am 1S 52,4 2.5 oe > E > ete aan alae, et : 3 4 o i eelyes = ep A Hour.| © 2 3 A 3 @ 5 BO gy e ‘a eet S ome 2 Ss 2 = 8 | Ota |S Sees eine Bae 2) Salger (Se. 8 sea ae is a a Se) Le sa |r| 2 |ee|] 8s | #82 Seesleas 2 = Qa oO Q a es < S Se AG ate ey Peele Sea SSS Se ee a ee ft) ft) o Oo Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr Mid- 4.2 | 645 | 63 | 0.607 | 668 | 1.52 0.82 night, | 656 Fe 1 66:2 (| ‘39 | 64.9) 4) v5.9 601 61 49 82 2 i ce a? en 609 ig! 22 85 3 e518 || (Be2-| | 64", jie 601 62 14 85 4 6g |) iach | eaaa ee 586 4G 16 85 5 648° | B2-|. 629 | 52 576 37 16 85 6 645 | 3.0! 627. | 48 572 33 09 85 7 | 642 | 32 |: 628] 5a! 365 25 14 85 8 657 | 48 | 63.59) 65 588 46 BA 81 9 67.6 | 59 | 646 | 89 609 66 2.24 "5 10 683 | Si || 642% | 122 601 53 3.19 67 11 68.4 | 10.7 63.0 | 16.1 578 24 4,29 59 Noon.| 69.1 12.4 62.9 | 18.6 576 19 5.12 A159 1 69:4 | 14.0:| .62.4° | 21.0 567 06 .90 51 2 69.4 | 15.0 | 61.9 | 22.5 557 | 5.94 6.37 48 3 69.4 | 15.3 | 61.7. | 23.0 554 91 51 A8 Ay 69.2 | 15.0 | 61.7 | 22.5 554 91 33 8 5 68.7 |-13.9 | 61.7 | 20.9 | .554 93 5.75 51 6 69.0 | 10.5 | 63.7 |15.8 | 591 | 6.38 | 4.28 60 "7 68.3 | 86 | 640 | 12.9 | .597 A8 3.38 .66 8 681° | Fda] 64.5% | 10.7 607 61 2.76 7h 9 67.7 | 62 | 646 | 9.8 609 66 85 74 10 67.2 | 54 | 645 | 81 607 65 Ol ay 11 670 | ase) Gare 6.9 "| .611 .70 1.70 .80 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants, Meteorological Observations. Xiil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations are a 3.8 ns g| 4% A| 2° ) 1) Sunday. 2| 140.0 3} 141.0 4) 139.9 5} 129.0 6) 133.2 wp. 130.0 8) Sunday. 9} 1386.0 10) 141.1 11} 134.0 12} 137.0 13} 140.0 14; 140.0 15) Sunday. 16) 136.1 17| 142.3 18} 140.6 19} 141.5 20| 142.0 ZY 137.9 22| Sunday. 22, 148.0 24| 138.5 25| 139.6 26} 143.9 27| 144.0 28} 138.0 Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strati > 3 >] ] > - | taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of Kebruary, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Se Oi: Sas © & | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. 92 et of the Wind. ; Be 10 O Inches. ; W. & calm & N. Cloudless. : W.&S. Cloudless. elas) Cloudless till 4 a. M. cloudy till 9 a. m. Cloudless till Noon, scattered “i and i afterwards. ee N. W. &N. Cloudless till 5 a. M. scattered i till Noon, cloudless afterwards. ee N. & S. Cloudless. a N. W. &N. Cloudless. Eig N. W. &S. W. Cloudless. aia W.&S. W. Cloudless. Ze N. W.&N.& W. | Cloudless. ae N. W. &S. W. Cloudless. 38 W.&S. EH. Cloudless. ate LW Cloudless till Noon, scatd. %i and “i till 5 p. m. cloudless afterwards. wid S. & W. ‘Scattered clouds till 6 Pp. m. cloudless afterwards. Ba S. Cloudless till 7 a. M. scattered “i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. ze S.W.&S.&S. EH. | Cloudless till Noon, scattered i till 4 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Bs S. W. & W. Cloudless. aa S.W.& W. Cloudless. ve Ss. W. Cloudless. hs 8S. W. &S. Cloudless. ae Variable. Cloudless. a W.&N. W. Cloudless till 11 A. M. scattered i till 8 P. M. cloudless afterwards. ea S. Cloudless till 5 A. M. scattered i & “i till 7 p. m. cloudless afterwards. es S. Cloudless till 10 a. M. seattered i till 6 p. M. cloudless afterwards. oe VR Cloudless till 5 a. M. cloudy till 3 P.M. cloudless afterwards. Ww i Cirro cumuli, XIV Meteorological Observations. Abstiact of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, wn the month of February, 1857. Mowtuiy Resuts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, * oe 29.887 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. mM. on the 6th, ee 30.082 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 27th, an 29.697 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ea es 0.385 Co) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee ee 75.0 Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 23rd, ee ee 89.8 fin. Temperature occurred at 7 a. M. on the 13th, oe se 60.5 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 29.3 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a ee 67.3 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,.. aT, Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a ee 63.4: Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 11.6 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, eo ee 0.586 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, a nf ve 6.37 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ae 2.94: Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.68 Inches. Rained No. days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, .. ee Nil. Total amount of rain during the month, a. oe ee Nil. Preyailing direction of the Wind, ee le oe Gary. Meteorological Observations. XV Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of February, 1857. On the 7th and 23rd February, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances. 7TH. h. m. h. m. Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, .. ae « ‘4) Qaim. & 4 10 Ps mu, Ditto Maximum Barometer,.. iis «- 10 10 ditto & 9 50 ditto, Between 7 20 & 7 30 4. M. Ditto Minimum Temperature, or half an hour after sunrise. Ditto Maximum Temperature between, .. 2 50 &3 OP.M. 23BD. h.; 7. h. m, Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, oe . 4 0am & 4 OPM. Ditto Maximum Barometer, ee -- 10 O ditto & 10 10 ditto. 7 0 ditto or half an hour Ditto Minimum Temperature, .. after sunrise. (Between 3 30 p.M. & 4 40 P.M, Ditto Maximum Temperature,- ~ during which time the Thermome- \_ ter was stationary, XVi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of February, 1857. ‘ Montury Resvrts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. MOF | hE bled eliele selefaae (ke oi} orl Glave s|S\e2 s £ ele ls =| 2 |cl N.siz ie! E. leis. Bic el ag lel W. leis isis No. of days. Midnight. | 2 il 7 6 A 2 2 1 2 1 8 5 3 3 2 2 1 8 6 3 3 2 3 1 9 5 3 3 2 4 2 7 By hha 2 3 5 Be 7 5 5 1 4 6 2) J1 i 2 6 3 A 2 3 7 4| | 2 1 5 A 4 3 1 8 4) | 2 1 2 4 1 3 A 9 6| | 2 2 6 i A 2 10 4) 13 2 2 A 4 2 2 11 4) 4d i 6 3 3 5 Noon. Z 1 5 4 4, 8 l i! 1 3 5 7 7 2 1 1 4 5 " 6 3 1 1 1 4 4 7 6 4 4 3 li 6 | 5 if 5 6 9 3 6 2 1 Y 5 7 2 7 1 1 8 5 5 3 i 8 2 8 5 5 3 il 9 2 9 4 5 3 1 10 3| 9 4 6 2 il 2| 9 4 6 3 | | Meteorological Observations. xvi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Kast. Feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. we Ze 2 3 Range of the Barometer 5 3 Range of the Tempera- “Bp E iS during the day. bs 5 ture during the day. mS 9 As Date. pO PS = 2 S 22 {| Max Min Diff oo Max. | Min. | Diff. s = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO fC) ty) o 1 | Sunday 2 | 29.854 | 29.939 | 29.778 0.161 | 80.3 90.0 73.9 | 16.1 3 808 879 734 145 | 80.0 89.2 73.0 | 16.2 4, 844 929 .780 145 | 80.6 89.8 74.4 | 15.4 5 863 942 817 125 | 80.2 89.0 73.6 | 15.4 6 858 942 .803 139 | 80.3 88.8 73.6 | 15.2 7 868 .980 752 228 | 77.3 88.2 | 67.8 | 20.4 8 | Sunday 9 -969 | 30.080 .916 164 | 74.3 83.2 68.7 | 14.5 10 937 061 881 180 | 68.5 70.4: 66.8 | 3 if 914 | 29.972 829 143 | 71.6 80.4: 64.8 | 15.6 12 -941 | 30.023 889 134 | 72.9 Sig 65.0 | 16.9 13 980 064 935 129 | 76.5 85.8 67.4 | 18.4 14 .950 O31 888 143 | 78.6 88.6 7050) TES 15 | Sunday 16 885 973 .810 163 | 80.6 90.6 72.3 | 18.3 cy .878 957 O07 | LaOrl BL: 92.4: 71.8 | 20.6 18 845 .928 Ai 151] 80.8 90.8 72.4 | 18.4 19 812 .882 .748 134 | 80.8 92.6 69.8 | 22.8 20 115 859 .695 164 82.1 93.2 ZActs i Taek 21 771 .836 713 123 | 83.0 94,2 74.7 | 19.5 22 Sunday 23 733 .809 646 .163 | 83.8 95.1 75.6 | 19.5 24 719 807 .659 148 | 84.4 96.6 74.8 | 21.8 25 741 -816 676 140 | 84.7 96.2 | 75.4 | 20.8 26 -786 872 731 141 | 85.8 98.6 75.2 | 23.4 27 784. 879 .689 5190.) 86.7 1-300.2 76.4 | 23.8 28 675 759 583 176] 86.5 | 988 76.8 | 22.0 29 | Sunday. 30 731 815 681 134} 85.7 95.4 | 78.8 | 16.6 31 802 881 157 124 | 84.9 | 94.8 78.2 | 16.6 =] . aj P . * 3 Lhe Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during the day. XVIll Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) Ps B S Bo | due hing lia Pa ie 2 | ee Perea eee al = = 2) © Se path a a = o © 5 Oe a ee = © 6 7 “6 |e o| e928 : 5 BE dae : 2 et 2s Date. |. = <= a x ‘5 Bo (oe Sd) 8S oe aes a 2 2. | os eye as o KS Ko) ne) — a mH os — oe S 8&0 © -r = © a ts Aue As =) OS i (eee g = Pos 4 Sno . ao eS a mS aos a @ Se Se Ss oa sp 5 bop oF o-8 | eae 6c oS = a oO a a = S a o fC) o fc) Inches.) V.-gr: 1) ee 1 | Sunday. 2 73.0 7.3 69.3 | 11.0 0.711 7.66 3.25 0.70 3 72.8 7.2 69.2 | 10.8 708 64: L7 71 4 74.3 6.3 (Api 9.5 £753 8.11 2.90 174 5 74.6 5.6 71.8 8.4: 771 31 .O7 76 6 74.9 5.4: 72.2 8.1 781 Al .50 ari, v | 72.3 9.0 69.8 7.5 722 7.82 16 A hes 8 | Sunday. 9 67.8 6.5 64.5 9.8 .607 6.62 2 50 73 10 65.1 3A 63.4 5.1 .586 64 1.19 84 1 66.9 4.7 64.5 7.1 .607 67 73 79 12 67.2 5.7 64.3 8.6 .603 .60 2.13 76 13 69.5 7.9 66.0 | 10.5 .638 .92 83 aL 14 71.0 7.6 67.2 | 11.4 .664: 7.19 3.19 .69 15 | Sunday. 16 72.0 8.6 67.7 | 12.9 674: 27 74 .66 17 70.8 10.4: 65.6 | 15.6 .630 6.78 4.43 61 18 69.6 11.2 64.0 | 16.8 597 A2 .65 08 19 70.3 10.5 65.0 | 15.8 617 65 AZ .60 20 72.0 10.1 66.9 | 15.2 657 7.06 45 OL 21 OL 19 fe Se il at 2 753 8.08. | 3.74 .68 22 Sunday. 23 75.8 8.0 71.8 | 12.0 Ary 20 .85 68 24 75.4 9.0 7049 \ 13.5 748 .0O 4.31 .65 25 77.3 7A (aso | 11.1 .817 73 3.69 70 26 76.2 9.6 | 714) 14.4 761 12 4.71 63 27 76.5 10.2 71.4 | 15.3 761 LO 5.08 .62 28 76.3 10.2 71.2 | 15.3 756 .05 05 .62 29 | Sunday. 30 77.0 8.7 72.6 | 13.1 790 43 4.37 .66 31 77.0 Ye (a0 | LL.9 801 5D 3.94 .69 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants, Meteorological Observations. XIX Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Hour, Mean Height of the Barometer at 32° Faht. A 8 ae KOUMNANEWNE SE Koo aonnos OD eH oO g S 7) ) 0 Cy) Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs. Mid- | 77 | 34 | 710 | 51 | 0.751 | 817 | 146 | 0.88 rite ‘ : : : i 1 72.2 3el 70.6 4.7 TAL 07 33 .86 2 71.9 Zia 70.4: A: A: 736 04 22 87 3 71.4 2.8 70.0 4.2 A | 7.94 15 87 4 71.1 2.6 69.8 3.9 722 89 07 88 5 70.7 2.6 69.4 3.9 713 .80 .04 88 6 70.4 2.5 69,1 3.8 .706 72 04: 88 74 70.8 2.3 69.6 35 17 84 0.95 89 8 72.3 3.7 70.4 5.6 £736 8.00 1.60 83 9 73.3 5.8 70.4 8.7 £736 7.95 2.58 .76 10 TSch 8.0 69.7 12.0 .720 7A 3.63 .68 af 74.0 | 10.9 68.5 | 16.4 692 41 5.08 59 Noon 73.8 13.4 67.1 20.1 661 03 6.34 53 1 73.7 15.3 66.0 23.0 .638 6.75 7.33 48 2 4320 16.4 65.3 24.6 .623 59 87 46 3 73.4 17.1 64 8 25.7 613 48 8.24 4A 4, 73.3 16.9 64.8 25.4 613 50 .09 A5 5 73.0 15.4 65.3 23.1 .623 61 7.23 48 6 73:7 LAL 68.1 16.7 684: 7.29 5.17 59 if 74.1 8.2 | 70.0° | 12.8 727 81 3.77 67 8 73.4 6.9 69 9 10.4 125 82 .09 72 a 73.3 5.6 70.5 8.4, 739 8.00 2.47 76 10 72.8 4.5 70.5 6.8 739 02 1.96 80 il 72.7 3.9 70.7 5.9 744, 08 .69 83 —$$$_$___ All the Hygrometrical elements are computed eer the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Xxi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. Solar radiation, Weather, &c. SRE 38 ome Ga \s23 - es 23 Re} HS 18.809 CS os Sat Al = pe + fe) Inches 1) Sunday ( | 186.7 ae 139.6 ifs 2 3 A 5| 136.2 ee 6 7 135.4 138.0 | 0.30 8) Sunday 9} 129.2 oe TO) ke 0.14 il) 131.0 | 0.52 12) 134.0 ee 13; 146.0 oe 14| 140.0 ee 15) Sunday. 16; 141.5 ae 17; 139.0 x 18) 135.0 ee 19| 138.8 ee 20; 135.0 oe 21) 144.0 oe 22) Sunday. 23} 138.8 a 24; 145.0 oe 25) 136.5 oe 26) 154.8 we 27; 143.0 ee 28} 139.6 ee 29| Sunday. 30) 138.0 ee 31); 134.0 ee Ni Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, V-i nimbi, —i strati “Mi cirro cumuli, Prevailing direction of the Wind. en ee. | - 0 ee N.W.&N.& W. N.& KE. N. & N. E. General Aspect of the Sky. Cloudless till 3 a.m. cloudy till 9 a. mM. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless till 6 a. M. scattered i till 6 p. m. cloudless afterwards. Variable aspect till 3 P. M. cloudless afterwards. Variable aspect till 2 P. mM. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 7 a. mM. seatd. i till 4 p. M. cloudy, with hghtning & thun- der & rain afterwards. Cloudy till 10 a. mM. scatd. i & “i afterwards. Scatd. \i & i till 6 a. mM. cloudy afterwards ; also rain between 9 A. M. & 1p. M. Scatd. i & i till 1 Pp. mM. cloudy afterwards, also rain & thunder & lightning between 8 & 11 P. M. Cloudless. Cloudless till 10 a. m. seatd. “i till 5 p. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless till 2 Pp. m. seatd. i till 6 P. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. XXil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. Montuty Resvtts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, wae 29-839 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 a. m. on the ‘oth, ... 30.080 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 6 P. M. on the 28th, opi 2O.08o Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, is vze 0 0.497 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, as cae 80.5 Max. Temperature, occurred at 4 P. M. on the 27th, se cewek LOO. Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 a. M. on the 11th, saa ‘iis 64.8 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, og 35.4 Co) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, sas a Tat Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, ... 7.8 Computed Mean’ Dew Point for the month, 2 de 68.8 Mean Dry Buib Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ee 11.7 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, as ove oe 10698 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, ah a) ah 7.52 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, ty 3.46 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.69 Inches. Rained 3 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, +e san 0.52 Total amount of rain during the month, ie a od 0.96 Prevailing direction of the Wind, ,,. a aig Ss. & 8S. W. Meteorological Observations. XXlil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. Montury Re&svxts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Date. Rain on. W. Rain on. N Rain on Calm. Rain on. Rain on. Midnight. oe ary eo ee WW Oe S&S TAT Ord O1 BSR WWW Re DD Ww Ww et j=) fool HKHOOMNANMAWNH 5 NHOALADR wD ww DO BNE Ebb wD He et ee ft ft Noon, ie me be ww rs I bo bo bo _ RPOMODNTAMURwODH Hm oo Co bo bo bo bo — ow DWNNWNHNEAADOWE i bo Ww GO tH WH dD ee LHe | ? Xxiv . Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1857. On the 21st March, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances :— m. he. mm. Exact Time of Minimum Barometer,... 20 A.M.and 4 OP.™M. Ditto Minimum Temperature,.........4. 30 do ee half an hour h. 4s Ditto; Maximum Barometer, ...i00.80e2-e0nee06 9 30° do. and T1750 ido. 2 after sunrise. 3 Ditto Maximum Temperature, ........ O P.M. On Saturday, the 7th March, 1857. A Western gale sprung up at + past 5 p.m. and blew for three quarters of an hour. During the prevalence of the gale there was much thunder and lightning and also a little rain. Meteorological Observations. 9.6 Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. oS oo 3 © 8 Range of the Barometer a2 Range of the Tempera- oS 8 during the day. ae ture during the day. ‘3 Ee =o TH & Qs ° go 38) 5 ee 5 : 2 So Max Min Diff Sa Max. | Min. | Diff. i) =) = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 0 oO fC) 29.794 | 29.868 | 29.733 0.135 84.1 .780 860 .710 .150 84.4 793 857 £733 124 84.2 93.6 78.4 | 15.2 817 914. 733 181 84.3 854: 329 773 .156 81.9 0854: 932 -730 202 78.9 -858 932 778 154: 77.0 835 S05 ch 2 fae .168 78.2 87.2 69.4 | 17.8 10 794 .866 .696 170 81.0 90.2 74.0 | 16.2 J1 778 848 .669 SS. 81.6 92.8 1.6 | 21.2 12 | Sunday 13 .699 Ai | .632 139 84.1 93.8 774.0 |: 16:8 14 -699 772 632 .140 84:4: 94.6 76.6 | 18.0 15 698 775 .606 169 86.6 96.2 79.8 | 16.4 16 624 720 528 192 87.7 98.4 80.2 | 18.2 17 -622 .687 065 122 88.5 98.1 SEZ | 26.9 18 -700 769 644 125 86.7 94.8 81.0 | 13.8 19 | Sunday 20 727 794, .663 131 85.0 92.5 77.0 | 15.5 21 748 829 671 158 82.8 93.8 75.0 | 18.8 22 .780 864 698 166 19.9 89.7 Lb"): 38:6 23 824 911 .693 218 76.3 84.8 71.3 | 13.5 24 -802 893 728 165 79.5 89.8 69.5 | 20.3 25 .786 860 -698 162 83.0 92.0 75.6 | 16.4 26 | Sunday 27 731 792 660 132 85.7 94.8 78.5 | 16.3 28 789 872 703 169 83.9 94.3 74.6 | 19.7 29 722 806 633 173 85.4: 96.0 77.0 | 19.0 30 655 732 563 169 87.3 98.8 79.8 | 19.0 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. XXVI Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. f 0 Pa 1) o > a E . 2: |e8 |£5 = : ° A @ i ie a = a a 3 = © 8 ea ae BH = = © & 3S a3 a = S 2 Ay ° Ss » Dy 5 S D S Ns E a © ee We, ore ee ate. faa) iS © cee — = = S/o 2 » = a a 20.2 = 3 ©» be © = wes ES) — 4 oo |= oe aii & a 2 2 ae Rs BER | a" a) e83 = = 3 ae a. 2 Ole ES ad aa) 2 a as 2 = |S Bo] s 2 a § 4 a 5 an o> So iSaaieok a a OD a) = = < = 0 Oo ty) Oo Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr. 1 772 6.9 73.7 10.4 | 0.819 8.78 | 3.43 | 0.72 2 77.5 6.9 74.0 10.4: 827 86 Ae eee 3 77.9 6.3 74.7 9.5 846 9.05 519° |. 3374 4 virgen 7.2 73.5 10.8 814 8.70 58 | .71 5 | Sunday 6 72.4 9.5 67.6 14.3 672 7.23 1° 42h | 163 7 73.1 5.8 70.2 8.7 732 Ol | 2hee 276 8 71.5 5.5 68.7 8.3 .677 yi ee ae 9 71.9 6.3 68.7 9.5 697 5A 71 | 74 10 75.8 52 73,2 78 806 8.68 46 | .78 11 76.2 5A 93.5 8.1 814 76 Da tL 12 Sunday. 13 78 2 59 75.2 8.9 .860 9.20 | 3.01 | .75 14 78.4 6.0 754 9.0 865 26 05 | .75 15 80.1 6.5 76.8 9.8 .905 63 || eS 16 79.7 8 0 95.7 12.0 873 28 | 4.28 | .68 17 78.1 10 4 72.9 15.6 797 8.45 | 5.43 | .61 18 80.4: 6.3 "72 9.5 .916 9.75 |" 3:48 1) 74 19 Sunday. 20 78.7 6.3 95.5 9.5 868 iyi 26 | 294 21 74.8 8.0 70.8 12.0 746 8.00 75 | .68 22 74.8 5.1 72,2, 0.7 781 Al | 2.37 | .78 23 70.1 6.2 67 0 9.3 .659 Fe We 52 | 74 24 72.4 vl 68.8 10.7 .699 A | Bae oe 25 76.4 6.6 73.1 99 .803 8.61 2k | Pee 26 | Sunday. 27 78.9 6.8 75.5 10.2 .868 9.27 68 | .72 28 76 0 7.9 720 11.9 .776 8.30 83 | .68 29 76.0 9.4 71.3 14,1 £758 10 | 4.58 | .64 30 78.9 8.4 94.7 12.6 846 99 42 | .67 All the Ji the Hc tromebeical clandentdtee aexaipated ‘bjt Wemaganroct warren elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XXVIl Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. 6 8 Range of the Barometer for = 3 Apes ou ie eemperte 2 Os : S ture for each hour Bes each hour during the Ao . 20 5 g during the = Ey month, PP io) month Hour. | = 3 2, As : ioe) o Sa | Max. | Min. | Diff. | 36 | ‘Max. | Min. | Diff. = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 ) ty) ty) .. 29.760 | 29.863 |29.577 | 0.286 | 788 | 83.6 | 71.4] 12.2 1 751 854 O74 .280 78.4: 83.2 70.7 | 12.5 2 .738 846 566 .280 78.1 83.2 70.6 | 12.6 3 £739 .862 571 291 77.5 83.0 70.4 | 12.6 4: 749 855 621 234 76.9 81.0 69.4 | 11.6 5 £753 .860 .608 252 76.9 81.6 69.4 | 12.2 6 776 895 617 .278 76.7 81.2 69.7. | 11.5 i) £798 .906 648 258 Ciel 82.0 71.00) ILO 8 .822 919 .667 252 80.6 85.0 74.1 | 10.9 9 832 930 .680 250 83.6 88.2 75.6 | 12.6 10 .830 932 687 245 85.9 91.0 76.7 | 14.3 il 818 918 .681 237 88.4: 93.4 78.0 | 15.4 Noon.| .799 905 .668 237 89.9 95.2 79.6 | 15.6 1 .766 885 .636 .249 91.4: 96.6 81.6 | 15.0 2 .736 846 .600 246 92.3 97.8 84.3 | 13.5 3 -710 838 .570 268 92.3 98.8 83.2 | 15.6 4 .687 814 548 266 91.4 98.4, 80.4 | 18.0 5 .682 802 529 273 89.3 96.8 80.0 | 16.8 6 .697 814 528 286 85.9 92.0 75.4 | 16.6 7 .720 834 541 293 83.4: 89.3 v2.8} 27.5 8 £753 864 574 290 81.7 86.4 70.6 | 15.8 9 .776 898 591 307 80.1 85.0 70.0 | 15.0 10 775 922 .602 .320 79.1 84.2 70.0 | 14.2 11 773 932 598 304 78.5 84.1 70.4 | 18.7 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month, XXVil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. oS mars = 5 o a) Ge 4 1 © ap o o =| o oO CO om °o s 4 BeBe) Bush ee Se sl eee 2 See [OB ed Seen 3S co) oy s cae w Bi [0 o 2 a S Hour.| © 2 S A = a 8 “Bo . = es ieee es 2 o 2 3 a) SS o--. |s = & .| to as a 3 = ge) Ais |b. ° |S 6 see es one om 2. pO 8 ae ae 26 Sal aS Ea re b 8 pa |) 8S. | S$ ae. Se aes a = a iS) Q = = < = ft) ) fy) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr Se m9 | 3:6 | 734) |. Bae) 0811 te%e. | T66 0.84 “1 VAG. | 25 1) 931 33 1 908 70 61 84 2 vag A BA) 73D 5.1 | .801 67 55 185 3 743 1 380) "Hols 5.0 | .787 54 50 85 A W291 RO.) OYA ls Aer: 7B 51 135 .86 5 WA 1 Best. BT eee |! 792 61 25 87 6 "3906 | 9.8-|. 92.5. | 42 787 56 24 87 "7 TAG | Sas 7 0n | aee 801 67 A3 .86 8 w59 | 94.7 | YR jt) | Si 78 223 7 80 9 768 196.8 |. ‘734 toe 811 69 3.34 72 10 Big | 83M) Yaa. tos 811 64. 4.23 67 11 78.1 1103 | 72.9 | 15.5 797 45 5.39 61 Noon.| 78-2 | Wy) 78s 107-6 783 27 6.19 57 ‘I 79.0 | 12.4 | 72.8 | 18.6 795 38 72 56 2 79.1 |13.2 | 72.5 | 19.8 787 28 722, 53 3 "8.5 | 13.8 | 71.6 | 20.7 766 05 AD 52 4 78.3 118.1 | 71.7 | 19.7 768 09 Ol da 2 78.3 111.0 | 72.8 | 16.5 795 41 5.80 59 6 W749 |: 8.0.| 739 | 120 824 79 4.08 68 ” 765. | GO -730. |104-| © 801 58 3.38 72 8 75.9 | BS.) L730. 87 801 .60 2.77 76 9 75.1 5.0 | 72.6 | 7.5 790 52 32 79 10 94.97 4.4 92.5 6.6 TST 51 .02 81 11 742 | 43 | 72.0 | 6.5 776 38 1.97 81 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XX1X Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Ra |&5 o2 |sad | | “3 |OS 8) Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. ees. |S .o 2 of the Wind. oS o 8 3 oe Al = ae co) Inches. 1} 130.5 se Ss. Cloudless till Noon, scatd. i till 9 p.m. cloudless afterwards. 2} 132.0 sel Me Cloudless till 1 Pp. mM. scattered “i or i till 6 P. mM. cloudless afterwards. 3) 135.0 ae Flying clouds the whole day. 4| 128.0 wok ee Cloudy. 5| Sunday. Stage | ..~|S.&8. W. Cloudy. 4) 209:2 } 1.13 |S. Cloudy, also raining & thundering & lightning between 7 P. Mm. & midnight. 8} 124.0 -- | Variable. Cloudy till 7 p.m. cloudless afterwards. 9) 135.4 . |S &W.&S. W. Cloudy the whole day; also drizzling between 3 & 6 a. M. & also at 8 P. ML (a 0.15 |S. Cloudy, also raining at 6 P. M. 11} 138.5 iets Cloudless at 8 a. M. scatd. “i afterwards, also raining at 8 Pp. M. also thunders and lightning between 8 & 11 P. wu. 12) Sunday. ae f2e0 | lf. |S. Scatd. clouds nearly the whole day, also drizzling at 7 P. M. [ wards. 14| 133.0 ae ho Cloudless till 4 a. mM. scatd. i after- 15) 131.0 pian) ites Cloudless nearly the whole day. 16} 136.0 od tees Cloudless. 17| 147.0 ee S. Cloudless, [ wards. 18} 131.7 weg Bs Cloudless till 3 A. M. scatd. clouds after- 19} Sunday. 20) 124.0 55 UB srt 32 Cloudy. 21} 130.0 | 0.42 |S. Cloudy & drizzling between 2 & 4 a. M. and also between 8 & 9 P. M. : 22} 125.0 | 0.10 |S. Cloudy, also rain at 8 P. M. also thun- | dering & lightning from 8 P.M. to | midnight. 2 re ae) see NN. We Cloudy, also drizzling at 9 P. m. 24) 132.0 PE USE Cloudless till 4 a. wm. scatd. clouds till 5 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 25, 140.0 | .. |S. Cloudy nearly the whole day. 26| Sunday. 27| 139.0 sax | Dade Sank. Cloudless till Noon, cloudy afterwards. 28} 131.6 «. |S. (S.H.gale between| Cloudy, also thundering and lightning midnight &14.M.)| and raining before sunrise and also after sunset. 29| 139.0 *- S. Cloudless. 30} 141.0 - 8. & 8. W. Cloudless till 5 a. mM. scatd. i & +i till 5. Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Ni Cirri, “i Cirro strati, ©i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strati, \ i Cirro cumuli, Ex Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Monturty Resunts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee ee 29.760 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 7th and 11 P. m. on the 8th, oe : she ae 29.982 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 61 P. M. on the 16th, oe 29.528 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, oe ee 0.404 fe) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee ee 83.2 Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 30th, oe ae 98.8 Min. Temperature occurred at 4&5 a. M. on the 9th, .. whe 69.4 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. die 29.4 re) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a; Ags "6.2 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 7.0 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a ne 724 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 10.5 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, dis us 0.792 Troy grains, Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae a we 8.49 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ae 3.40 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.71 Inches. Rained 10 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, do one 1.13 Total amount of rain during the month, an ee ais 1.80 Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe He if Ss. Meteorological Observations. XXX Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. Monruty Resvxts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. és} .|5 E 5 ce] . |g 5 slAle] |s elel jefe lel s ls N.|e tz ce] E. lois. E. a let Wists lel dS le No. of days Midnight. 1 4 1 A 1 2 1 3 1 3 3 ~g 4 2 2 2|2 5 E 3 2 Bey dl 6 i 4. 3 1 4 7 2 3 3 3 2 8 nh 5 3 3 1 9 1 3 5 3 10 1 3 Fe 1 11 2 6 2 Noon. 3 6 D} 1 2 7 2 2 3 6 3 3 1 2 6 3 Lb 2 6 5 6 1 6 1 5 i 7 4) 2 3 1 8 22) Li Le 2 yA | ee | 9 si ae 2 3 g'3 10 1] 1] 2 5 1 1 11 Lich 2 4, 1 1 XXXil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1857. On the 24th April, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances. h. m. h. m. Luact Time of Minimum Barometer, .. os 5 23804a.M.& 4 35 P.M. Ditto Maximum Barometer,.. oe «» 9 50 ditto&10 40 ditto. Between 5 20 & 5 30 4. M. Ditto Minimum Temperature, or qr. of an hour before sunrise. (Between 3 20 & 40P.M. Ditto Maximum Temperature, < during which time the Thermome- \_ ter was stationary. Meteorological Observations. XXxill Abstract of the Results of the Howrly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Sisal, Sea | 2 os S : Bus Range of the Barometer a 3 Range of the Tempera- “i & 3 during the day. p & ture during the day. m So As Date. a cs a S S2 | Max. Min Diff Sa Max. | Min. | Diff. = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. rey 0 0 oO 1 | 29.689 | 29.778 | 29.627 | 0.151] 88.4 100.0 | 79.5 | 20.5 2 641 726 4G 180 | 87.4 96.7 . 1.79.7 | 17.0 3 | Sunday 4, 596 .656 532 124 | 88.3 99.6 | 82.0 | 17.6 5 622 707 044 163 | 87.4 96.6 80.6 | 16.0 6 584 646 497 149 | 87.0 93.2 81.7 | 11.5 7 618 .680 12 168 | 86.5 93.6 69.0 | 24.6 8 570 .627 A92 135 | 83.0 93.6 73.0 | 20.6 9 530 593 485 108 | 80.7 91.6 | 73.6 | 18.0 10 | Sunday ig .667 731 597 134 | 81.7 90.2 | 74.5 | 15.7 12 .650 704 047 157 | 86.3 94.6 | 81.6 | 13.0 13 694: 756 611 145 | 86.3 94.1 80.1 | 14.0 14 722 787 658 129 | 85.3 93.0 | 78.2 | 148 15 694: £758 603 155 | 87.3 94.4 81.1 | 13.3 16 .668 733 582 151 | 87.6 95.6 | 82.0 | 13.6 17 | Sunday 18 506 568 413 155 | 86.8 96.4 | 78.8 | 17.6 19 514, 581 423 158; 88.5 97.0 | 81.6 | 15.4 20 586 734: 502 232 | 84.9 92.0 76.6 | 15.4 21 633 736 551 185 |. 84.4 94.0 75.5 | 18.5 22 .688 «75D 610 145 | 82.1 90.0 75.4 | 14.6 23 691 £758 616 142 | 85.7 93.8 80.4 | 13.4 24 | Sunday 25 628 .687 548 139 | 86.1 93.8 | 80.4 | 13.4 26 540 611 432 179 | 87.0 94.5 | 80.8 | 13.7 : 27 437 510 345 165 | 86.8 95.7 | 81.6 | 14.1 : 28 410 .480 337 143 | 86.3 97.5. | 79.8 | 17.7 | 29 - A89 559 432 127 | 86.9 94.2 | 80.2 | 14.0 30 519 587 450 137]. 87.1 94.6 78.8 | 15.8 31 | Sunday. The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during the day. XXXIV Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) of a E Saree rma ae ° o = = E S| Su aiia® | a. |e ae es a Bi] ee ec ee 2 © 3 i So | fae) 523 = E 5, = © here os ce Date. canes = a Ss So >a | ® Bap BK 3 a = ae Sia Ee oo} nis oe) Q ra eae O's a“ oOo 8 o°D = D = 2 Sos ms =o gH a 2 2.3 i a Sy Ais S. s |of8 bal a 3 S| 82 | Bia (eine eS o A ie 3 P> Py oF ® -m = Suen) 6 oS a A 0 A a = pe a o 0 o 0 Inches.| "T. gr. | Titer 1 77.9 10.9 72.0 | 16.4 0.776 8.23 5.61 0.60 2 80.1 7.3 76.4 | 11.0 893 9.51 3.94 71 3 | Sunday. 4, 80.8 7.5 77.0 |°11.3 .910 67 4.13 -70 5 80.9 6.5 77.6 9.8 928 87 3.08 By ies 6 80.8 6.2 Fil 9.3 931 92 37 75 7 80.1 6.4: 76.9 9.6 908 66 4A: 74: 8 78.7 4.3 76.5 6.5 896 61 2.21 SL 9 . 77.0 3.7 75.1 5.6 857 23 Lei 84: 10 | Sunday. J1 78.1 3.6 76.3 5.4 890 59 78 84 12 81.1 5.2 78.5 7.8 .955 | 10.18 2.84: 78 13 80.9 5.4 78.2 8.1 .946 .09 .93 78 14 80.0 5.3 77.3 8.0 .919 9.82 82 .78 15 81.4: 5.9 78.4 8.9 952 | 10.12 3.29 76 16 81.7 5.9 78.7 8.9 961 22 .30 76 17 | Sunday. 18 80.7 6.1 77.6 9.2 .928 9.89 32 75 a9 83.1 5.4 80.4: 8.1 1,014 | 10.76 12 .78 20 TES Ev 74.4 | 10.5 0.838 8.95 54: 12 21 77.0 7A Cf ae ele We | .809 .65 .66 70 22 771. 5.0 74.6 7.5 843 9.05 2.46 79 23 79.9 5.8 77.0 8.7 -910 ara 3.09 76 24 | Sunday. i 25 80.3 5.8 77.4 8.7 .922 83 12 .76 26 80.4: 6.6 fig 3.9 913 72 57 73 27 79.8 7.0 7am | 10.5 .890 48 73 ia 28 19.1 6.6 76.4 9.9 893 53 49 73 29 81.6 5.3 78.9 8.0 .967 | 10.30 2.95 78 30 81.6 5.5 78.8 8.3 964 27 3.06 77 31 | Sunday. All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants, Meteorological Observations. XXXKV Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. oe Range of the Barometer | = 5 Range of the Temperature oo Ss : | for each hour during Ae for each hour during H ‘eo the month. PS the month. our, = a Q, a 5 = a) ap ° é s = c : 3-2 | Max. Min, Diff. Se, | Max. Min. Diff. = a | Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. ty) 0 rt) oO Mid- night. 29.618 | 29.726 |29.412 | 0.314 81.2 85.4 73.0 12.4 EI .603 719 408 oll 81.1 84.8 74.8 10.0 2 591 .705 AlL .294 | 80.9 84.2 74.7 9.5 3 582 .696 .400 .296 80.9 84.0 74.6 9.4, 4 .585 0G -400 .007 80.7 83.8 74.5 9.3 5 600 «719 .405 814 | 80.5 83.3 74.8 8.5 6 .618 -746 410 .036 80.8 83.8 75.0 8.8 7 637 .765 .416 849 82.0 85.4: 75.3 10.1 8 652 774 425 049 84.4: 87.2 77.0 10.2 9 .658 787 431 .856 86.7 90.8 78.0 12.8 10 .656 Es ABA .843 89.2 92.6 80.0 12.6 11 643 -776 A427 349 | 91.0 95.2 82.8 12.4 Noon. .627 .766 415 ols) 92.3 96.4. 85.0 11.4 1 .598 £731 .386 845 93.6 99.6 87.6 12.0 2 .570 .693 364 229 | 94,1 99.4: 88.6 10.8 3 .550 .687 344 043 93.7 | 100.0 80.6 19.4 4 .530 .679 oT 842 92.9 99.9 76.4 23.5 5 B27 .661 .046 015 91.4 98.0 73.6 24.4: 6 043 .658 »067 .291 88.4: 94.0 74.6 19.4 | -563 701 ool .820 85.8 90.7 75.6 15.1 8 .589 -734 | 402 002 84, 2 88.6 75.6 13.0 9 .612 -730 -406 O24 83.5 87.2 75.5 Lh 10 .620 -740 .398 842 82.6 | 86.6 75.0 11.6 11 .617 -736 .399 007 81.6 | 86.4 69.0 17.4 The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month, XXXVI Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. 3 Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) | = 3 3 B rr sO ooag | 33 ad RE kal ai eee es 3) a c) = eS) oe Swen >) le > EB > a4 2 Pasig 25 S| om ° ce) fo) » 3 Sen Qe Hou. | 28 3 A S fe 0° oo) Let ae g 2 3 2 el Oe Peg Pesce | tas ares go 3 3 34 ~ oO Se a == a os $ 4 Fa 2. = ek ge) Solem ie Ba S38 | pb a |e] > | ssl | ee8 | es8 = fa tS) a = = Made Bec gs oO 0 o o | Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. Mid- | 77 | 35 | 75.9 | 53 |o879 | 947 | 174 | 0.88 Bee , : / : : : d 1 77.8 3.3 76.1 5.0 885 53 64: 85 2 77.9 3.0 76.4 4.5 .893 .62 48 87 3 78.0 2.9 76.5 4.4: .896 67 A3 87 4 78.0 2.7 76.6 4.1 899 .69 .30 .88 5 78.0 2.5 76.7 3.8 902 72 26 .89 6 78.3 2.5 77.0 3.8 .910 81 .26 .89 7 79.0 3.0 77.8 4.5 925 94, 53 87 8 80.1 4.3 Tt9 6.5 937 10.02 2.29 81 9 81.0 5.7 78.1 8.6 943 04 3.14 76 10 81.8 74 78.1 11.1 943 00 4.16 71 11 82.1 8.9 77.6 13.4 928 9.81 5.12 66 Noon 82.4 9.9 77.4 14.9 922 71 19 63 1 82.8 10.8 77.4 16.2 922 .69 6.39 60 2 83.1 11.0 77.6 16.5 928 73 59 60 3 82.5 11.2 76.9 16.8 908 52 61 59 4 81.8 Le 76.2 16.7 887 39 AA 59 5 82.0 9.4 77.3 14.1 919 70 5.40 64, 6 80.7 qi 76.8 11.6 905 09 4.25 69 4 79.6 6 2 76.5 9.3 896 57 3.26 75 8 78.7 5.5 75.9 8.3 879 A2 2.82 77 9 78.5 5.0 76.0 7.5 882 45 55 79 30 78 3 4.3 76.1 6.5 885 .00 18 81 d1 77.8 3.8 75.9 5.7 879 46 1.88 83 _ —_— i All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XXXVI1 Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta, an the month of May, 1857. Solar radiation, Weather, &c. Hae |S5 3-8 od es deers .| 23 | & §} Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. $/ 43 (4.36 of the Wind. 3 | = a A) a” [Ree 0 Inches. Bb} 4400 | 2. J & Cloudless. 2} 145.0 5 NI Cloudless. 3| Sunday (afterwards. 4) 138.0 Be S Cloudless till Noon, scattered clouds 5| 142.0 gat “ise Cloudless. [ wards. 6} 124.5 S. (high.) Cloudless till 5 a. M. scattered i after- 7} 181.4 | 2.88 | S.& 8S. EH. (high.) | Cloudy, also a gale with much rain and hailstones and thunder and lightning between 10 and 11 P. M. 8} 125.0 | 0.88 |S. E. &S8. Cloudy, also raining at 3 Pp. M.; also raining and hailing with thunder and lightning at 6 P. M. | i i eee 9} 116.0 ; 142 |8.H. &S. Cloudy, also raining between 3 and 10| Sunday.| 0.57 [7 A. M. Ly LE TE a ie Bel Cloudy, also very slightly drizzling at 12) 136.0 de 8 Ditto ditto at 6 P. M. 13} 129.0 | 036 |S. EH. &8. Cloudy, also raining with thunder and rayisy2) -. | 8. &N. E, Cloudy. [lightning at 8 P. mM. 15} 148.0 | .. | Calm&S. Cloudless till 5 a.m. scattered i till 8 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 16; 144.0 | 0.08; S Cloudless till 64. m. scatd. Ciafterwards ; also little rain between Gand 7 Pp. M. 17| Sunday.| 1.81 [also raining at 6 P. M. yi. | h..- | 8S. & SB, Cloudless till 4.4. m. cloudy afterwards ; a) 135.0-| 4 8. Cloudless till 5 a.m. cloudy afterwards. 20; 125.4 | 0.32 | S. EH. & EH. Cloudy till 10 a. m. cloudless till 4 p. M. cloudy afterwards, also a gale accompanied by rain and thunder and lightning between 7 and 9 P. M. 21; 133.0 | 0.15 | N.W.&S. E. Cloudy, also raining at 10 and 11 P. mM. 22; 134.8 | 0.12 | N. &S8. Cloudy, also raining between 8 & 9 P. M. 23; 139.0] .. 8S. &S. E. Cloudless till 10 a. M. scattered i till 3 P. M. scattered \-i afterwards. 24) Sunday.| 0.80 (afterwards. 25) 121.0 ae S. E. &S. Cloudless till 5 A. M. scattered clouds 26) 132.0 | .. 8, Cloudless till 4 a. M. scattered clouds 27' 142.0 e S. W. Cloudy. [afterwards. me) 193.0 | as Ss. & 8. W. Cloudless till 10 a.m. scatd. -iand “i till 4 Pp. mM. cloudy afterwards, Also a N. W. gale and a little drizzling be- tween 4 past 5 P.M. and 5’ to6 P.M. 29) 140.8 sie S. Cloudy till 4 Pp. m. cloudless afterwards. 30) 128.0 | 0.44 |58.&N. E, Cloudless till 1 P. M. scattered \i & ~i 31) Sunday. till 5p. M, cloudy afterwards. Also a west gale between 6-40 & 7 P. M. and likewise rain during the gale and for 2 hours afterwards. Ni Cirri, i cirro strati, “i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \-i nimbi, —i strati, Wi cirro cumuli, XXXVI Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. Montury REsurtTs. Inches, Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe e- 29.600 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 A. M. on the 14th, eet, | 20.1 OF Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 4 P. M. on the 28th, we w2e.da7 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, ate -- 0.450 o Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, A de 86.0 Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the Ist, we «- 100.0 Min. Temperature, occurred at 11 Pp. M. on the 7th, “e ee 69.6 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 31.0 te) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ile a 79.9 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.1 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, | ae Se 76.8 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 9.2 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. oe «= 4) 0.905 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, ve oe ee 9.65 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, oe 3.26 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.75 Inches. Rained 16 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe 2.38 Total amount of rain during the month, als oe fis 9.33 Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. oe oe S.&58. HE. Meteorological Observations. XXXIX Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. Monturty REsvuts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. | Hour. Rain on. S. EB Rain on. Calm 3 Rain on. Rein on, W. Rain on. N. W. Rain on. Rain on. Midnight. = PFPwmNnwNnNrFNW bd NNWNwWNHEH ft ii e led — (ow) wo nnwnwryoe BOOMS OUP Oo bo a et oe Noon, NE = io ft be = — ae EDN DHE NWH HEHE ise _ MPOUMDNTOAAA Dm ww dO dO dO ww DO AOWONUOWALRA DoD i te 0 bo mb DH He 0 bo bo & ww OD bo DH we bo bo be a jt _ xl Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1857. On the 23rd May, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances :— Di. (30, be. mn; Exact Time of Minimum Barometer,......0.6. 2 20 4.M.and 5 OP.M. Ditto Maximum Barometer,.......... 9 30 do. and 10. 30 do. (Between 5 Oand6 O a.m. during the whole of which interval the Thermometer stood at the same reading | 80.4 which was the lowest \. temperature during the day. Ditto Maximum Temperature,........ 2 20 P.M. Ditto Minimum Temperature,...e.... , On the 7th, a Southerly breeze blew from 10 a. m. till4 P.M; after which a South Easterly breeze springing up; the sky became overcast and distant flashes of sheet-lightning were constantly visible on the Hast side. Things continued in this state till 10 P. wu. when it commenced raining heavily. At 20 minutes past 10 P. m. the South Hasterly breeze which had been blowing since 4 P. M. became a gale. After the gale had set in, it continually veered its directions. At 11 p. mu. all was quiet again. During the prevalance of the gale there was much rain, thunder, and lightning and an incessant fall of hailstones. Also the undermentioned gales occurred during the month. May 20th, between 6 and 7 a.m. a N. E. gale blew for about 10 minutes; only one side of the gale passing over Calcutta, the whole body of the gale going by the East thereof. May 20th, between 7 and 8 p.m. a S. W. gale blew for abont three quarters of an hour; during which and for upwards of an hour afterwards, there was much lightning and thundering, accom- panied with little rain. May 28th, between 5 and6 p.m. a N. W. gale blew for about 20 minutes. May 30th, between 6 and 7 Pp. M. a W. gale blew for about 20 minutes, during which there was little rain. ~ * Meteorological Observations. xli Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1’ North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. . feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. \ 15 636 £707 561 16 .598 675 505 = = a3 Range of the Barometer = 2 Range of the Tempera- “Bp ac during the day. me ture during the day. o = Fa) rns as cared é ao? ; a % ; £ S34 Max Min Diff is Max Min. | Diff Gl. alles = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ty) f) ft) ) 1 | 29.569 | 29.648 | 29.490 0.158 86.7 92.8 81.4 | 11.4 2 045 612 A461 151 86.9 92.4: 83.6 8.8 3 551 .616 ASL 135 86.9 92.2 81.6 | 10.6 4 .550 .599 472 127 87.0 92.9 80.3 | 12.6 5 604: .655 534: 121 84.9 93.8 80.6 | 13.2 6 .627 .663 081 082 85.8 93.2 81.3 | 11.9 7 | Sunday 8 567 .625 485 140 87.8 95.0 83.8 | 11.2 . 534 578 475 103 88.7 96.0 82.8 | 13.2 10 .065 613 A494 119 89.3 97.2 83.4 | 13.8 11 -620 675 572 103 89.0 96.2 83.4 | 12.8 12 -610 .662 .525 137 87.7 95.8 78.0 | 17.8 13 584 .635 .509 126 86.6 92.5 82.0 | 10.5 14 | Sunday 17 .557 .607 489 118 86.1 94.6 81.7 | 12.9 18 527 .588 .467 121 85.6 93.6 82.0 | 11.6 19 468 512 869 143 84.2 90.0 82.0 8.0 20 -396 448 316 132 85.5 90.6 80.8 2.8 21 | Sunday | 22 302 300 .249 104; 81.5 86.1 fia 7.0 23 392 509 316 .193 82.4: 88.3 78.2 | 10.1 24, -549 .618 493 125 83.3 87.4 79.0 8.4 25 573 615 502 113 84.5 91.3 80.6 | 10.7 26 533 575 477 .098 82.3 88.8 79.0 9.8 27 488 540 442 .098 81.2 88.4: hi Osh, hd Ai 28 | Sunday. 29 .380 413 334 079 80.2 82.5 78.8 3.7 30 A421 459 351 108 79.5 84.5 77.4 pal The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb ee eee are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day, xhi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of June, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. : Ecc iiaga’'> 00] ote a NE = ° (an) o acs Sey iS =| a 3 Fl ii 2 c= | 2s ee er a 3 RUG eee onc ecle Date. a a E fs 3 2S S aS os s 3 A ie a ee Sete ous, o a) = ao Be 2.9 | "65 S/he a tS 2 2 2 Sos os = S Salo je ) = = Os i) St Sis sl ae so om Sy ‘5 ss" s® |S 30] 6 2 wo & & a = ale o> S.8 | Stele eS = A 5 a = = |< A o ty) a) oO Inches. | T.gr.| T. gr. 1 80.9 5.8 78.0 8.7 | 0.940 | 10.01 | 3.17 | 0.76 2 81.3 5.6 78.5 8.4: .955 18 .07 77 3 81.4: 5.5 78.6 8.3 .958 21 04 77 4 82.1 4.9 79.6 7.4 .989 54 | 2.75 79 5) 78.7 6.2 75.6 9.3 871 9.31 | 318 75 6 80.4: 5.4 FU er: 8.1 931 94 | 2.89 78 7 | Sunday 8 82.1 5.7 79.2 8.6 976) |)110:37 1 S23.) 9G 9 82.2 6.5 78.9 9.8 OF 26 .70 74 10 82.6 6.7 79.2 101 .976 .80 .86 73 il 82.0 70 78 5 10.5 £955 12 96 | .72 12 81.0 6.7 77 6 10,1 .928 9.87 .69 73 13 80.2 6.4 77.0 9.6 .910 .69 45 74: 14 | Sunday 15 80.8 6.2 77.7 93 .931 92 37 75 16 80.5 6.2 77.4: 93 922 83 35 75 17 80.5 5.6 MEY 8 4 931 94 01 77 18 80.5 5.1 CTS, ad. 987.) dl0:00. |: 246 78 19 80.5 3.7 78.6 5.6 958 26 | 1.98 84 20 80.3 5.2 VIRUS 7.8 931 9.94 | 2.78 78 21 | Sunday 22 78.3 3.2 iG. 4.8 902 £40.) de6d 86 23 78.5 3.9 76.5 5.9 .896 63 98 83 24 79.5 3.8 77.6 5.7 .928 95 98 83 25 80.1 4.4 “ie 0°6 .937 | £0.02 | 2.33 81 26 79.4 2.9 Wo 4.4: .937 08 ; 150 87 27 78.8 2.4 413 3.6 .928 9.99 22 89 28 | Sunday. 29 78.2 2.0 77.2 3.0 916 89} 0:99 |. 8% 30 77.0 2.5 75.7 3.8 873 43 | 1.23 | .89 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorologicai Observations. Kllil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon, ‘6 3 _ | Range of the Barometer for = Fs Range os the Cats Bis each hour during the oe pee ae pour Hour. ms a Q E ; 7 e+ | Max. | Min. Diff. © fy Max. | Min. | Diff. = = | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo o mig ° . 29.536 |29.651 |29.387 | 0.314 | 824 | 852 | 787) 65 1 | 524 | 642 | «301 341 | 822 | 85.0 | 786| 6:4 2 514 635 304 | 831 82.0 84.8 | 78.6] 6.2 3 509 .635 .297 | 338 81.9 85.5 | 78.4) 7.1 A 510 .638 274 | 864 81.8 84.2) 78.21 %6.0 5 523 646 278 368 81.7 S49" e782 | “6.0 6 543 657 .289 368 8L9 | 846 | 782! 64 7 558 687 305 382 82.8 85.4 | 79.0] 6.4 8 567 .698 320 378 84.6 67.8.) 80.0 1078 9 573 707 324 383 86.6 90.6 | 79.2 | 11.4 10 573 692 1315 377 87.9 92.6 | 80.2 | 12.4 11 565 680> | ) 312 368 9.4 94.1 80.4 | 13.7 Noon.| .548 662 301 361 90.5 95.0 | 80.2 | 148 it 530 .637 295 342 90.7 96.4 | 81.3 | 15.1 2 513 615 274: 341 90.0 97.2 | 78.0 | 19.2 3 495 598 .268 330 89.6 G7.2, 178.3 | 18.9 4 A73 584: 249 335 88.5 96.4 | 78.0 | 18.4 5 AT3 620 259 361 S77 94.8 | 77.8 | 17.0 6 484: 611 277 334 86.2 92:0 | 77.0'| 15.0 7 500 .608 303 305 85.0 89.6 Ti | 32:2 8 526 635 327 308 83.9 88.0 | 78.0 | 10.0 9 5389 .663 335 328 83.3 86.7 78.8 7.9 10 552 663 | .353 310 83.0 86.8 | 79.0] 7.8 11 550 | 649 | .349 300 82.7 85.6 | 79.0| 66 The Mean Pei of the Barometer, Thermometers are during the month, ! derived from the ‘Observations made at the several as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb hours xliv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1857. Hourly Means, &c, of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. e a = 5 © ie oy @ a ® a o Bs oom ° a 28 : i suaie Se lather ie o © Fa oe “ap = na mg Q 3 S 5 2 th i) te cenit Se ees Hour}, © 3: 3 A 3 a3 30 > rae Mer § 32 2 3 2 = legit O°, | eR anges es 5 3 a2) Fas 1 Pls 6 ieee 20 a. a Pid so |S SF. S/e8 E55 $5 P g per | § Sor) Bae (Sh Oe a Ss = fa S) a = a : - a o=@- 4=s° ‘a~ o- JApnde Re Gm en we USS 2 0 -0~ Be Ome at ea Pr -1 td errr at 3" - o 6° +4 G~ ose ee naee oe Bst~est aa oe be Spay enn yous ete-o-ee r= pe ae —e-9- a0 a B= e * eT eae ee ees ~~ aa eae eee Pd ok eee 38 -2- a ene gee ples 0— B= wn de eke e atae iF pres err rd ets to oe ee - “gaa “ Sol Soho Ses eo 2 Ot ee ee ; 35. enw a-6 " ann * 628 BON Oe RED - Pee eee Red . ee (oe ere oa - 3% sea © whee ~erds =Qu te aR ee- &->- Bh = “¢ “ae ONS one Oo - 8 —p>poe=net~ es” » = aye Swe ao 5~ eo ek -F #~a=0 ae De Ore Behe ke e846 4°92 4~ bn eos Oe naa! wwarare ; . ptt Se ee aahs ah A~s B= h~ Boe” pret Teer ret ay ot <5 zey=ee 4; eee etl ok bl kre at oe oe tlre Se ari Terr rer es Ti ae poe Perey es al be ae A6= 8586-8" ow o- “= e-@-e* “on <7 eer e~ : ae fe 2-s-s eee Sa a Pa Spare Panwtat ; : eh a= OK a bos « “yachts Seeks Cy ~ 8. aes Visoe 2 ecieaswe ines Pd = ra acete = ‘mere 624 8502 = ecesasil 58 mao teee Ee bal e-en578 8 te ee ae 4 Qreeteees anwar ath aegat: +4. 6-8-0 2—8>*~ saree sa ae oe ~q~2- O"e Se hao ee ee bel ek rel @-e~ ee A per iter et et zest »~ ab Pe * ents p edu te i 96 end ue * ’ +P 5d ep Rete) e-4 @*e" ~e-0~@ a+ re ee ee ~4~ 26 ———3 tg-645-0-6- * Pin gener saps asrs Stetetenet 2s Bose? =<4-% vd <& eae oe" oh oie = ~ —~ Fh dhabaeetOs Heya ee = - Pye ey qa 7 ar +o @—~ S20 05 RAE E HS SP PES er rm fy * yb OSe- ot ae. #414 34 bee tasetees! #4 eee